[BY AUTHORITY.]

U. S. INFANTRY TACTICS,
FOR THE

INSTRUCTION, EXERCISE, AND MANOEUVRES
OF THE

UNITED STATES INFANTRY,
INCLUDING

Infantry of the Line, Light Infantory,
and Riflemen.
PREPARED UNDER THE DIRECTION OF THE
WAR DEPARTMENT,
AND AUTHORIZED AND ADOPTED BY

THE SECRETARY OF WAR,
MAY 1, 1861.
CONTAINING

THE SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER; THE SCHOOL OF THE
COMPANY; INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS; THE
GENERAL CALLS, THE CALLS POR SKIRMISHERS,
AND THE SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION;
INCLUDING THE ARTICLES OF WAR AND A DICTIONARY
OF MILITARY TERMS.

PHILADELPHIA:
J. B. L I P P I N C O T T & CO.
1863.

Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1861, by
J . B. LIPPINCOTT & CO.
in the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United States for
the Eastern District of Pennsylvania.

The numbers under
of the Soldier refer to the

the i l l u s t r a t i o n s in the
paragraphs.

School

356
Un3u
1863

W A R DEPARTMENT,

WASHINGTON, MAY 1,1861.

This System of United States Infantry Tactics, prepared under the
direction of the War

Department,

having been approved by the President, is adopted for the instruction of
the troops and for the observance of
the militia when so employed.
SIMON CAMERON,
SECRETARY OF W A R .

PREFACE.
THE following system of Infantry Tactics, based
upon the latest improvements in French military experience, and adapted to the peculiar wants of our
service, has been prepared by order of the United
States Government, and is now, after the most satisfactory evidence of its efficiency, authorized and
adopted by the Secretary of War for the instruction
of the troops.
Infantry is divided into Heavy Infantry—also
called Infantry of the Line—and Light Infantry.
The difference between Heavy and Light Infantry
is twofold: 1st. In their weapons and equipment,
the former being armed with the musket, and the
latter with the rifle, when it may be had. 2d. In
the order of battle, Heavy Infantry being in compact order, while Light Infantry is dispersed or deployed as skirmishers, the men being separated and
more independent in delivering their fire as sharpshooters.
In the school of the company and of the battalion,
the instruction for Heavy and Light Infantry is the same,
every regiment of Infantry having one company of
5

6

PREFACE.

Light Infantry as a part of its organization, and all
these companies being drilled as Infantry of the
Line.
The system now presented gives a complete course
of instruction for both kinds of Infantry, in the
schools of the company and battalion, and has besides a special drill for Light Infantry when employed
as skirmishers.
The advantages claimed by this system of tactics
over former ones are numerous and decided: greater
celerity in movements, forming in line from column
without halting, changing direction from front to
rear while marching, doubling the files when marching by a flank, the omission of unnecessary commands, or parts of commands, more varied formation
of squares against cavalry, and many others.
A complete manual of arms for the musket will be
found at the end of the school of the soldier, p. 74.
It is believed that, with the same materiel, this
system will render a company or regiment much
more effective than any other.
With a view to insure uniformity in a system of
instruction the merits of which are acknowledged
by the highest authority, it is now presented to the
volunteers and militia called into service, as the
authorized drill for the United States Infantry, and
that by which they will be instructed and disciplined.
WASHINGTON, D.C., May 1,

1861.

United States Infantry Tactics.
TITLE FIRST,
ARTICLE FIRST.

Formation of a Regiment in order of battle, or in line.
1. A REGIMENT is composed often companies, "which
•will habitually be posted from right to left, in the
following order: fir?* sixth, fourth, ninth, third,
eighth, fifth, tenth, seventh, second, according to the
rank of captains.
2. "With a less number of companies the same principle will be observed, viz.: the first captain will
command the right company, the second captain the
left company, the third captain the right centre company, and so on.
3. The companies thus posted will be designated
from right to left, first company, second company, &c.
This designation will be observed in the manoeuvres.
4. The first two companies on the right, whatever
their denomination, will form the first division; the
next two companies the second'division; and so on, to
the left.
6. Each company will be divided into two equal
parts, which will be designated as the first and second
platoon, counting from the right; and each platoon,
in like manner, will be subdivided into two sections.
6. In all exercises and manoeuvres, every regiment,
7

8

FORMATION OF THE BATTALION

or part of a regiment, composed of two or more companies, will be designated as a battalion.
7. The color, with a guard to be hereinafter designated, will be posted on the left of the right centre
battalion company. That company, and all on its
right, will be denominated the right wing of the battalion ; the remaining companies the left wing.
8. The formation of a regiment is in two ranks;
and each company will be formed into two ranks, in
the following manner: the corporals will be posted
in the front rank, and on the right and left of platoons, according to height; the tallest corporal and
the tallest man will form the first file, the next two
tallest men will form the second file, and so on to the
last file, which will be composed of the shortest corporal and the shortest man.
9. The odd and even files, numbered as one, two,
in the company, from right to left, will form groups
of four men, which will be designated comrades in
battle.
10. The distance from one rank to another will be
thirteen inches, measured from the breasts of the
rear rank men to the backs or knapsacks of the front
rank men.
11. For manoeuvring, the companies of a battalion
will always be equalized, by transferring men from
the strongest to the weakest companies.
Posts of Company Officers, Sergeants and Corporals.'
12. The company officers and sergeants are nine in
number, and will be posted in the following manner:
IS. The cdptain on the right of the company, touching with the left elbow.
14. The first sergeant in the rear rank, touching
with the left elbow, and covering the captain. In
the manoeuvres he will be denominated covering sergeant, or right guide of the company.
15. The remaining officers and sergeants "will bo

FORMATION OF THE BATTALION.

9

posted as file closers, and two paces behind the rear
rank.
16. The first lieutenant, opposite the centre of the
fourth section.
17. The second lieutenant, opposite the centre of the
first platoon.
18. The third lieutenant', apposite the centre of the
second platoon.
19. The second sergeant, opposite the second file
from the left of the company. In the manoeuvres he
will be designated left guide of the company.
20. The third sergeant, opposite the second file from
the right of the second platoon.
21. The fourth sergeant, opposite the second file
from the left of the first platoon.
22. ^he fifth sergeant, opposite the second file from
the right of the first platoon.
28. In the left or tenth company of the battalion,
the second sergeant will be posted in the front rank,
and on the left of the battalion.
24. The corporals will be posted in the front rank,
as prescribed No 8.
25. Absent officers and sergeants will be replaced,
officers by sergeants, and sergeants by corporals.
The colonel may detach a first lieutenant from one
company to command another, of which both the
captain and first lieutenant are absent; but this
authority will give no right to a lieutenant to demand
to be so detached.
Posts of Held Officers and Hegimental Staff.
26. The field officers, colonel, lieutenant colonel
and major, are supposed to be mounted, and on
active service shall be on horseback. The adjutant, when the battalion is manoeuvring, will be on
foot.
27. The colonel will take post thirty paces in rear
of the file closers, and opposite &e centre of the bat-

10

FORMATION OF THE BATTALION.

talion. This distance will be reduced whenever there
is a reduction in the front of the battalion.
28. The lieutenant colonel and the major will be
opposite the centres of the right and left wings respectively, and twelve paces in rear of the file closers.
29. The adjutant and sergeant major will be opposite the right and left of the battalion, respectively;
and eight paces in rear of the file closers.
30. The adjutant and sergeant major will aid th«
lieutenant colonel and major, respectively, in the
manoeuvres.
31. The colonel, if absent, will be replaced by the
lieutenant colonel, and the latter by the major. If
all the field officers be absent, the senior captain will
command the battalion; but if either be present, he
will not call the senior captain to act as field officer,
except in case of evident necessity.
32. The quarter-master, surgeon, and other staff
officers, in one rank, on the left of the colonel, and
three paces in his rear.
33. The quarter-master sergeant, on a line with
the front rank of the field music, and two paces on
the right.
Posts of Field Music and Band.
34. The buglers will be drawn up in four ranks,
and posted twelve paces in rear of the file closers, the
left opposite the centre of the left centre company.
The senior principal musician will be two paces in
front of the field music, and the other two paces in
the rear.
35. The regimental band, if there be one, will be
drawn up in two or four ranks, according to its numbers, and posted five paces in rear of the field music,
having one of the principal musicians at its head.
Color-guard.
86. In each battalion the color-guard will be com-

FORMATION OF THE BATTALION,

11

posed of eight corporals, and posted on the left of the
right centre company, of which company, for the time
being, the guard will make a part.
37. The front rank will be composed of a sergeant,
to be selected by the colonel, who will be called, for
the time, color-bearer, with the two ranking corporals,
respectively, on his right and left; the rear rank will
be composed of the three corporals next in rank; and
the three remaining corporals will be posted in their
rear, and on the line of file closers. The left guide
of the color-company, when these three last named
corporals are in the rank of file closers, will be immediately on their left.
38. In battalions with less than five companies present, there will be no color-guard, and no display of
oolors, except it may be at reviews.
39. The corporals for the color-guard will be selected from those most distinguished for regularity
and precision, as well in their positions under arms
as in their marching. The latter advantage, and a
just carriage of the person, are to be more particularly sought for in the selection of the color-bearer.
General Guides.
40. There will be two general guides in each bat*
talion, selected, for the time, by the colonel, from
among the sergeants (other than first sergeants) the
most distinguished for carriage under arms, and
accuracy in marching.
41. These sergeants will be respectively denominated, in the manoeuvres, right general guide, and left
general guide, and be posted in the line of file closers;
the first in rear of the right, and the second in rear
of the left flank of the battalion.

12

INSTRUCTION OF THE BATTALION.

ARTICLE SECOND.

Instruction of the Battalion.
42. Every commanding officer is responsible for
the instruction of his command. He will assemble
the officers together for theoretical and practical instruction as often as he may judge necessary, and
when unable to attend to this duty in person, it will
be discharged by the officer next in rank.
43. Captains will be held responsible for the theoretical and practical instruction of their non-commissioned officers, and the adjutant for the instruction
of the non-commissioned staff. # To this end, they will
require these tactics to be studied and recited lesson
by lesson; and when instruction is given on the
ground, each non-commissioned officer, as he explains
a movement, should be required to put it into practical operation.
44. The non-commissioned officers should also be
practised in giving commands. Each command, in a
lesson, at the theoretical instruction, should first be
given by the instructor, and then repeated, in succession, by the non-commissioned officers, so that while
they become habituated to the commands, uniformity
may be established in the manner of giving them.
45. In the school of the soldier, the company officers will be the instructors of the squads ; but if there
\ e not a sufficient number of company officers present, intelligent sergeants may be substituted; and
two or three squads, under sergeant instructors, ba
superintended, at the same time, by an officer.
46. In the school of the company, the lieutenant
colonel and the major, under the colonel, will be the
principal instructors, substituting frequently the captain of the company, and sometimes one of the lieutenants ; the substitute, as far as practicable, being
superintended by one of the principals.

INSTRUCTION OP THE BATTALION.

13

47. In the school of the battalion, the brigadier
general may constitute himself the principal instructor,
frequently substituting the colonel of the battalion,
sometimes the lieutenant colonel or major, and twice
or thrice, in the same course of instruction, each of
the three senior captains. In this school, also,
the substitute will always, if practicable, be superintended by the brigadier general or the colonel, or
(in case of a captain being the instructor) by the
lieutenant colonel or major.
48. Individual instruction being the basis of the
instruction of companies, on which that of the regiment depends, and the first principles having the
greatest influence upon this individual instruction,
classes of recruits should be watched with the greatest care.
49. Instructors will explain, in a few clear and
precise words, the movement to be executed; and not
to overburden the memory of the men, they will
always use the same terms to explain the same principles.
50. They should often join example to precept,
should keep up the attention of the men by an animated tone, and pass rapidly from one movement to
another, as soon as that which they command has
been executed in a satisfactory manner.
51. The sabre bayonet should only be fixed when
required to be used, either for attack or defence; the
exercises and manoeuvres will be executed without
the bayonet.
52. In the movements which require the bayonet
to be fixed, the chief of the battalion will cause the
signal to fix bayonet, to be sounded; at this signal
the men will fix bayonets without command, and immediately replace their pieces in the position they
were before the signal.

14

INSTRUCTION OP THE BATTALION.

Instruction of Officers.
63. The instruction of officers can be perfected only
by joining theory to practice. The colonel will often
practise them in marching and in estimating distances,
and he will carefully endeavor to cause them to take
steps equal in length and swiftness. They will also
be exercised in the double quick step.
54. The instruction of officers will include all the
Titles in this system of drill, and such regulations as
prescribe their duties in peace and war.
55. Every officer will make himself perfectly acquainted with the bugle signals, and should, by practice, be enabled, if necessary, to sound them. This
knowledge, so necessary in general instruction, becomes of vital importance on actual service in tho
field
Instruction of Sergeants.
56. As the discipline and efficiency of a company
materially depend on the conduct and character of
its sergeants, they should be selected with care, and
properly instructed in all the duties appertaining to
their rank.
57. Their theoretical instruction should include
the School of the Soldier, the School of the Company,
and the Drill for Skirmishers. They should likewise
know all the details of service, and the regulations
prescribing their duties in garrison and in campaign.
58. The captain selects from the corporals in his
company those whom he judges fit to be admitted to
the theoretical instruction of the sergeants.
Instruction of Corporals.
59. Their theoretical instruction should include
the School of the Soldier, and such regulations as
prescribe their duties in garrison and in campaign.
60. The captain selects from his company a few

INSTRUCTION OF THE BATTALION.

15

privates, who may be admitted to the theoretical instruction of the corporals.
61. As the instruction of sergeants and corporals
is intended principally to qualify them for the instruction of the privates, they should be taught not
only to execute, but to explain intelligibly every
thing they may be required to teach.
Commands.
There are three kinds.
62. The command of caution, which is attention.
63. The preparatory command, which indicates the
movement which is to be executed.
64. The command of execution, such as march or
halt, or, in the manual of arms, the part of command
which causes an execution.
65. The tone of command should be animated, distinct, and of a loudness proportioned to the number
of men under instruction.
66. The command attention is pronounced at the
top of the voice, dwelling on the last syllable.
67. The command of execution will be pronounced
in a tone firm and brief.
68. The commands of caution and the preparatory
commands are herein distinguished by italics, those of
execution by CAPITALS.

69. Those preparatory commands which, from their
length, are difficult to be pronounced at once, must be
divided into two or three parts, with an ascending
progression in the tone of command, but always in
Buch a manner that the tone of execution may be
more energetic and elevated; the divisions are indicated by a hyphen. The parts of commands which
are placed in a parenthesis are not pronounced.

16

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART I.

T I T L E SECOND.
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER.
General Kules and Division of the School of the Soldier.
70. THE object of this school being the individual
and progressive instruction of the recruits, the instructor never requires a movement to be executed
until he has given an exact explanation of it; and be
executes, himself, the movement which he commands,
80 as to join example to precept. He accustoms the
recruit to take, by himself, the position which is explained—teaches him to rectify it only when required
by his want of intelligence—and sees that all the
movements are performed without precipitation.
71. Each movement should be understood before
passing to another. After they have been properly
executed in the order laid down in each lesson, the
instructor no longer confines himself to that order;
on the contrary, he should change it, that he may
judge of the intelligence of the men.
72. The instructor allows the men to rest at the
end of each part of the lessons, and oftener, if he
thinks proper, especially at the commencement; for
this purpose he commands REST.
73. At the command REST, the soldier is no longer
required to preserve immobility, or to remain in his
place. If the instructor wishes merely to relieve the
attention of the recruit, he commands, in place—
REST; the soldier is then not required to preserve
his immobility, but he always keeps one of his feet
in its place.
74. When the instructor wishes to commence the

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART I.

17

instruction, he commands—ATTENTION ; at this command, the soldier takes his position, remains motionless, and fixes his attention.
75. The School of the Soldier will be divided into
three parts: the first, comprehending what ought to
be taught to recruits without arms; the second, the
manual of arms, the loadings and firings; the third,
the principles of alignment, the march by the front,
the different steps, the march by the flank, the principles of wheeling, and those of change of direction; also, long marches in double quick time and
the run.
76. Each part will be divided into lessons, as
follows :•—
PART FIRST.

Lesson 1. Position of the soldier without arms:
Eyes right, left and front.
Lesson 2. Facings.
I/esson 3. Principles of the direct step in common
and quick time.
Lesson 4. Principles of the direct step in double
quick time and the run,
PART SECOND.

Lesson 1.
Lesson 2.
Lesson 8.
Lesson 4.
rank.
Lesson 5.
Lesson 6.

Principles of shouldered arms.
Manual of arms.
To load in four times, and at will.
Firings, direct, oblique, by file, and by
To fire and load, kneeling and lying.
Bayonet exercise.
PART THIRD.

Lesson 1. Union of eight or twelve men for instruction in the principles of alignment.
Lesson 2. The direct march, the oblique march, and
the different steps.
2

18

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART V

Lesson 3. The march by the flank.
Lesson 4. Principles of wheeling and change of
direction.
Lesson 5. Long marches in double quick time, and
the run, with arms and knapsacks.

PART FIRST.
77. This will be taught, if practicable, to one recruit at a time; but three or four may be united,
when the number be great, compared with that of the
instructors. In this case, the recruits will be placed
in a single rank, at one pace from each other. In
this part, the recruits will be without arms.
LESSON I.

Position of the Soldier.
78. Heels on the same line, as near each other asj
the conformation of the man will permit;
The feet turned out equally, and forming with each
other something less than a right angle;
The knees straight without stiffness ;
The body erect on the hips* inclining a little forward ;
The shoulders square and falling equally;
The arms hanging naturally ;
The elbows near the body;
The palm of the hand turned a little to the front,
(he little finger behind the seam of the pantaloons;
The head erect and square to the front, without
constraint;
The chin near the stock, without covering it;
The eyes fixed straight to the front, and striking
the ground about the distance of fifteen paces.

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART I.

19

Keniaiks on the position of the Soldier.
Heels on the same line;

79. Because, if one were in rear of the other, the
shoulder on that side would be thrown back, or the
position of the soldier would be constrained.
Heels more or less closed/
Because, men who are knock-kneed, or who have
legs with large calves, cannot, without constraint,
make their heels touch while standing.
The feet equally turned out, and not forming too large an
angle;
Because, if one foot were turned out more than
the other, a shoulder would be deranged, and if both
feet be too much turned out, it would not be practicable to incline the upper part of the body forward
without rendering the whole position unsteady.
Knees extended without

stiffness;

Because, if stiffened, constraint and fatigue would
be unavoidable.
The hody erect on the hips;
Because, it gives equilibrium to the position. The
instructor will observe that many recruits have the
bad habit of dropping a shoulder, of drawing in a
side, or of advancing a hip, particularly the right,
when under arms. These are defects he will labor to
correct.
The upper part of the oody inclining forward;
Because, commonly, recruits are disposed to do
the reverse,'to project the belly, and to throw back
the shoulders, when they wish to hold themselves
erect, from which result great inconveniences in
marching. The habit of inclining forward the upper

20

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART I.

part of the body is so important to contract, that the
instructor must enforce it at the beginning, particularly with recruits who have naturally the opposite
habit.
Shoulders square ;

Because, if the shoulders be advanced beyond the
line of the breast, and the back arched (the defect,
called round-shouldered, not uncommon among recruits), the man cannot align himself, nor use his
piece with address. It is important, then, to correct this
defect, and necessary to that end that the coat should
set easy about the shoulders and armpits; but in
correcting this defect, the instructor will take care
that the shoulders be not thrown too much to the
rear, •which would cause the belly to project, and the
small of the back to be curved.
The arms hanging naturally, elbows near the body, the
palm of the hand a little turned to the front, the little
finger behind the seam of the pantaloons ;

Because, these positions are equally important to
the shoulder-arms, and to prevent the man from occupying more space in a rank than is necessary to a
free use of the piece; they have, moreover, the advantage of keeping in the shoulders.
The face straight to the front, and without

constraint;

Because, if there be stiffness in the latter position,
it would communicate itself td the whole of the upper
part of the body, embarrass its movements, and give
pain and fatigue.
Eyes direct to the front;
Because, this is the surest means of maintaining
the shoulders in line—an essential object, to be insisted on and attained.
80. The instructor having given the recruit the

SCHOOL OP THE SOLDIER—PART I.

21

position of the soldier without arms, will now teach
him the turning of the head and eyes. He will
command:
1. Eyes—EIGHT.

2. FRONT.

81. At the word right, the recruit will turn the
head gently, so as to bring the inner corner of the
left eye in a line with the buttons of the coat, the
eyes fixed on the line of the eyes of the men in, or
supposed to be in, the same rank.
82. At the second command, the head will resume
the direct or habitual position.
83. The movement of Eyes—LEFT will be executed
by inverse means.
84. The instructor will take particular care that
the movement of the head does not derange the
squareness of the shoulders, which will happen if
the movement of the former be too sudden.
85. When the instructor shall wish the recruit to
pass from the state of attention to that of ease, he
will command:
REST.

86. To cause a resumption of the habitual position, the instructor will command :
1. Attention.

2. SQUAD.

87. At the first word, the recruit will fix his attention; at the second, he will resume the prescribed
position and steadiness.
LESSON II.

Facings.
88. Facing to the right and left will be executed
in one time, or pause. The instructor will command:
1. Squad. 2. Right (or left)—FACE.
89. At the second command, raise the right foot

22

SCHOOL OP THE SCLDIER—PART I .

slightly, turn on the left heel, raising the toes a
little, ana then replace the right heel by the side of
the left, and on the same line.
90. The full face to the rear (or front) will be
executed in two times, or pauses. The instructor
'will command:
1. Squad. 2. ABOLT—FACE.
91. (First time.) At the word about, the recruit
will turn on the left heel, bring the left toe to the
front, carry the right foot to the rear, the hollow
opposite to, and full three inches from, the left heel,
the feet square to each other.
92. (Second time.) At the word face, the recruit
will turn on both heels, raise the toes a little, extend the hams, face to the rear, bringing, at the same
time, the right heel by the side of the left.
93. The instructor will take care that these motions do not derange the position of the body.
LESSON

III.

Principles of the Direct Step.
94. The length of the direct step, or pace, in common time, will be twenty-eight inches, reckoning from
heel to heel, and in swiftness, at the rate of ninety
in a minute.
95. The instructor, seeing the recruit confirmed
in his position, will explain to him the principle and
mechanism of this step—placing himself six or seven
paces from, and facing to, the recruit. He will himself execute slowly the step in the way of illustration, and then command:
1. Squad, forward.

2. Common time.

3. MARCH.

96. At the first command, the recruit will ihro'w

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART I.

23

the weight of the body on the right leg, without
bending the left knee.
97. At the third command, he will smartly, but
without a jerk, carry straight forward the left foot
twenty-eight inches from the right, the sole near the
ground, the ham extended, the toe a little depressed,
and, as also the knee, slightly turned out; he will,
at the same time, throw the weight of the body forward, and plant flat the left foot, without shock,
precisely at the distance where it finds itself from
the right when the weight of the body is brought
forward, the whole of which will now rest on the
advanced foot. The recruit will next, in like manner, advance the right foot and plant it as above,
the heel twenty-eight inches from the heel of the
left foot, and thus continue to march without crossing
tliQ legs, or striking the one against the other, without turning the shoulders, and preserving always the
face direct to the front.
98. When the instructor shall wish to arrest the
march, he will command:
1. Squad.

2. HALT.

99. At the second command, which will be given at
the instant when either foot is coming to the ground,
the foot in the rear will be brought up, and planted
by the side of the other, without shock.
100. The instructor will indicate, from time to time,
to the recruit, the cadence of the step by giving the
command one at the instant of raising a foot, and
two at the instant it ought to be planted, observing
the cadence of ninety steps in a ninute. This method
will contribute greatly to impress upon the mind the
two motions into which the step is naturally divided.
101. Common time will be employed only in the
first and second parts of the School of the Soldier.
As soon as the recruit has acquired steadiness, has
become established in the principles of sho aldered

24

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART I .

arms, and in the mechanism, length and swiftness of
the step in common time, he will be practised only in
quick time, the double quick time, and the run.
102. The principles of the step in quick time are
the same as for common time, but its swiftness is at
the rate of one hundred and ten steps per minute.
103. The instructor wishing the squad to march in
quick time, will command:
1. Squad, forward. 2. MARCH.
LESSON IV.

Principles of the Double Quick Step.
104. The length of the double quick step is thirtythree inches, and its swiftness at the rate of one
hundred and sixty-five steps per minute.
105. The instructor wishing to teach the recruits
the principles and mechanism of the double quick
step, will command:
1. Double quick step. 2. MARCH.
106. At the first command, the recruit will raise
his hands to a level with his hips, the hands closed,
the nails towards the body, the elbows to the rear.
107. At the second command, he will raise to the
front his left leg bent, in order to give to the knee
the greatest elevation, the part of the leg between the
knee and the instep vertical, the toe depressed; he
will then replace his foot in its former position; with
the right leg he will execute what has just been prescribed for the left, and the alternate movement of
the legs will be continued until the command:
1. Squad.

2. HALT.

108. At the second command, the recruit will bring
the foot which is raised by the side of the other, and
dropping at the same time his hands by his side, will
;tesume the position of the soldier without arms.

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART I.

25

109. The instructor placing himself seven or eight
paces from, and facing the recruit, will indicate the
cadence by the commands, one and two, given alternately at the instant each foot should be brought to
the ground, which at first will be in common time,
but its rapidity will be gradually augmented.
110. The recruit being sufficiently established in the
principles of this step, the instructor will command:
1. Squad, forward, 2. Double quick.
3. MARCH.

111. At the first command, the recruit will throw
the weight of his body on the right leg.
112. At the second command, he will place his arms
as indicated No. 106.
113. At the third command, he will carry forward
the left foot, the leg slightly bent, the knee somewhat
raised—will plant his left foot, the toe first, thirtythree inches from the right, and with the right foot
will then execute what has just been prescribed for
the left. This alternate movement of the legs will
take place by throwing the weight of the body on
the foot that is planted, and by allowing a natural,
oscillatory motion to the arms.
114. The double quick step may be executed with
different degrees of swiftness. Under urgent circumstances the cadence of this step may be increased te
one hundred and eighty per minute. At this rate a
distance of four thousand yards would be passed over
in about twenty-five minutes.
115. The recruits will be exercised also in running.
116. The principles are the same as for the double
quick step, the only difference consisting in a greater
degree of swiftness.
117. It is recommended in marching at double quick
time, or the run, that the men should breathe as much
as possible through the nose, keeping the mouth
closed. Experience has proved that, by conforming

26

SCHOOL OP THE SOLDIER—PART I I .

to this principle, a man can pass over a much longer
distance, and with less fatigue.

PART SECOND.
GENERAL RULES.

118. The instructor will not pass the men to this
second part until they shall be well established in the
position of the body, and in the manner of marching
at the different steps.
119. He will then unite four men, whom he will
place in the same rank, elbow to elbow, and instruct
them in the position of shouldered arms, as follows:
LESSON

L

Principles of Shouldered Arms.
120. The recruit being placed as explained in the
first lesson of the first part, the instructor will cause
him to bend the right arm slightly, and place the
piece in it, in the following manner:
121. The piece in the right hand—the barrel nearly
vertical and resting in the hollow of the shoulder—
the guard to the front, the arm hanging nearly at its
full length near the body; the thumb and fore-finger
embracing the guard, the remaining fingers closed
together, and grasping the swell of the stock just
under the cock, which rests on the little finger.
122. Ilecruits are frequently seen with natural
defects in the conformation of the shoulders, breast
and hips. These the instructor will labor to correct
in the lessons without arms, and afterwards, by
steady endeavors, so that the appearance of the
pieces, in the same line, may be uniform, and this
without constraint to the men in their positions.
123 The instructor will have occasion to remark

26

SHOULDER ABMS (No. 120).

PL I.

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART II.

27

that recruits, on first bearing arms, are liable to
derange their position by lowering the right shoulder
and the right hand, or by sinking the hip and spreading out the elbows.
124. He will be careful to correct all these faults
by continually rectifying the position; he will sometimes take away the piece to replace it the better; he
will avoid fatiguing the recruits too much in the beginning, but labor by degrees to render this position
so natural and easy that they may remain in it a long
time without fatigue.
125. Finally, the instructor will take great care
that the piece, at a shoulder, be not carried too high
nor too low: if too high, the right elbow would spread
out, the soldier would occupy too much space in his
rank, and the piece be made to waver; if too low,;
the files would be too much closed, the soldier would
not have the necessary space to handle his piece
with facility, the right arm would become too much
fatigued, and would draw down the shoulder.
126. The instructor, before passing to the second
lesson, will cause to be repeated the movements of
eyes right, left, and front, and the facings.
LESSON II.

Manual of Arms.
127. The manual of arms will be taught to four
men, placed, at first, in one rank, elbow to elbow,
and afterwards in two ranks.
128. Each command will be executed in one time
(or pause), but this time will be divided into motions,
the better to make known the mechanism.
129. The rate (or swiftness) of each motion, in
the manual of arms, with the exceptions herein indicated, is fixed at the ninetieth part of a minute;
but, in order not to fatigue the attention, the instructor will, at first, look more particularly to the exe-

28

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART II.

cutiou of the motions, without requiring a nice observance of the cadence, to which he will bring the
recruits progressively, and after they shall have become a little familiarized with the handling of'the
piece.
130. As the motions relative to the cartridge, to
the rammer, and to the fixing and unfixing of the
bayonet, cannot be executed at the rate prescribed,
nor even with a uniform swiftness, they will not be
subjected to that cadence. The instructor will, however, labor to cause these motions to be executed with
promptness, and, above all, with regularity.
131. The last syllable of the command will decide
the brisk execution of the first motion of each time
(or pause). The commands two, three, and four, will
decide the brisk execution of the other motions. As
soon as the recruits shall well comprehend the positions of the several motions of- a time, they will be
taught to execute the time without resting on its
different motions; the mechanism of the time will
nevertheless be observed, as well to give a perfect
use of the piece, as to avoid the sinking of, or slurring over, either of the motions.
132. The manual of arms will be taught in the
following progression: The instructor will command:
Support—ARMS. .
One time and three motions.
133. [First motion.) Bring the piece, with the right
hand, perpendicularly to the front and between the
eyes, the barrel to the rear; seize the piece with the
left hand at the lower band, raise this hand as high
as the chin, and seize the piece at the same time with
the right hand four inches below the cock.
134. [Second motion.) Turn the piece with the right
hand, the barrel to the front,; carry the piece to the
left shoulder, and pass the foie-ariu extended on the

28

SUPPORT ABMS (No. 133.)

PI. 2.

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART II.

29

breast between the right hand and the cock ; support
the cock against the left fore-arm, the left hand resting on the right breast.
135. (Third motion.) Drop the right hand by tho
Bide.
136. When the instructor may wish to give repose
in this position, he will command:
REST.

137. At this command, the recruits will bring up
smartly the right hand to the handle of the piece
(small of the stock), when they will not be required
to preserve silence, or steadiness of position.
138. When the instructor may wish the recruits to
pass from this position to that of silence and steadiness, he will command:
1. Attention.

2. SQUAD.

139. At the second word, the recruits will resume
the position of the third motion of support arms,
Shoulder—ARM s.
One time and three motions.
140. (First motion.) Grasp the piece with the right
hand under and against the left fore-arm; seize it
with the left hand at the lower band, the thumb extended ; detach the piece slightly from the shoulder,
the left fore-arm along the stock.
141. (Second motion.) Carry the piece vertically to
the right shoulder with both hands, the rammer to
the front, change the position of the right hand so
as to embrace the guard with the thumb and forefinger, slip the left hand to the height of the shoulder,
the fingers extended and joined, the right arm nearly
straight.
142. (Tlird motion.) Drop the left hand quickly by
the side.
3

30

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART II,

Present—ARMS.
One time and two motions.
143. (First motion.) With the right hand bring the
piece erect before the centre of the body, the ram*
mer to the front; at the same time seize the piece
with the left hand half-way between the guide sight
and lower band, the thumb extended along the
barrel and against the stock, the fore-arm horizontal
and resting against the body, the hand as high aa
the elbow.
144. (Second motion.) Grasp the small of the stock
with the right hand below and against the guard.
Shoulder—ARMS.
One time and two motions.
145. (First motion.) Bring the piece to the right
shoulder, at the same time change the position of
the right hand so as to embrace the guard with the
thumb and fore-finger, slip up the left hand to the
height of the shoulder, the fingers extended and
joined, the right arm nearly straight.
146. (Second motion.) Drop the left hand quickly
by the side.
Order—ARMS.
One time and two motions.
147. (First motion.) Seize the piece briskly with
the left hand near the upper band, and detach it
slightly from the shoulder with the right hand:
loosen the grasp of the right hand, lower the piece
with the left, reseize the piece with the right hand
above the lower band, the little finger in rear of the
barrel, the butt about four inches from the ground,
the right hand supported against the hip, drop the
left hand by the side.
148. (Second motion.) Let the piece slip through

s
o

PRESENT ARMS (No. 143).

PI 3.

ai

ORDER, ARMS (No. 147),

PL 4.

SCHOOL OP THE SCLDIER—PART I I .

31

the right hand to the ground by opening slightly
the fingers, and take the position about to be
described.
Position of Order Arms.
149. The hand low, the barrel between the thumb
and fore-finger extended along the stock; the other
fingers extended and joined; the muzzle about two
inches from the right shoulder; the rammer in
front; the toe (or beak) of the butt, against, and
in a line with, the toe of the right foot, the barrel
perpendicular.
150. When the instructor may wish to give repose
in this position, he will command:
REST.

151. At this command, the recruits will not be
required to preserve silence or steadiness.
152. When the instructor may wish the recruits
to pass from this position to that of silence and
steadiness, he will command:
1. Attention.

2. SQUAD.

153. At the second word, the recruits will resume
the position of order arms.
Shoulder—Aims.
One time and two motions.
154. [First motion.) Raise the piece vertically with
the right hand to the height of the right breast, and
opposite the shoulder, the elbow close to the body ;
seize the piece with the left hand below the right,
and drop quickly the right hand to grasp the piece
at the swell of the stock, the thumb and fore-finger
embracing the guard; press the piece against the
shoulder with the left hand, the right arm nearly
Straight.

82

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART Hi

165. {Second motion.) Drop the left hand quickly
by the side.
Load in nine times.
1. LOAD.*
One time and one motion.
156. Grasp the piece with the left hand as high
as the right elbow, and bring it vertically opposite
the middle of the body, shift the right hand to the
upper band, place the butt between the feet, the
barrel to the front; seize it with the left hand near
the muzzle, which should be three inches from the
body; carry the right hand to the cartridge box.
2. Handle—CARTRIDGE.
One time and one motion.
157. Seize the cartridge with the thumb and next
two fingers, and place it between the teeth.
3. Tear—CARTRIDGE.
One time and one motion.
158. Tear the paper to the powder, hold the
cartridge upright between the thumb and first two
fingers, near the top; in this position place it in
front of and near the muzzle—the back of the hand
to the front.
4. Charge—CARTRIDGE.
One time and one motion.
159. Empty the powder into the barrel: disengage
the ball from the paper with the right hand and the
thumb and first two fingers of the left; insert it into
the bore, the pointed end uppermost, and press it down
* Whenever the loadings and firings are to be executed, the
Instructor will cause the cartridge boxes to be brought to the front.

32

LOAD (No, 156).

PL 5.

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART I I .

33

with the right thumb; seize the head of the rammer
with the thumb and fore-finger of the right hand, the
t>ther fingers closed, the elbows near the body.
6.

Draw—RAMMER.

One time and three motions.
160. (First motion.) Half draw the rammer by extending the right arm; steady it in this position with
the left thumb; grasp the rammer near the muzzle
with the right hand, the little finger uppermost, the
nails to the front, the thumb extended along the rammer.
161. (Second motion.) Clear the rammer from the
pipes by again extending the arm; the rammer in the
prolongation of the pipes.
162. (Third motion!) Turn the rammer, the little
end of the rammer passing near the left shoulder;
place the head of the rammer on the ball, the back
of the hand to the front.
6.

Ram—CARTRIDGE.

One time and one motion.
163. Insert the rammer as far as the right, and
steady it in this position with the thumb of the left
hand; seize the rammer at the small end with the
thumb and fore-finger of the right hand, the back
of the hand to the front; press the ball home, the
elbows near the body.
7. Return—RAMMER.

One time and three motions.
164. (First motion.) Draw the rammer half-way out,
and steady it in this position with the left thumb;
grasp it near the muzzle with the right hand, the little
finger uppermost, the nails to the front, the thumb
along the rammer; clear the rammer from the bore

34

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART I I .

by extending the arm, the nails to the front, the rammer in the prolongation of the bore.
165. (Second motion.) Turn the rammer, the head
of the rammer passing near the left shoulder, and insert it in the pipes until the right hand reaches the
muzzle, the nails to the front.
166. (Third motion.) Force the rammer home by
placing the little finger of the right hand on the head
of the rammer; pass the left hand down the barrel
to the extent of the arm, without depressing the
shoulder.
8.

PRIME.*

One time and two motions.
167. (First motion.) With the left hand raise the
piece till the hand is as high as the eye, grasp the
small of the stock with the right hand; half face to
the right; place, at the same time, the right foot behind and at right angles with the left; the hollow of
the right foot against the left heel. Slip the left
hand down to the lower band, the thumb along the
stock, the left elbow against the body ; bring the piece
to the right side, the butt below the right fore-arm—
the small of the stock against the body and two inches
below the right breast, the barrel upwards, the muzzle
on a level with the eye.
168. (Second motion.) Half cock with the thumb of
the right hand, the fingers supported against the guard
and the small of the stock—remove the old cap with
one of the fingers of the right hand, and with the
thumb and fore-finger of the same hand take a cap
from the pouch, place it on the nipple, and press it
* If Maynard's primer be used, the command will be, loadin eight
times, and the eighth command will be, shoulder arms, and executed
from return rammer, in one time and two motions, as follows :
(First motion.) Raise the piece with the left hand, and take the
position of shoulder arms, as indicated No. 145.
(JSecond motion.) Drop the left hand quickly by the side.

34

PRIME (No. 167),

PI

SCHOOL OP THE SOLDIER—PART II.

35

down with the thumb; seize the small of the stock
with the right hand.
9 Shoulder—ARMS.
One time and two motions.
169. (First motion.) Bring the piece to the right
shoulder and support it there with the left hand, face
to the front; bring the right heel to the side of and
on a line with the left; grasp the piece with the right
hand as indicated in the position of shoulder arms.
170. (Second motion.) Drop the left hand quickly
by the side.
READY.

One time and three motions.
171. (First motion.) Raise the piece slightly with
the right hand, making a half face to the right on
the left heel; carry the right foot to the rear, and
place it at right angles to the left, the hollow of it
opposite to, and against the left heel; grasp the piece
with the left hand at the lower band and detach it
slightly from the shoulder.
172. (Second motion.) Bring down the piece with
both hands, the barrel upwards, the left thumb extended along the stock, the butt below the right forearm, the small of the stock against the body and two
inches below the right breast, the muzzle as high as
the eye, the left elbow against the side; place at the
same time the right thumb on the head of the cock,
the other fingers under and against the guard.
173. (Third motion.) Cock, and seize the piece at
the small of the stock without deranging the position
of the butt.

36

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART 11.
AIM.

One time and one motion.
174. Raise the piece with both hands, and support
the butt against the right shoulder; the left elbow
down, the right as high as the shoulder; incline the
head upon the butt, so that the right eye may perceive quickly the notch of the hausse, the front sight,
and the object aimed a t ; the left eye closed, the
right thumb extended along the stock, the fore-finger
on the trigger.
175. When recruits are formed in two ranks to
execute the firings, the front rank men will raise a
little less the right elbow, in order to facilitate the
aim of the rear rank men.
176. The rear rank men, in aiming, will each carry
the right foot about eight inches to the right, and towards the left heel of the man next on the right, inclining the upper part of the body forward.
FIRE.

One time and one motion.
177. Press the fore-finger against the trigger, fire,
without lowering or turning the head, and remain in
this position.
178. Instructors will be careful to observe when
the men fire, that they aim at some distinct object,
and that the barrel be so directed that the line of fire
and the line of sight be in the same vertical plane.
They will often cause the firing to be executed on
ground of different inclinations, in order to accustom
the men to fire at objects either above or below them.
LOAD.

One time and one motion.
179. Bring down the piece with both hands, at the
Bame time face to the front and take the position of

36

AIM (No. 174).

PI 7.

37

AS REARRBANK, AIM (No. 170).

PI. 8.

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER

PART I I .

37

had as indicated No. 156. E a c h r e a r r a n k m a n "will
b r i n g his r i g h t foot by the side of t h e left.
180. The men being in this position, t h e i n s t r u c t o r
will cause t h e loading to be continued b y t h e commands and means prescribed No. 156 and following.
181. If, after firing, the i n s t r u c t o r should not wish
the r e c r u i t s to reload, h e will c o m m a n d :
Shoulder—ARMS.
One time and one motion.
182. Throw u p t h e piece b r i s k l y w i t h t h e left
h a n d , and resume the position of shoulder arms, at
the same time face to t h e front, t u r n i n g on t h e left
heel, and bring the r i g h t heel on a line with the left.
183. To accustom the r e c r u i t s to wait for t h e command fire, t h e instructor, when t h e y are in t h e position of aim, will c o m m a n d :
Recover—ARM S .
One time and one motion.
184. At t h e first p a r t of t h e command, w i t h d r a w
the finger from the t r i g g e r ; at the command arms,
r e t a k e the position of the t h i r d motion of ready.
185. The recruits being in the position of the t h i r d
motion of ready, if the instructor should wish t©
bring t h e m to a shoulder, he will c o m m a n d :
SHOULDER—ARMS.

One time and one motion.
186. At the command shoidder, place r the t h u m «
upon the cock, the fore-finger on the trigger, halfcock, a n d seize the small of t h e stock w i t h t h e r i g h t
h a n d . At the command arms, b r i n g u p t h e piece
b r i s k l y to the right shoulder, a n d r e t a k e t h e positioa
of shoulder arms.
4

38

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART I I .

187. The recruits being at shoulder arms, when
the instructor shall wish to fix bayonets, he will
command:
Fix—BAYONET.

One time and three motions.
188. [First motion.) Grasp the piece with the left
hand at the height of the shoulder, and detach it
slightly from the shoulder with the right hand.
189. (Second motion.) Quit the piece with the right
hand, lower it with the left hand, opposite the middle
of the body, and place the butt between the feet
without shock; the rammer to the rear, the barrel
vertical, the muzzle three inches from the body;
seize it with the right hand at the upper band, and
carry the left hand reversed to the handle of the
sabre-bayonet.
190. (Third motion.) Draw the sabre-bayonet from
the scabbard and fix it on the extremity of the barrel; seize the piece with the left hand, the arm extended, the right hand at the upper band.
Shoulder—ARMS.
One time and two motions.
191. (First motion.) Raise the piece with the left
hand and place it against the right shoulder, the
rammer to the front; seize the piece at the same time
with the right hand at the swell of the stock, the
thumb and fore-finger embracing the guard, the right
arm nearly extended.
192. (Second motion.) Drop briskly the left hand by
the side.
Charge—BAYONET.

One time and two motions.
193. (First motion.) Raise the piece slightly with
lie right hand and make a half face to the right on

38

C H A R G E BAYONET (No. 193).

PZ.9.

SCHOOL OP THE SOLDIER—PART I I .

39

the left heel; place the hollow of the right foot opposite to, and three inches from the left heel, the feet
square; seize the piece at the same time with the
left hand a little above the lower band.
194. (Second motion.) Bring down the piece with
both hands, the barrel uppermost, the left elbow
against the body; seize the small of the stock, at the
game time, with the right hand, which will be supported against the hip ; the point of the sabre-bayonet
as high as the eye.
Shoulder—ARMS.
One time and two motions.
195. (First motion.) Throw up the piece briskly
with the left hand in facing to the front, place it
against the right shoulder, the rammer to the front;
turn the right hand so as to embrace the guard, .slide
the left hand to the height of the shoulder, the right
hand nearly extended.
196. (Second motion.) Drop the left hand smartly by
the side.
Trail—ARMS.
One time and two motions.
197. (First motion.) The same as the first motion of
order arms,
198. (Second motion.) Incline the muzzle slightly to
the front, the butt to the rear and about four inches
from the ground. The right hand supported at the
hip, will so hold the piece that the rear rank men
may not touch with their bayonets the men in the
front rank.
SHOULDER—ARMS.

199. At the command shoulder, raise the piece perpendicularly in the right hand, the little finger in rear
of the barrel; at the command armsf execute what has

40

SCHOOL OP THE SOLDIER—PART I I .

been prescribed for the shoulder from the position of
order arms.
Unfix—BAYONET.

One time and three motions.
200. (First and second motions.) The same as the first
and second motions of fix bayonet, except that, at the
end of the second command, the thumb of the right
hand will be placed on the spring of the sabre-bayonet, and the left hand will embrace the handle of the
sabre-bayonet and the barrel, the thumb extended
along the blade.
201. (Third motion.) Press the thumb of the right
hand on the spring, wrest oif the sabre-bayonet, turn
it to the right, the edge to the front, lower the guard
until it touches the right hand, which will seize the
back and the edge of the blade between the thumb
and first two fingers, the other fingers holding the
piece; change the position of the hand without quitting the handle, return the sabre-bayonet to the scabbard, and seize the piece with the left hand, the arm
extended.
Shoulder—ARM S.
One time and two motions.
202. (First motion.) The same as the first motion
from, fix bayonet, No. 191.
203. (Second motion.) The same as the second motion
hom fix bayonet, No. 1^2.
Secure—ARMS.
One time and three mozions.
204. (First motion.) The same as the first motion of
support arms, No. 133, except with the right hand
seize the piece at the small of the stock.
205. (Second motion.) Turn the piece with both

40

UNFIX

BAYONET (No. 200).

PI

ia

41

SECURE ARMS (No. 204).

PL 11.

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART II.

41

hands, the barrel to the front j bring it opposite the
left shoulder, the butt against the hip, the left hand
at the lower band, the thumb as high as the chin and
extended on the rammer; the piece erect and detached
from the shoulder, the left fore-arm against the piece
206. (Third motion.) Reverse the piece, pass it under
the left arm, the left hand remaining at the lower
band, the thumb on the rammer to prevent it from
sliding out, the little finger resting against the hip,
the right hand falling at the same time by the side.
Shoulder—A EMS.
One time and three motions.
207. [First motion.) Raise the piece with the leff
hand, and seize it with the right hand at the small
of the stock. The piece erect and detached from the
shoulder, the butt against the hip, the left fore-arm
along the piece.
208. [Second motion.) The same as the second motion
of shoulder arms from a support.
209. (Third motion.) The same as the third motion
of shoulder arms from a support.
Right shoulder shift—ARMS.
One time and two motions.
210. (First motion.) Detach the piece perpendicu
larly from the shoulder with the right hand, and seiz<
it with the left between the lower band and guide
sight, raise the piece, the left hand at the height of
the shoulder and tour inches from it; place, at th<
game time, the right hand on the butt, the beak betweei
the first two fingers, the other two fingers under th(
butt plate.
211. (Second motion.) Quit the piece with the left
band, raise and place the piece on the right shouldei

42

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART II.

with the right hand, the lock plate upwards; let fall,
at the same time, the left hand by the side.
Shoulder—ARM S .
One time and two motions.
212. (First motion.) Raise the piece perpendicularly
by extending the right arm to its full length, the rammer to the front, at the same time seize the piece with
the left hand between the lower band and guide sight.
213. (Second motion.) Quit the butt with the right
hand, which will immediately embrace the guard,
lower the piece to the position of shoulder arms, slide
up the left hand to the height of the shoulder, the
fingers extended and closed. Drop the left hand by
the side.
214. The men being at support arms, the instructor
will sometimes cause pieces to be brought to the right
shoulder. To this effect, he will command:
Right shoulder shift—ARMS.
One time and two motions,
215. (First motion.) Seize the piece with the right
hand, below and near the left fore-arm, place the left
hand under the butt, the heel of the butt between the
first two fingers.
216. (Second motion.) Turn the piece with the left
hand, the lock plate upward, carry it to the right
shoulder, the left hand still holding the butt, the
muzzle elevated; hold the piece in this position and
place the right hand upon the butt as is prescribed
tfo. 210, and let fall the left hand by the side.
Support—ARM S .
One time and two motions.
217. (First motion.) The same as the first motion
of shoulder arms, No. 212.

42

FL 12.

R I G H T S H O U L D E R S H I F T A R M S (No. 210).

43

G R O U N D A R M S (No. 222).

PL 13.

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART I I .

43

218. (Second motion.) Turn the piece with both
hands, the barrel to the front, carry it opposite the
left shoulder, slip the right hand to the small of the
stock, place the left fore-arm extended on the breast
as is prescribed No. 134, and let fall the right hand
by the side.
Arms—AT WILL.

One time and one motion.
219. At this command, carry the piece at pleasure
on either shoulder, with one or both hands, the muzzle elevated.
Shoulder—ARMS.
One time and one motion.
220. At this command, retake quickly the position
of shoulder arms.
221. The recruits being at ordered arms, when the
instructor shall wish to cause the pieces to be placed
on the ground, he will command:
Ground—ARMS.
One time and two motions.
222. (First motion.) Turn the piece with the right
hand, the barrel to the left, at the same time seize
the cartridge box with the left hand, bend the body,
advance the left foot, the heel opposite the lower
band; lay the piece on the ground with the right
hand, the toe of the butt on a line with the right toe,
the knees slightly bent, the right heel raised.
223. (Second motion.) Rise up, bring the left foot
by the side of the right, quit the cartridge box with
the left hand, and drop the hands by the side.
Raise—ARMS.
One time and two motions.
224. (First motion.) Seize the cartridge box with

44

SCHOOL OP THE SOLDIER—PART I I .

the left hand, bend the body, advance the left foot
opposite the lower band, and seize the piece with the
right hand.
225. [Second mction.) Raise the piece, bringing the
left foot by the side of the right; turn the piece with
the right hand, the rammer to the front; at the same
time quit the cartridge box with the left hand, and
drop this hand by the side.
Inspection of Arms.
226. The recruits being at ordered arms, and having
the sabre-bayonet in the scabbard, if the instructor
wishes to cause an inspection of arms, he will command:
Inspection—ARM S .
One time and tivo motions.
227. [First motion.) Seize the piece with the left
hand below and near the upper band, carry it with
both hands opposite the middle of the body, the butt
between the feet, the rammer to the rear, the barrel
vertical, the muzzle about three inches from the body;
carry the left hand reversed to the sabre-bayonet,
draw it from the scabbard and fix it on the barrel;
grasp the piece with the left hand below and near the
upper baud, seize the rammer with the thumb and
fore-linger of the right hand bent, the other fingers
closed.
228. [Second motion.) Draw the rammer as has been
explained in loading, and let it glide to the bottom of
the bore, replace the piece with the left hand opposite
the right shoulder, and retake the position of ordered
arms.
229. The instructor will then inspect in succession
the piece of each recruit, in passing along the front
of the rank. Each, as the instructor reaches him,
will raise smartly his piece with his right hand, seize
it with the left between the lower band and guide

SCHOOL OP THE SOLDIER—PART I I .

45

sight, the lock to the front, the left h a n d a t t h e height
of the chin, the piece opposite to t h e left e y e ; t h e
instructor will take it with the r i g h t hand at the h a n d l e ,
and, after inspecting it, will r e t u r n it to t h e r e c r u i t ,
who will receive it back with the right h a n d , a n d r e place it in the position of ordered arms.
230. When the instructor shall have passed h i m ,
each recruit will ret;ike the position prescribed at
the command inspection arms, r e t u r n the r a m m e r , a n d
resume the position of ordered arms.
281. If, instead of inspection of arms, t h e i n s t r u c t o r
Bhould merely wish to cause bayonets to be fixed, h e
will c o m m a n d :
Fix—BAYONET.

232. Take t h e position indicated No. 227, fix b a y o nets as h a s been explained, and immediately resume
the position of ordered aims.
233. If it be the wish of the instructor, after firing,
to ascertain whether the pieces have been discharged,
he will c o m m a n d :
Spring—RAMMERS

.

234. P u t the r a m m e r in t h e b a r r e l as h a s been explained above, and immediately r e t a k e the position
of ordered arms.
235. The i n s t r u c t o r , for the purpose stated, can
take the r a m m e r by the small end, and spring it in
the barrel, or cause each r e c r u i t to m a k e it r i n g i n
the barrel.
236. Each r e c r u i t , after the i n s t r u c t o r passes h i m ,
will r e t u r n rammer, a n d resume the position of ordered arms.
Bemarks «n the Manual of A r m s .
237. The manual of a r m s frequently distorts t h e
persons of recruits before they acquire ease a n d con-

46

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART II.

fidence in the several positions. The instructor will
therefore frequently recur to elementary principles
in the course of the lessons.
238. Recruits are also extremely liable to curve
the sides and back, and to derange the shoulders,
especially in loading. Consequently, the instructor
will not cause them to dwell too long, at a time, in
one position.
239. When, after some days of exercise in the
manual of arms, the four men shall be well established in their use, the instructor will always terminate the lesson by marching the men for some
time in one rank, and at one pace apart, in common
and quick time, in order to confirm them more and
more in the mechanism of the step; he will also
teach them to mark time and to change step, which
will be executed in the following manner:
To mark time.
240. The four men marching in the direct step, the
instructor will command:
1. Mark time. 2. MARCH.
241. At the second command, which will be given
at the instant a foot is coming to the ground, the
recruits will make a semblance of marchmg, by
bringing the heels by the side of each other, and ob6erving the cadence of the step, by raising each foot
alternately without advancing.
242. The instructor wishing the direct step io be
resumed, will command:
1. Fonvard.

2. MARCH.

243. At the second command, which will be given
as prescribed above, the recruits will retake the step
of twenty-eight inches.

SCHOOL 01

THE SOLDIER—PAET I I .

47

To change step.
244. The squad being in m a r c h , the
will command:
1. Change, step.
245.
at t h e
bring
which
which

instructor

2. M A R C H .

At the second command, which will be given
i n s t a n t either foot is coming to the ground,
the foot which is in r e a r by the side of t h a t
is in front, and step off again with t h e foot
was in front.

To march backwards.
246. The i n s t r u c t o r wishing the squad to m a r c h
b a c k w a r d s , will c o m m a n d :
1. Squad backivard.

2. M A R C H .

247. At the second command, the recruits will step
off smartly with the left foot fourteen inches to the
rear, reckoning from heel to heel, and so on with the
feet in succession till the command halt, which will
always be preceded by t h e caution squad. The men
will halt at this command, and b r i n g back the foot in
front by the side of the other.
248. This step will always be executed in quick
time.
249. The i n s t r u c t o r will be watchful t h a t t h e r e cruits m a r c h straight to the rear, and t h a t the erect
position of the body and the piece be not deranged.
LESSON

III.

To load i n four times.
250. The object of this lesson is to p r e p a r e t h e r e cruits to load at will, and to cause them to distinguish
the times which r e q u i r e the greatest r e g u l a r i t y and
attention, such as charge cartridge, ram cartridge, and
prime. I t will be divided as follows:
5

48

SCHOOL OP THE SOLDIER—PART

II.

251. T h e first time will be executed at the end of
the c o m m a n d ; t h e three others at the commands,
two, three and four.
The instructor will c o m m a n d :
1. Load in four times.

2, LOAD.

252. E x e c u t e the times to include charge cartridge.
Two.
253.

Execute the times to include r a m cartridge.

254.

E x e c u t e the times to include p r i m e .

255.

E x e c u t e the time of shoulder

THREE.

FOUR.

arms.

To load at will.
256. The instructor will n e x t teach loading at will,
which will be executed as loading in four times, b u t
continued, and without resting on either of the times.
He will c o m m a n d :
1. Load at will.

2. LOAD.

257. The instructor will habituate the recruits, b y
degrees, to load with the greatest possible promptitude, each without regulating himself by his neighbor, and above all without waiting for him.
258. The cadence prescribed No. 129, is not applicable to loading in four times, or at will.
LESSON

IV.

Firings.
259. The firings are direct or oblique, a n d will be
executed as follows:

SCHOOL Or THE SOLDIER—PART II.

49

The direct fire.
260. The instructor will give the following commands :
1 Fire by Squad.

2. Squad.

5. FIRE.

3. READY.

4. AIM.

6. LOAD.

261. These several commands will be executed as
has been prescribed in the Manual of Arms. At the
third command, the men will come to the position of
ready as heretofore explained. At the fourth they
will aim according to the rank in which each may
find himself placed, the rear rank men inclining forward a little the upper part of the body, in order
that their pieces may reach as much beyond the front
rank as possible.
262. At the sixth command, they will load their
pieces and return immediately to the position of ready
263. The instructor will recommence the firing by
the commands:
1. Squad.

2. AIM.

3. FIRE.

4. LOAD.

264. When the instructor wishes the firing to cease,
he will command:
Cease firing.
265. At this command, the men will cease firing,
but will load their pieces if unloaded, and afterwards
bring them to a shoulder.
Oblique Firings.
266. The oblique firings will be executed to the
right and left, and by the same commands as the
direct fire, with this single difference—the command
aim will always be preceded by the caution, right or
left oblique.

50

SCHOOL OE THE SOLDIER—PART II.

Position of the two ranks in the Oblique Eire to th@
right.
267. At the command ready, the two ranks will execute what has been prescribed for the direct fire.
268. At the cautionary command, right oblique, the
two ranks will throwback the right shoulder and look
steadily at the object to be hit.
269. At the command aim, each front rank man
will aim to the right without deranging the feet;
each rear rank man will advance the left foot about
eight inches towards the right heel of the man next
on the right of his file leader, and aim to the right,
inclining the upper part of the body forward and
bending a little the left knee.
Position of the two ranks in the Oblique Fire to the
left.
270. At the cautionary command left oblique, the
two ranks will throw back the left shoulder and look
steadily at the object to be hit.
271. At the command aim, the front rank will take
aim to the left without deranging the feet; each man
in the rear rank will advance the right foot about
eight inches towards the right heel of the man next
on tile right of his file leader, and aim to the left, inclining the upper part of the body forward and bending a little the right knee.
272. In both cases, at the command load, the men
of each rank will come to the position of load as prescribed in the direct fire; the rear rank men bring*
ing back the foot which is to the right and front by
the side of the other. Each man will continue to
load as if isolated.
To fire by file.
273. The fire by file will be executed by the two
ranks, the files of which will fire successively, and

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART II.

51

without regulating on each other, except for the first
fire.
274. The instructor will command:
1. Fire by file. 2. Squad, 3. READY.

4. COMMENCE

FIRING.

275. At the third command, the two ranks will take
the position prescribed in the direct fire.
276. At the fourth command, the file on the right
will aim and fire; the rear rank man in aiming will
take the position indicated No. 176.
277. The men of this file will load their pieces
briskly and fire a second time; reload and fire again,
and so on in continuation.
278. The second file will aim, at the instant the
first brings down pieces to reload, and will conform
in all respects to that which has just been prescribed
for the first file.
279. After the first fire, the front and rear rank
men will not be required to fire at the same time.
280. Each man, after loading, will return to the
position of ready and continue the fire.
281. When the instructor wishes the fire to cease,
he will command:
Cease—FIRING.

282. At this command, the men will cease firing.
If they have fired they will load their pieces and
bring them to a shoulder; if at the position of ready,
they will half-cock and shoulder arms. If in the position of aim, they will bring down their pieces, halfcock, and shoulder arms.
To fire by rank.
283. The fire by rank will be executed by each
entire rank, alternately

52

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART I I .

284. The instructor wi1! command:
1. Fire by rank. 2. Squad. 3. READY.
rank.

5. AIM.

6. F I R E .

4. Rear

7. LOAD.

285. At the third command, the two ranks will
take the position of ready, as prescribed in the direct
fire.
286. At the seventh command, the rear rank will
execute that which has been prescribed in the direct
fire, and afterwards take the position of ready.
287. As soon as the instructor sees several men of
the rear rank in the position of ready, he will command:
1. Front rank.

2. AIM. 3. FIRE.

4. LOAD.

288. At these commands, the men in the front rank
will execute what has been prescribed for the rear
rank, but they will not step off with the right foot.
289. The instructor will recommence the firing by
the rear rank, and will thus continue to alternate
from rank to rank, until he shall wish the firing to
cease, when he will command, cease firing, which will
be executed as heretofore prescribed.
LESSON V.

To fire and load kneeling.
290. In this exercise the squad will be supposed
loaded and drawn up in one rank. The instruction
will be given to each man individually, without times
or motions, and in the following manner.
291. The instructor will command:
FIRE AND LOAD KNEELING.

292. At this command, the man on the right of the
squad will move forward three paces and halt; then
carry the right foot to the rear and to the right of
the left heel, and in a position convenient for placing
the right knee upon the ground in bending the left

52

F I R E AND LOAD K N E E L I N G (No. 292).

PL 14.

SCHOOL OP THE SOLDIER—PART II.

53

l e g ; place the r i g h t knee upon the g r o u n d ; lower
t h e piece, the left fore-arm supported upon the t h i g h
on the same side, the right h a n d on the small of the
stock, the butt resting on the r i g h t thigh, t h e left
h a n d supporting the piece near the lower band.
293. He will next move the r i g h t leg to the left
a r o u n d the knee supported on the ground, u n t i l t h i s
leg is n e a r l y perpendicular to t h e direction of t h e
left foot, and thus seat himself comfortably on th<3
r i g h t heel.
294. Raise the piece with the r i g h t h a n d and s u p p o r t it with the left, holding it n e a r t h e lower b a n d ,
the left elbow resting on the left thigh n e a r the k n e e ;
seize the h a m m e r with the t h u m b , the fore-finger
u n d e r the g u a r d , cock and seize the piece at t h e
small of the stock; b r i n g t h e piece to the shoulder,
aim and fire.
295. B r i n g the piece down as soon as it is fired,
and support it with the left hand, the b u t t r e s t i n g
against the r i g h t t h i g h ; c a r r y the piece to the r e a r
rising on the knee, the barrel downwards, the b u t t
r e s t i n g on the g r o u n d ; in this position support t h e
piece with the left h a n d at the u p p e r band, d r a w
cartridge with the right and load the piece, r a m m i n g
the ball, if necessary, with both hands.
296. When loaded b r i n g the piece to the front with
the left h a n d , which holds it at the upper b a n d ; seize
it at the same time with the r i g h t h a n d at the small
of the stock; turn the piece, the barrel u p p e r m o s t
and nearly horizontal, the left elbow r e s t i n g on t h e
left thigh ; half-cock, remove the old cap a n d p r i m e ,
rise, and return to the r a n k s .
297. The second man will then be t a u g h t wbfit h a s
j u s t been prescribed for the first, a n d so on t h r o u g h
the remainder of the squad.
To fire and load lying*.
298. I n this exercise t h e squad will be in one r a n k

54

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART II.

and loaded; the instruction will be given individually
and without times or motions.
299. The instructor will command:
F I R E AND LOAD LYING.

300. At this command, the man on the right of the
squad will move forward three paces and halt; he
will then bring his piece to an order, drop on both
knees, and place himself on the ground flat on his
belly. In this position he will support the piece
nearly horizontal with the left hand, holding it near
the lower band, the butt end of the piece and the
left elbow resting on the ground, the barrel uppermost ; cock the piece with the right hand, and carry
this hand to the small of the stock ; raise the piece
with both hand's, press the butt against the shoulder,
and resting on both elbows, aim and fire.
301. As soon as he has fired, bring the piece down
and turn upon his left side, still resting on his left
elbow; bring back the piece until the cock is opposite his breast, the butt end resting on the ground;
take out a cartridge with the right hand; seize the
small of the stock with this hand, holding the cartridge with the thumb and two first fingers; he will
then throw himself on his back, still holding the piece
with both hands; carry the piece to the rear, place
the butt between the heels, the barrel up, the muzzle
elevated. In this position, charge cartridge, draw
rammer, ram cartridge, and return rammer.
302. When finished loading, the man will turn
again upon his left side, remove the old cap and
prime, then raise the piece vertically, rise, turn
about, and resume his position in the ranks.
803. The second man will be taught what has
just been prescribed for the first, and so on throughout the squad.

54

GUARD AGAINST I N F A N T R Y (No. 805).

PI 15.

55

GUARD A G A I N S T CAVALRY (No. 308)

PL 16.

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART

LESSON

fl.

56

VI.

Bayonet Exercise.
804. The b a y o n e t exercise in t h i s book will be
confined to two movements, the guard against infantry,
and t h e guard against cavalry.
The men will be
placed in one r a n k , with two paces interval, and being at shoulder a r m s , the i n s t r u c t o r will c o m m a n d :
1. Guard against Infantry.

2. GUARD.

One time and two motions.
305. [First motion.)
Make a half face to t h e r i g h t ,
t u r n i n g on both heels, the feet s q u a r e to each o t h e r ;
at the same time raise t h e piece slightly, a n d seize it
with the left h a n d above and n e a r the lower b a n d .
306. [Second motion.)
Carry the r i g h t foot t w e n t y
inches perpendicularly to the r e a r , the r i g h t heel on
the prolongation of the left, the knees slightly bent,
t h e weight of the body r e s t i n g equally on both l e g s ;
lower the piece with b o t h h a n d s , the barrel u p p e r most, the left elbow against t h e b o d y ; seize the piece
a t the same time with the r i g h t h a n d at the small of
the stock, the arms falling n a t u r a l l y , the point of the
bayonet slightly elevated.
Shoulder—ARM

S.

One time and one motion.
307. Throw u p t h e piece with the left h a n d , and
place it against the r i g h t shoulder, at the same time
bring the r i g h t heel by the side of the left a n d face
to the front.
1. Guard against Cavalry.

2. GUARD.

One time and two motions.
308. Both motions the same as for guard against
infantry, except t h a t t h e r i g h t h a n d will be s u p p o r t e d

56

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART I I I .

against the hip, and the bayonet held at the height
of the eye, as in charge bayonet.
Shou Ider—ARM S .
One time and one motion*
809. Spring up the piece with the left hand and
place it against the right shoulder, at the same time
bring the right heel by the side of the left, and face
to the front.
PART THIRD.
810. When the recruits are well established in the
principles and mechanism of the step, the position of the
body, and the manual of arms, the instructor will unite
eight men, at least, and twelve men, at most, in order
to teach them the principles of alignment, the principles of the touch of elbows in marching to the front,
the principles of the march by the flank, wheeling
from a halt, wheeling in marching, and the change
cf direction to the side of the guide. He will place
the squad in one rank, elbow to elbow, and number
the men from right to left.
LESSON I.

Alignments.
311. The instructor will at first teach the recruits
to align themselves man by man, in order the better
to make them comprehend the principles of alignment ; to this end, he will command the two men on
the right flank to march two paces to the front, and
having aligned them, he will caution the remainder
of the squad to move up, as they may be successively
called, each by his number, and align themselves
successively on the line of the first two men.
312. Each recruit, as designated by his number,

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART I I I .

57

will turn the head and eyes to the right as prescribed
in the first lesson of the first part, and will march in
quick time two paces forward, shortening the last, so as
to find himself about six inches behind the new alignment, which he ought never to pass: he will next
move up steadily by steps of two or three inches, the
hams extended, to the side of the man next to him
on the alignment, so that, without deranging the
head, the line of the eyes, or that of the shoulders,
he may find himself in the exact line of his neighbor,
whose elbow he will lightly touch without opening
his own.
313. The instructor seeing the rank well aligned,
will command:
FRONT.

314. At this, the recruits will turn eyes to the
front, and remain firm.
315. Alignments to the left will be executed on the
same principles.
316. When the recruits shall have thus learned to
align themselves man by man, correctly, and without
groping or jostling, the instructor will cause the
entire rank to align itself at once by the command:
Right (or

left)—DRESS.

317. At this, the rank, except the two men placed
in advance as a basis of alignment, will move up in
quick time, and place themselves on the new line, according to the principles prescribed No. 312.
318. The instructor, placed five or six paces in front,
and facing the rank, will carefully observe that the
principles are followed, and then pass to the flank
that has served as the basis, to verify the alignment.
319. The instructor seeing the greater number of
the rank aligned, will command :

58

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART III.

FRONT.

320. The i n s t r u c t o r may afterwards order this 01
that file, forward or back, designating each by its number. The file or files designated, only, will slightly
t u r n the head towards the basis, to j u d g e how much
t h e y ougnt to move u p or back, steadily place themselves on the line, and then t u r n eyes to the front,
without a p a r t i c u l a r command to t h a t effect.
321. Alignments to the r e a r will be executed on the
same principles, the r e c r u i t s stepping back a little
beyond the line, and then dressing up according to
the principles prescribed No. 312, the i n s t r u c t o r
commanding:
Right (or left)

backward—DRESS.

322. After each alignment, the instructor will examine the position of the men, and cause the r a n k to
come to Drdered arms, to prevent too much fatigue, and
also the d a n g e r of negligence at shouldcied arms.
LESSON

II.

323. The men h a v i n g learned, in the first and second
p a r t s , to match with steadiness in common time, and
to take steps equal in length and swiltness, will be
exercised in the t h i r d p a r t only in quick time, double
quick time, and t h e r m * ; the i n s t r u c t o r will cause them
to execute successively, at these different gaits, t h e
march to the front, the facing about in marching, t h e
m a r c h by t h e flank, the wheels at a halt and in m a r c h ing, and the c h a n g e s of direction to the side of the
guide.
324. The i n s t r u c t o r will inform the recruits t h a t at
the command march, they will always move off in
quick time, unless this command should be preceded
by t h a t of double quick.

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIE R—*PART III.

59

To march to the front.

325. The rank being correctly aligned, when the
instructor shall wish to cause it to march by the
front, he will place a well-instructed man on the
right or the left, according to the side on which he
may wish the guide to be, and command:
1. Squad, forward. 2. Guide right (or left). 3. MARCH.
326. At the command march, the rank will step off
smartly with the left foot; the guide will take care t<?
march straight to the front, keeping his shoulders
always in a square with that line.
327. The instructor will observe, in marching t<?
the front, that the men touch lightly the elbow towards
the side of the guide; that they do not open out the
left elbow, nor the right arm; that they yield to pressure coming from the side of the guide, and resist that
coming from the opposite side; that they recover by
insensible degrees the slight touch of the elbow, if
lost; that they maintain the head direct to the front,
no matter on which side the guide may be; and if
found before or behind the alignment, that the man
in fault corrects himself by shortening or lengthening
the step, by degrees, almost insensible.
328. The instructor will labor to cause recruits to
comprehend that the alignment can only be preserved,
in marching, by the regularity of the step, the touch
of the elbow, and the maintenance of the shoulders
in a square with the line of direction; that if, for example, the step of some be longer than that of others,
or if some march faster than others, a separation of
elbows, and a loss of the alignment, would be inevitable ; that if (it being required that the head should
be direct to the front) they do not strictly observe
the touch of elbows, it would be impossible for an individual to judge whether he marches abreast with
6

60

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART III.

his neighbor, or not, and whether there be not an in*
terval between them.
329. The impulsion of the quick step having a tendency to make men too easy and free in their movements, the instructor will be careful to regulate the
cadence of this step, and to habituate them to preserve always the erectness of the body, and the due
length of the pace.
330. The men being well established in the principles of the direct march, the instructor will exercise
them in marching obliquely. The rank being in
march, the instructor will command:
1. Right (or left) oblique. 2. MARCH.
331. At the second command, each man will make
a half face to the right (or left), and will then march
straight forward in the new direction. As the men
no longer touch elbows, they will glance along the
shoulders of the nearest files, towards the side to
which they are obliquing, and will regulate their
steps so that the shoulders shall always be behind
that of their next neighbor on that side, and that
his head shall conceal the heads of the other men in
the rank. Besides this, the men should preserve the
same length of pace, and the same degree of obliquity
382. The instructor wishing to resume the primitive
direction, will command:
1. Forward.

2. MARCH.

333. At the second command, each man will make
a half face to the left (or right), and all will then
march straight to the front, conforming to the principles of the direct march.
To march to the front in double quick time.
334. When the several principles, heretofore explained, have beccme familiar to the recruits, and

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART I I I .

61

fhey shall be well established in t h e position of the
body, the bearing of arms, and the mechanism,
length, an<? swiftness of the step, t h e i n s t r u c t o r will
pass them from quick to double quick time, a n d t h e
reverse, observing not to make them m a r c h obliquely
in double quick time, till they are well established i a
the cadence of this step.
335. The ^quad b e i n g at a m a r c h in quick time,
the instructor will c o m m a n d :
1. Double quick.

2. M A R C H .

336. At the command march, which will be given
when either foot is coming to the ground, the s q u a d
will step off n r double quick time. The men will endeavor to follow the principles laid down in the first
p a r t of this book, and to preserve the alignment.
337. When t h e instructor wishes the squad to r e sume the step in quick time, h e will c o m m a n d :
1. Quick time.

2. M A R C H .

338. At the command march, which will be given
when either foot is coming to t h e ground, t h e s q u a d
will retake the step in quick time.
339. The squad being in m a r c h , the i n s t r u c t o r will
halt it b y the commands and means prescribed Nos.
98 and 99. The command halt will be given an i n s t a n t
before the foot is ready to be placed on the ground.
340. The s q u a d being in m a r c h in double quick
time, the i n s t r u c t o r will occasionally cause it to m a r k
time by the commands prescribed No. 240. The m e n
will then m a r k double quick time, without altering
the cadence of the step. He will also cause them to
pass from the direct to the oblique step, a n d r e c i p r o cally, conforming to w h a t h a s been prescribed No.
330, and following.
341. The squad being at a halt, t h e i n s t r u c t o r will
cause it to march in double quick time, b y preceding
the command march, by double quick.

62

SCHOOL OP THE SOLDIER—PART I I I .

342. The instructor will endeavor to regulate well
the cadence of this step.
To face about in marching.
343. If the squad be marching in quick, or double
quick time, and the instructor should wish to march
it in retreat, he will command:
1. Squad right about. 2. MARCH.
344. At the command march, which will be given
at the instant the left foot is coming to the ground,
the recruit will bring this foot to the ground, and,
turning on it, will face to the rear; he will then place
the right foot in the new direction, arid step off with
the left foot.
To march backwards.
345. The squad being at a halt, if the instructor
should wish to march it in the back step, he will
command:
1. Squad backward. 2. Guide left (or right). 3. MARCH.
346. The back step will be executed by the means
prescribed No. 247.
347. The instructor, in this step, will be watchful
that the men do not lean on each other.
348. As the march to the front in quick time
should only be.executed at shouldered arms, the instructor, in order not to fatigue the men too much,
and also to prevent negligence in gait and position,
will halt the squad from time to time, and cause arms
to be ordered.
349. In marching at double quick time, the men will
always carry their pieces on the right shoulder, or at a
trail. This rule is general.
350. If the instructor shall wish the pieces carried
at a trail, he will give the command trail arms, before
the command double quick. If, on the contrary, this

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PAET I I I .

63

command be not given, the men will shift their pieces
to the right shoulder at the command double quick.
In either case, at the command halt, the men will
bring their pieces to the position of shoulder arms.
This rule is general.
LESSON III.

The inarch by the flank.
851. The rank being at a halt, and correctly
aligned, the instructor will command:
1. Squad, right—FAPE.

2. Forward.

3. MARCH.

352. At the last part of the first command, the
rank will face to the right; the even numbered men,
after facing to the right, will step quickly to the
right side of the odd numbered men, the latter standing fast, so that when the movement is executed, the
men will be formed into files of two men abreast.
353. At the third command, the squad will step off
smartly with the left foot; the files keeping aligned,
and preserving their intervals.
354. The march by the left flank will be executed
by the same commands, substituting the word left
for right, and by inverse means; in this case, the
even numbered men, after facing to the left, will
stand fast, and the odd numbered will place themselves on their left.
355. The instructor will place a well-instructed
soldierly the side of the recruit who is at the head
of the rank, to regulate the step, and to conduct him;
and it will be enjoined on this recruit to march always
elbow to elbow with the soldier.
856. The instructor will cause to be observed in
the march, by the flank, the following rules:
That the step be executed according to the principled pre*
scribed for the direct step ;

Because these principles, without which men,

64

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART III.

placed elbow to elbow, in the same rank, <%annot
preserve unity and harmony of movement, are of a
more necessary observance in marching in file.
That the head of the man who immediately precedes, covert
the heads of all who are in front;
Because it is the most certain rule by which each
man may maintain himself in the exact line of the
file.
357. The instructor will place himself habitually
five or six paces on the flank of the rank marching
in file, to watch over the execution of the principles
prescribed above. He will also place himself sometimes in its rear, halt, and suffer it to pass fifteen or
twenty paces, the better to see whether the men cover
each other accurately.
358. When he shall wish to halt the rank, marching by the flank, and to cause it to face to the front,
he will command:
1. Squad.

2. HALT.

3. FRONT.

359. At the second command, the rank will halt,
and afterwards no man will stir, although he may
have lost his distance. This prohibition is necessary,
to habituate the men to a constant preservation of
their distances.
360. At the third command, each man will front
by facing to the left, if marching by the right flank,
and by a face to the right, if marching by the left
flank. The rear rank men will at the same time move
quickly into their places, so as to form the squad
again into one rank.
361. When the men have become accustomed to
marching by the flank, the instructor will cause
them to change direction by file; for this purpose,
he will command:

SCHOOL OP THE SOLDIER—PART III.

65

I. By file left (or right). 2. MABOH.
362. At the command march, the first file will
change direction to the left (or right) in describing
a small arc of a circle, and will then march straight
forward; the two men of this file, in wheeling, will
keep up the touch of the elbows, and the man on the
side to which the wheel is made, will shorten the first
three or four steps. Each file will come successively
to wheel on the same spot where that which preceded
it wheeled.
363. The instructor will also cause the squad to
face by the right or left flank in marching, and for
this purpose will command:
1. Squad by the right (or left) flank. 2. MARCH.
364. At the second command, which will be given
a little before either foot comes to the ground, the
recruits will turn the body, plant the foot that is
raised in the new direction, and step off with the
other foot without altering the cadence of the step;
the men will double or undouble rapidly.
365. If, in facing by the right or the left flank,
the squad should face to the rear, the men will come
into one rank, agreeably to the principles indicated
No. 360. It is to be remarked that it is the men who
are in rear who always move up to form into single
rank, and in such manner as never to invert the order
of the numbers in the rank.
366. If, when the squad has been faced to the rear,
the instructor should cause it to face by the left flank,
it is the even numbers who will double by moving to
the left of the odd numbers; but if by the right flank,
it is the odd numbers who will double to the right of
the even numbers.
867. This lesson, like the preceding one, will be
practised with pieces at a shoulder; but the instructor may, to give relief by change, occasionally
5

66

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART III.

order support arms, and he will require of the recruits
marching in this position, as much regularity as in
the former.
The march by the flank in double quick time.
368. The principles of the march by the flank ia
double quick time, are the same as in quick time.
The instructor will give the commands prescribed
No. 351, taking care always to give the command
double quick before that of march.
369. He will pay the greatest attention to the cadence of the step.
370. The instructor will cause the change of direction, and the march by the flank, to be executed in
double quick time, by the same commands, and according to the same principles, as in quick time.
371. The instructor will cause the pieces to be carried either on the right shoulder or at a trail.
372. The instructor will sometimes march the
squad by the flank, without doubling the files.
373. The principles of this march are the same as
in two ranks, and it will always be executed in quick
time.
374. The instructor will give the commands prescribed No. 351, but he will be careful to caution the
squad not to double files.
375. The instructor will be watchful that the men
do not bend their knees unequally, which would cause
them to tread on the heels of the men in front, and
also to lose the cadence of the step and their distances.
376. The various movements in this lesson will be
executed in single rank. In the changes of direction, the leading man will change direction without
altering the length or the cadence of the step. The
instructor will recall to the attention of the men, that
in facing by the right or left flank in marching they
will not double, t u t march in one rank.

SCHOOL OP THE SOLDIER—PART III.

67

LESSON IV.

WHEELINGS.
General principles of Wheeling.
377. Wheelings are of two kinds: from halts,
or on fixed pivots, and in march, or on movable
pivots.
378. Wheeling on a fixed pivot takes place in passing a corps from the order in battle to the order in
column, or from the latter to the former.
379. Wheels in marching take place in changes of
direction in column, as often as this movement is
executed to the side opposite to the guide.
380. In wheels from a halt, the pivot-man onlyturns in his place, without advancing or receding.
381. In the wheels in marching, the pivot takes
steps of nine or eleven inches, according as the squad
is marching in quick or double quick time, so as to
clear the wheeling point, which is necessary, in order
that the subdivisions of a column may change direction without losing their distances, as will be explained in the school of the company.
382. The man on the wheeling flank will take the
full step of twenty-eight inches, or thirty-three
inches, according to the gait.
Wheeling from a halt, or on a fixed pivot.
383. The rank being at a halt, the instructor will
place a well-instructed man on the wheeling flank to
conduct it, and then command:
1. By squad, right wheel. 2. MARCH.
384. At the second command, the rank will step
off with the left foot, turning at the same time the
head a little to the left, the eyes fixed on the line of
the eyes of the men to their left; the pivot-man will
merely mark time in gradually turning his body, in

68

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART III.

order to confoim himself to the movement of the
marching flank; the man who conducts this flank
will take steps of twenty-eight inches, and from the
first step advance a little the left shoulder, cast his
eyes from time to time along the rank, and feel constantly the elbow of the next man lightly, but never
push him.
885. The other men will feel lightly the elbow of
the next man towards the pivot, resist pressure
coming from the opposite side, and each will conform
himself to the marching flank—shortening his step
according to his approximation to the pivot.
386. The instructor will make the rank wheel
round the circle once or twice before halting, in order
to cause the principles to be the better understood,
and he will be watchful that the centre does not
break.
387. He will cause the wheel to the left to be executed according to the same principles.
388. When the instructor shall wish to arrest the
wheel, he will command:
1. Squad.

2. HALT.

889. At the second command, the rank will halt,
and no man stir. The instructor, going to the flank
opposite the pivot, will place the two outer men of
that flank in the direction he may wish to give to the
rank, without however displacing the pivot, who will
conform the line of his shoulders to this direction.
The instructor will take care to have between these
two men, and the pivot, only the space necessary to
contain the other men. He will then command:
Left (or right)—DRESS.
390. At this, the rank will place itself on the alignment of the two men established as the basis, in conformity with the principles prescribed.

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART III*

69

301. The instructor will next command FRONT^
Which will be executed as prescribed No. 314.
Remarks on the principles of the wheel from a halt.
392. Turn a little the head toioards the marching
flank,
and fix the eyes on the line of the eyes of the men who
are on that side ;

Because, otherwise, it would be impossible for each
man to regulate the length of his step so as to conform his own movement to that of the marching
flank.
Touch lightly the elbow of the next man toioards the pivot;

In order that the files may not open out in the
wheel.
Resist pressure that comes from the side of the

marching

flank ;
Because, if this principle be neglected, the pivot,
which ought to be a fixed point, in wheels from a
halt, might be pushed out of its place by pressure.
Wheeling in marching, or on a movable pivot.
393. When the recruits have been brought to execute well the wheel from a halt, they will be taught
to wheel in marching.
394. To this end, the rank being in march, when
the instructor shall wish to cause it to change direction to the reverse flank (to the side opposite to the
guide or pivot flank), he will command:
1. Right (or left) wheel. 2. MARCH.
395. The first command will be given when the
rank is yzifour paces from the wheeling point.
396. At the second command, the wheel will be
executed in the same manner as from a halt, except
that the touch of the elbow will remain towards the
marching flank (or side of the guide) instead of tho

70

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART III.

ni&e, of the actual pivot; that the pivot-man, instead
of merely turning in his place, will conform himself
to the movement of the marching flank, feel lightly
the elbow of the next man, take steps of full nine
inches, and thus gain ground forward in describing
a small .curve so as to clear the point of the wheel.
The middle of the rank will bend slightly to the rear.
As soon as the movement shall commence, the man
who conducts the marching flank will cast his eyes
on the ground over which he will have to pass.
397. The wheel being ended, the instructor will
eommand:
1. Forward.

2. MARCH.

398. The first command will be pronounced when
four paces are yet required to complete the change of
direction.
399. At the command march, which will be given
at the instant of completing the wheel, the man
who conducts the marching flank will direct himself
straight forward; the pivot-man and all the rank will
retake the step of twenty-eight inches, and bring the
head direct to the front.
Turning, or change of direction to the side of the guide.
400. The change of direction to the side of the
guide, in marching, will be executed as follows: The
instructor will command:
1. Left (or right) turn. 2. MARCH. ,
401. The first command will be given when the rank
is jet four paces from the turning point.
402. At the command march, to be pronounced at
the instant the rank ought to turn, the guide will face
to the left (or right) in marching, and move forward
in the new direction without slackening or quickening
the cadence, and without shortening or lengthening
the step. The whole rank will promptly conform

SCHOOL OP THE SOL.DIER—PART III.

71

itself to the new direction: to effect which, each man
Will advance the shoulder opposite to the guide, take
the double quick step, to carry himself in the new
direction, turn the head and eyes to the side of the
guide, and retake the touch of the elbow on that side,
in placing himself on the alignment of the guide,
from whom he will take the step, and then resume
the direct position of the head. Each man will thus
arrive successively on the alignment.
Wheeling and changing direction to the side of tho
guide, in double quick time.
403. When the recruits comprehend and execute
well, in quick time, the wheels at a halt and in marching, and the change of direction to the side of the
guide, the instructor will cause the same movements
to be repeated in double quick time.
404. These various movements will be executed by
the same commands and according to the same principles as in quick time, except that the command
double quick will precede that of march. In wheeling
while marching, the pivot-man will take steps of
eleven inches, and in the changes of direction to the
side of the guide, the men on the side opposite the
guide must increase the gait in order to bring themselves into line.
405. The instructor, in order not to fatigue the
recruits, and not to divide their attention, will cause
them to execute the several movemelits of which this
lesson is composed, first without arms, and next, after
the mechanism be well comprehended, with arms.
LESSON V.

Long marches in double quick time and the run.
406. The instructor will cause to be resumed the
exercises in double quick time and the run, with
arms and knapsacks.

72

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART Iir.

407. He will cause long marches to be executed in
double quick time, both by the front and by the flank,
and by constant practice will lead the men to pass
oyer a distance of five miles in sixty minutes. The
pieces will be carried on either shoulder, and sometimes at a trail.
408. He will also exercise them in long marches at
a run, the pieces carried at will; the men will be instructed to keep as united as possible, without however exacting much regularity, which is impracticable.
409. The run, in actual service, will only be resorted to when it may be highly important to reach a
given point with great promptitude.
To stack arms.
The men being at order arms, the instructor will
command:
Stack—ARMS.
410. At this command, the front rank man of every
even numbered file will pass his piece before him,
seizing it with the left hand near the upper band;
will place the butt a little in advance of his left toe,
the barrel turned towards the body, and draw the
rammer slightly from its place; the front rank man
of every odd numbered file will also draw the rammer
slightly, and pass his piece to the man next on his
left, who will seize it with the right hand near the
upper band, and place the butt a little in advance of
the right toe of the man next on his right, the barrel
turned to the front; he will then cross the rammers
of the two pieces, the rammer of the piece of the odd
numbered man being inside; the rear rank man of
every even file will also draw his rammer, lean his
piece forward, the lock-plate downwards, advance
the right foot about six inches, and insert the ramme?
between the rammer and barrel of the piece of his
front'rank man; with his left hand he will place the

72

STACK ARMS (No. 410).

PI 16$.

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART III.

73

butt of his piece on the ground, thirty-two inches in
rear of, and perpendicular to, the front rank, bringing back his right foot by the side of the left; the
front rank man of every even file will at the same
time lean the stack to the rear, quit it with his right
hand, and force all the rammers down. The stack
being thus formed, the rear rank man of every odd
file will pass his piece into his left hand, the barrel to
the front, and inclining it forward, will rest it on the
stack.
411. The men of both ranks having taken the position of the soldier without arms, the instructor will
command:
1. Break ranks. 2. MARCH.
To resume arms.
412. Both ranks being re-formed in rear of their
stacks, the instructor will command:
Take—ARMS.

413. At this command, the rear rank man of every
odd numbered file will withdraw his piece from the
stack; the front rank man of every even file will seize
his own piece with the left hand and that of the man
on his right with his right hand, both above the
lower band ; the rear rank man of the even file will
seize his piece with the right hand below the lower
band; these two men will raise up the stack to
loosen the rammers; the front rank man of every odd
file will facilitate the disengagement of the rammers,
if necessary, by drawing them out slightly with the
left hand, and will receive his piece from the hand
of the man next on his left; the four men will retake
the position of the soldier at order arms.

74

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART I I I .

MANUAL OF ARMS FOR THE MUSKET.
414. THIS manual differs in so many respects from
that of the rifle and rifle musket that it becomes
necessary to specify it for the use of infantry troops
armed with the percussion-lock musket.
Shoulder—ARMS .
415. The piece is held in the left hand, the arm
being a \ery little bent, the elbow close to the body,
the butt of the musket grasped in the palm of the
hand, the heel of the butt between the fore-finger
and the middle finger; the thumb on the front screw
of the butt-plate, the butt kept well back, so that the
piece shall appear perpendicular when seen from the
front, and not to be moved from its position by the
movement of the thighs in marching ; tne stock, below the tail band, lying in the hollow of the shoulder ; the right arm hanging naturally at the right
side.
416. Care should be taken by the instructor that
the recruit acquires this position of the musket correctly and maintains it in marching, as it is the position from which most others are taken and to which
the soldier must constantly return.
Support—ARMS.
One time and three motions.
417. (First motion.) "With the right hand seize the
Bmall of the stock four inches below the lock, slightly
raising but not turning the piece.

74

SHOULDER, ARMS (HQ. 415),

PI, 17.

Shoulder Arms, side view:

7

75

SUPPORT ARMS
(No. 4 1 7 \

PL 18.

P R E S E N T ARMS
(No. 424).

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART I I I .

75

413. {Second motion.) Take the left hand from the
butt, extend the left fore-arm under the cock upwards
across the breast, the hand flat on the right breast.
419. [Third motion.) Drop the right arm to its place
at the side.
420. The movement to return to the position of
shouldered arms from that of support arms is always:
Carry—ARMS.
One time and three motions.
421. (First motion.) Carry the right hand to the
small of the stock.
(Second motion.) Place the left hand under the butt
as before.
(Third motion.) Let the right hand fall to the side,
and lower the piece slightly to the position of shouldered arms.
422. Note.-—The command Carry arms is only given
when coming from the support to the position of
shouldered arms. In every other case th'e command
is Shoulder arms.
423. The piece being at the shoulder, the next
command of the instructor is:
Present—ARMS.
One time and tivo motions.
424. (First motion.) Turn the piece with the left hand,
the lock out, and seize the small of the stock with the
right hand, the piece kept vertical and detached from
the body, the left hand remaining under the butt.
425. (Second motion.) Bring the piece erect before the
centre of the body, turning it inwards, the rammer
being brought to the front, the right hand close under
the guard. Seize the piece at the same time with the
left hand above the lock, the thumb extended along
the barrel, the left fore-arm resting on the body, and
the hand as high as the elbow.
426. To return to the position of shouldered arms,
the instructor will c o m m i t :

76

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART III.
Shoulder—ARM

S.

One time and two motions.
427. [First motion.) T u r n the piece with t h e r i g h t
hand, the b a r r e l to the front, raise and keep it against
t h e left'shoulder with the right h a n d ; place the left
u n d e r t h e b u t t , the r i g h t h a n d simply resting on the
small of the stock without grasping it.
428. [Secondmotion.) Drop the r i g h t h a n d to the side.
Order—ARMS.
One time and two motions,
429. (First motion.) E x t e n d the left arm so as to
lower the piece, and seize it with the r i g h t h a n d j u s t
above the tail band. Let go witJi the left h a n d , and
c a r r y the piece, kept vertical, to the right side, the
r a m m e r to the front, the little tinger behind the b a r r e l ,
t h e r i g h t hand against the hip, the b u t t of the piece
t h r e e inches from the ground, the piece vertical, the
left hand hanging by the side.
430. (Second motion.) Let the piece slip t h r o u g h t h e
r i g h t h a n d without shock to the ground, so t h a t t h e
b u t t will be on a line with the toes; at once drop t h e
a r m so t h a t t h e b a r r e l may be held by the t h u m b and
extended fore-finger, the muzzle of t h e piece b e i n g
about two inches from the r i g h t shoulder.
481. To resume t h e position of shouldered a r m s ,
ttie command of the i n s t r u c t o r will b e :
Shoulder—ARMS.
One time and two motions.
432. (First motion.) Raise the piece with the r i g h t
nand, and carry i t u p , k e p t vertical;- to t h e left
shoulder, turning it in t h e passage so as to b r i n g t h e
b a r r e l to the front; place t h e left h a n d u n d e r t h e
butt, and slip the r i g h t h a n d down to t h e lock.
433. (Second motion.) Let t h e r i g h t h a n d fall to t h e
Bide.

76

C H A R G E B A Y O N E T (No. 434

PI. 19.

ORDER

ARMS (No. 429).

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART I I I .

77

Charge—BAYONE T.
One time and two motions.
434. {First motion.) Make a half face to the right, and
take the position of the first motion in about face. Turn
the piece with the left hand, the lock outwards, and
seize the small of the stock with the right hand, the
piece being kept vertical and slightly detached from
the shoulder; the left hand remaining under the butt.
435. (Second motion.) Detach the left hand, bringing
down the piece with the right, so that the left hand
may seize it a little above the tail band, the barrel up,
the left elbow near the body, the right hand against
the hip, the point of the bayonet as high as the eye.
436. To resume the position of shouldered arms,
the command i s :
Shoulder—ARMS.
One time and tioo motions,
437. (First motion.) Face to the front by turning
on the left heel and bringing the right foot alongside ; spring the piece up to the left shoulder with
the right hand, and place the left under the butt as
heretofore prescribed.
438. (Second motion.) Drop the right hand to the side.
Loading and Firing.
439. In order to instruct recruits in the details of
loading and firing their pieces, the first command of
the instructor i s :
Load in ten times—LOAD.
One time and two motions.
440. (First motion.) Extend the left arm to its full
length, seize the piece with the right hand just above
the lower band, carry the right foot forward, placing

78

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART III.

its heel against the hollow of the left, but without
altering the position of the body.
441. {Second motion.) With the right hand carry the
piece directly downwards along the left thigh, seizing
it with the left hand above the right, and letting the
butt come to the ground without shock, so that the
piece shall touch the left thigh; the muzzle opposite
the centre of the body. Then carry the right hand
quickly to the cartridge box and open it.
2. Handle—CARTRIDGE.

One time and one motion.
442. Take the cartridge in the thumb and first two
fingers, and place the end of it in the teeth.
3. Tear—CARTRIDGE.

One time and one motion.
443. Tear the end of the cartridge down to the
powder, then hold it upright, and place it in front
of and near the muzzle, the back of the hand to the
front.
4. Charge—CARTRIDGE.

One time and one motion.
444. Turn the back of the right hand towards the
body, in order to discharge the powder into the
barrel, raise the elbow as high as the wrist, shake
the cartridge and insert it fully into the muzzle; leave
the hand reversed, the fingers closed, but the hand
extended.
5.

Draw—RAMMER.

One time and three motions.
445. {First motion.) Drop the right elbow, and seize
the rammer between the thumb and fore-finger bent,
the other fingers being closed; draw the rammer, extending the arm; seize it again at the middle between

78

LOAD (No. 441).

PL 20,

CHARGE C A R T R I D G E
(No. 444).

SCHOOL OJP THE SOLDIER—PART l i t .

79

the thumb and fore-finger, the hand reversed, the palm
to the front, the nails u p ; then clear the rammer entirely by again extending the arm.
446. (Second motion.) Turn the rammer between the
bayonet and the face, the rammer parallel to the
bayonet, the arm extended, the butt of the rammer
near the muzzle, but not inserted.
447. (Third motion.) Insert the rammer, and force
it down as low as the hand.
6.

Ram—CARTRIDGE.

One time and one motion.
448. Extend the arm to its full length, seizing the
rammer between the right thumb extended and the
fore-finger bent, the other fingers closed; ram the
cartridge home twice with force, then seize the rammer at the little end, between the thumb and forefinger bent, the other fingers being closed, and the
right elbow touching the body.
7. Return—RAMMER.

One time and three motions.
449. (First motion.) Draw the rammer, re-seize it at
the middle between the thumb and fore-finger, the
palm of the hand to the front, the nails up, then clear
liie rammer from the barrel by extending the arm.
450. (Second motion.) Turn the rammer between the
bayonet and the face, closing the fingers, the rammer
parallel to the bayonet, the arm extended, the little
end of the rammer near the first pipe, but not inserted.
451. (Thirdmotion.) Insert the rammer, and, with
the thumb, which will follow the movement, force it
as low as the middle band. Then raise the hand,
place the little finger on the butt of tbe rammer and
force it down, at the same time lowering the left hand
on the barrel to the extent of the arm, without de •
pressing the shoulder.

80

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART III.

8. Cast—ABOUT.

One time and two motions.
452. (First motion.) Bring up the piece vertically
to the left shoulder with the left hand, seize it with
the right hand at the small of the stock, and slide the
left hand down as low as the chin.
453. [Second motion.) Make a half face to the right
as in about face, except that the hollow of the right
foot is close against the left heel, instead of three
inches to the rear; carry the piece opposite the right
shoulder; with the right hand bring it down into the
left, seize it with the left at the tail band, the thumb
extended on the stock, the butt under the right forearm, the small of the stock against the body, the
right hand grasping the small of the stock, the muzzle
as high as the eye.
9. PRIME.

One time and one motion.
454. Half-cock the piece with the thumb of the
right hand, keeping the piece in its place with the
left; displace the old cap, and, with the thumb and
first two fingers of the right hand, take a cap from
the pouch, place it upon the cone, push it down with
the thumb, and then seize the piece by the small of
the stock.
10. Shoulder—ARMS.
One time and two motions.
455. This command is executed precisely as in
coming to shouldered arms from charge bayonet. (437-8.)
The loading being thus accomplished, to proceed
to firing the command of the instructor is:
BEADY.

One time and four motions.
456. [First motion.) Turn the piece with the left

80

PI 21.

P B I M E (No. 454).

READY (from position of Prime).
One time and one motion.
Place the thumb of the right
hand oh the hammer (the fingers
remaining under and against the
guard), cock the piece, and seize
the small of the stock.

B E A D Y (No. 460).

SHOULDER—ARMS (from this position of Ready).
At the command shoulder, support the piece firmly with
the left hand, half-cock the piece, and seize it at the handle
with the right hand. At the word arms, face to the front
and complete the time.

81

PI. 22.

AIM. F R O N T A N D R E A R RA2TK (No. 460>

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART III.

81

hand, bringing the lock to the front, and seize if with
the right at the small of the stock. At the same
time make a half face to the right, turning on the left
heel, bringing the left toe to the front and placing the
right foot behind, at right angles to the left, the hollow
of the right against the heel of the left.
457. (Second motion.) With the right hand bring
the piece, kept vertical, to the centre of the body, the
left hand placed just above the lock, the thumb extended
along the stock, and at the height of the chin, the rammer being turned obliquely to the left and front.
458. (Third motion.) Place the thumb on the head of
the hammer, the fore-finger under and on the guard,
the elbow at the height of the hand.
459. (Fourth motion.) Close the right elbow to the
body in cocking, seize the piece by the small of the
stock with the right hand; let it descend along the
body in the left hand to the tail band, which should
remain at the height of the shoulder.
AIM.

One time and one motion.
460. Raise the butt of the piece to the right
shoulder, at the same time dropping the muzzle, the
left hand remaining at the tail band, the left elbow a
little down ; direct the right eye along the barrel, by
dropping the head upon the butt, shut the left eye,
and place the forefinger upon the trigger.
461. At the command aim, the rear rank man will
also carry his right foot about eight inches to the right,
to enable him to disengage his piece in firing over the
shoulder of the front rank man.
FIBE.

One time and one motion.

462. Without any other movement, pull the trigger

82

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART III.

firmly and without jerking, and remain in that position.
463. After the piece is discharged, the instructor
may desire at once to re-load; or, without loading, to
resume the position of shouldered arms. If the latter
be his wish, the command is :
Shoulder—ARM S .
One time and two motions.
464. (First motion.) Bring back the piece with both
hands to its vertical position, face to the front, the
piece at the left shoulder, and place the left hand
under the butt.
465. (Second motion.) Drop the right hand to its
place.
466. If it be desired to re-load after firing, while in
the position of aim, the instructor will command:
LOAD.

One time and two motions.
467. (First motion.) Bring the piece back with both
hands, depress the butt strongly by extending the
right arm, carry it thus to the left side, the barrel to
the front and opposite the left shoulder, the left hand
with the back turned to the front, and as high as the
chin, the left fore-arm touching the stock. At the
same time, face to the front, and carry the heel of the
right foot against the hollow of the left.
468. (Second motion.) Let go the small of the stock
with the right hand, let the piece descend to the ground
without shock through the left, and take the second
motion of load.
The loading may then proceed by the numbers as
before.
469. "While in the position of aim, before firing, the

SCHOOL OP THE SOLDIER—PART I I I .

83

i n s t r u c t o r may desire to exercise his men b y b r i n g i n g
t h e m back to the position of ready.
To do this the command will b e :
Recover—ARMS

.

470. This is executed precisely as in the m a n u a l for
Che rifle. (184.)
471. The men being in t h e position of r e a d y or
recover arms, if t h e i n s t r u c t o r desire to b r i n g t h e m
to t h a t of shouldered a r m s , t h e command i s :
Shoulder—ARMS.
472. At the word shoulder, t h e r e c r u i t will face to
the front, a n d b r i n g his piece, k e p t vertical, to t h e
centre of the body, the left t h u m b as high as t h e chin,
t h e little finger j a s t above t h e lock. Next, with his
right t h u m b on t h e head of t h e hammer and t h e forefinger on the trigger, he will. carefully half-cock the
piece, and seize the small of the stock with the r i g h t
h a n d . At the command arms, t h e piece is carried to
the r i g h t shoulder in the position of shouldered arms.
473. When a squad has been found to execute t h e
loading in ten times well, t h e y m a y be caused to execute the movement with fewer numbers, hy the command:
Load in four
times—LOAD.
474. (First motion.) At the command load, the recruit will execute the first time of loading (in ten times),
handle cartridge, tear cartridge, a n d charge cartridge.
475. (Second motion.) At the command two, draw
rammer, enter it as far as the hand, and ram twice.
476. (Third motion.) A t t h e command three, return
rammer, cast about, mid prime.
477. (Fourth motion.) At the command four, shoulder
arms.
478. If the wish of t h e instructor be to remove the
8

84

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART I I I .

bayonet while in the position of shouldered arms, hd
gives the command:
Unfix—BAYONET.

One time and three motions.
479. (First motion.) Extend the left arm, seize tha
piece with the right hand just above the tail band.
43O. (Second motion.) Drop the piece with the right
hand along the left thigh, seize it with the left hand
above the right, lengthen out the left arm, rest the
butt on the ground without shock; carry the right
hand to the bayonet, with the thumb lower the clasp
against the stop, and seize the bayonet at the socket
and shank.
481. (Third motion.) Wrest off the bayonet, place it
in the scabbard, and then rest the right little finger
upon the butt of the rammer, lower the left hand
al ng the barrel, extending the arm, without depressing the shoulder.
Shoulder—-ARM 3 .
One time and three motions.
482. {First motion.) Raise the piece with the left
hand along the left side, the hand as high as the chin,
the fore-arm touching the piece, the barrel to the
front; drop the right hand to seize the piece a little
above the handle, the fore-finger touching the hammer, and the thumb on the counter-plate.
483. (Second motion.) Raise the piece with the right
band, place the left under the butt. Bring back the
right heel to the side of the left on the same line;
support the piece with the right hand against the
shoulder, as at shouldered arms, the right hand resting
on, without grasping, the piece.
484. (Third motion.) Let the right hand fall to its

place.

85

S E C U R E ARMS CNe. 4S5)»

PL 23.

T R A I L ARMS (No, 493>4

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—FART III.

85

Secure—ARMS.
One time and two motions.
485. (First motion.) Seize the piece with the right
hand, the thumb on the counter-plate, the fore-linger
against the cock; detach the piece from the shoulder,
the barrel to the front; seize it at the tail band with
the left hand, the thumb extended on the rammer, the
piece erect, opposite the shoulder, the left elbow on
the piece.
486. (Second motion.) Reverse the piece, pass it
under the left arm, the left hand remaining at the
tail band, the thumb on the rammer to prevent it from
sliding out; the little finger on the hip, the right hand
resuming its position at the side.
Shoulder—ARMS.
One time and two motions.
487. (First motion.) Raise the piece carefully with
the left hand, seize the small of the stock with the
right, to support it against the shoulder; quit the hold
of the left hand and place it under the butt.
488. (Second motion.) Let the right hand drop to its
place, at the same time dropping the piece slightly in
the left, so as to take the position of shouldered arms.
Fix—BAYONET.

One time and three motions.
489. (First motion.) The same as in unfix bayonet.
490. (Second motion.) The same as in unfix bayonett
except that instead of carrying the right hand to the
place where the bayonet would be, if fixed, it is carried to the bayonet-scabbard, so as to seize the bayonet by the socket and shank, so that the lower
(now upper) end of the socket shall extend about an
inch above the heel of the palm.
491. (Third motion.) Draw the bayonet from the scabbard, carry and fix it on the muzzle, turning the clasp

86

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER—PART III.

towards the body with the right thumb ; then lower
6he left hand along the barrel, in extending the arm.
Shoulder—ARMS.
492. The same as from unfix bayonet. (482.)
Trail—ARMS.
One time and two motions,
493. (First motion.) As the first motion of order arms.
(429.)
494. (Second motion.) Incline the muzzle slightly to
the front, and the butt to the rear, the butt being
kept about three inches from the ground; the right
hand, supported at the hip, will sustain the piece so
that the rear rank men may not touch the front rank
men with their bayonets.
Shoulder—ARMS .
495. At the word shoulder, bring back the muzzle
so as to make the piece vertical. At the word armsy
bring the piece to the shoulder as prescribed in coming
from the position of order arms. (432.)
Right shoulder shift—ARMS.
One time and one motion.
496. Turn the piece with the left hand, the lock
to the front, seize it at the same time with the right
hand at the handle, place it on the right shoulder,
the left hand not quitting the butt, the muzzle up,
the lock-plate upwards. Keep the piece in this position by placing the right hand on the flat of the butt.
Let the left hand fall to the side.
Shoulder—ARM S .
One time and one motion.
497. Raise the piece by extending the right arm;
seize it with the left hand above the lock, carry it
against the left shoulder, turning the barrel to the
front; the right hand at the small of the stock; plac*

86

KIGHT SHOULDER
S H I F T ARMS CNo. 496\,

PL 24.

I N S P E C T I O N OP
A R M S (No. 50).

SCHOOL OP THE SOLDIER—PART I I I .

87

the left under the butt, and then let the right fall to
its place.
Inspection of—ARMS,
498. From the position of ordered arms, the bayonet being in the scabbard.
One time and three motions.
499. (First motion.) Face to the right once and a
half on the left heel, carrying the right foot perpendicularly to the rear, at right angles with the left and
about six inches from it; seize the piece with the left
hand just above the middle band, incline the muzzle
to the rear without displacing the heel of the butt,
the rammer turned towards the body. Carry the
right hand to the bayonet and seize it, as in the
Second motion of fix bayonet. (490.)
500. (Second motion.) Draw the bayonet from the
scabbard, carry and fix it on the muzzle; then seize
the rammer, draw it as has been explained in loading
in ten times, and let it glide to the bottom of the bore.
501. (Third motion.) Face to the front, seize the
piece with the right hand and retake the position of
ordered arms.
502. The instructor will then inspect as in the
manual for the rifle. (229.)
503. If, instead of inspection of arms, the instructor
simply desires that bayonets should be fixed, he will
command:
Fix—BAYONET.

504. Take the position as in the first motion of in-*
spection of arms, fix the bayonet as explained in part
of the second motion, and face to the front.
505. If the instructor wish, after firing, to know
whether pieces remain undischarged, he will command:

88

SCHOOL OP THE SOLDIER—PART I I I .

Spring—RAMMERS .

506. Which will be executed as in the manual for
the rifle. (284.)
Arms—PORT.

One time and one motion.
507. Throw the piece diagonally across the body,
the lock to the front, seizing it at once with both
hands, the right at the small of the stock, the left at
the tail band, the two thumbs pointing towards the
muzzle, the barrel sloping upwards, and crossing opposite to the point of the left shoulder, the butt proportionally lowered; the palm of the right hand
above, and that of the left under the piece, the nails
of both hands next to the body, to which the elbows
will be closed.
Shoulder—ARMS.
One time and two motions.
508. (First motion.) Bring the piece to the left
shoulder, placing the left hand under the butt.
509. (Second motion.) Drop the right hand to its
place at the side.
510. In order to relieve the soldier from the constraint of any fixed position, the instructor will command:
Arms—AT WILL.

One time and one motion.
511. Carry the piece at pleasure on either shoulder,
or with one or both hands, the muzzle being up.
Shoulder—ARMS .
512. Resume at once the position of shouldered arms.
513. In going through the manual of arms, the instructor will see that the recruit constantly retains
the position of the soldier, which, under the pressure
©f his arms, he is liable to lose.
END OF THE SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER.

88

ABMS POBT (No. 507*

PI 25,

SCHOOL OF TOT? COMPANY/.

89

TITLE T H I R D .
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY.
General Eules and Division of the School of the Company.
1. INSTRUCTION by company will always precede
that by battalion, and the object being to prepare the
soldiers for the higher school, the exercises of detail
by company will be strictly adhered to, as well in respect to principles, as the order of progression herein
prescribed.
2. There will be attached to a company undergoing
elementary instruction, a captain, a covering sergeant,
and a certain number of file closers, the whole posted
in the manner indicated, Title First, and, according
to the same Title, the officer charged with the exercise of such company will herein be denominated the
instructor.
3. The School of the Company will be divided into
six lessons, and each lesson will comprehend five articles, as follows:
LESSON

I.

(1.} To open ranks.
(2.S Alignments in open ranks.
(3. J Manual of arms.
?4:.) To close ranks.
(5.) Alignments, and manual of arms in closed ranks.
LESSON

II.

jfl.) To load in four times and at will*
(2.) To fire by company.

90

SCHOOL OP THE COMPACT.

(3.) To fire by file.
(4.) To fire by rank.
(5.) To fire by the rear rank.
LESSON III.

(1A To march in line of battle.
(2.) To halt the company marching in line of battle,
and to align it.
(3.) Oblique march in line of battle.
(4.) To mark time, to march in double quick time,
and the back step.
(5.) To march in retreat in line of battle.
LESSON IV.

l.J To march by the flank.
2.\ To change direction by file.
3.) To halt the company marching by the flank,
and to fa^e it to the front.
(4.) The company being in march by the flank, to
form it on the right or left by file into line of battle.
(5.) The company marching by the flank, to form
it by company or platoon into line, and cause it to
face to the right and left in marching.
LESSON V.

(1.) To break into column by platoon either at a
halt, or while marching.
2A To march in column.
3.S To change direction.
4.) To halt the column.
! 5.) Being in column by platoon, to form to the right
©r left into line of battle, either at a halt or marching.
LESSON VI.

(1.) To break into platoons, and to re-form the
company.

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY.

91

(2.) To break files to the rear, and to cause them to
re-enter into line.
(8.) To march in column in route, and to execute the
movements incident thereto.
(4.) Countermarch.
(5.) Being in column by p atoon, to form on the
right or left into line of battle.
4. The company will always be formed in two ranks.
The instructor will then cause the files to be numbered, and for this purpose will command:
In each rank—Count Twos.
5. At this command, the men count in each rank,
from right to left, pronouncing in a loud and distinct
voice, in the same tone, without hurry and without
turning the head, one, two, according to the place
which each one occupies. He will also cause the
company to be divided into platoons and sections,
taking care that the first platoon is always composed
of an even number of files.
6. The instructor will be as clear and concise as
possible in his explanations; he will cause faults of
detail to be rectified by the captain, to whom he will
indicate them, if the captain should not have himself observed them; and the instructor will not
otherwise interfere, unless the captain should not
well comprehend, or should badly execute his intentions.
7. Composure, or presence of mind, in him who
commands, and in those who obey, being the first
means of order in a body of troops, the instructor
will labor to habituate the company to this essential
quality, and will himself give tn% example.

92

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY—LESSON I.

LESSON FIRST.
ARTICLE FIRST.

To open ranks.
8. The company being at ordered arms, the ranks
and file closers well aligned, when the instructor
shall wish to cause the ranks to "be opened, he will
direct the left guide to place himself on the left of
the front rank, which being executed, he will command:
1. Attention.

2. Company. 3. Shoulder—ARMS.
4. To the rear open order.
9. At the fourth command, the covering sergeant,
and the left guide, will step off smartly to the rear,
four paces from the front rank, in order to mark the
alignment of the rear rank. They will judge this
distance by the eye, without counting the steps.
10. The instructor will place himself at the same
time on the right flank, in order to observe if these
two non-commissioned officers are on a line parallel
to the front rank, and if necessary, to correct their
positions, which being executed, he will command:
5. MARCH.

11. At this command, the front rank will stand
fast.
12. The rear rank will step to the rear, without
eounting the steps, and will place themselves on
the alignment marked for this rank, conforming to
what is prescribed in the school of the soldier,
No. 321.
13. The covering sergeant will align the rear
rank on the left guide placed to mark the left of
this rank.
14. The file closers will march to the rear at the

SCHOOL OP THE COMPANY-—LESSON" I.

93

same time with the rear rank, and will place them*
selves two paces from this rank when it is aligned.
15. The instructor seeing the rear rank aligned,
will command:
6. FRONT.

16. At this command, the sergeant on the left of
the rear rank will return to his place as a file closer.
17. The rear rank being aligned, the instructor
will direct the captain and the covering sergeant
to observe the men in their respective ranks, and
to correct, if necessary, the positions of persons and
pieces.
ARTICLE SECOND.

Alignments in open ranks.
18. The ranks being open, the instructor will, in
the first exercises, align the ranks, man by man, the
better to inculcate the principles.
19. To effect this, he will cause two or four men
on the right or left of each rank to march two or
three paces forward, and, after having aligned them,
command:
By file right (or left)—DRESS.
20. At this, the men of each rank will move up
successively on the alignment, each man being preceded by his neighbor in the same rank, towards the
basis, by two paces, and having correctly aligned
himself, will cast his eyes to the front.
21. Successive alignments having habituated the
soldiers to dress correctly, the instructor will cause
the ranks to align themselves at once, forward and
backward, sometimes in a direction parallel, and
sometimes in one oblique, to the original direction,
giving, in each case, two or four men to serve as a
basis of alignment to each rank. To effect which,
he will command:
9

94

[SCHOOL OP THE COMPANY—LESSON I .

1. Right (or left)—DRESS.

2. FRONT.

or
1. Right (or left) backward—DRESS.

2. FRONT.

22. Tn oblique alignments, in opened ranks, the
men of the rear rank will not seek to cover their file
leaders, as the sole object of the exercise is to teach
them to align themselves correctly in their respective
ranks, in the different directions.
23. In the several alignments, the captain will
superintend the front rank, and the covering sergeant the rear rank. For this purpose, they will
place themselves on the side by which the ranks are
dressed.
24. In oblique alignments, the men will conform the
line of their shoulders to the new direction of their
rank, and will place themselves on the alignment as
has been prescribed in the school of the soldier, No'.
317 or No. 321, according as the new direction shall
be in front or rear of the original one.
25. At the end of each alignment, the captain and
the covering sergeant will pass along the front of the
ranks to correct the positions of persons and arms.
ARTICLE THIRD.

Manual of Arms.
26. The ranks being open, the instructor will
place himself in a position to see the ranks, and
will command the manual of arms in the following
order:
Present arms.
/Shoulder arms.
Order arms.
Ground arms.
Raise arms.
Shoulder arms
Support arms.
Shoulder arms.
Fix bayonet.
Shoulder arms.
Charge bayonet,
Shoulder arms.

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY—LESION I.

Trail arms.
Unfix bayonet.
Secure arms.

95

Shoulder arms.
Shoulder arms.
Shoulder arms.

Load in nine times.
27. The instructor will take care that the position
of the body, of the feet, and of the piece, be always
exact, and that the times be briskly executed and
close to the person.
ARTICLE FOURTH.

To close ranks.
28. The manual of arms being ended, the instructor
will command:
1. Close order. 2. MARCH.
29. At the command march, the rear rank will
close up in quick time, each man directing himself
on his file leader.
ARTICLE F I F T H .

Alignments, and manual of arms in closed ranks.
30. The ranks being closed, the instructor will
cause to be executed parallel and oblique alignments
by the right and left, forward and backward, observing to place always two or four files to serve am
a basis of alignment. He will give the commands
prescribed, No. 21.
31. In alignments in closed ranks, the captain will
superintend the front rank, and the covering sergeant
the rear rank. They will habituate themselves to
judge the alignment by the lines of the eyes and
shoulders, in casting a glance of the eye along th©
front and rear of the ranks.
32. The moment the captain perceives the greater
number of the front rank aligned, he will command

06

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY—LESSON" I .

FRONT, and rectify, afterwards, if necessary, tha
alignment of the other men by the means prescribed
in the school of the soldier, No. 320. The rear rank
will conform to the alignment of the frori rank, superintended by the covering sergeant.
33. The ranks being steady, the instructor will
place himself on the flank to verify their alignment.
He will also see that each rear rank man covers accurately his file leader.
34. In oblique alignments, the instructor will observe what is prescribed, No. 24.
35. In all alignments, the file closers will preserve
the distance of two paces from the rear rank.
36. The alignments being ended, the instructor will
cause to be executed the manual of arms.
37. The instructor, wishing to rest the men, without deranging the alignment, will first cause arms to
be supported, or ordered, and then command:
In place—REST.
38. At this command, the men will no longer be
constrained to preserve silence or steadiness of position ; but they will always keep one or other heel on
the alignment.
39. If, on the contrary, the instructor should wish
to rest the men without constraining them to preserve
the alignment, he will command :
REST.

40. At which command, the men will not be required to preserve immobility, or to remain in their
places.
41. The instructor may, also, when he shall judge
proper, cause arms to be stacked, which will be exe*
cuted as prescribed, school of the soldier.

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY—LESSON II.

97

LESSON SECOND.
42. The instructor, wishing to pass to the second
lesson, will cause the company to take arms, if stacks
have been formed, and command :
1. Attention. 2. Company. 3. Shoulder—ARMS.
43. The instructor will then cause loadings and
firings to be executed in the following order:
ARTICLE FIRST.

To load in four times and at will.
44. Loading in four times will be commanded and
executed as prescribed in the school of the soldier,
No. 251, and following. The instructor will cause
this exercise to be often repeated, in succession,
before passing to loading at will.
45. Loading at will will be commanded and executed as prescribed in the school of the soldier, No.
256. In priming when loading in four times, and also
at will, the captain and covering sergeant will half
face to the right with the men, and face to the front
when the man next to them, respectively, brings his
piece to the shoulder.
46. The instructor will labor to the utmost to cause
the men, in the diiferent loadings, to execute what has
been prescribed in the school of the soldier, Nos. 257
and 258.
47. Loading at will, being that of battle, and consequently the one with which it is most important to
render the men familiar, it will claim preference in
the exercises the moment the men be well established
in the principles. To these they will be brought by
degrees, so that every man may be able to load with
cartridges, and to fire at least three rounds in a
minute with ease and regularity.

9$

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY-—LESSON I I .
ARTICLE

SECOND,

To fire by company.
48. T h e instructor, wishing to cause t h e fire bf
company to b e executed, will command :
1. Fire by company,

2. Commence firing.

49. At the first command, the captain will promptly
place himself opposite t h e centre of h i s company,
and four paces in rear of the line of file closers: t h e
covering sergeant will retire to t h a t line, a n d place
himself opposite to his interval. This rule is general,
for both the captain and covering sergeant, in all the
different firings.
50. At the second command, t h e captain will a d d :
1. Company,

2. R E A D Y ; 3. A I M ;

4. F I R E ;

5. L O A D .

51. At the command load, t h e men will load their
pieces, a n d then take t h e position of ready, as p r e scribed in the school of t h e soldier.
52. The captain will immediately recommence t h e
firing, by t h e c o m m a n d s :
1.

Company.

2. A I M .

3. F I R E .

4. LOAD.

53. T h e firing will b e t h u s continued until t h e sign a l to cease firing is sounded.
54. T h e captain will sometimes cause aim t o b e
taken to the r i g h t a n d left, simply observing to p r o nounce right (or left) oblique, before t h e command aim.
ARTICLE

THIRD.

The Fire by file.
65. The instructor wishing to cause the fire b y fil
to b e executed, will c o m m a n d :
1. Fire by file. 2 . Company.
3. R E A D Y .
mence firing.

4. Com-

66. The third a n d fourth commands will be exs-

SCHOOL OP THE COMPANY—LESSON I I .

99

6Uted as prescribed in the school of the soldier, No275 and following.
57. The fire will be commenced by the right file
of the company; the next file will take aim at the
instant the first brings down pieces to re-load, and so
on to the left; but this progression will only be observed in the first discharge, after which each man
will re-load and fire without regulating himself by
others, conforming himself to what is prescribed in
the school of the soldier, No. 280.
ARTICLE FOURTH.

The Fire by rank.
58. The instructor wishing the fire by rank to be
executed, will command:
1. Fire by rank.

2. Company. 3. READY.

4. Rear rank—AIM.

5. EIRE.

6. LOAD.

59. The fifth and sixth commands will be executed
as is prescribed in the school of the soldier, No. 285
and following.
60. When the instructor sees one or two pieces in
the rear rank at a ready, he will command:
1. Front rank.

2. AIM.

3. FIRE.

4. LOAD.

61. The firing will be continued thus by alternate
ranks, until the signal is given to cease firing.
62. The instructor will sometimes cause aim to be
taken to the right and left, conforming to what is
prescribed No. 54.
63. The instructor will cause the firing to cease,
whether by company, by file, or by rank, by sounding
the signal to ceasefiring,and at the instant this sound
commences, the men will cease to fire, conforming to
what is prescribed in the school of the soldier, No.
282.
64. The signal to cease firing will be always fol'

100

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY—LESSON II.

lowed by a bugle note; at which sound, the captain
and covering sergeant will promptly resume their
places in line, and will rectify, if necessary, the
alignment of the ranks.
65. In this school, except when powder is used,
the signal to cease firing will be indicated by the command, cease firing, which will be pronounced by the
instructor when he wishes the semblance of firing
to cease.
66. The command posts will be likewise substituted, under similar circumstances, for the bugle note
employed as the signal for the return of the captain
and covering sergeant to their places in line, which
command will be given when the instructor sees the
men have brought their pieces to a shoulder.
67. The fire by file being that which is most frequently used against an enemy, it is highly important that it be rendered perfectly familiar to the
troops. The instructor will, therefore, give it almost
exclusive preference, and labor to cause the men to
aim with care, and always, if possible, at some particular object. As it is of the utmost importance
that the men should aim with precision in battle, this
principle will be rigidly enforced in the exercises for
purposes of instruction.
ARTICLE F I F T H .

To Fire by the rear rank.
68. The instructor will cause the several fires to
be executed to the rear, that is, by the rear rank. To
effect this, he will command:
1. Face by the rear rank.

2. Company. 3. About-"

FACE.

69. At the first command, the captain will step out
and place himself near to, and facing the right file
of his company; the covering sergeant, and file

SCHOOL OP THE COMPANY—LESSON I I .

101

closers, will pass quickly through the captain's interval, and place themselves faced to the rear, the
covering sergeant a pace behind the captain, and the
file closers two paces from the front rank opposite
to their places in line, each passing behind the covering sergeant.
70. At the third command, which will be given
at the instant the last file closer shall have passed
through the interval, the company will face about;
the captain will place himself in his interval in the
rear rank, now become the front, and the covering
sergeant will cover him in the front rank, now become the rear.
71. The company having faced by the rear rank,
Ihe instructor will cause it to execute the fire by
company, both direct and oblique, the fire by file,
and the fire by rank, by the commands and means
prescribed in the three preceding articles; the captain, covering sergeant, and the men will conform
themselves, in like manner, to what is therein prescribed.
72. The fire by file will commence on the left of
the company, now become the right. In the fire by
rank, the firing will commence with the front rank,
now become the rear.
73. To resume the proper front, the instructor will
command:
1. Face by the front rank. 2. Company. 3. About—
FACE.

74. At the first command, the captain, covering
sergeant and file closers will conform to what is
prescribed Nos. 69 and 70.
75. At the third command, the company having
faced about, the captain and covering sergeant will
resume their places in line.
76. In this lesson, the instructor will impress on
the men the importance of aiming always at some

102

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY—LESSON II.

particular object, and of holding the piece as proscribed in the school of the soldier, No. 178.
77. The instructor will recommend to the captain
to make a short pause between the commands aim
and fire, to give the men time to aim with accuracy.
78. The instructor will place himself in position
to see the two ranks, in order to detect faults; he
will charge the captain and file closers to be equally
watchful, and to report to him when the ranks are
at rest. He will remand, for individual instruction,
the men who may be observed to load badly.
79. The instructor will recommend to the soldiers,
in the firings, the highest degree of composure or
presence of mind; he will neglect nothing that may
contribute to this end.
80. He will give to the men, as a general principley
to maintain, in the direct fire, the left heel in its place,
in order that the alignment of the ranks and files may
not be deranged; and he will verify, by examination,
after each exercise in firing, the observance of this
principle.
81. The instructor will observe, in addition to these
remarks, all those which follow.
82. When the firing is executed with cartridges, it
is particularly recommended that the men observe, in
uncocking, whether smoke escapes from the tube,
which is a certain indication that the piece has been
discharged; but if, on the contrary, no smoke escapes,
the soldier, in such case, instead of re-loading, will
pick and prime again. If, believing the load to be
discharged, the soldier should put a second cartridge
in his piece, he ought, at least, to perceive it in ramming, by the height of the load; and he would be
very culpable, should he put in a third. The instructor will always cause arms to be inspected after
firing with cartridges, in order to observe if the fault
has been committed, of putting three cartridges, with-

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY—LESSOtf III.

103

out a discharge, in the same piece, in which case the
ball screw will be applied.
83. It sometimes,happens, when a cap has missed
fire, that the tube is found stopped up with a hard,
white, and compact powder; in this case, picking
will be dispensed with, and a new cap substituted
for the old one.

LESSON THIRD.
ARTICLE FIRST.

To advance in line of battle.
84. The company being in line of battle, and correctly aligned, when the instructor shall wish to exercise it in marching by the front, he will assure himself that the shoulders of the captain and covering
sergeant are perfectly in the direction of their respective ranks, and that the sergeant accurately
covers the captain; the instructor will then place
himself twenty-five or thirty paces in front of them,
face to the rear, and place himself exactly on the prolongation of the line passing between their heels.
85. The instructor, being aligned on the directing
file, will command :
1. Company, forward.
86. At this, a sergeant, previously designated, will
move six paces in advance of the captain: the instructor, from the position prescribed, will correctly
align this sergeant on the prolongation of the directing file.
87. This advanced sergdant, who is to be charged
with the direction, will, the moment his position is
assured, take two points on the ground in the straight
line which would pass between his own and the heela
of the instructor.

104

SCHOOL OP THE COMPANY—LESSON III.

88. These dispositions being made, the instructor
will step aside, and command:
2. MARCH.

89. At this, the company will step off with life.
The directing sergeant will observe, with the greatest
precision, the length and cadence of the step, marching on the two points he has chosen ; he will take in
succession, and always a little before arriving at the
point nearest to him, new points in advance, exactly
in the same line with the first two, and at the distance
of some fifteen or twenty paces from each other. The
captain will march steadily in the trace of the directing
sergeant, keeping always six paces from him; the men
will each maintain the head direct to the front, feel
lightly the elbow of his neighbor on the side of direction, and conform himself to the principles prescribed,
school of the soldier, for the march by the front.
90. The man next to the captain will take special
care not to pass him; to this end, he will keep the
line of his shoulders a little in the rear, but in the
same direction with those of the captain.
91. The file closers will march at the habitual distance of two paces behind the rear rank.
92. If the men lose the step, the instructor will
command:
To the—STEP.

93. At this command, the men will glance towards
the directing sergeant, retake the step from him, and
again direct their eyes to the front,
94. The instructor will cause the captain and covering sergeant to be posted sometimes on the right, and
sometimes on the left of the company.
95. The directing sergeant, in advance, having the
greatest influence on the march of the company, he
will be selected for the precision of his step, his habit
of maintaining his shoulders in a square with a given

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY-—LESSON IIJE.

105

line of direction, and of prolonging that line without
variation.
96. If this sergeant should fail to observe these
principles, undulations in the front of the company
must necessarily follow; the men will be unable to
contract the habit of taking steps equal in length and
swiftness, and of maintaining their shoulders in a
square with the line of direction—the only means of
attaining perfection in the march in line.
97. The instructor, with a view the better to establish the men in the length and cadence of the step,
and in the principles of the march in line, will cause
the company to advance three or four hundred paces,
at once, without halting, if the ground will permit.
In the first exercises, he will march the company with
open ranks, the better to observe the two ranks.
98. The instructor will see, with care, that all the
principles of the march in line are strictly observed;
he will generally be on the directing flank, in a position to observe the two ranks, and the faults they may
commit; he will sometimes halt behind the directing
file during some thirty successive steps, in order to
judge whether the directing sergeant, or the directing
file, deviate from the perpendicular.
ARTICLE SECOND.

To halt the company, marching in line Of battle, and
to align it.
99. The instructor, wishing to halt the company,
will command:
1. Company. 2. HALT.

100. At the second command, the company will
halt; the directing sergeant will remain in advance,
unless ordered to return to the line of file closers*
The company being at a halt, the instructor may

106

SCHOOL OP THE COMPANY—LESSON III.

advance the first three or four files on the side of
direction, and align the company on that basis, or
he may confine himself to causing the alignment
to be rectified. In this last case, he will command:
Captain, rectify the alignment. The captain will
direct the covering sergeant to attend to the rear
rank, when each, glancing his eyes along his rank,
will promptly rectify it, conforming to what is
prescribed in the school of the soldier, No. 320.
ARTICLE T H I R D .

Oblique march in line of battle.
101. The company being in the direct march,
when the instructor shall wish to cause it to march
obliquely, he will command:
Right (or left) oblique. 2. MARCH.
102. At the command march, the company will
take the oblique step. The men will accurately
observe the principles prescribed in the school of the
soldier, No. 331. The rear rank men will preserve
their distances, and march in rear of the man next on
the right (or left) of their habitual file leaders.
103. When the instructor wishes the direct march to
be resumed, he will command:
1. Forward. 2. MARCH.

104. At the command march, the company will
resume the direct march. The instructor will move
briskly twenty paces in front of the captain, and
facing the company, will place himself exactly in the
prolongation of the captain and covering sergeant;
and then, by a sign, will move the directing sergeant
on the same line, if he be not already on i t ; the latter will immediately take two points on the ground

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY—LESSON III.

107

between himself and the instructor, and as he advances,
will take new points of direction, as is explained No.
89.
105. In the oblique march, the men not having the
touch of elbows, the guide will always be on the side
towards which the oblique is made, without any indication to that effect being giVen; and when the direct
march is resumed, the guide will be, equally without
indication, on the side where it was previous to the
oblique.
106. The instructor will, at first, cause the oblique
to be made towards the side of the guide. He will
also direct the captain to have an eye on the directing
sergeant, in order to keep on the same perpendicular
line to the front with him, while following a parallel
direction.
107. During the continuance of the march, the instructor will be watchful that the men follow parallel
directions, in conforming to the principles prescribed
in the school of the soldier, for preserving the general alignment; whenever the men lose the alignment,
he will be careful that they regain it by lengthening
or shortening the step, without altering the cadence,
or changing the direction.
108. The instructor will place himself in front of
the company and face to it, in order to regulate the
march of the directing sergeant, or the man who is
on the flank towards which the oblique is made, and
to see that the principles of the march are properly
observed, and that the files do not crowd.
ARTICLE FOURTH.

To mark time, to march in double quick time, and the
back step.
109. The company being in the direct march and
in quick time, the instructor, to cause it to mark time,
will command:

108

SCHOOL OP THE COMPANY—LESSON III,

1. Mark time. 2. MARCH.
110. To resume the march, he will command:
1. Forward.

2. MARCH.

111. To cause the march in double quick time, the
instructor will command:
1. Double quick. 2. MARCH.
112. The command march will be pronounced at the
instant either foot is coming to the ground.
113. To resume quick time, the instructor will command:
1. Quick time. 2. MARCH.
114. The command march will be pronounced at the
instant either foot is coming to the ground.
115. The company being at a halt, the instructor
may cause it to march in the back step ; to this
eifect, he will command:
1. Company backward. 2. MARCH.
116. The back step will be executed according to
the principles prescribed in the school of the soldier
No. 247, but the use of it being rare, the instructor
will not cause more than fifteen or twenty steps to be
taken in succession, and to that extent but seldom.
117. The instructor ought not to exercise the company in marching in double quick time till the men
are well established in the length and swiftness of the
pace in quick time: he will then endeavor to render
the march of one hundred and sixty-five steps in the
minute equally easy and familiar, and also cause
them to observe the same erectness of body and composure of mind as if marching in quick time.
118. When marching in double quick time, if a
subdivision (in a column) has to change direction by
turning, or has to form into line, the men will quickea

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY—LESSON I I I .

109

the pace to one hundred and eighty steps in a minute.
The same swiftness of step will be observed under all
circumstances where great rapidity of movement is
required. But, as ranks of men cannot march any
length of time at so swift a rate, without breaking
or confusion, this acceleration will not be considered
a prescribed exercise, and accordingly companies or
battalions will only be habitually exercised in the
double quick time of one hundred and sixty-five steps
in the minute.
ARTICLE F I F T H .

To march in retreat.
119. The company being halted and correctly
aligned, when the instructor shall wish to cause it to
march in retreat, he will command:
1. Company. 2. About—FACE.
120. The company having faced to the rear, the
instructor will place himself in front of the directing
file, conforming to what is prescribed, No. 84.
121. The instructor, being correctly established
on the prolongation of the directing file, will command:
3. Company, forward.
122. At this, the directing sergeant will conform
himself to what is prescribed, Nos. 86 and 87, with
this difference—he will place himself six paces in
front of the line of file closers, now leading.
123. The covering sergeant will step into the line
of file closers, opposite to his interval, and the captain will place himself in the rear rank, now become
the front.
124. This disposition being promptly made, the
instructor will command :
4. MABCH.

10

110

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY—LESSON I l l i

125. At this, the directing sergeant, the captain,
and the men, will conform themselves to what i€
prescribed No. 89, and following.
126. The instructor will cause to be executed,
marching in retreat, all that is prescribed for marching in advance; the commands and the means of
execution will be the same.
127. The instructor having halted the company,
will, when he may wish, cause it to face to the front
by the commands prescribed No. 119. The captain,
the covering sergeant, and the directing sergeant,
will resume their habitual places in line, the moment
they shall have faced about.
128. The company being in march by the front
rank, if the instructor should wish it to march in
retreat, he will cause the right about to be executed
while marching, and to this effect will command:
1. Company. 2. Right about. 3. MARCH.
129. At the third command, the company will
promptly face about, and recommence the march by
the rear rank.
130. The directing sergeant will face about with
the company, and will move rapidly six paces in
front of the file closers, and upon the prolongation
of the guide. The instructor will place him in the
proper direction by the means prescribed No. 104.
The captain, the covering sergeant, and the men, will
conform to the principles prescribed for the march
in retreat.
131. When the instructor wishes the company tc
march by the front rank, he will give the same commands, and will regulate the direction of the march
by the same means.
132. The instructor will cause to be executed va
double quick time, all the movements prescribed in
the 3d, 4th, 5th, and 6th lessons of this school, with
the exception of the march backwards, which will be

ill

PL 26,

a

^

B

i&fiss %
h

CI

t^kPm 6

El

a
a

P

yy <n
-a
0

Marching hj tt fianli doubling the files, and filing to the left
or right (Ho. 135).

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY—LESSON IT.

Ill

executed only in quick time. He will give the same
commands, observing to add double quick before the
command march.
133. When the pieces are carried on the right
shoulder, in quick tim.e, the distance between the
ranks will be sixteen inches. Whenever, therefore,
the instructor brings the company from a shoulder to
this position, the rear rank must shorten a little the
first steps in order to gain the prescribed distance,
and will lengthen the steps, on the contrary, in order
to close up when the pieces are again brought to a
shoulder. In marching in double quick time, the
distance between the ranks will be twenty-six inches,
and the pieces will be carried habitually on the right
shoulder.
134. Whenever a company is halted, the men will
bring their pieces at once to a shoulder at the comn*and halt. The rear rank will close to itc proper
distance. These rules are general.
LESSON FOURTH.
ARTICLE F I R S T .

To march by the flank.
135. The company being in line of battle, and at a
halt, when the instructor shall wish to cause it to
march by the right flank, he will command:
1. Company, right—IACE.
2. Forward.
3. MARCH.

136. At the first command, the company will face
to the right, the covering sergeant wiu place himself
at the head of the front rank, the captain having
stepped out for the purpose, so far as to find himself
by the side of the sergeant, and on his left; the front
rank will double as is prescribed in the school of the
aoldier, No. 352; the rear rank will, at the same time,

112

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY—LESSON IV,

side-step to the right one pace, and double in the
same manner; so that when the movement is completed, the files will be formed of four men aligned,
and elbow to elbow. The intervals will be preserved.
137. The file closers will also move by side step
to the right, so that when the ranks are formed,
they will be two paces from the rearmost rank,
138. At the command march, the company will
move off briskly in quick time; the covering sergeant at the head of the front rank, and the captain on his left, will march straight forward. The
men of each file will march abreast of their respective front rank men, heads direct to the front;
the file closers will march opposite their places in
line of battle.
139. The instructor will cause the principles of
the march by the flank to be observed, in placing
himself, pending the march, as prescribed in the
school of the soldier, No. 357.
140. The instructor will cause the march by the
left flank to be executed by the same commands,
substituting left for right; the ranks will double as
has been prescribed in the school of the soldier,
No. 354; the rear rank will side-step to the left one
pace before doubling.
141. At the instant the company faces to the left,
the left guide will place himself at the head of the
front rank; the captain will pass rapidly to the left,
and place himself by the right side of this guide;
the covering sergeant will replace the captain in
the front rank, the moment the latter quits it to go
to the left.
ARTICLE SECOND.

To change direction by file.
142. The company being faced by the flank, and
either in march, or at a halt, when the instructor

SCHOOL OP THE COMPANY-— LESSON IT.

113

shall wish to cause it to wheel by file, he will command :
1. By file, left (or right). 2. MARCH.
143. At the command march, the first file will
wheel; if to the side of the front rank man, the
latter will take care not to turn at once, but to describe a short arc of a circle, shortening a little
the first five or six steps in order to give time to the
fourth man of this file to conform himself to the
movement. If the wheel be to the side of the rear
rank, the front rank man will wheel in the step of
twenty-eight inches, and the fourth man will conform himself to the movement by describing a short
arc of a circle as has be-en explained. Each file will
come to wheel on the same ground where that which
preceded it wheeled.
144. The instructor will see that the wheel be executed according to these principles, in order that
the distance between the files may always be preserved, and that there be no check or hinderance at
the wheeling point.
ARTICLE T H I R D .

To halt the company marching by the flank, and to face
it to the front.
145. To effect these objects, the instructor will
command:
1. Company.

2. HALT.

3. FRONT.

146. The second and third commands will be executed as prescribed in the school of the soldier, Nos.
859 and 360. As soon as the files have undoubled, the
rear rank will close to its proper distance. The captain, and covering sergeant, as well as the left guide,
if the march be by the left flank, will return to their

114

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY-—LESSON IV.

habitual places m line at the instant the company
faces to the front.
147. The instructor may then align the company
by one of the means prescribed, No. 100.
ARTICLE FOURTH.

The company being in march by the flank, to form it oa
the right (or left) by file into line of battle.
148. If the company be marching by the right
flank, the instructor will command :
1. On the right, by file into line. 2. MARCH.
149. At the command march, the rear rank men
doubled will mark time; the captain and the covering sergeant will turn to the right, march straight
forward, and be halted by the instructor when they
shall have passed at least six paces beyond the rank
of file closers; the captain will place himself correctly on the line of battle, and will direct the alignment as the men of the front rank successively
arrive; the covering sergeant will place himself behind the captain at the distance of the rear rank;
the two men on the right of the front rank doubled,
will continue to march, and passing beyond the
covering sergeant and the captain, will turn to the
right; after turning, they will continue to march
elbow to elbow, and direct themselves towards the
line of battle, but when they shall arrive at two
paces from this line, the even number will shorten
the step so that the odd number may precede him on
the line, the odd number placing himself by the side
and on the left of the captain; the even number will
afterwards oblique to the left, and place himself on
the left of the odd number; the next two men of the
front rank doubled, will pass in the same manner
behind the two first, turn then to the right, and place
themselves.,, according to the means just explained,

114
1ST

PL 27.
]

1 t

1 1

EI
B
\ ' •'

9

1

I ' ' > !
1 i > i I
L_L .,LJ. 1

fa

; isa

El

•
D

On the right by file into line (No, 14tf).

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY—LESSON IV.

115

tp the left, and by the side of, the two men already
established on the line; the remaining files of this
rank will follow in succession, and be formed to the
left in the same manner. The rear rank doubled
will execute the movement in the manner already
explained for the front rank, taking care not to commence the movement unt'l four men of the front
rank are established on the line of battle; the rear
rank men, as they arrive on the line, will cover accurately their file leaders.
150. If the company be marching by the left
flank, the instructor will cause it to form by file on
the left into line of battle, according to the same
principles and by the same commands, substituting
the indication left for right. In this case, the odd
numbers will shorten the step, so that the even
numbers may precede them on the line. The captain, plnced on the left of the front rank, and tho
left guide, w,ill return to their places in line of battle,
by order of the instructor, after the company shall
be formed and aligned.
151. To enable the men the better to comprehend
the mechanism of this movement, the instructor will
at first nause it to be executed separately by each
rank doubled, and afterwards by the two ranks
united and doubled.
152. The instructor will place himself on the line
of battle, and without the point where the right or
left is to rest, in order to establish the base of the
alignment, and afterwards he will follow up the
movement to assure himself that each file conforms
itself to what is prescribed No. 149.

116

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY—LESSON IT.
ARTICLE

FIFTH.

The company being in march by the flank, to form it
by company, or by platoon, into line, and to cause it
to face to the right and left in marching.
153. The company being* in march by the right
flank, the instructor will order the captain to form
it into line; the captain will immediately command:
1. By company, into line ; 2. MARCH.
154. At the command march, the covering sergeant
will continue to march straight forward; the men
will advance the right shoulder, take the double
quick step, and move into line, by the shortest route,
taking care to undouble the files, and to come on the
line one after the other.
155. As the front rank men successively arrive in
line with the covering sergeant, they will tdke from
him the step, and chen tarn their eyes to the front.
156. The men of the rear rank will conform to
the movements of their respective file leaders, but
without endeavoring to arrive in line at the same
time with the latter.
157* At the instant the movement begins, the
captain will face to his company in order vO follow
up the execution; and, as soon as the company is
formed, he will command, guide left, place himself
two paces before the centre, face to the front, and
take the step of the company.
158. At the command guide left, the second sergeant will promptly place himself in the front rank,
on the left, to serve as guide, and the covering sergeant who is on the opposite flank will remain there.
159. When the company marches by the left flank,
this movement will be executed by the same commands, and according to the same principles; the
company being formed, the captain will command
guide right, and place himself in front of his company
fas above; the covering sergeant who is on the right

116

Pi 28.

a

By company into Um (iSTo. 163)*

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY—LESSON IT.

117

of the front rank will serve as guide, and the second
sergeant placed on the left flank will remain there.
160. Thus, in a column by company, right or left
in front, the covering sergeant and the second ser«
geant of each company will always be placed on the
right and left, respectively, of the front rank; they
will be denominated right guide and left guide, and
the one or the other charged with the direction.
161. The company being in march by the flank, if
it be the wish of the instructor to cause it to form
platoons, he will give an order to that effect to the
captain, who will command:
1. By platoon, into line. 2. MABCH.
162. The movement will be executed by each
platoon according to the above principles. The captain will place himself before the centre of the first
platoon, and the first lieutenant before the centre of
the second, passing through the opening made in the
centre o^the company, if the march be by the right
flank, and around the left of his platoon, if the march
be by the left: in this last case, the captain will also
pass around the left of the second platoon in order to
place himself in front of the first. Both the captain
and lieutenant, without waiting for each other, will
command guide left (or right) at the instant their
respective platoons are formed.
163. At the command guide left (or right), the guide
of. each platoon will pass rapidly to the indicated
flank of the platoon, if not already there.
164. The right guide of the company will always
serve as the guide of the right or left of the first
platoon, and the left guide of the company will serve,
in like manner, as the guide of the second platoon.
165. Thus, in a column by platoon, there will be
but one guide to each platoon; he will always be
placed on its left flank, if the right be in front, and
$n the right flank, if the left be in front.

118

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY—LESSON V.

166. In these movements, the file closers will follow the platoons to which they are attached.
167. The instructor may cause the company,
marching by the flank, to form by company, or by
platoon, into line, by his own direct commands,
using those prescribed for the captain, No. 153 or
161.
168. The instructor will exercise the company in
passing, without a halt, from the march by the front,
to the march by the flank, and reciprocally. In either
case, he will employ the commands prescribed in the
school of the soldier, No. 363, substituting company
for squad. The company will face to the right or
left, in marching, and the captain, the guides, and
file closers will conform themselves to what is prescribed for each in the march by the flank, or in the
march by the front of a company supposed to be a
subdivision of a column.
169. If, after facing to the right or left, in marching, the company find itself faced by the rear rank,
the captain will place himself two paces behind the
centre of the front rank, now in the rear, the guides
will pass to the rear rank, now leading, and the file
closers will march in front of this rank.
170. The instructor, in order to avoid fatiguing
the men, and to prevent them from being negligent
in the position of shoulder arms, will sometimes
order support arms in marching by the flank, and
arms on the right shoulder, when marching in line.
LESSON FIFTH.
ARTICLE FIRST.

To break into column by platoon, either at a halt or
i s march.
171. The company being at a halt, in line of battle,

118

13

i

yt. 29.

a

^^^^m^^zmmtA

6

E3

a
-a

-a
ifl a.
To break into column by platoons (No. 171).

11

SCHOOL, OP THE COMPANY-—LESSON Y.

119

the instructor, wishing to break it into column, by
platoon to the right, will command:
1. By platoon, right wheel. 2. MARCH.
172. At the first command, the chiefs of platoon
will rapidly place themselves two paces before the
centres of their respective platoons, the lieutenant
passing around the left of the company. They need
not occupy themselves with dressing, one upon the
other. The covering sergeant will replace the captain in the front rank.
173. At the command march, the right front rank
man of each platoon will face to the right, the covering sergeant standing fast; the chief of each platoon
will move quickly by the shortest line, a little beyond
the point at which the marching flank will rest when
the wheel shall be completed, face to the late rear,
and place himself so that the line which he forms
with the man on the right (who had faced) shall be
(perpendicular to that occupied by the company in
line of battle; each platoon will wheel according to
the principles prescribed for the wheel on a fixed
pivot, and when the man who conducts the marching
flank shall approach near to the perpendicular, its
chief will command ;
1. Platoon.

2. HALT.

174. At the command halt, which will be given at
the instant the man who conducts the marching flank
shall have arrived at three paces from the perpendicular, the platoon will halt; the covering sergeant
will move to the point where the left of the first platoon is to rest, passing by the front rank ; the second
sergeant will place himself, in like manner, in respect
to the second platoon. Each will take care to leave
between himself and the man on the right of his platoon, a space equal to its front; the captain and first
lieutenant will look to this, and each take care to

120

SCHOOL OP THE COMPANY—LESSON T.

align the sergeant between himself and the man of
the platoon who had faced to the right.
175. The guide of each platoon, being thus established on the perpendicular, each chief will place
himself two paces outside of his guide, and, facing
towards him, will command:
3.

Left—DRESS.

176. The alignment being ended, eaeh chief of
platoon will command, FRONT, and place himself two
paces before its centre.
177. The file closers will conform themselves to
the movement of their respective platoons, preserving
always the distance of two paces from the rear rank.
178. The company will break by platoon to th©
left, according to the same principles. The instructor will command:
1. By platoon, left wheel. 2. MARCH.
179. The first command will be executed in the
same manner as if breaking by platoon to the right.
180. At the command march, the left front rank
man of each platoon will face to the left, and the
platoons will wheel to the left, according to the principles prescribed for the wheel on a fixed pivot; the
chiefs of platoon will conform to the principles indicated Nos. 173 and 174.
181. At the command halt, given by the chief of
eaeh platoon, the covering sergeant on the right of
the front rank of the first platoon, and the second
sergeant near the left of the second platoon, will
each move to the points where the right of his platoon is to rest. The chief of each platoon should be
careful to align the sergeant between himself and
the man of the platoon who had faced to the left, and
Will iheir command:
Bight—DRESS.

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY-—WESSON V.

121

182. The platoons being aligned, each chief of pla-»
**>on will command, FRONT, and place himself opposite its centre.
183. The instructor wishing to break the company by platoon to the right, and to move the column
forward after the wheel is completed, will caution
the company to that effect, and command:
1. By platoon, right wheel. 2. MARCH.
184. At the first command, the chiefs of platoon
will move rapidly in front of their respective platoons, conforming to what has been prescribed No.
172, and will remain in this position during the continuance of the wheel. The covering sergeant will replace the chief of the first platoon in the front rank.
185. At the command march, the platoons will
wheel to the r g h t , conforming to th<i principles
herein prescribed; the man on the pivot will not face
to the right, but will mark time, conforming himself
to the movement of the marching flank; and when
the man who is on the left of this flank shall arrive
near the perpendicular, the instructor will command:
3. Forward. 4. MARCH. 5. Guide left.
186. At the fourth comman 1, which will be given
at the instant the wheel is completed, the platoons
will move straight to the front, all the men taking
the step of twenty-eight inches. The covering sergeant and the second sergeant will move rapidly to
the left of their respective platoons, the former passing before the front rank. The leading guide will
immediately take points on the ground in the direction which may be indicated to him by the instructor.
187. At the fifth command, the men will take the
touch of elbows lightly to the left.
188. If the guide of the second platocu should
lose his distance, or the line of direction, he will

122

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY—-LESSON V.

conform to the principles herein prescribed Nos. 202
and 203.
189. If the company be marching in line to the
front, the instructor will cause it to break by platoon
to the right by the same commands. At the command march, the platoons will wheel in the mannei
already explained; the man on the pivot will take
care to mark time in his place, without advancing oi
receding; the instructor, the chiefs of platoon, and
the guides, will conform to what has been prescribed
Nos. 184 and following.
190. The company may be broken by platoons to
the left, according to the same principles, and by inverse means, the instructor giving the commands prescribed Nos. 188 and 185, substituting left for right,
and reciprocally.
191. The movements explained in Nos. 183 and 189
will only be executed after the company has become
well established in the principles of the march in
column, Articles Second and Third.
Eemarks.
192. The instructor, placed in front of the company, will observe whether the movement be executed according to the principles prescribed above;
whether the platoons, after breaking into column, are
perpendicular to the line of battle just occupied;
and whether the guide, who placed himself where
the marching flank of his platoon had to rest, has
left, between himself and the front rank man on the
right (or left), the space necessary to contain the
front of the platoon.
193. After the platoons have broken, if the rearmost guide, should not accurately cover the leading
one, he will not seek to correct his position till the
column be put in march, unless the instructor, wishing to wheel immediately into line, should think it
necessary to rectify the direction of the guides,

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY—LESSON V.

123

which would be executed as will be hereinafter explained in Article Fifth of this Lesson.
194. The instructor will observe, that the^man on
the right (or left) of each platoon, who, at the command march, faces to the right (or left), being the true
pivot of the wheel, the front rank man next to him
ought to gain a little ground to the front in wheeling,
so as to clear the pivot-man.
ABTICLE SECOND.

To march, in column.
195. The company having broken by platoon, right
(or left) in front, the instructor, wishing to cause the
column to march, will throw himself twenty-five or
thirty paces in front, face to the guides, place himself correctly, on their direction, and caution the
leading guide to take points on the ground.
196. The instructor being thus placed, the guide
of the leading platoon will take two points on the
ground in the straight line passing between his own
and the heels of the instructor.
197. These dispositions being made, the instructor
will step aside, and command:
1. Column, forward.

2. Guide left (or right).

3. MARCH.

198. At the command march, promptly repeated by
the chiefs of platoon, they, as well as the guides, will
lead off, by a decided step, their respective platoons,
in order that the whole may move smartly, and at
the same moment.
199. The men will each feel lightly the elbow of
his neighbor towards the guide, and conform himself,
in marching, to the principles prescribed in the school
of the soldier, No. 327. The man next to the guide,
in each platoon, will take care never to pass him, and
ftlso to march always about six inches to the right (or

124

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY—LESSON

V.

left) from him, in order not to push him out of the
direction.
200. The leading guide will observe, with the
greatest precision, the length and cadence of the
step, and maintain the direction of his march by the
means prescribed No. 89.
201. The following guide will march exactly in
the trace of the leading one, preserving between the
latter and himself a distance precisely equal to the
front of his platoon, and marching in the same step
with the leading guide.
202. If the following guide lose his distance from
the one leading (which can only happen by his own
fault), he will correct himself by slightly lengthening
or shortening a few steps, in order that there may
not be sudden quickenings or slackenings in the
march of his platoon.
203. If the same guide, having neglected to march
exactly in the trace of the preceding one, find himself sensibly out. of the direction, he will remedy this
fault by advancing more or less the shoulder opposite
to the true direction, and thus, in a few steps, insensibly regain it, without the inconvenience of the oblique
step, which would cause a loss of distance. In all
cases, each chief of platoon will cause it to conform
to the movements of its guide.
Remarks on the march in column.
204. If the chiefs and guides of subdivisions neglect to lead off, and to decide the march from the
first step, the march will be begun in uncertainty,
which will cause waverings, a loss of step, and a loss
of distance.
205. If the leading guide take unequal steps, the
march of his subdivision, and that which follows, will
be uncertain; there will be undulations, quickenings,
and slackenings in the march.
206. If the same guide be not habituated to pro-

125

PL 30.

To change direction hy ivheeling to the right (No. 211).

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY—LESSON Y.

125

long a given direction, without deviation, he will
describe a crooked line, and the column must wind to
conform itself to such line.
207. If the following guide be not habituated to
march in the trace of the preceding one, he will lose
his distance at every moment in endeavors to regain the trace, the preservation of which is the most
important principle in the march in column.
208. The guide of each subdivision in column will
be responsible for the direction, distance, and step;
the chief of the subdivision, for the order and the
conformity of his subdivision with the movements of
the guide. Accordingly, the chief will frequently
turn, in the march, to observe his subdivision.
209. The instructor, placed on the flank of the
guides, will watch over the execution of all the principles prescribed; he will, also, sometimes place himself in the rear, align himself on the guides, and
halt, pending some thirty paces together, to verify
the accuracy of the guides.
210. In column, chiefs of subdivision will always
repeat, with the greatest promptitude, the commands
march and halt, no chief waiting for another, but
each repeating the command the moment he catches
it from the instructor. They will repeat no other
command given by him; but will explain, if necessary, to their subdivisions, in an under-tone of
voice, what they will have to execute, as indicated by
the commands of caution.
ARTICLE THIRD.

To change direction.
211. The changes of direction of a column while
marching, will be executed according to the principles prescribed for wheeling on the march. Whenever, therefore, a column is to change direction, the
instructor will change the guide, if not already there,

126

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY—-LESSON T .

to the flank opposite the side to which the change is
to be made.
212. The column being in march right in front, if
it be the wish of the instructor to change direction
to the right, he will give the order to the chief of the
first platoon, and immediately go himself, or send a
marker, to the point at which the change of direction
is to be made; the instructor, or marker, will place
himself on the direction of the guides, so as to present the breast to that flank of the column.
213. The leading guide will direct his march on
that person, so that, in passing, his left arm may just
graze his breast. When the leading guide shall have
approached near to the marker, the chief of his platoon will command:
1. Bight wheel. 2. MARCH.
214. The first command will be given when the
platoon is at the distance of four paces from the
marker.
215. At the command march, which will be pronounced at the instant the guide shall have arrived
opposite the marker, the platoon will wheel to the
right, conforming to what is prescribed in the school
of the soldier, No. 396.
216. The wheel being finished, the chief of each
platoon will command:
3. Forward. 4. MARCH.

217. These commands will be pronounced and exe*
cuted as is prescribed in the school of the soldier,
Nos, 398 and 399. The guide of the first platoon
will take points on the ground in the new direction,
ji order the better to regulate the march.
218. The second platoon will continue to march
straight forward till up with the marker, when it will
Wheel to the right, and re-take the direct march by

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY-—LESSON T.

127

the same commands and the same means which governed the first platoon.
219. The column being in march right in front, if
the instructor should wish to change direction to the
left, he will command, guide right. At this command,
the two guides will move rapidly to the right of their"
respective platoons, each passing in front of his subdivision; the men will take the touch of elbows to
the right; the instructor will afterwards conform to
what is prescribed No. 212.
220. The change of direction to the left will then
be executed according to the same principles as the
change of direction to the right, but by inverse means.
221. When the change of direction is completed,
the instructor will command, guide left.
222. The changes of direction in a column, left in
front, will be executed according to the same principles.
223. In changes of direction in double quick time,
the platoons will wheel according to the principles
prescribed in the school of the soldier, No. 404.
224. In order to prepare the men for those formations in line which can be executed only by turning
to the right or the left, the instructor will sometimes
cause the column to change direction to the side of
the guide. In this case, the chief of the leading platoon will command: Left (or right) turn, instead of
left (or right) wheel. The subdivisions will each turn,
in succession, conforming to what is prescribed ill
the school of the soldier, No. 402. The leading guide,
as soon as he has turned, will take points on the
ground, the better to regulate the direction of the
inarch.
225. It is highly important, in order to preserve
distances and the direction, that all the subdivisions
of the column should change direction precisely at
the point where the leading subdivision changed; it
is for this reason that that point ought to be marked

128

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY—LESSON V.

in advance, and that it is prescribed that the guides
direct their march on the marker, also that each chief
of subdivision shall not cause the change to commence
till the guide of his subdivision has grazed the breast
of this marker.
226. Each chief will take care that his subdivision
arrives at the point of change in a square with the
line of direction: with this view, he will face to his
subdivision when the one which precedes has commenced to turn or to wheel, and he will be watchful
that it continues to march squarely until it arrives at
the point where the change of direction is to commence.
227. If, in changes of direction, the pivot of the
subdivision which wheels should not clear the wheeling point, the next subdivision would be arrested and
distances lost; for the guide who conducts the marching flank having to describe an arc, in length about
a half greater than the front of the subdivision, the
second subdivision would be already up with the
wheeling point, whilst the first which wheels has yet
the half of its front to execute, and hence would be
obliged to mark time until that half be executed. It
is therefore prescribed, that the pivot of each subdivision should take steps of nine or eleven inches in
length, according to the swiftness of the gait, in order
not to arrest the march of the next subdivision. The
chiefs of subdivision will look well to the step of the
pivot, and cause his step to be lengthened or shortened as may be judged necessary. By the nature of
this movement, the centre of each subdivision will
bend a little to the rear.
228. The guides will never alter the length or the
cadence of the step, whether the change of direction
be to the side of the guide or to the opposite side.
229. The marker, placed at the wheeling point,
will always present his breast to the flank of the
column. The instructor will take the greatest paina
in causing the prescribed principles to be observed;

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY—LESSON Y.

129

he will see that each subdivision only commences the
change of direction when the guide, grazing the
breast of the marker, has nearly passed him, and
that the marching flank does not describe the arc of
too large a circle, in order that it may not be thrown
beyond the new direction.
230. In change of direction by wheel, the guide of
the wheeling flank will cast his eyes over the ground
at the moment of commencing the wheel, and will
describe an arc of a circle whose radius is equal to
the front of the subdivision.
ARTICLE FOURTH.

To halt the column.
231. The column being in march, when the instructor shall wish to halt it, he will command:
1. Column.

2. HALT.

232. At the second command, promptly repeated
by the chiefs of platoon, the column will halt; the
guides also will stand fast, although they may have
lost both distance and direction.
233. If the command halt, be not repeated with
the greatest vivacity, and executed at the same instant, distances will be lost.
234. If a guide, having lost his distance, seek to
recover it after that command, he will only throw his
fault on the following guide, who, if he have marched
well, will no longer be at his proper distance; and if
the latter regain what he has thus lost, the movement
will be propagated to the rear of the column.
ARTICLE FIFTH.

Being in column by platoon, to form to the right 01
left into line of battle, either at a halt or on th9
march.
235. The instructor having halted the column

130

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY—LESSON V.

right in front, and wishing to form it into line of
battle, "will place himself at platoon distance in front
of the leading guide, face to him, and rectify, if
necessary, the position of the guide beyond; which
being executed, he will command:
Left—DRESS.

236. At this command, which will not be repeated
by the chiefs of platoon, each of them will place
himself briskly two paces outside of his guide, and
direct the alignment of the platoon perpendicularly
to the direction of the column.
237. Each chief having aligned his platoon, will
command, FRONT, and return quickly to his place in
column.
238. This disposition being made, the instructor
will command:
1. Left into line, wheel. 2. MARCH.
239. At the command march, briskly repeated by
the chiefs of platoon, the front rank man on the left
of each platoon will face to the left, and place his
breast lightly against the arm of the guide by his
side, who stands fast; the platoons will wheel to the
left on the principle of wheels from a halt, and in
conformity to what is prescribed No. 194. Each
chief will turn to his platoon to observe its movement, and when the marching flank has approached
near the line of battle, he will command: *
1. Platoon.

2. HALT.

240. The command halt, will be given when the
marching flank of the platoon is three paces from
the line of battle.
241. The chief of the second platoon, having halted
H, will return to his place as a file closer, passing
•round the left of his subdivision.
242. The captain having halted the first platoon,

SCHOOL OP THE COMPANY—LESSON T.

J 31

will move r a p i d l y to the point at which t h e r i g h t of
the c o m p a n y will r e s t in line of b a t t l e , a n d com
mand:
Right-—DRESS.
243. A t this command, the two platoons will d r e s s
u p on t h e a l i g n m e n t ; the front r a n k m a n on t h e
r i g h t of t h e leading platoon, who finds himself opposite t h e i n s t r u c t o r established on the direction of t h e
guides, will place his breast lightly a g a i n s t t h e left
a r m of t h i s officer.
The captain will direct the
alignment from the r i g h t on t h e m a n on t h e opposite
flank of t h e company.
244. The company being aligned, t h e c a p t a i n will
command :
FRONT.

245. The i n s t r u c t o r seeing t h e company in line of
battle, will c o m m a n d :
Guides—POSTS.
246. A t this command, the covering sergeant will
cover t h e captain, a n d the left guide will r e t u r n to his
place as a file closer.
247. If t h e column be left i n front, and t h e i n structor should wish to form it to the r i g h t into line
of battle, he will place himself at p l a t o o n distance
in front of the leading guide, face to him, a n d rectify,
if necessary, t h e position of t h e guide b e y o n d ;
which being executed, h e will c o m m a n d ;
1. Right into line, wheel,

2. M A R C H .

248. At the command march, t h e front r a n k m a n on
t h e r i g h t of each platoon will face to t h e r i g h t and
place his breast lightly against the left a r m of the
guide by his side, who stands fast; each platoon will
wheel to the right, and will be halted by its chief,
w h e n the marching flank h a s approached near th©
12

132

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY—LESSON V.

line of battle; for this purpose, the chief of each
platoon 'will command:
1. Platoon.

2. HALT.

249. The command halt, -will be given when the
marching flank of the platoon is three paces from the
line of battle. The chief of the second platoon having halted his platoon, will resume his place in the
rank of file closers.
250. The captain having halted the first platoon,
will move briskly to the point at which the leii of the
company will rest, and command:
Left—DRESS.

251. At this command, the two platoons will dress
up on the alignment; the man on the left of the
second platoon, opposite the instructor, will place his
breast lightly against the right arm of this officer,
and the captain will direct the alignment from the left
on the man on the opposite flank of the company.
252. The company being aligned, the captain will
command:
FRONT.

253. The instructor will afterwards command:
Guides—POSTS.
254. At this command, the captain will move to the
right of his company, the covering sergeant will cover
him, and the left guide will return to his place as a
file closer.
255. The instructor may omit the command left or
right dress, previous to commanding left or right into
line, wheel, unless, after rectifying the position of the
guides, it should become necessary to dress the platoons, or one of them, laterally to the right or left.
256. The instructor, before the command left (or
right) into line, loheel, will assure himself that the
rearmost platoon is at its exact wheeling distance

SCHOOL OV THE COMPANY—LESSON V .

133

from the one in front. This attention is important,
in order to detect negligence on the part of guides in
this essential point.
257. If the column be marching right in front, and
the instructor should wish to form it into line without
baiting the column, he will give the commands prescribed No. 238, and move rapidly to platoon distance
in front of the leading guide.
258. At the command march, briskly repeated by
the chiefs of platoon, the left guides will halt short,
the instructor, the chiefs of platoon, and the platoons,
will conform to what is prescribed No. 289 and following.
259. If the column be in march left in front, this
formation will be made according to the same principles, and by inverse means.
260. If the column be marching right in front, and
the instructor should wish to form it into line without halting the column, and to march the company in
line to the front, he will command:
1. By platoons left wheel. 2. MARCH.
261. At the command march, briskly repeated by
the chiefs of platoon, the left guides will halt: the
man next to the left guide in each platoon will mark
time: the platoons will wheel to the left, conforming
to the principles of the wheel on a fixed pivot. When
the right of the platoons shall arrive near the line of
battle, the instructor will command:
3. Forward. 4. MARCH. 5. Guide right (or left).
262. At the fourth command, given at the instant
the wheel is completed, all the men of the company
will move off together with the step of twenty-eight
inches; the captain, the chief of the second platoon,
the covering sergeant, and the left guide will take
their positions as in line of battle.
263. At the fifth command, which will be given

134

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY—LESSON VI.

immediately after the fourth, the captain and cover*
ing sergeant, if not already there, will move briskly
to the side on which the guide is designated. The
non-commissioned officer charged with the direction
will move rapidly in front of the guide, and will be
assured in his line of march by the instructor, as is
prescribed No. 104. That non-commissioned officer
will immediately take points on the ground as indicated in the same number. The men will take the
touch of elbows to the side of the guide, conforming
themselves to the principles of the march in line.
264. The same principles are applicable to a column
left in front.
LESSON SIXTH.
ARTICLE FIRST.

To break the company into platoons, and to re-form
the company.
To break the company into platoons.
265. The company marching in the cadenced step,
and supposed to make part of a column, right in
front, when the instructor shall wish to cause it to
break by platoon, he will give the order to the captain,
who will command: 1. Break into platoons, and immediately place himself before the centre of the first
platoon.
266. At the command break into platoons, the first
lieutenant will pass quickly around the left to the centre of his platoon, and give the caution: Mark time.
267. The captain will then command: 2. March.
268. The first platoon will continue to march
straight forward; the covering sergeant will move
rapidly to the left flank of this platoon (passing by
the front rank) as soon as the flank shall be disengaged.

134

PL 31.

&
»MM'^.m»xm:M.i?A

B

A

i

r i

i l i

l \ I f [

?
£rd -L.I

I.L..

1

'..ted
I..J

..1.1.1. i.l. J . J .

±
• £

E3

T

•

.To break the company into jrfatooua, and to re-form
company (No. 265).

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY—LESSON VI

135

269. At the command march, given by the captain,
the second platoon will begin to mark time; its
chief will immediately add: 1. Right oblique; 2.
MABCH. The last command will be given so. that
this platoon may commence obliquing the instant the
rear rank of the first platoon shall have passed. The
men will shorten the step in obliquing, so that when
the command forward march is given, the platoon may
have its exact distance.
270. The guide of the second platoon being near
the direction of the guide of the first, the chief of
the second will command Forward, and add MABCH,
the instant that the guide of his platoon shall cover
the guide of the first.
271. In a column, left in front, the company will
break into platoons by inverse means, applying to
the first platoon all that has been prescribed for the
second, and reciprocally.
^
272. In this case, the left guide of the company
Will shift to the right flank of the second platoon,
and the covering sergeant will remain on the right
of the first.
To re-form the company.
273. The column, by platoon, being in march,
right in front, when the instructor shall wish to cause
it to form company, he will give the order to the
eaptain, who will command : Form company.
274. Having given this command, the captain will
immediately add: 1. First platoon; 2. Right oblique.
275. The chief of the second platoon will caution
it to continue to march straight forward.
276. The captain will then command: 3. MABCH.
277. At this command, repeated by vhe chief of
the second, the first platoon will oblique to the right,
in order to unmask the second; the covering sergeant, on the left of the first platoon, will return to
the right of the company, passing by the front rank.

1.36

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY—LESSON VI.

278. When the first platoon shall have nearly unmasked the second, the captain will command: 1
Mark time, and at the instant the unmasking shall be
complete, he will add: 2. MARCH. The first platoon
will then cease to oblique, and mark time.
279. In the mean time the second platoon will
have continued to march straight forward, and when
it shall be nearly up with the first, the captain will
command Forward, and at the instant the two platoons shall unite, add MARCH ; the first platoon will
then cease to mark time.
280. In a column, left in front, the same movement will be executed by inverse means, the chief of
the second platoon giving the command Forward, and
the captain adding the command MARCH, when the
platoons are united.
281. The guide of the second platoon, on its right,
will pass to its left ,flank the moment the platoon
begins to oblique ; the guide of the first, on its right,
remaining on that flank of the platoon.
282. The instructor will also sometimes cause the
company to break and re-form, by platoon, by his
own direct commands. In this case, he will give the
general commands prescribed for the captain above:
1. Break into platoons; 2. MARCH; and 1. Form company;

2. MARCH.

283. If, in breaking the company into platoons,
the subdivision that breaks off should mark time too
long, it might, in a column of many subdivisions,
arrest the march of the following one, which would
cause a lengthening of the column, and a loss of
distances.
284. In breaking into platoons, it is necessary
that the platoons which oblique should not shorten
the step too much, in order not to lose distance in
column, and not to arrest the march of the following
subdivision.
285. If a platoon obliques too far to a flank, U

Tl. 32.

137

IB

SO
23

•

wwmm £

£3"

is
[> D>

S..
S

[
D

i>l-i.-,.j.,L.i.,L.U,ITr
Li-.i.i-i.i.i.i.i.i.i......

Ch D
-T>3

To break files to the rear, and to cause them to re-enter the
line (No. 289).

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY—LESSON VT.

137

would be obliged to oblique again to the opposite
flank, to regain fne direction, and by the double
movement arrest, probably, the march of the following subdivision.
286. The chiefs of those platoons which oblique
will face to their platoons, in order to enforce the
observance of the foregoing principles.
287. When, in a column of several companies, they
break in succession, it is of the greatest importance
that each company should continue to march in the
same step, without shortening or slackening, whilst
that which precedes breaks, ^although the following
company should close up on the preceding one.
This attention is essential to guard against an elongation of the column.
288- Faults of but little moment, in a column of
a few companies, would be serious inconveniences
in a general column of many battalions. Hence the
instructor will give the greatest care in causing all
the prescribed principles to be strictly observed. To
this end, he will hold himself on the directing flank,
the better to observe all the movements.
ARTICLE SECOND.

Being in column, to break files to the rear, and to
cause them to re-enter into line.
289. The company being in march, and supposed
to constitute a subdivision of a column, right (or left)
in front, when the instructor shall wish to cause
files to break off he will give the order to the captain, who will immediately turn to his company, and
command:
1. Two files from left (or right) to rear. 2. MARCH.
290. At the command march, the two files on the
left (or right) of the company will mark time, the
others will continue to march straight forward; the

138

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY—LESSON YI.

two rear rank men of these files will, as soon as tho
rear rank of the company shall clear them, move to
the right by advancing the outer shoulder; the odd
number will place himself behind the third file from
that flank, the even number behind the fourth,
passing for this purpose behind the odd number;
the two front rank men will, in like manner, move
to the right when the rear rank of the company
shall clear them, the odd number will place himself
behind the first file, the even number behind the
second file, passing for this purpose behind the odd
number. If the files are broken from the right, the
men will move to the left, advancing the outer
shoulder, the even number of the rear rank will
place himself behind the third file, the odd number
of the same rank behind the fourth; the even number of the front rank behind the first file, the odd
number of the same rank behind the second, the odd
numbers for this purpose passing behind the even
numbers. The men will be careful not to lose their
distances, and to keep aligned.
291. If the instructor should still wish to break
two files from the same side, he will give the order
to the captain, who will proceed as above directed.
292. At the command march, given by the captain,
the files already broken, advancing a little the outer
shoulder, will gain the space of two files to the right,
if fhe files are broken from the left, and to the left,
if the files are broken from the right, shortening, at
the same time, the step, in order to make room
between themselves and the rear rank of the company for the files last ordered to the rear; the latter
will break by the same commands and in the same
manner as the first. The men who double should
increase the length of the step in order to prevent
distances from being lost.
293. The instructor may thus dimmish the front
of a company by breaking off successive groups of

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY—LESSON TI*

139

two files, but the new files must always be broke©
from the same side.
294. The instructor, wishing to cau'se files bro&ei?
off to return into line, will give the order to the cap*
tain, who will immediately command:
1. Two files into line. 2. MARCH.
. 295. At the command march, the first two files of
those marching by the flank will return briskly into
line, and the others will gain the space of two files
by advancing the inner shoulder towards the flank to
which they belong.
296. The captain will turn to his company, to
watch the observance of the principles which have
just been prescribed.
297. The instructor having caused groups of two
files to break one after another, and to return again
into line, will afterwards cause two or three groups
to break together, and for this purpose will command: Four or six files from left (or right) to rear;
MARCH. The files designated will mark time; each
rank will advance a little the outer shoulder as soon
as the rear rank of the company shall clear it, will
oblique at once, and each group will place itself
behind the four neighboring files, and in the same
manner, as if the movement had been executed
group by group, taking care that the distances are
preserved.
298. The instructor will next order the captain to
cause two or three groups to be brought into line at
once, who, turning to the company, will command:
Four or six files into line—MARCH.
299. At the command march, the files designated
will advance the inner shoulder, move up and form
on the flank of the company by the shortest lines,..
300. As often as files shall break off to the rear, the
guide on that flank will gradually close on the near-

140

SCHOOL OP THE COMPANY—LESSON VI.

est front rank man remaining in line, and he will also
open out to make room for files ordered into line.
801. The files which march in the rear are disposed
in the following order: the left files as if the company was marching by the right flank, and the right
files as if the company was marching by the left flank.
Consequently, whenever there is on the right or left
of a subdivision, a file which does not belong to a
group, it will be broken singly.
302. It is necessary to the preservation of distances
in column that the men should be habituated in the
schools of detail to execute the movements of this article with precision.
303. If new files broken off do not step well to the
left or right in obliquing; if, when files are ordered
into line, they do not move up with promptitude and
precision, in either case the following files will be
arrested in their march, and thereby cause the column
to be lengthened out.
304. The instructor will place himself on the flank
from which the files are broken, to assure himself of
the exact observance of the principles.
305. Files will only be broken off from the side of
direction, in order that the whole company may easily
pass from the front to the flank march.
ARTICLE THIRD.

To march the column in route, and to execute the
movements incident thereto.
306. The swiftness of the route step will be one
hundred and ten steps in a minute; this swiftuess
will be habitually maintained in columns in route,
when the roads and ground may permit.
307. The company being at a halt, and supposed to
constitute a subdivision of a column, when the instructor shall wish to ctuse it to march in the routs
step, he will command:

SCHOOL OP THE COMPANY—LESSON VI.

141

1. Column, forward. 2. Guide, left (or right).
8. Jloute step. 4. MARCH.
808. At the command march, repeated by the cap*
tain, the two ranks will step off together; the rear
rank will take, in marching, by shortening a few
steps, a distance of one pace (twenty-eight inches)
xrom the rank preceding, which distance will be computed from the breasts of the men in the rear rank,
to the knapsacks of the men in the front rank. The
men, without further command, will immediately
carry their arms at will, as indicated in the school of
the soldier, No. 219. They will no longer be required
to march in the cadenced pace, or with the same foot,
or to remain silent. The files will march at ease;
but care will be taken to prevent the ranks from intermixing, the front rank from getting in advance
of the guide, and the rear rank from opening to too
great a distance.
309. The company marching in the route step, the
instructor will cause it to change direction, which will
be executed without formal commands, on a simple
caution from the captain; the rear rank will come up
to change direction in the same manner as the front
rank. Each rank will conform itself, although in the
route step, to the principles which have been prescribed for the change in closed ranks, with this difference only; that the pivot-man, instead of taking
steps of nine, will take steps of fourteen inches, in
order to clear the wheeling point.
310. The company marching in the route step, to
cause it to pass to the cadenced step, the instructor
will first order pieces to be brought to the right
shoulder, and then command:
1. Quick time. 2. MAKCH.
311. At the command march, the men will resume
the cadenced step, and will close so as to leave a distance of sixteen inches between each rank

142

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY—LESSON VI.

312. The company marching in the cadenced pace,
the instructor, to cause it to take the route step, will
command:
1. Route step. 2. MABCH.
313. At the command march, the front rank will
continue the step of twenty-eight inches, the rear
rank will take, by gradually shortening the step, the
distance of twenty-eight inches from the front rank;
the men will carry their arms at will.
314. If the company be marching in the route step,
and the instructor should suppose the necessity of
marching by the flank in the same direction, he will
command:
1. Company by the right (or left) flank, 2. By file left
(or right).

3. MARCH.

315. At the command march, the company will face
to the right (or left) in marching, the captain will place
himself by the side of the guide who conducts the
leading flank: this guide will wheel immediately to
the left or right; all the files will come in succession
to wheel on the same spot as the guide; if there be
files broken off to the rear, they will, by wheeling,
regain their respective places, and follow the movement of the company.
316. The instructor having caused the company to
be again formed into line, will exercise it in increasing and diminishing front, by platoon, which will be
executed by the same commands, and the same means,
as if the company were marching in the cadenced
step. When the company breaks into platoons, the
chief of each will move to the flank of his platoon,
and will take the place of the guide, who will step
back into the rear rank.
317. The company being in column, by platoon, and
supposed to march in the route step, the instructor can
cause the front to be diminished and increased, by

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY- -LESSOR VI.

143

section, if the platoons have a front of twelve files or
more.
'
318. The movements of diminishing and increasing
front, by section, will be executed according to the
principles indicated for the same movements by platoon. The right sections of platoons will be commanded by the captain and first lieutenant, respectively; the left sections, by the two next subalterns
in rank, or, in their absence, by sergeants.
319. The instructor wishing to diminish by section,
will give the order to the captain, who will command:
1. Break into sections. 2. MARCH.
320. As soon as the platoons shall be broken, each
chief of section will place himself on its directing
flank in the front rank, the guides who will be thus
displaced will fall back into the rear rank: the file
closers will close up to within one pace of this rank,
321. Platoons will be broken into sections only in
the column in route: the movement will never be executed in the manoeuvres, whatever may be the front
of the company.
322. When the instructor shall wish to re-form
platoons, he will give the order to the captain, who
will command:
1. Form platoons. 2. MABCH.
323. At the first command, each chief of section
will place himself before its centre, and the guides
will pass into the front rank. At the command march,
the movement will be executed as has been prescribed
for forming company. The moment the platoons are
formed, the chiefs of the left sections will return to
their places as file closers.
324. The instructor will also cause to be executed
the diminishing and increasing front by files, as prescribed in the preceding article, and in the same
13

144

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY—LESSON VI.

manner as if marching in the cadenced step. "When
the company is broken into sections, the subdivisions
must not be reduced to a front of less than six files,
not counting the chief of the section.
325. The company being broken by platoon, or by
section, the instructor will cause it, marching in the
route step, to march by the flank in the same direction> by the commands and the means indicated Nos,
314 and 315. The moment the subdivisions shall face
to the right (or left), the first file of each will wheel
to the left (or right), in marching, to prolong the
direction, and to unite with the rear file of the subdivision immediately preceding. The file closers will
take their habitual places in the march by the flank,
before the union of the subdivisions.
326. If the company be marching by the right flank,
and the instructor should wish to undouble the files,
which might sometimes be found necessary, he will
inform the captain, who, after causing the cadenced
step to be resumed, and arms to be shouldered or
supported, will command:
1. In two ranks, undouble files. 2. MARCH.
327. At the second command, the odd numbers will
continue to march straight forward, the even numbers
will shorten the step, and obliquing to the left will
place themselves promptly behind the odd numbers;
the rear rank will gain a step to the left so as to retake the touch of elbows on the side of the front
rank.
328. If the company be marching by the left
flank, it will be the even numbers who will continue
to march forward, and the odd numbers who will
undouble.
329. If the instructor should wish to double the
filee, he will give the order to the captain, who will
cemjnand:

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY1—LESSON VI,

145

1. In four ranks, double files. %< (MAROH.
S30. At the command march, the files will double
in the manner as explained, when the company faces
by the right or the left flank. The instructor will
afterwards cause the route step to be resumed.
831. The various movements prescribed in this
lesson may be executed in double quick time. The
men will be brought, by degrees, to pass over at
this gait about eleven hundred yards in seven
minutes.
332. When the company marching in the route step
shall halt, the rear rank will close up at the command
halt, and the whole will shoulder arms.
333. Marching in the route step, the men will be
permitted to carry their pieces in the manner they
shall find most convenient, paying attention only to
holding the muzzles up, so as to avoid accidents.
ARTICLE FOURTH.

Countermarch.
334. The company being at a halt, and supposed
to constitute part of a column, right in front, when
the instructor shall wish to cause it to countermarch,
he will command:
1. Countermarch. 2. Company, right—FACE.
3. By file left. 4. MARCH.
335. At the second command, the company will
face to the right, the two guides to the right ajbout;
the captain will go to the right of his company and
cause two files to break to the rear, and then place
himself by the side of the front rank man, to conduct him.
336. At the command march, both guides will
stand fast; the company will step off smartly;-the
first file, conducted by the captain, will wheel around
the right guide, and direct its march along the front

146

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY—-LESSON VI.:

rank so as to arrive behind, and two paces from the
left guide ; each file will come in succession to wheel
on the same ground around the right guide; the
leading file having arrived at a point opposite to the
left guide, the captain will command :
1. Company.

2. HALT. 3. FRONT.
DRESS.

4. Right—

337. The first command will be given at fottr
paces from the point where the leading file is to
rest.
338. At the second command, the company will
halt.
339. At the third, it will face to the front.
340. At the fourth, the company will dress by the
right; the captain will step two paces outside of the
left guide, now on the right, and direct the alignment, so that the front rank may be enclosed between the two guides; the company being aligned,
he will command FRONT, and place himself before
the centre of the company as if in column; the
guides, passing along the front rank, will shift to
their proper places, on the right and left of that
rank.
341. In a column, by platoon, the countermarch
will be executed by the same commands, and according to the same principles; the guide of each
platoon will face about, and its chief will place
himself by the side of the file on the right, to conduct it.
342. In a column, left in front, the countermarch
will be executed by inverse commands and means,
but according to the same principles. Thus, the
movement will be made by the right flank of subdivisions, if the right be in front, and by the left flank,
if the left be in front; in both cases the subdivisions
will wheel by file to the side of the front rank.

147

PL 33.

.J !
G IS
3 m

1

1

> i

•

M

t

i

i

i

<

I

'_•

li-LJii
t

i

i

i

i

i

On the right into line (Xo.'344).

SCHOOL OP THE COMPANY—-LESSON VI.
ARTICLE

147

FIFTH.

Being in column by platoon, to form on the right (or
left) into line of battle.
343. The column by platoon, right in front, being
in march, the instructor, wishing to form it on the
right into line of battle, will command:
1. On the right into line. 2. Guide right.
344. At the second command,- the guide of each
platoon will shift quickly to its right flank, and the
men will touch elbows to the right; the column will
continue to march straight forward.
345. The instructor having given the' second command, will move briskly to the point at which the
right of the company ought to rest in line, and place
himself facing the point of direction to the left which
he will choose.
346. The line of battle ought to be so chosen that
the guide of each platoon, after having turned to the
right, may have, at least, ten paces to take before
arriving upon that line.
347. The head of the column being nearly opposite to the instructor, the chief of the first platoon
will command: 1. Right turn; and when exactly
opposite to that point, he will add:
2. MARCH.

348. At the command march, the first platoon will
turn to the right, in conformity with the principles
prescribed in the school of the soldier, No. 402.
Its guide will so direct his march as to bring the
front rank man, next on his left, opposite to the instructor ; the chief of the platoon will march before
Us centre; and when its guide shall be near the line
of battle, he will command :
1. Platoon.

2. HALT.

148

SCHOOL OF THE COMFAK YV-LESSON- : TI.

349. At the command halt, which will be given at
the instant the right of the platoon shall arrive at
the distance of three paces from the line of battle,
the platoon will halt; the files, not yet in line, will
come up promptly. The guide will throw himself on
the line of battle, opposite to one of the three left files
of his platoon; he will face to the instructor, who
will align him on the point of direction to the left.
The chief of platoon having, at the same time, gone
to the point where the right of the company is to
rest, will, as soon as he sees all the files of the platoon in line, command:
Right—DRESS.

350. At this, the first platoon will align itself; the
front rank man, who finds himself opposite to the
guide, will rest his breast lightly against the right
arm of this guide, and the chief of the platoon, from
the right, will direct the alignment on this man.
351. The second platoon will continue to march
straight forward, until its guide shall arrive opposite
to the left file of the first; it will then turn to the
right at the command of its chief, and march towards
the line of battle, its guide directing himself on the
left file of the first platoon.
352. The guide having arrived at the distance of
three paces from the line of battle, this platoon will
be halted, as prescribed for the first; at the instant
it halts, its guide will spring on the line of battle,
opposite to one of the three left files of his platoon,
and will be assured in his position by the instructor.
353. The chief of the second platoon, seeing all its
files in line, and its guide established on the direction, will command:
Right—DRESS.

854. Having given this command, he will return to

SCHOOL OT THE COMPANY—LESSON YI.

149

M$ place as a file closer, passing around the left; the
Becond platoon will dress up on the alignment of the
first, and, when established, the captain will command:
FRONT.

355. The movement ended, the instructor will command:
Guides—POSTS.
356. At this command, the two guides will return
to their places in line of battle.
357. A column, by platoon, left in front, will form
on the left into line of battle, according to the same
principles, and, by inverse means, applying to the
second platoon what is prescribed for the first, and
reciprocally. The chief of the second platoon having
aligned it, from the point of appui (the left), will
retire to his place as a file closer. The captain having
halted the first platoon three paces behind the line of
battle, will go to the same point to align this platoon,
and then command: FRONT. At the command,
guides—posts, given by the instructor, the captain will
shift to his proper flank, and the guides take their
places in line of battle.
358. When the companies of a regiment are to be
exercised, at the same time, in the school of the com*
pany, the colonel will indicate the lesson or lessons
they are severally to execute. The whole will commence by a bugle signal, and terminate in like
manner.
Tbrmation of a company from two ranks into single
rank, and reciprocally.
359. The company being formed into two ranks in
the manner indicated No. 8, school of the soldier, and
supposed to make part of a column, right or left in

150

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY—LESSON V I .

front, when the instructor shall wish to form it into
single rank, he will command :
1. In one rank, form company. 2. MARCH.
360. At the v first command, the right guide will
face to the right.
361. At the command march, the right guide will
Btep off and march in the prolongation of the front
rank.
362. The first file will step off at the same time
with the guide; the front rank man will turn to the
right at the first step, follow the guide, and be himself followed by the rear rank man of his file, who
will come to turn on the same spot where he had
turned. The second file, and successively all the
other files, will step off as has been prescribed for
the first, the front rank man of each file following
immediately the rear rank man of the file next on
his right. The captain will superintend the move^
ment, and when the last man shall have stepped
off, he will halt the company, and face it to the
front.
363. The file closers will take their places in line
of battle, two paces in rear of the rank.
364. The company being in single rank, when the
instructor shall wish to form it into two ranks, he
will command:
1. In two ranks, form company. 2. Company
right-—FACE.

3. MAHCH.

365. At the second command, the company will
face to the right: the right guide and the man on
the right will remain faced to the front.
366. At the command march, the men who have
faced i.o the right, will step off, and form files in the
following manner: the second man in the rank will
place himself behind the first to form the first file j
the third will place himself by the side of the first in

SCHOOL OP THE COHPANY^-LESSON Yii

151

iM front rank; the fourth behind the third in the
rear rank. All the others will, in like manner, place
themselves, alternately, in the front and rear rank^
and will thus form files of two men, on the left of
those already formed.
367. The formations above described will be habitually executed by the right of companies; but
When the instructor shall wish to have them executed
by the left, he will face the company about, and post
the guides in the rear rank.
368. The formation will then be executed by the
same commands, and according to the same principles as by the front rank; the movement commencing
with the left file, now become the right, and in each
file by the rear rank man, now become the front; the
left guide will conform to what has been prescribed
for the right.
369. The formation ended, the instructor will face
the company to its proper front.
370. When a battalion in line has to execute either
of the formations above described, the colonel will
cause it to break to the rear by the right or left of
companies, and will then give the commands just prescribed for the instructor. Each company will execute the movement as if acting singly.
Formation of a company from two ranks into four, and
reciprocally, at a halt, and in march.
371. The company being formed in two ranks, at a
halt, and supposed to form part of a column right in
front, when the instructor shall wish to form it into
four ranks, he will command:
... In four ranks, form company. 2. Company left—FACE.
3. MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).

;/372. At the second command, the left guide will
reniain faced to the front, the company will face to
the left: the rear rank will gain the distance of one

152

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY—LESSON Vt.

pace from the front rank by a side step to the left
and rear, and the men will form into four ranks aa
prescribed in the school of the soldier.
373. At the command march, the first file of four
men will reface to the front without undoubling. All
the other files of four will step off, and closing successively to about five inches of the preceding file,
will halt, and immediately face to the front, the men
remaining doubled.
374. The file closers will take their new places in
line of battle, at two paces in rear of the fourth rank.
375. The captain will superintend the movement.
376.. The company being in four ranks, when the
instructor shall wish to form it into two ranks, he
will command:
1. In two ranks, form company. 2. Company right—FACE.
3. MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).

377. At the second command, the left guide will
stand fast, the company will face to the right.
378. At the command march, the right guide will
step off and march in the prolongation of the front
rank. The leading file of four men will step off at
the same time, the other files standing fast; the
second file will step off when there shall be between
it and the first space sufficient to form into two ranks.
The following files will execute successively what has
been prescribed for the second. As soon as the last
file shall have its distance, the instructor will command :
1. Company. 2. HALT.

3. FRONT.

379. At the command front, the company will face
to the front, and the files will undouble.
. 380. The company being formed in two ranks, and
marching to the front, when the instructor shall wish
to form it into four ranks, he will command:

SCHOOL OF THE COMVANY-—LESSON VI.

153

1 In four ranks, form company. 2. By the left, doubU
files. 3. MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).
381. At the command march, the left guide and the
left file of the company will continue to march straight
to the front: the company will make a half face to
the left, the odd numbers placing themselves behind
the even numbers. The even numbers of the reaf
rank will shorten their steps a little, to permit the
odd numbers of the front rank to get between them
and the even numbers of that rank. The files thus
formed of fours, except the left file, will continue to
march obliquely, lengthening their steps slightly, so
as to keep constantly abreast of the guide; each file
will close successively on the file next on its left, and
when at the proper distance from that file, will face
to the front by a half face to the right, and take the
touch of elbows to the left.
382. The company being in march to the front in
four ranks, when the instructor shall wish to form it
into two ranks, he will command:
1. In two ranks, form company. 2. By the right, undouble files. 3. MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).
383. At the command march, the left guide and the
left file of the company will continue to march
straight to the front; the company will make a half
face to the right and march obliquely, lengthening
the step a little, in order to keep, as near as possible,
abreast of the guide. As soon as the second file
from the left shall have gained to the right the interval
necessary for the left file to form into two ranks, the
second file will face to the front by a half face to the
left, and march straight forward ; the left file will immediately form into two ranks, and take the touch of
elbows to the left. Each file will execute successively what has just been prescribed for the file next
to the left, and each file will form into two ranks

154

SCHOOL OP THE COMPANY—LESSON YI.

when the file next on its right has obliqued the required distance and faced to the front.
384. If the company be supposed to make part of
a column, left in front, these different movements will
be executed according to the same principles and by
inverse means, substituting the indication left for right.

END 0¥ THE SCHOOL O f THE COMPANY.
f

INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS*

155

INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.

General principles and division of the instruction.
1. THE movements of skirmishers should be subjected to such rules as will give to the commander
the means of moving them in any direction with the
greatest promptitude.
2. It is not expected that these movements should
be executed with the same precision as in closed
ranks, nor is it desirable, as such exactness would
materially interfere with their prompt execution.
3. When skirmishers are thrown out to clear the
way for, and to protect the advance of, the main
corps, their movements should be so regulated by
this corps, as to keep it constantly covered.
4. Every body of skirmishers should have a reserve, the strength and composition of which will
vary according to circumstances.
5. If the body thrown out be within sustaining
distance of the main corps, a very small reserve will
be sufficient for each company, whose duty it shall
be to fill vacant places, furnish the line with cartridges, relieve the fatigued, and serve as a rallying
point for the skirmishers.
6. If the main corps be at a considerable distance,
besides the company reserves, another reserve will
be required, composed of entire companies, which
will be employed to sustain and reinforce such parts
qf the line as may be warmly attacked : this reserve
should be strong enough to relieve at least half the
companies deployed as skirmishers.
7. The reserves should be placed behind the centre

156

INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.

of the line of skirmishers, the company reserves at
one hundred and fifty, and the principal reserve at
four hundred paces. This rule, however, is not invariable. The reserves, while holding themselves
within sustaining distance of the line, should be,
as much as possible, in position to afford each other
mutual protection, and must carefully profit by any
accidents of the ground to conceal themselves from
the view of the enemy, and to shelter themselves
from his fire.
8. The movements of skirmishers will be executed
in quick, or double quick time. The run will be resorted to only in cases of urgent necessity.
9. Skirmishers will be permitted to carry their
pieces in the manner most convenient to them.
10. The movements will be habitually indicated by
the sounds of the bugle.
11. The officers, and, if necessary, the non-commissioned officers, will repeat, and cause the commands to be executed, as soon as they are given; bnt
to avoid mistakes, when the signals are employed,
they will wait until the last bi s;le note is sounded
before commencing the movement.
12. When skirmishers are ordered to move rapidly,
the officers and non-commissioned officers will see
that the men economize their strength, keep cool, and
profit by all the advantages which the ground may
offer for cover. It is only by this continual watchfulness on the part of all grades, that a line of skirmishers can attain success.
13. This instruction will be divided into five articles, and subdivided as follows:
ARTICLE FIRST.

(1.) To deploy forward.
(2.) To deploy by the flank.
(3.) To extend intervals.

INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.

15V

To close interv^ld.

tt) To relieve skirmishers.
ARTICLE SECOND*

(1A
(2.)
?3.)
(4.)

To advance in lino.
To retreat in line.
To change direction.
To march by the flank.
ARTICLE THIRD.

(1.) To fire at a halt.
(2.) To fire marching.
ARTICLE FOURTH.

(1A The rally.
(2. S To form column to march in any direction.
(3.) The assembly.
ARTICLE F I F T H .

To deploy a battalion as skirmishers.
To rally the battalion deployed as skirmishers.
14. In the first four articles, it is supposed that
the movements are executed by a company deployed
as skirmishers, on a front equal to that of the battalion in order of battle. In the fifth article, it is
supposed that each company of the battalion, being
deployed as skirmishers, occupies a front of one hundred paces. From these two examples, rules may
be deduced for all cases, whatever may be the numerical strength of the skirmishers, and the extent
of ground they ought to occupy.

ft!

ARTICLE FIRST.

Deployments.
15. A company may be deployed as skirmishers in
two ways: forward, and by the flank.
14

158

INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.

16. The deployment forward will be adopted when
the company is behind the line on which it is to be
established as skirmishers: it will be deployed by
the flank, when it finds itself already on that line.
17. Whenever a cvsnpany is to be deployed as skirmishers, it will be divided into two platoons, and
each platoon will be subdivided into two sections;
the comrades in battle, forming groups of four men,
will be careful to know and to sustain each other.
The captain will assure himself that the files in the
centre of each platoon and section are designated.
18. A company may be deployed as skirmishers
on its right, left, or centre file, or on any other
named file whatsoever. In this manner, skirmishers
may be thrown forward with the greatest possible
rapidity on any ground they may be required to
occupy.
19. A chain of skirmishers ought generally to preserve their alignment, but no advantages which the
ground may present should be sacrificed to attain
this regularity.
20. The interval between skirmishers depends on
the extent of ground to be covered; but, in general,
it is not proper that the groups of four men should
be removed more than forty paces from each other.
The habitual distance between men of the same group
in open grounds will be five paces; in no case will
they lose sight of each other.
21. The front to be occupied to cover a battalion
comprehends its front and the half of each interval
which separates it from the battalion on its right
and left. If a line, whose wings are not supported,
should be covered by skirmishers, it will be necessary either to protect the flanks with skirmishers, or
to extend them in front of the line so far beyond the
wings as effectually to oppose any attempt which
might be made by the enemy's skirmishers to disturb the flanks.

150

PL 34.

4—-IB

A

fe

B K 1!
5

EM^i

*ft;* *

ET5

Bin

HE a

m J!

(i1

V
To deploy forward (No. 22).

03BB

INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.

159

To deploy forward.
22. A company being at a halt or in march, when
<he captain shall wish to deploy it forward on the
(eft file of the first platoon, holding the second platoon in reserve, he will command:
(1.) First platoon—as skirmishers.
(2.\ On the left file—take intervals.
(3.) MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).

23. At the first command, the second and third
lieutenants will place themselves rapidly two paces
behind the centres of the right and left sections of
the first platoon; the fifth sergeant will move one
pace in front of the centre of the first platoon, and
will place himself between the two sections in the
front rank as soon as the movement begins; the
fourth sergeant will place himself on the left of the
front rank of the same platoon, as soon as he can
pass. The captain will indicate to this sergeant the
point on which he wishes him to direct his march.
The first lieutenant, placing himself before the centre
of the second platoon, will command:
Second platoon backward—MARCH.
24. At this command, the second platoon will step
three paces to the rear, so as to unmask the flank of
the first platoon. It will then be halted by its chief,
and the second sergeant will place himself on the
left, and th$ third sergeant on the right flank of this
platoon.
25. At the command march, the left group of four
men, conducted by the fourth sergeant, will direct
itself on the point indicated; all the other groups of
fours,.. throwing forward briskly the left shoulder,
will move diagonally to the front in double quick
time, so as to gain to the right the space of twenty
paces, which shall be the distance between each

160

INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.

group and that immediately on its left; When the
second group from the left shall arrive on a line
with, and twenty paces from, the first, it will march
straight to the front, conforming to the gait and
direction of the first, keeping constantly on the same
alignment and at twenty paces from it. The third
group, and all the others, will conform to what has
just been prescribed for the second; they will arrive
successively on the line. The right guide will arrive
with the last group.
26. The left guide having reached the point where
the left of the line should rest, the captain will command the skirmishers to halt; the men composing
each group of fours will then immediately deploy at
five paces from each other, and to the right and left
of the front rank man of the even file in each group,
the rear rank men placing themselves on the left of
their file leaders. If any groups be not in line at the
command halt, they will move up rapidly, conforming to what has just been prescribed.
27. If, during the deployment, the line should be
fired upon by the enemy, the captain may cause the
groups of foars to deploy, as they gain their proper
distances.
28. The line being formed, the non-commissioned
officers on the right, left and centre of the platoon
will place themselves ten paces in rear of the line,
and opposite the positions they respectively occupied. The chiefs of sections will promptly rectify
any irregularities, and then place themselves twentyfive or thirty paces in rear of the centre of their
sections, each having with him four men taken from
the reserve, and also a bugler, who will repeat, if
necessary, the signals sounded by the captain.
29. Skirmishers should be particularly instructed
to take advantage of any cover which the ground
may offer, and should lie flat on the ground whenever such a movement is necessary to protect them

INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.

16i

from the fire of the enemy. Regularity in the alignment should yield to this important advantage.
30. When the movement begins, the first lieutenant
will face the second platoon about, and march it
promptly, and by the shortest line, to about one
hundred and fifty paces in rear of the centre of the
line. He will hold it always at this distance, unless
ordered to the contrary.
31. The reserve will conform itself to all the movements of the line. This rule is general.
32. Light troops will carry their bayonets habitually in the scabbard, and this rule applies equally
to the skirmishers and the reserve ; whenever bayonets are required to be fixed,, a particular signal will
be given. The captain will give a general superintendence to the whole deployment, and then promptly
place himself about eighty paces in rear of the centre
of the line. He will have with him a bugler and four
men taken from the reserve.
33. The deployment may be made on the right or
the centre of the platoon, by the same commands,
substituting the indication right or centre, for that of
left file.
34. The deployment on the right or the centre will
be made according to the principles prescribed above:
in this latter case, the centre of the platoon will be
marked by the right group of fours in the second
section: the fifth sergeant will place himself on the
right of this group, and serve as the guide of the
platoon during the deployment.
35. In whatever manner the deployment be made,
on the right, left, or centre, the men in each group of
fours will always deploy at five paces from each other,
and upon the front rank man of the even numbered
file. The deployments will habitually be made at
twenty paces interval; but if a greater interval be
required, it will be indicated in the command.
36. If a company be thrown out as skirmishers, so

162

INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.

near the main body as to render a reserve unnecessary,
the entire company will be extended in the same manner, and according to the same principles, as for the
deployment of a platoon. In this case, the third
lieutenant will command the fourth section, and a
non-commissioned officer designated for that purpose,
the second section; the fifth sergeant will act as
centre guide; the file closers will place themselves
ten paces in rear of the line, and opposite their places
in line of battle. The first and second lieutenant
will each have a bugler near him.
To deploy by the flank.
37. The company being at a halt, when the captain
shall wish to deploy it by the flank, holding the first
platoon in reserve, he will command:
I. Second platoon—as skirmishers. 2. By the right
flank—take intervals. 3. MARCH (or double quick—
MARCH).

38. At the first command, the first and third lieutenants will place themselves, respectively, two paces
behind the centres of the first and second sections of
the second platoon ; the fifth sergeant will place himself one pace in front of the centre of the second
platoon; the third sergeant, as soon as he can pass,
will place himself on the right of the front rank of
the same platoon. The captain will indicate tc him
the point on which he wishes him to direct his march.
The chief of the first platoon will execute what has
been prescribed for the chief of the second platoon,
Nos. 23 and 24. The fourth sergeant will place himself on the left flank of the reserve, the first sergeant
will remain on the right flank.
39. At the second command, the first and third
lieutenants will place themselves two paces behind
the left group of their respective sections

1G2

PI.

4 iSfflttiiiDijrEflissis&Effiiasffl'ninniBisiflHEffiE

l i l Q I I S l S i t !

m E 01 1 E E il
4

3 Ifl l ^ = g ^ g g j

asssssaq-

To deploy by the funk

(No. 37).

E ?- 3 $ *

•, ,«/**>

=^.

INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.

163

40. At the command march, the second platoon will
face to the right, and commence the movement; the
left group of fours will stand fast, but will deploy as
soon as there is room on its right, conforming to what
has been prescribed No. 26; the third sergeant will
place himself on the left of the right group, to conduct it; the second group will halt at twenty paces
from the one on its left, the third group at twenty
paces from the second, and so on to the right. As
the groups halt, they will face to the enemy, and deploy as has been explained for the left group.
41. The chiefs of sections will pay particular attention to the successive deployments of the groups,
keeping near the group about to halt, so as to rectify
any errors which may be commited. When the deployment is completed, they will place themselves
thirty paces in rear of the centre of their sections, as
has been heretofore prescribed. The non-commissioned officers will also place themselves as previously
indicated.
42. As soon as the movement commences, the chief
of the first platoon, causing it to face about, will move
it as indicated No. 30.
43. The deployment may be made by the left flank
according to the same principles, substituting left
flank for right flank.
44. If the captain should wish to deploy the company upon the centre of one of the platoons, he will
command:
,;
1, Second platoon—as skirmishers. 2. By the right and
left flanks—take intervals. 3. MARCH (or double quick
—MARCH).

45. At the first command, the officers and noncommissioned officers will conform to what has been
prescribed No. 38.
46. At the second command, the first lieutenant will
place himself behind the left group of the right seo-

164

INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.

tion of the second platodn, the third lieutenant behind
the right group of the left section of the same platoon.
47. At the command march, the right section will
face to the right, the left section will face to the left,
the group on the right of this latter section will stand
fast. The two sections will move off in opposite direcf ions: the third sergeant will place himself on the
left of the right file to conduct it, the second sergeant
on the right of the left file. The two groups nearest
that which stands fast, will each halt at twenty paces
from this group, and each of the other groups will
halt at twenty paces from the group which is in rear
of it. Each group will deploy as heretofore prescribed No. 40.
48. The first and third lieutenants will direct the
movement, holding themselves always abreast of the
group which is about to halt.
49. The captain can cause the deployment to be
made on any named group whatsoever; in this case,
the fifth sergeant will place himself before the group
indicated, and the deployment will be made according
to the principles heretofore prescribed.
50. The entire company may be also deployed according to the same principles.
To extend intervals.
51. This movement, which is employed to extend a
line of skirmishers, will be executed according to the
principles prescribed for deployments.
52. If it be supposed that the line of skirmishers is
at a halt, and that the captain wishes to extend it to
the left, he will command:
1. By the left flank [so many paces) extend intervals.
2. MARCH (or double quick—-MARCH).

53. At the command march, the group on the right
will stand fast, all the other groups will face to the

164

-a

To extend intervals (No. 51).

PL SC.

INSTRUCTION TOR SKIRMISHERS.

165

left, and each group will extend its interval to the
prescribed distance by the means indicated No. 40.
54. The. men of the same group will continue to
preserve between each other the distance of five
paces, unless the nature of the ground should render
it necessary that they should close nearer, in order
to keep in sight of each other. The intervals refer to
the spaces between the groups, and not to the distances between the men in each group. The intervals
will be taken from the right or left man of the neighboring group.
55. If the line of skirmishers be marching to the
front, and the captain should wish to extend it to the
right, he will command:
1. On the left group (so many paces) extend intervals,
2. MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).

56. The left group, conducted by the guide, will
continue to march on the point of direction; the
other groups throwing forward the left shoulder, and
taking the double quick step, will open their intervals to the prescribed distance, by the means indicated No. 25, conforming also to what is prescribed
No. 54.
57. Intervals may be extended on the centre of the
line, according to the same principles.
58. If, in extending intervals, it be intended that
one company or platoon should occupy a line which
had been previously occupied by two, the men of the
company or platoon which is to retire, will fall successively to the rear as they are relieved by the extension of the intervals.
To close intervals.
59. This movement, like that of opening intervals,
will be executed according to the principles preocribed for the deployments.
60. If the line of skirmishers be halted, and the

166

INSTRUCTION K)R SKIRMISHERS.

captain should wish to close intervals to the left, he
will command;
1, By the left flank (so many paces) close intervals.
2. MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).

61. At the command march, the left group will
stand fast, the other groups will face to the left and
close to the prescribed distance, each group facing to
the enemy as it attains its proper distance.
62. If the line be marching to the front, the captain will command:
1. On the left group (so many paces) close intervals.
2. MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).

63. The left group, conducted by the guide, will
continue to move on in the direction previously indicated ; the other groups, advancing the right shoulder,
will close to the left, until the intervals are reduced
to the prescribed distance.
64. Intervals may be closed on the right, or on the
centre, according to the same principles.
65. When intervals are to be closed up, in order to
reinforce a line of skirmishers, so as to cause two
companies to cover the ground which had been previously occupied by one, the new company will deploy so as to finish its movement at twenty paces in
rear of the line it is to occupy, and the men will
successively move upon that line, as they shall be
unmasked by the men of the old company. The reserves of the two companies will unite behind the
centre of the line.
To relieve a company deployed as skirmishers.
66. AVhen a company of skirmishers is to be re
lieved, the captain will be advised of the intention,
which he will immediately communicate to his first
and second lieutenants.
67. Tho new company will execute its deployment

INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.

167

•forward, so as to finish the movement at about t w e n t y
p a c e s in r e a r of the line.
68. Arrived a t t h i s distance, t h e men of t h e new
company, by command of their captain, will advance
r a p i d l y a few paces beyond the old line and h a l t ;
the new line being established, t h e old company will
assemble on its reserve, taking care not to get into
g r o u p s of fours u n t i l they a r e beyond the fire of the
enemy.
69. If the skirmishers to be relieved are m a r c h i n g
in r e t r e a t , the company thrown out to relieve them
will deploy b y the flank, as prescribed No. 88 a n d
following. The old skirmishers will continue to r e t i r e
w i t h order, a n d having passed the new line, t h e y will
form upon the reserve.
ARTICLE

SECOND.

To advance.
To advance in line, and to retreat in line*
70. When a platoon or a company deployed as
skirmishers is m a r c h i n g by t h e front, t h e guide will
be habitually in t h e centre. No p a r t i c u l a r indication
to this effect need be given in t h e commands, b u t if on
t h e c o n t r a r y it be intended t h a t the directing guide
should be on t h e r i g h t , or left, the command guide
right, or guide left, will be given immediately after
t h a t of forward.
71. The captain, wishing the line of s k i r m i s h e r s to
advance, will c o m m a n d :
1. Fonoard.

2. M A R C H (or double

quick—MARCH).

72. This command will be repeated with the great*
est r a p i d i t y b y t h e chiefs of sections, and, i n cas«
of need, b y t h e sergeants.
This r u l e is general,
whether t h e skirmishers m a r c h by t h e front or by
the flank.
73. A t t h e first command, three s e r g e a n t s will move
15

168

INSTRUCTION" FOR SKIRMISHERS.

briskly on the line, the first on the right, the second
on the left, and the third in the centre.
74. At the command march, the line will move to
the front, the guide charged with the direction will
move on the point indicated to him, the skirmishers
will hold themselves aligned on this guide, and preserve their intervals towards him.
75. The chiefs of sections will march immediately
behind their sections, so as to direct their movements.
76. The captain will give a general superintendence to the movement.
77. When he shall wish to halt the skirmishers, he
will command:
HALT.

78. At this command, briskly repeated, the line
will halt. The chiefs of sections will promptly rectify
any irregularity in the alignment and intervals, and
after taking every possible advantage which the
ground may offer for protecting the men, they* with
the three sergeants in the Hue, will retire to their
proper places in rear.
79. The captain, wishing to march the skirmishers
in retreat, will command:
I. In retreat. 2. MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).
80. At the first command, the three sergeants will
move on the line as prescribed No. 73.
81. At the command march, the skirmishers will
face about individually, and march to the rear, conforming to the principles prescribed No. 74.
82. The officers and sergeants will use every exertion to preserve order.
83. To halt the skirmishers, marching in retreat,
the captain will command:
HALT.

84. At this command, the skirmishers will halt,
and immediately face 'o the front.

INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.

169

85 The chiefs of sections and the three guides
will each conform himself to what is prescribed
No. 78.
To change direction.
86. If the commander of a line of skirmishers
shall wish to cause it to change direction to the
right, he "will command:
1. Right wheel. 2. MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).
87. At the command march, the right guide will
mark time in his place; the left guide will move in a
circle to the right, and, that he may properly regulato
his movements, will occasionally cast his eyes to the
right, so as to observe the direction of the line, and
the nature of the ground to be passed over. The
centre guide will also march in a circle to the right,
and in order to conform his movements to the general
direction, will take care that his steps are only half
the length of the steps of the guide on the left.
88. The skirmishers will regulate the length of
their steps by their distance from the marching flank,
being Jess as they approach the pivot, and greater as
they are removed from i t ; they will often look to
the marching flank, so as to preserve the direction
and their intervals.
89. When the commander of the line shall wish to
resume the direct march, he will command :
1. Forward. 2. MARCH.

90. At the command march, the line will cease \o
wheel, and the skirmishers will move direct to the
front; the centre guide will march on the point which
will be indicated to him.
91. If the captain should wish to halt the line, in
place of moving it to the front, he will command:
HALT.

92. At this command, the line will halt.

170

INSTRUCTION* FOR SKIRMISHERS.

93. A change of direction to the left will be made
according to the same principles, and by inverse
means.
94. A line of skirmishers marching in retreat, will
change direction by the same means, and by the same
commands, as a line marching in advance; for example, if the captain should wish to refuse his left,
now become the right, he will command: 1. Left
wheel. 2. MARCH. At the command halt, the skirmishers will face to the enemy.
95. But if, instead of halting the line, the captain
should wish to continue to march it in retreat, h-z
Will, when he judges the line has wheeled sufficiently,
command:
1. In retreat.
2. MARCH.

To march by the flank.
96. The captain, wishing the skirmishers to marob
by the right flank, will command:
1. By the right JlanJc
2. MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).

97. At the first command, the three sergeants will
place themselves on the line.
98. At the command march, the skirmishers will
face to the right and move off; the right guide will
place himself by the side of the leading man on the
right to conduct him, and will march on the point indicated; each skirmisher will take care to follow
exactly in the direction of the one immediately preceding him, and to preserve his distance.
99. The skirmishers may be marched by the left
flank, according to the same principles, and by the
same commands, substituting left for right; the left
guide will place himself by the side of the leading
man to conduct him.

INSTRUCTION FOB SKIRMISHERS.

171

100. If the skirmishers be matching by the flank,
and the captain should wish to halt them, he will
command:
HALT.

•101. At this command, the skirmishers will halt
and face to the enemy. The officers and sergeants
will conform to what has been prescribed No. 78.
102. The reserve should execute all the movements
of the line, and be held always about one hundred
and fifty paces from it, so as to be in position to
second its operations.
103. When the chief of the reserve shall wish to
march it in advance, he will command: 1. Platoon
forward. 2. Guide left. 3. MARCH. If he should
wish to march it in retreat, he will command: 1. In
retreat. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right. At the command halt, it will re-face to the enemy.
104. The men should be made to understand that
the signals or commands, such as forward, mean that
the skirmishers shall march on the enemy; in retreat,
that they shall retire, and to the right or left flank, that
the men must face to the right or left, whatever may
be their position.
105. If the skirmishers be marching by the flank,
and the captain should wish to change direction to
the right (or left), he will command: 1. By file right
(or left). 2. MARCH. These movements will also be
executed by the signals Nos. 14 and 15.
ARTICLE THIRD.

The firings.
106. Skirmishers will fire either at a halt or
marching.
To fire at a halt.
107. To cause this fire to be executed, th^ captain
will command:

L72

INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.

Commence-—FIRING.
108. At this command, briskly repeated, the men
of the front rank will commence firing ; they "will reload rapidly, and hold themselves in readiness to fire
again. During this time the men of the rear rank
will come to a ready, and as soon as their respective
file leaders have loaded, they will also fire and re-load.
The men of each file will thus continue the firing,
conforming to this principle, that the one or the other
shall always have his piece loaded.
109. Light troops should be always calm, so as to
aim with accuracy; they should, moreover, endeavor
to estimate correctly the distances between themselves
and the enemy to be hit, and thus be enabled to deliver their fire with the greater certainty of success.
110. Skirmishers will not remain in the same place
whilst re-loading, unless protected by accidents in the
ground.
To fire marching.
111. This fire will be executed by the same commands as the fire at a halt.
112. At the command commence firing, if the line
be advancing, the front rank man of every file will
lialt, fire, and re-load before throwing himself forward.
The rear rank man of the same file will continue to
march, and after passing ten or twelve paces beyond
his front rank man, will halt, come to a ready, select
his object, and fire when his front rank man has
loaded; the fire will thus continue to be executed by
each file; the skirmishers will keep united, and endeavor, as much as possible, to preserve the general
direction of the alignment.
113. If the line be marching in retreat, at the command commencefiring,the front rank man of every fil«
will halt, face to the enemy, fire, and then re-loaci
whilst moving to the rear; the rear rank man of tlw
same file will continue to march, and halt ten oi

INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.

173

twelve paces beyond his front rank man, face about,
conie to a ready, and fire, when his front rank man
nas passed him in retreat and loaded; after which,
he will move to the rear and re-load; the front rank
man in his turn, after marching briskly to the rear,
will halt at ten or twelve paces from the rear rank,
face to the enemy, load his piece and fire, conforming
to what has just been prescribed; the firing will thus
be continued.
114. If the company be marching by the right
flank, at the command, commencefiring,the front rank
man of every file will face to the enemy, step one
pace forward, halt, and fire; the rear rank man will
continue to move forward. As soon as the front rank
man has fired, he will place himself briskly behind
his rear rank man and re-load whilst marching. When
he has loaded, the rear rank man will, in his turn,
step one pace forward, halt, and fire, and, returning
to the ranks, will place himself behind his front rank
man; the latter, in his turn, will act in the same
manner, observing the same principles. At the command, cease firing, the men of the rear rank will retake their original positions, if not already there.
115. If the company be marching by the left flank,
the fire will be executed according to the same principles, but in this case it will be the rear rank men
who will fire first.
116. The following rules will be observed in the
cases to which they apply.
117. If the line be firing at a halt, or whilst marching by the flank, at the command, Forward—MARCH,
it will be the men whose pieces are loaded, without
regard to the particular rank to which they belong,
who will move to the front. Those men whose pieces
have been discharged, will remain in their places to
load them before moving forward, and the firing will
be continued agreeably to the principles prescribed
N<>.li2.

174

INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.

118. If the line be firing either at a halt, advanc*
ing, or whilst marching by the flank, at the command, In retreat—MAEOH, the men whose pieces are
loaded will remain faced to the enemy, and will fire
in this position; the men whose pieces are discharged
will retreat loading them, and the fire will be continued agreeably to the principles prescribed No. 113.
119. If the line of skirmishers be firing either at
a halt, advancing, or in retreat, at the command, By
the right (or left) flank—MARCH, the men whose pieces
are loaded will step one pace out of the general alignment, face to the enemy, and fire in this position; the
men whose pieces are unloaded will face to the right
(or left) and march in the direction indicated. The
men who stepped out of the ranks will place themselves, immediately after firing, upon the general direction, ' and in rear of their front or rear rank men,
as the case may be. The fire will be continued according to the principles prescribed No. 114.
120. Skirmishers will be habituated to load their
pieces whilst marching; but they will be enjoined
to halt always an instant, when in the act of charging
cartridge, and priming.
121. They should be practised to fire and load
kneeling, lying down, and sitting, and much liberty
should be allowed in these exercises, in order that
they may be executed in the manner found to be
most convenient. Skirmishers should be cautioned
not to forget that, in whatever position they may load,
it is important that the piece should be placed upright before ramming, in order that the entire charge
of powder may reach the bottom of the bore.
122. In commencing the fire, the men of the same
rank should not all fire at once, and the men of the
eame file should be particular that one or the Other
of them be always loaded.
123. In retreating, the officer commanding the
skirmishers should seize on every advantage which.

175
CIBES«!5iW!i!li!ii5Sfi'!DlaS

PL 38.

ESSEiaisiSIES!

S l s l l

1 MM | y y i 1 m y j IIMBJ ijyii n mmm H joyy j gyyi g §
g

310> I" 13

i
1M

sua a

.liBi,

J8H,
\ \ \

M:

/

/ / /

!

y

The rally (No. 127): by sections (No. 132), by platoons
(No. 137), on the reserve (No. 139).

INSTRUCTION F05C SKIRMISHERS,

175

the ground may present, for arresting the enemy ag
long as possible.
124. At the signal to cease firing, the captain will
gee that the order is promptly obeyed; but the men
who may not be loaded, will load. If the line be
marching, it will continue the movement; but the
man of each file who happens to be in front, will
wait until the man in rear shall be abreast with him.
125. If a line of skirmishers be firing advancing,
at the command halt, the line will re-form upon the
skirmishers who are in front; when the line is retreating, upon the skirmishers who are in rear.
126. Officers should watch with the greatest possible vigilance over a line of skirmishers; in battle,
they should neither carry a rifle nor fowling-piece.
In all the firings, they, as well as tbe sergeants,
should see that order and silence are preserved, and
that the skirmishers do not wander imprudently;
they should especially caution them to be calm and
collected; not to fire until they distinctly perceive
the objects at which they aim, and are sure that
those objects are within proper range. Skirmishers
should take advantage promptly, and with intelligence, of all shelter, and of all accidents of the
ground, to conceal themselves from the view of the
enemy, and to protect themselves from his fire. It
may often happen, that intervals are momentarily
lost when several men near each other find a common
shelter; but when they quit this position, they should
immediately resume their intervals and their places
in line, so that they may not, by crowding, needlessly
expose themselves to the fire of the enemy.
ARTICLE FOURTH.
THE BALLY,

To form column.
127. A company deployed as skirmishers, is rallied

176

INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.

in order to oppose the enemy with better success;
the rallies are made at a run, and with bayonets
fixed; when ordered to rally, the skirmishers fix
bayonets without command.
128. There are several ways of rallying, which
the chief of the line will adopt according to circumstances.
129. If the line, marching or at a halt, be merely
disturbed by scattered horsemen, it will not be necessary to fall back on the reserve, but the captain will
cause bayonets to be fixed. If the horsemen should,
however, advance to charge the skirmishers, the
captain will command, rally by fours. The line will
halt if marching, and the four men of each group
will execute this rally in the following manner: the
front rank man of the even numbered file will take
the position of guard against cavalry; the rear rank
man of the odd numbered file will also take the
position of guard against cavalry, turning his back to
him, his right foot thirteen inches from the right
foot of the former, and parallel to it; the front rank
man of the odd file, and the rear rank man of the
even file, will also place themselves back to back,
taking a like position, and between the two men
already established, facing to the right and left; the
right feet of the four men will be brought together,
forming a square, and serving for mutual support.
The four men in each group will come to a ready,
fire as occasion may offer, and load without moving
their feet.
130. The captain and chiefs of sections will each
cause the four men who constitute his guard to form
square, the men separating so as to enable him and
the bugler to place themselves in the centre. The
three sergeants will each promptly place himself in
the group nearest him in the line of skirmishers.
131. Whenever the captain shall judge these squares

INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.

177

too weak, but should wish to hold his position by
strengthening his line, he will command:
Rally by sections.
132. At this command, the chiefs of sections will
move rapidly on the centre group of their respective
sections, or on any other interior group whose position might offer a shelter, or other particular advantage ; the skirmishers will collect rapidly at a run
on this group, and without distinction of numbers.
The men composing the group on which the formation is made, will immediately form square, as heretofore explained, and elevate their pieces, the bayonets uppermost, in order to indicate the point on
which the rally is to be made. The other skirmishers, as they arrive, will occupy and fill the open
angular spaces between these four men, and successively rally around this first nucleus, and in such
manner as to form rapidly a compact circle. The
skirmishers will take, as they arrive, the position of
charge bayonet, the point of the bayonet more elevated, and will cock their pieces in this position.
The movement concluded, the two exterior ranks will
fire as occasion may offer, and load without moving
their feet.
133. The captain will move rapidly with his guard,
wherever he may judge his presence most necessary.
134. The officers and sergeants will be particular to
observe that the rally is made in silence, and with
promptitude and order; that some pieces in each of
their subdivisions be at all times loaded, and that the
fire is directed on those points only where it will be
most effective.
135. If the reserve should be threatened, it will
form into a circle around its chief.
136. If the captain, or commander of a line of skirmishers formed of many platoons, should judge that
the rally by section does not offer sufficient resistance,

178

INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.

he will cause the rally by platoons to be executed, and
for this purpose will command:
Rally by platoons.
137. This movement will be executed according to
the same principles, and by the same means, as the
rally by sections. The chiefs of platoon will conform
to what has been prescribed for the chiefs of section.
138. The captain wishing to rally the skirmishers
on the reserve, will command:
Rally on the reserve.
139. At this command, the captain will move briskly
on the reserve; the officer who commands it will take
immediate steps to form square; for this purpose, he
will cause the half sections on the flanks to be thrown
perpendicularly to the rear; he will order the men to
come to a ready.
140. The skirmishers of each section, taking the
run, will form rapidly into groups, and upon that man
of each group who is nearest the centre of the section. These groups will direct themselves diagonally
towards each other, and in such manner as to form
into sections with the greatest possible rapidity while
moving to the rear; the officers and sergeants will
see that this formation is made in proper order, and
the chiefs will direct their sections upon the reserve,
taking care to unmask it to the right and left. As
the skirmishers arrive, they will continue and complete the formation of the square begun by the reserve,
closing in rapidly upon the latter, without regard to
their places in line; they will come to a ready without command, and fire upon the enemy; which will
also be done by the reserve as soon as it is unmasked
by the skirmishers.
141. If a section should be closely pressed by
cavalry while retreating, its chief will command halt;
i t this command, the men will form rapidly into a

INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.

179

compact circle around the officer, who will re-form
his section and resume the march, the moment he can
do so with safety.
142. The formation of the square in a prompt and
efficient manner, requires coolness and activity on the
part of both officers and sergeants.
143. The captain will also profit by every moment
of respite which the enemy's cavalry may leave him;
as soon as he can, he will endeavor to place himself
beyond the reach of their charges, either by gaining
a position where he may defend himself with advantage, or by returning to the corps to which he belongs.
For this purpose, being in square, he will cause the
company to break into column by platoons at half
distance; to this effect, he will command:
1. Form column. 2. MARCH.
144. At the command march, each platoon will dress
on its centre, and the platoon which was facing to the
rear will face about without command. The guides
will place themselves on the right and left of their
respective platoons, those of the second platoon will
place themselves at half distance from those of the
first, counting fioin the rear rank. These dispositions being made, the captain can move the column
in whatever direction he may judge proper.
145. If he wishes to march it in retreat, he will
command:
1. In retreat. 2. MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).
146. At the command march, the column will immediately face by the rear rank, and move off in the
opposite direction. As soon as the column is in
motion, the captain will command:
3. Guide right (or left).
147. He will indicate the direction to the leading

180

INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.

guide; the guides will march at their proper distances,
and the men will keep aligned.
148. If again threatened by cavalry, the captain
will command:
1. Form square. 2. MARCH.
149. At the command march, the column will halt;
the first platoon will face about briskly, and the outer
half sections of each platoon will be thrown perpendicularly to the rear, so as to form the second and
third fronts of the square. The officers and sergeants
will promptly rectify any irregularities which may be
committed.
150. If he should wish to march the column in
advance, the captain will command:
1. Form column. 2. MARCH.
151. Which will be executed as prescribed No.
144.
152. The column being formed, the captain will
command:
1. Forward. 2. MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).

3. Guide left (or right).
153. At the second command, the column will move
forward, and at the third command, the men will take
the touch of elbows to the side of the guide.
154. If the captain should wish the column to
gain ground to the right or left, he will do so by
rapid wheels to the side opposite the guide, and, for
this purpose, will change the guide whenever it may
be necessary.
155. If a company be in column by platoon, at
half distance, right in front, the captain can deploy
the first platoon as skirmishers by the means already
explained; but if it should be his wish to deploy the
second platoon forward on the centre fire, leaving the
•first platoon in reserve, he will command;

INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.
IV Second platoon—as
file—take
intervals.

181

skirmishers.
2. On the centre
3. M A R C H (or double quick—

MARCH).

156. At t h e first command, t h e ch?ef of t h e first
platoon will caution his platoon to s t a n d f a s t ; t h e
chiefs of sections of t h e second platoon will place
themselves before t h e centre of their s e c t i o n s ; t h e
fifth s e r g e a n t will place himself one p a c e in front of
t h e centre of t h e second platoon.
157. A t t h e second command, t h e chief of t h e
r i g h t section, second platoon, will c o m m a n d : Section
right face; the chief of the left section: Section left
face.
158. At the command march, these sections will
move,off briskly in opposite directions, a n d h a v i n g
u n m a s k e d the first platoon, the chiefs of sections
will respectively c o m m a n d : By the left
flank—MARCH,
a n d By the right flank—MARCH ; and as soon as these
sections a r r i v e on the alignment of t h e first platoon,
t h e y will command, As skirmishers—MARCH.
The
g r o u p s will t h e n deploy according to prescribed
principles, on t h e r i g h t group of the left section,
which will be directed by t h e fifth sergeant on t h e
point indicated
159. If t h e captain should wish t h e deployment
made b y t h e flank, the second platoon will be moved
to the front b y the means above stated, a n d h a l t e d
after passing some steps beyond the alignment of t h e
first p l a t o o n ; t h e deployment will t h e n be made b y
t h e flank according to the principles p r e s c r i b e d .
160. When one or more platoons a r e deployed a s
skirmishers, and the captain should wish to r a l l y
t h e m on the battalion, h e will c o m m a n d :
Rally on' the

battalion.

1 6 1 . At this command, the skirmishers a n d fha
reserve, n ) m a t t e r w h a t position the c o m p a n y t o
which they belong may occupy in order of b a t t l e , will
16

W2

INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.

rapidly unmask the front of the battalion, directing
themselves in a run towards its nearest flank, and
then form in its rear.
. 162. As soon as the skirmishers have passed beyond the line of file closers, the men will take the
quick step, and the chief of each platoon or section
"will re-form his subdivision, and place it in column
behind the wing on which it is rallied, and at ten
paces from the rank of file closers. These subdivisions will not be moved except by order of the commander of the battalion, who may, if he thinks
I roper, throw them into line of battle at the extremities of the line, or in the intervals between the
battalions.
163. If many platoons should be united behind
the same wing of a battalion, or behind any shelter
whatsoever, they should be formed always into close
column, or into column at half distance.
164. When the battalion, covered by a company
of skirmishers, shall be formed into square, the
platoons and sections of the covering company will
be directed by their chiefs to the rear of the square,
which will be opened at the angles to receive the
skirmishers, who will be then formed into close
column by platoons in rear of the first front of the
square.
165. If circumstances should prevent the angles
of the square from being opened, the skirmishers
will throw themselves at the feet of the front rank
men, the right knee on the ground, the butt of the
piece resting on the thigh, the bayonet in a threatening position. A part may also place themselves about
the angles, where they can render good service by
defending the sectors without fire.
166. If the battalion on which the skirmishers are
rallied be in column ready to form square, the skirmishers will be formed into close column by platoon,
in rear of the centre of the third division, and at the

INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.

183

command, Form square—MARCH, they will move forward and close on the buglers.
167. When skirmishers have been rallied by platoon
or section behind the wings of a battalion, and it be
wished to deploy them again to the front, they will
be marched by the flank towards the intervals on the
wings, and be then deployed so as to cover the front
of the battalion.
168. When platoons or sections, placed in the
interior of squares or columns, are to be deployed,
they will be marched out by the flanks, and then
thrown forward, as is prescribed No. 157; as soon
as they shall have unmasked the c6lumn or square,
they will be deployed, the one on the right, the othe*
on the left file.
The assembly.
169. A company deployed as skirmishers will be
assembled when there is no longer danger of its being
disturbed; the assembly will be made habitually in
quick time.
170. The captain wishing to assemble the skirmish*
ers on the reserve, will command:
Assemble on the reserve.
171. At this command, the skirmishers will assem
ble by groups of fours ; the front rank men will place
themselves behind their rear rank men; and each
group of fours will direct itself on the reserve, where
each will take its proper place in the ranks. When
the company is re-formed, it will rejoin the battalion
to which it belongs.
172. It may be also proper to assemble the skirmishers on the centre, or on the right or left of the
line, either marching or at a halt.
173. If the captain should wish to assemble them
on the centre while marching, he wilJ command :

184

INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.

Assemble on the centre,
174. At this command, the centre guide will continue to march directly to the front on the point indicated ; the front rank man of the directing file will
follow the guide, and be covered by his rear rank
man; the other two comrades of this group, and
likewise those on their left, will march diagonally,
advancing the left shoulder and accelerating the gait,
so as to re-form the groups while drawing nearer and
nearer the directing file; the men of the right section
will unite in tlie same manner into groups, and then
upon the directing file, throwing forward the right
shoulder. As they successively unite on the centre,
the men will bring their pieces to the right shoulder.
175. To assemble on the right or left file will be
executed according to the same principles.
176. The assembly of a line marching in retreat
will also be executed according to the same principles, the front rank men marching behind their
rear rank men.
177. To assemble the line of skirmishers at a halt,
arid on the line they occupy, the captain will give the
same commands; the skirmishers will face to the right
or left, according as they should march by the right
or left flank, re-form the groups while marching, and
thus arrive on the file which served as the point of
formation. As they successively arrive, the skirmishers
will support arms.
ABTICLE FIFTH.

To deploy a battalion as skirmishers, and to rally
this battalion.
To deploy the battalion as sitirmishers.
[ 178.

A battalion being in line of battle, if the commander should wish to deploy it on the right of the
sixth company, holding the three right companies in

184

PI. 39.

S3.

111

k©sr

-

——-^

,-0

Deployment of a battalion of
skirmishers (No. 178).

^i«

188

PI. 40.

---<U...

•I

DQDOI

an
HOI
The rally (No. 19?)..

INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.?

l8o

reserve, he Will signify his intentidn to the lieutenant
colonel and adjutant, and also to the major, who will
be directed to take charge of the reserve. He will
point out to the lieutenant colonel the direction h0
wishes to give the line, as well as the point where ho
wishes the right of the sixth company to rest, and to
the commander of the reserve the place he may wish
it established.
179. The lieutenant colonel will move rapidly in
front of the right of the sixth company, and the adjutant in front of the left of the same company. The
commander of the reserve will dispose of it in the
manner to be hereinafter indicated.
180. The colonel will command:
1. First (or second) platoons—as skirmishers.
2. On the right of the sixth company—take intervals.
3. MARCH (or douule quick—MARCH).

181. At the second command, the captains of the
fifth and sixth companies will prepare to deploy the
first platoons of their respective companies, the sixth
on its right, the fifth on its left file.
182. The captain of the fourth company will face
it to the right, and the captains of the seventh and
eighth companies will face their respective companies
io the left.
183. At the command march, the movement will
commence. The platoons of the fifth and sixth companies will deploy forward; the right guide of the
sixth will march on the point which will be indicated
to him by the lieutenant colonel.
184. The company which has faced to the right,
and also the companies which have faced to the left,
will march straight forward. The fourth company
will take an interval of one hundred paces counting
from the left of the fifth, and its chief will deploy ita
first platoon on its left file. The seventh and eighth?
companies will each take an interval of one hundred

186

INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.

paces, c< {anting from the first file of the company
which is immediately on its right; and the chiefs of
these companies will afterwards deploy their first
platoons on the right file.
185. The guides who conduct the files on which the
deployment is made, should be careful to direct themselves towards the outer man of the neighboring
company, already deployed as skirmishers; or, if the
company has not finished its deployment, they will
judge carefully the distance which may still be required to place all these files in line, and will then
march on the point thus marked out. The companies, as they arrive oh the line, will align themselves on those already deployed.
186. The lieutenant colonel and adjutant will follow the deployment, the one on the right, the other
on the left; the movement concluded, they will place
themselves near the colonel.
187. The reserves of the companies will be established in echellon in the following manner: the
reserve of the sixth company will be placed one
hundred and fifty paces in rear of the right of this
company; the reserves of the fourth and fifth companies, united, opposite the centre of their line of
skirmishers, and thirty paces in advance of the reserve of the sixth company; the reserves of the seventh
and eighth companies, also united, opposite the
centre of their line of skirmishers, and thirty paces
farther to the rear than the reserve of the sixth
company.
188. The major commanding the companies com*
posing the reserve, on receiving an order from the
colonel to that effect, will march these companies
thirty paces to the rear, and will then ploy them
into column by company, at half distance; after
which, he will conduct the column to the point which
shall ]?ave been indicated to him.
189 The colonel will have a general superintend •

INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.

187

«nce of i he movement; and, when it is finished,
will wove to a point in rear of the line, whence his
view may best embrace all the parts^ in order to
direct their movements.
190. If, instead of deploying forward, it be desired to deploy by the flank, the sixth and fifth companies will be moved to the front ten or twelve paces,
halted, and deployed by the flank, the one on the
right, the other on the left file, by the means already
indicated. Each of the other companies will be
marched by the flank; and as soon as the last file
of the company, next towards the direction, shall
have taken its interval, it will be moved upon the
line established by the fifth and sixth companies,
halted, and deployed.
191. In the preceding example, it has been sup
posed that the battalion was in order of battle; but
if in column, it would be deployed as skirmishers by
the same commands and according to the same principles.
192. If the deployment is to be made forward, the
directing company, as soon as it is unmasked, will be
moved ten or twelve paces in front of the head of the
column, and will be then deployed on the file indicated. Each of the other companies will take its interval to the right or left, and deploy as soon as it is
taken.
193. If the deployment is to be made by the flank,
the directing company will be moved in the same
manner to the front, as soon as it is unmasked, and
will then be halted and deployed by the flank on the
file indicated. Each of the other companies will be
marched by the flank, and, when its interval is taken,
will be moved on the line, halted, and deployed as
soon as the company next towards the direction shall
Jiave finished its deployment.
194. It has been prescribed to place the reserves in
echelldn, in order that they may, in the event of a

188

INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS*

rally, be able to protect themselves without injuring
each other; and the reserves of two contiguous companies have been united, in order to diminish the
number of the echellons, and to increase their capacity for resisting cavalry.
195. The echellons, in the example given, descend
from right to left; but they may, on an indication
from the colonel to that effect, be posted on the same
principle, so as to descend from left to right.
196. When the color-company is to be deployed as
skirmishers, the color, without its guard, will be detached, and remain with the battalion reserve.
The Rally.
197. The colonel may cause all the various movements prescribed for a company, to be executed by
the battalion, and by the same commands and the
same signals. When he wishes to rally the battalion,
he will cause the rally on the battalion to be sounded,
and will so dispose his reserve as to protect this
movement.
198. The companies deployed as skirmishers will
be rallied in squares on their respective reserves;
each reserve of two contiguous companies will form
the first front of the square, throwing to the rear the
sections on the flanks; the skirmishers who arrive
first will complete the lateral fronts, and the last the
fourth front. The officers and sergeants will superintend the rally, and as fast as the men arrive, they
will form them into two ranks, without regard to
height, and cause them to face outwards.
199. The rally being effected, the commanders of
squares will profit by any interval of time the cavalry
may allow for putting them in safety, either by
marching upon the battalion reserve, or by seizing
an advantageous position; to this end, each of the
squares will be formed into column, and march in

INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.

189

this order; and if threatened anew, it will halt, and
again form itself into square.
200. As the companies successively arrive near the
battalion reserve, each will re-form as promptly as
possible, and, without regard to designation or number, take place in the column next in rear of the com*
pahies already in it.
201. The battalion reserve will also form square, if
itself threatened by cavalry. In this case, the companies in marching towards it will place themselves
promptly in the sectors without fire, and thus march
on the squares.

BSD OF INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.

190

SWORD MANUAL, ETC.

MANUAL OF THE SWORD OR SABRE, FOR
OFFICERS.
POSITION OF THE SWORD OR SABRE, UNDER ARMS

The carry. The gripe is in the right hand, which
will be supported against the right hip, the back of
the blade against the shoulder.
TO SALUTE WITH THE SWORD OR SABRE.

Three times (or pauses).
One. At the distance of six paces from the person
to be saluted, raise the sword or sabre perpendicularly,
the point up, the fiat of the blade opposite to the
right eye, the guard at the height of the shoulder,
the elbow supported on the body.
Two. Drop the point of the sword or sabre by ex
tending the arm, so that the right hand may be
brought to the side of the right thigh, and remain in
that position until the person to whom the salute is
rendered shall be passed, or shall have passed, six
paces.
Three. Raise the sword or sabre smartly, and place
the back of the blade against the right shoulder.

COLOR-SALUTE.
In the ranks, the color-bearer, whether at a halt
or in march, will always carry the heel of the colorlance supported at the right hip, the right hand
generally placed on the lance at the height of th«

RELIEVING SENTINELS.

191

shoulder, to hold it steady. When the color has to
render honors, the color-bearer will salute as follows:
At the distance of six paces slip the right hand
along the lance to the height of the eye; lower the
lance by straightening the arm to its full extent, the
heel of the lance remaining at the hip, and bring
back the lance to the habitual position when the
person saluted shall be passed, or shall have passed,
six paces.

MANUAL FOR RELIEVING SENTINELS.
Arms—PORT.

One time and one motion.
Throw the piece diagonally across the body, the
lock to the front, seize it smartly at the same instant
with both hands, the right at the handle, the left at
the lower band, the two thumbs pointing towards the
muzzle, the barrel sloping upwards and crossing
opposite the point of the left shoulder, the butt proportionally lowered. The palm of the right hand
will be above, and that of the left under, the piece,
the nails of both hands next to the body, to which
the elbows will be closed.
Shoulder—ARM S.
One time and two motions.
{First motion.) Bring the piece smartly to the right
shoulder, placing the right hand as in the position
of shoulder arms, slip the left hand to the height of
the shoulder, the fingers extended.
(Second motion.) Drop the left hand smartly by the
side.
Being on parade and at order arms, if it be wished
to give the men rest, the command will be •

|92

INSTRUCTION FOR CHIEF BUGLER, ETC.

Parade-r-REST.
At the command rest, turn the piece on the heel of
the butt, the barrel to the left, the muzzle in front
of the centre of the body; seize it at the same time
with the left hand just above, and with the right at
the upper band; carry the right foot six inches to
the rear, the left knee slightly bent.

INSTRUCTION FOR THE CHIEF BUGLER
AND DRUM MAJOR.
The posts of the field music and band have been
given TITLE L, for the order in battle.
In column in manoeuvre, the field music and band
will march abreast with the left centre company, and
on the side opposite the guide.
In column in route, as well as in the passage of
defiles to the front or in retreat, they will march at
the head of their respective battalions.

GENERAL CiLLS.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12
13

Attention.
The general.
The assembly,
To the color.
The recall.
Quick time.
Double quick time.
The charge.
The reveille.
Retreat.
Tattoo.
To extinguish lights,
Assembly of the buglers

INSTRUCTION FOR CHIEF W&UER, ETC.

14. Assembly of the guard.
15. Orders for orderly sergeants.
16. For officers to take their places
in line after firing.
17. The disperse.
18. Officers' call.
19. Breakfast call.
20. Dinner call.
21. Sick call.
22. Fatigue call.
23. Church call.
24. Brill call.
25. School call.

CALLS FOR SKIRMISHERS.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.

J?Yx bayonet.
£/«/«; bayonet.
$*«c& ftVne.
Double quick time.
!TAe nm.
Deploy as skirmishers.
Forward.
V» retreat.
J7a&.
J5y ^ e n#fa /tfrc^.
ify Z e Ze/£ ^«nA;.
&
Commence firing.
Cease firing.
Change direction to the right.
Change direction to the left,
Z2e rfown.
Rise up.
ifo% by fours.
^aZZi/fo/sections.
i2a% by platoons.

193

194

INSTRUCTION FOR CHIEF BUGLER, ETC.

21. Rally on the reserve,
22. Rally on the battalion,
23. Assemble on the battalion.
NOTE.—When the whole of the troops, in the
sanie camp or garrison, are to depart, the general, the
assembly, and to the color, will be beaten or sounded, at
the proper intervals, in the order here mentioned.
At the first, the troops will prepare for the movement ; at the second, they will form by company, and
at the third, unite by battalion.

EXPLANATION OF THE SIGNS.
MOVEMENT OF THE METRONOME.
76 =

J — j&s 4— or 76 steps to the minute.

80 =

J . — i o i * — or 80 steps to the minute.
*

100 =

I IP- 6
J.—-Sr\

&
120 =

or 100 steps to the minute.

SB 8

J — $£v 2 — or 120 steps to the minute.

Silence . . ^ — Demi-silence • • •f

GENERAL CALLS.
1.—ATTENTION".
120 = j .iZZe^ro.

^

*- •#-#—

^?—R-w—1

i »[ 1 — ^ - 4

fe^^^^^i^i
ir

195

196

GENERAL CALLS.

2.-THE GENERAL.
130 = J Presto.

i

E

W) .'J-3-Jii—j=5

z r n ..a;

i s

3.-THE ASSEMBLY.
80 = J Andante.

f^m^m r * t
§11111
s
fn^uT^if^g^
y?Tr~T

197

GENERAL CALLS.

4.-TO THE

80 = J

i

COLOR.

Andante.

P^m

*£

r \\ u-1

ggffi—f^=M^

E^gg^i^^gpi

^^m

Ei
¥

5.—THE RECALL.
80 = ^ Andante.

p^RUIh^M

|d±g=g^SEgiiiE
e.-QUICK TIME.

110 = J Allegro.

W$EH=&l

m

GENERAL CALLS.

^ £

££

—| y,J-

famW-

33±

HI

sn

^^£&r=£BJ^*Q-^S

jjg^pgEJ^^j
7.-BOUBLE QUICK T I M E .
165 = J Allegro.

Sdiss
pBf^l^^^gj £

^i^glsi
^^^^^^^^1

s

W4

^^Mffljjj^^fl^jfcj

GENERAL CALLS.

m

5S
i mm^wf^^m
8 . - T H E CHARGE.

115 = J Allegro.

H

&
$

$--& }-^Z-^—d^-4-\^8

g—tf—Zg.

: g ± ^ # 4—~\-0=^~0
—H5^
±=tz

0.

fe^^g
L

/^SZ3~£.&

0—&-—#4-P—/

ll§ll

•<g-f I

"P—i

m

_£_

,*_.

4j-r^—#^#-^7R

200

GENERAL CALLS.

9 . - T H E EEVEILLE.
110 = J • Allegro.

pa

—f—v..

<to=^gd3^^

^PP

CPOCT

| 0" * 0 A b { f"""^P—'

lO.-KETREAT.
76 = J Andante,

m leiS

^ - ^ — ^ ^

£^P

201

GENERAL CALLS.

ll.-TATTOO.

112 = 9 Allegro.
J
^r
-

*

<-<>A \
C

n~\
/T\

rmy
/C\

gp8 7 ^ r s U - H — J - i F f ^ H V K E
t±£—M ? r~f r h^rTFy^i^
*+l-W-l-i»i=±t=ttU£ ^
^^f^i^^i|f=^prr|:pzj^^:

i

#M—-j*-

t=±z*

Si
ifellllgi^l
&ES£ i
g±j==g±

^^L_

i

3-£?-

e

te
/T\

r 7f

. /T\

- ^

202

GENERAL CALLS.

12.-TO E X T I N G U I S H L I G H T S .
76 = J Allegro,

p^m.

sS

jfe)-J—J^*5

-4—— 0

^-

[|>7 r r f ^ j j g p E g f f M i
13—ASSEMBLY O F T H E BUGLERS.
160 = J B-e«to.

^^^^Hg

I
w
14.-ASSEMBLY OF T H E GUARD.
112 = j Allegro.

inpi

I

^'

SS

203

GENERAL CALLS,
_P^^3_Y

:

Hi

^=£H

: S

-

T ^ ^

M~~ T

mmi

15.-ORDERS FOR ORDERLY S E R G E A 1 T S .
72 = J Allegro.

H#-3---»-Hf » )•£—(H-» *H*-P~f

^I^feJ^^P

^P^^P^
1 6 . - F O R OFFICERS TO TAKE T H E I R
PLACES IN L I N E A F T E R F I R I N G .
108 = > . Allegro.

^m^a

-IF

17—THE DISPERSE.
120 = J Allegro.

%&^^^m

204

GENERAL CALLS.

IS-OFFICEHS' CALL.
152 = J Allegro.

i^iggiiPilps
19.-BRBAKFAST CALL.

138 == j J ^ r o .

^gigrtiipii

205

GENERAL CALLS.

20.-DIK3TEB CALL.
110 --= J Allegro,

21.-SICK CALL.
110= J Allegro.

9-\ f v TTi

M

±i-

pfzmms^&m.
2 2 . - F A T I G U E CALL.
92 = J Allegro.

=
i

p^SS
s^

206

GENERAL CALLS.

i ^l l

:

Ld=J
/T\

^

^

/T\

T—C-B

23.-CHURCH CALL.
80 =. J Andante,

$

-&- -#-*-J- T#-

"#-

S

^

i

_^—-tf-i-^—^

^

is

2 4 . - D R I L L CALL.
76 = J Maestoso.

;£—m
^

mi

207

GENERAL CALLS.

l^^mm^mM
4
• LnVIiiJ

1-

1

m

ds

:*£

25.-SCHOOL CALL.
110 = J Allegro.
/CN

i- Q ~—E3-i
nL U - 2 — H = ~s—*r~ 0 «f T
-py-srfrn ^ J * i—|il * 1 r 7 y
1 VM; ,4t
° 1
bt==L_f_=L

r*

^m
pm

=F=?=

/T\

j9 *• r

I

I

308

CALLS FOR SKIRMISHERS.

CALLS FOR SKIRMISHERS.
l . - F I X BAYONET.

2.—UNFIX BAYONET.

80 = J Andante,

IpillliiSllilii
3.—QUICK T I M E .

(Music tlie same as in "General Calls.")

CALLS tfOR SKIRMISHERS.
4.-DOUBLE

QUICK:

209

TIME.

165 = j Allegro,

m

J—p-~p-f*-*-^—0-*-*-\

fei^#fr^=£fcEti#t
gj^jyga^aj

pmm s

=F5=R
22

*—&~*-0-\-fiA-f

Ef=£

5 . - T H E BUIsT.

160 = J Presto.

muuum^^
^BSgmms^

i

fe££

_

#

„

210

CALLS FOR SKIRMISHERS.

6.-DEPI1QY AS SKIBMISHEBS.
110: = J Allegro.
L£_/g=je:

fe^H=

-P—P_fit.

7.-EOBWABD.
160 = J Presto.

2= f

fc=ft=J

i

P

EE£0~0

-#

|*

SE=E

2=§

|35^=p=g=^t
8.-IST B E T B E A T .

76:

piggiisigiii
m^&.

t=x=t

m

m

JEZJE1

CALLS FOR SKIRMISHERS,

211

9.-HALT.
100 = J Presto.

P

-4—-^y

-*—#-

i^n

10.-BY THE BIGHT FLANK.
160 = J Presto.

i

fi:

*
/TS

/ T \ /TS

^SS^§£g
11.—BY THE LEFT FLANK.
160 = J Presto.

±z

Si

=P

« ?

1

^
12.-COMMENCE FIBIBTG,
160 = J Pmrfo.

18

miiii

212

CALLS FOR SKIRMISHERS.

13.-CEASE F I R I N G .
50 = J Maestoso.

14,-CHANGE DIRECTION TO T H E R I G H T .
110 = J Allegro.

& $
^^^fg^55
/T"\

J J"

/T\

<M^ii^fel
JL5.-CHANGE DIRECTION TO T H E L E F T .
110 = J Allegro.

s
|Bg^%^^S
i t=t 111111151
P2Z2C

^3T

1 6 . - L I E DOWN.
§0 = J Moderate.

2~

^^J:

i

CALLS FOR SKIRMISHERS.

213

17.-BISB U P .
50 =- J Moderate*.
s^

Ep^™y=^^

-fcfE

18.-KALLY BY FOUKS.
130 = J ^l%ro.

1 9 . - B A L L Y BY SECTIONS.
132 = J Allegro.

F£=%~rR-Prir
i* M?—?~H
\{(V) 4 «-4-4—4—*-H—> | 1 H—:> i V |LJ^.__L^__..,# .1

Isp '

7

P4, f

, # h"7»~r

j*--——Fw—H:

' 1 \ £=%=$*-£-&•

2 0 . - B A L L Y BY PLATOONS.
110 = J Allegro.

fag^gp^pspj

i

LJ«J

gi^m

214

CALLS FOR SKIRMISHERS.
21.-BALLY

ON

THE

BESEBVE.

76 = J Andante.

3E£
%-»-

i

E

2 2 . - B A L L Y ON T H E BATTALION.
76 = J Andante.

^i§P

BEpFf^^g
=a=*

23.—ASSEMBLE ON T H E BATTALION.
80 = J Andante.

^ISB

:SEZZZ2:

^fe^^^F^f-^^S

-FT

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART I.

215

TITLE FOURTH.
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION.
Formation of the Battalion.
1. EVERY colonel will labor to habituate his bat*
talion to form line of battle, by night as well as by
day, with the greatest possible promptitude.
2. The color-company will generally be designated
as the directing company. That, as soon as formed,
will be placed on the direction the colonel may have
determined for the line of battle. The other companies will form on it, to the right and left, on the
principles of successive formations which will be
herein prescribed.
3. The color-bearer may have received the color
from the hands of the colonel; but if there be daylight, and time, the color will be produced with due
solemnity.
Composition and march of the color-escort.
4. When the battalion turns out under arms and
the color is wanted, a company, other than that of the
color, will be put in march to receive and escort it.
5. The march will be in the following order, in
quick time, and without music: the field music, followed by the band; the escort in column by platoon,
right in front, with arms on the right shoulder, and
the color-bearer between the platoons.
6. Arrived in front of the tent or quarters of the
colonel,sthe escort will form line, the field music and
band on the right, and arms will be brought to a
shoulder.

216

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART I.

7; The moment the escort is in line, the color^
bearer, preceded by the first lieutenant, and followed
by a sergeant of the escort, will go to receive the
color.
8. When the color-bearer shall come out, followed
by the lieutenant and sergeant, he will halt before
the entrance; the escort will present arms, and the
field music will sound to the color.
9. After some twenty seconds, the captain will
cause the sound to cease, arms to be shouldered, and
then break by platoon into column; the color-bearer
will place himself between the platoons, and the
lieutenant and sergeant will resume their posts.
10. The escort will march back to the battalion to
the sound of music in quick time, and in the same
order as above, the guide on the right. The march
will be so conducted that when the escort arrives at
one hundred and fifty paces in front of the right of
the bitttalidi, the direction of the march will be
parallel to its front, and when the color arrives
nearly opposite its place in line, the column will
change direction to the left, and the right guide will
direct himself on the centre of the battalion.
Honors paid to the color.
11. Arrived at the distance of twenty paces from
tlt\e battalion, the escort will halt, and the music
cease; the colonel will place himself six paces before
the centre of the battalion, the color-bearer will approach the colonel, by the front, in quick time; when
at the distance of ten paces, he will halt: the colonel
will cause arms to be presented, and to the color to be
sounded, which being executed, the color-bearer will
take his place in the front rank of the color-guard,
and the battalion, by command, shoulder arms.
12. The escort, field music, and band, will return
in quick time to their several places in line of battle,
marching by the rear of the battalion.

SCHOOL OP THE BATTALION—PART I.

217

13. The color will be escorted back to the colonel's
tent or quarters in the above order.
General Rules and Division of the School of the
Battalion.
14. This school has for its object the instruction
of battalions singly, and thus to prepare them for
manoeuvres in line. The harmony so indispensable
in the movements of many battalions can only be
attained by the use of the same commands, the same
principles, and the same means of execution. Hence,
all colonels and actual commanders of battalions will
conform themselves, without addition or curtailment,
to what will herein be prescribed.
15. When a battalion instructed in this drill shall
manoeuvre in line, the colonel will regulate its movements, as prescribed in the third volume of the Tactics for heavy infantry.
1C The school of tho battalion will be divided into
five parts.
17. The first will comprehend opening and closing
ranks, and the execution of the different fires.
18. The second, the different modes of passing
from the order in battle, to the order in column.
19. The third, the march in column, and the other
movements incident thereto.
20. The fourth, the different modes of passing from
the order in column to the order in battle.
21. The fifth will comprehend the march in line of
battle, in advance and in retreat; the passage of defiles in retreat; the march by the flank; the formation
by file into line of battle; the change of front; the
column doubled on the centre; dispositions against
cavalry; the rally, and rules for manoeuvring by the
rear rank.

218

SCHOOL

F THE BATTALION—PART I.

PART FIRST.
Opening and closing ranks, and the execution of the
different fires.
ARTICLE FIRST.

To open and to close ranks.
22. The colonel, wishing the ranks to be opened,
will command:
1. Prepare to open ranks.
23. At this command, the lieutenant colonel and
major will place themselves on the right of the battalion, the first on the flank of the file closers, and
the second four paces from the front rank of the
battalion.
24. These dispositions being made, the colonel
will command:
2. To the rear, open order. 3. MARCH.
25. At the second command, the covering sergeants, and the sergeant on the left of the battalion,
will place themselves four paces in rear of the front
rank, and opposite their places in line of battle, in
order to mark the new alignment of the rear rank;
they will be aligned by the major on the left sergeant of the battalion, who will be careful to place
himself exactly four paces in rear of the front rank,
and to hold his piece between the eyes, erect and inverted, the better to indicate to the- major the direction to be given to the covering sergeants.
26. At the command march, the rear rank and the
file closers will step to the rear without counting
steps; the men will pass a little in rear of the line
traced for this rank, halt, and dress forward on the
covering sergeants, who will align correctly the men
of their respective companies.
27. The file closers will fall back and preserve the

ECBOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART I.

219

dUiance of two paces from the rear rank, glancing
eyes to the right; the lieutenant colonel will, from
the right, align them on the file closer of the left,
who, having placed himself accurately two paces
from the rear rank, will invert his piece, and hold it
up erect between his eyes, the better to be seen by
the lieutenant colonel.
28. The colonel, seeing the ranks aligned, will
command:
4. FRONT.

At this command, the lieutenant colonel, major,
and the left sergeant, will retake their places in line
of battle.
29. The colonel will cause the ranks to be closed
by the commands prescribed for the instructor in the
school of the company, No. 28.
ARTICLE SECOND.

Manual of arms.
30. The ranks being closed, the colonel will cause
the following times and pauses to be executed:
Present arms.
Shoulder arms.
Order, arms.
Shoulder arms.
Support arms.
Shoulder arms.
Fix bayonet.
Shoulder arms.
Charge bayonet.
Shoulder arms.
Unfix bayonet.
Shoulder arms.
ARTICLE THIRD.

Loading at will, and the Firings.
31. The colonel will next cause to be executed
loading at will, by the commands prescribed in the
school of the company, No. 45; the officers and sergeants in the ranks will half face to the right with
the men at the eighth time of loading, and will face

220

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART I.

to the front when the men next to them come io ft
shoulder.
32. The colonel will cause to be executed the £re
by company, the fire by wing, the fire by battalion,
the fire by file, and the fire by rank, by the commands to be herein indicated.
33. The fire by company and the fire by file will
always be direct; the fire by battalion, the fire by
wing, and the fire by rank, may be either direct or
oblique.
34. When the fire ought to be oblique, the colonel
will give, at every round, the caution right (or left)
oblique, between the commands ready and aim.
35. The fire by company will be executed alternately by the right and left companies of each division, as if the division were alone. The right company will fire first; the captain of the left will not
give his first command till he shall see one or two
pieces ar a ready in the right company; the captain
of the latter, after the first discharge, will observe
the same rule in respect to the left company; and
the fire will thus be continued alternately.
36. The colonel will observe the same rule in the
firing by wing.
37. The fire by file will commence in all the companies at once, and will be executed as has been prescribed in the school of the company, No. 55 and
following. The fire by rank will be executed by
each rank alternately, as has been prescribed in the
school of the company, No. 58 and following.
38. The color-guard will not fire, but resei ve itself
l)v the defence of the color.
The fire by company.'
3D. The colonel, wishing the fire by company lj
be executed, will command:
1. Fire by company. 2. Commence firing.

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART I.

221

40. At the first command, the captains and covering sergeants will take the positions indicated in the
school of the company No. 49.
41. The color and its guard will step back at the
same time, so as to bring the front rank of the guard
in a line with the rear rank of the battalion. This
rule is general for all the different firings.
42. At the second command, the odd numbered
companies will commence to fire ; their captains will
each give the commands prescribed in the school of
the company No. 50, observing to precede the command company by that of first, third, fifth, or seventh,
according to the number of each.
43. The captains of the even numbered companies
will give, in their turn, the same commands, observing to precede them by the number of their respective companies.
1
44. In order that the odd numbered companies
rpay no* all £re at once, their Cfptainn will observe,
but only for the first discharge, to give the command
fire one after another: thus, the captain of the third
company will not give the command fire until he has
heard the fire of the first company; the captain of
the fifth will observe the same rule with respect to
the third, and the captain of the seventh the same
rule with respect to the fifth.
45. The colonel will cause the fire to cease by the
sound to cease firing; at this sound, the men will execute what is prescribed in the school of the company
No. 63; at the sound for officers to take their places
after firing, the captains, covering sergeants, and
color-guard, will promptly resume their places in
line of battle. This rule is general for all the firings.
The fire by wing.
46. When the colonel shall wish this fire to be exeuted, he will command :

222

SCHOOL OP THE BATTALION—PART I.

1. Fire by wing. 2. Eight wing. 3. READY.
* 4. AIM.

6. F I R E . 6. LOAD.

47. The colonel will cause the wings to fire alternately, and he will recommence the fire by the commands : 1. Eight wing; 2. AIM ; 3, FIRE ; 4, LOAD.
1. Left wing; 2. A I M ; 3. F I R E ; 4. LOAD; in con-

forming to what is prescribed No. 35.
The fire by battalion.
48. The colonel will cause this fire to be executed
by the commands last prescribed, substituting for
the first two, 1. Fire by battalion; 2. Battalion.
The fire by file.
49., To cause this to be executed, the colonel will
command:
1. Fire by file. 2. Battalion. 3. READY.
4. Commence firing.
50. At the fourth command, the fire will commence
on the right of each company, as prescribed in the
echool of the company No. 57. The colonel may,
if he thinks proper, cause the fire to commence on
the right of each platoon.
The fire by lank.
61. To cause this fire to be executed, the colonel
will command:
1. Fire by rank. 2. Battalion. 3. READY.
4. Bear rank. 5. AIM. 6. FIRE.
7. LOAD.

52. This fire will be executed as has been explained in the school of the company No. 59, in
following the progression prescribed for the two
ranks which should fire alternately.

SCHOOL OP THE BATTALION—PART I.

223

To fire by the rear rank.
53. When the colonel shall wish the battalion to
fire to the rear, he will command:
2
1. Face by the rear rank. 2. Battalion,
3. About—FACE.
54. At the first command, the captains, covering
sergeants, and file closers will execute what has been
prescribed in the school of the company No. 69; the
color-bearer will pass into the rear rank, and, for this
purpose, the corporal of his file will step before the
corporal next on his right to let the color-bearer
pass, and will then take his place in the front rank;
the lieutenant colonel, adjutant, major, sergeant
major, and the music will place themselves before
the front rank, and face to the rear, each opposite
his place in the line of battle—the first two passing
around the right, and the others around the left, of
the battalion.
55. At the third command, the battalion will face
about; the captains and covering sergeants observing
what is prescribed in the school of the company
No. 70.
56. The battalion facing thus by the rear rank,
the colonel will cause it to execute the different fires
by the same commands as if it were faced by the
front rank.
57. The right and left wings will retain the same
designations, although faced about; the companies
also will preserve their former designations, as first,
second, third, &c.
58. The fire by file will commence on the left of
each company, now become the right.
59. The fire by rank will commence by the front
rank, now become the rear rank. This rank will
preserve its denomination.
60. The captains, covering sergeants, and color*

224

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION'—PART I .

guard will, at the first command given by the colonel,
take the places prescribed for them in the fires, with
the front rank leading.
CI. The colonel, after firing to the rear, wishing
to face the battalion to its proper front, will command :
1. Face by the front rank.

2. Battalion.

3. About—

FACE.

62. At these commands, the battalion will return
to its proper front by the means prescribed Nos. 54
and 55.
63. The fire by file being that most used in war,
the colonel will give it the preference in the preparatory exercises, in order that the battalion may
be brought to execute it with the greatest possible
regularity.
64. When the colonel may wish to give some relaxation to the battalion, without breaking the ranks,
he will execute what has been prescribed in the
school of the company Nos. 37 and 38 or Nos. 39
and 40.
65. "When the colonel shall wish to cause arms to
be stacked, he will bring the battalion to ordered
arms, and then command:
1. Stack—ARMS.

2. Break ranks.

3. MARCH.

66. The colonel wishing the men to return to the
ranks, will cause attention to be sounded, at which
the battalion will re-form behind the stacks of arms.
The sound being finished, the colonel, alter causing
the stacks to be broken, will command:
Battalion.
67. At this command, the men will fix their atten
tion, and remain immovable

PI. 41.

225
^f^Mmm'

tfBSSs^'}

^m\mmml

;

^tlPMii^";

By

company

right wheel,

&c. (INfo. TO).

SCHOOL OP THE BATTALION—PART II.

225

P A R T SECOND.
Different modes of p a s s i n g from t h e order i n battle to
the order in column.
ARTICLE

FIRST.

To break to the r i g h t or the left into column.
68. Lines of battle will habitually b r e a k into columa
b y c o m p a n y ; they may also b r e a k by division or by
platoon.
69. I t is here supposed t h a t t h e colonel wishes to
break by company to t h e r i g h t ; he will c o m m a n d :
1. By company,

right

wheel.

2. M A R C H (or

double

quick—MARCH.)

70. At the first command, each captain will place
himself rapidly before the centre of his company,
and caution it t h a t it has to wheel to t h e r i g h t ; each
covering s e r g e a n t will replace his c a p t a i n in t h e front
rank.
71. At t h e command march, each company will
break to the r i g h t , according to the principles p r e scribed in t h e school of the company, No. 1 7 3 ; each
captain will conform himself to what is p r e s c r i b e d
for the chiefs of p l a t o o n ; t h e left guide, as soon as
he can pass, will place himself on t h e left of the
front r a n k to conduct the m a r c h i n g flank, a n d when
he shall have a p p r o a c h e d n e a r to t h e perpendicular,
the captain will c o m m a n d : 1. Such company.
2.
HALT.

72. At t h e second command, which will be given
at the instant the left guide shall be a t the distance
of t h r e e paces from the p e r p e n d i c u l a r , the company
will h a l t ; the guide will advance a n d place his left
a r m lightly against t h e brelist of the captain, who
will establish him on t h e alignment of the m a n who
h a s faced to the r i g h t ; t h e covering s e r g e a n t will
19

226

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART n .

place himself correctly on the alignment on the right
of that man ; which being executed, the captain will
align his company by the left, command FRONT, and
place himself two paces before its centre.
73. The captains having commanded FRONT, the
guides, although some of them may not be in the
direction of the preceding guides, will stand fast, in
order that the error of a company that has wheeled
too much or too little may not be propagated; the
guides not in the direction will readily come into it
when the column is put in march.
74. A battalion in line of battle will break into
column by company to the left, according to the
same principles, and by inverse means; the covering
sergeant of each company will conduct the marching
flank, and the left guide will place himself on the
left of the front rank at the moment the company
halts.
75. When the battalion breaks by division, the
indication division will be substituted in the commands for that of company ; the chief of each division
(the senior captain) will conform himself to what i3
prescribed for the chief of company, and will place
himself two paces before the centre of his division;
the junior captain, if not already there, will place
himself in the interval between the two companies in
the front rank, and be covered by the covering sergeant of the left company in the rear rank. The right
guide of the right company will be the right guide,
and the left guide of the left company the left guide,
of the division.
76. When the battalion shall break by platoon to
the right or to the left, each first lieutenant will pass
around the left of his company to place himself in
front of the second platoon, and, for this purpose, each
covering sergeant, excerpt the one of the right company, will step, for the moment, in rear of the right
file of his company.

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART II.

227

77. When the battalion breaks by division to the
tight, and there is an odd company, the captain of this
company (the left), after wheeling into column, will
cause it to oblique to the left, halt it at company distance from the preceding division, place his left guide
on the direction of the column, and then align his
company by the left. When the line breaks by division to the left, the odd company will be in front; its
captain, having wheeled it into column, will cause it
to oblique to the right, halt it at division distance
from the division next in the rear, place his right
guide on the direction of the other guides, and align
the company by the right.
78. The battalion being in column, the lieutenant
colonel and major will place themselves on the directing flank, the first abreast with the leading subdivision, and the other abreast with the last, and both
six paces from the flank. The adjutant will be near
the lieutenant colonel, and the sergeant major near
the major.
79. The colonel will have no fixed place as the
instructor of his battalion; but in columns composed
of many battalions, he will place himself habitually
on the directing flank fifteen or twenty paces from the
guides, and abreast with the centre of his battalion.
80. When the colonel shall wish to move the column
forward without halting it, he will caution the battalion to that effect, and command:
1. By company, right wheel. 2. MARCH (or double quick
—MARCH).

81. At the first command, the captains of companies
will execute what is prescribed for breaking into
column from a halt.
82. At the second command, they will remain in
front of their companies to superintend the movement ; the companies will wheel to the right on fixed
pivots as indicated in the school of tae company No.

228

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART II.

185; the left guides will conform to what'is prescribed
above; when they shall arrive near the perpendicular
the colonel will command :
3. Forward. 4. MARCH. 5. Guide left.
83. At the third command, each covering sergeant
will place himself by the right side of the man on
the right of the front rank of his company. At the
fourth command, which will be given at the instant
the wheel is completed, the companies will cease to
wheel, and march straight forward. At the fifth, the
men will take the touch of elbows to the left. The
leading guide will march in the direction indicated to
him by the lieutenant colonel. The guides will immediately conform themselves to the principles of the
march in column, school of the company No. 200 and
following.
84. If the battalion be marching in line of battle,
the colonel will cause it to wheel to the right or left,
by the same commands and the same means ; but he
should previously caution the battalion that it is to
continue the march.
85. A battalion in line of battle will break into
column by company to the left, according to the
same principles and by inverse means ; the covering
sergeant of each company will conduct the marching
flank, and the left guides will place themselves on the
left of their respective companies at the command
forward.
86. When a battalion has to prolong itself in column
towards the right or left, or has to direct its march
in column perpendicularly or diagonally in front, or in
rear of either flank, the colonel will cause it to break
by company to the right or left, as has just been
prescribed; but when the line breaks to the right, in
order to march towards the left, or the reverse, the
colonel will command: Break to the right to march to
the left, or break to the left to march to the right; before

PI 42,

229

'77"

qiiiiwiiiiiiiiiittiiH

rr
Tf

~^ili«Ig

(?~
Tr"

rr

' hMilillliiilP

"liiiiaifi 1

tr
Yr
By the riyht of companies to the rear into column, &c*
(No. 88).

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART I I .

229

giving the command, by company, right (or left) wheel,
As soon as the battalion is broken, the lieutenant
colonel will place a marker abreast with the right
guide of the leading company. The instant the
column is put in motion, this company will wheel to
the left (or right), march ten paces to the front without changing the guide, and wheel again to the left
(or right). The second wheel being completed, the
captain will immediately command guide left (or right).
The guide of this company will march in a direction
parallel to the guides of the column. The lieutenant
colonel will be careful to place a second marker at
the point where the first company is to change
direction the second time.
ARTICLE SECOND.

To break to the rear, by the right or left, into column,
and to advance or retire by the right or left of companies.
87. When the colonel shall wish to cause the battalion to break to the rear, by the right, into column
by company, he will command:
1. By the right of companies to the rear into column.
2. Battalion right—FACE.
3. MABCH (or double
quick—MARCH).

88. At the first command, each captain will place
himself before the centre of his company, and caution it to face to the right; the covering sergeants
will step into the front rank.
89. At the second command, the battalion will face
to the right; each captain will hasten to the right of
his company, and break two files to the rear; the
first file will break the whole depth of the two ranks ;
the second file less; which being executed, the captain will place himself so that his breast may touch
lightly the left arm of the front rank man of the

230

SCHOOL OP THE BATTALION—PART II.

last file in the company next on the right of his own
The captain of the right company will place himself
*s if there were a company on his right, and wil)
align himself on the other captains. The covering
sergeant of each company will break to the rear with
the right files, and place himself before the front
rank of the first file, to conduct him.
90. At the command march, the first file of each
company will wheel to the right; the covering sergeant, placed before this file, will conduct it perpendicularly to the rear. The other files will come successively to wheel on the same spot. The captains
will stand fast, see their companies file past, and at
the instant the last file shall have wheeled, each captain will command:
1. Such company. 2. HALT.
4. Left—DRESS.

3. FRONT.

91. At the instant the company faces to the front,
its left guide will place himself so that his left arm
may touch lightly the breast of! his captain.
92. At the fourth command, the company will align
itself on its left guide, the captain so directing it
that the new alignment may be perpendicular to that
which the company had occupied in line of battle;
and, the better to judge this, he will step back two
paces from the flank.
93. The company being aligned, the captain will
command: FRONT, and take his place before its
centre.
94. The battalion marching in line of battle, when
the colonel shall wish to break into column by company, to the rear, by the right, he will command:
1. By the right of companies to the rear into column.
2. Battalion, by the right flank. 3. MARCH (or double
quick—MARCH).

95. At the first command, each captain will step

SCHOOL DF THE BATTALION—PART II.

231

briskly in front of the centre of his company, and
caution it to face by the right flank.
96. At the command march, the battalion will faco
to the right; each captain will move rapidly to the
right of his company and cause it to break to the
right; the first file of each company will wheel to
the right, and the covering sergeant placed in front
of this file will conduct it perpendicularly to the
rear; the other files will wheel successively at the
same place as the first. The captains will see their
companies file past them; when the last files have
wheeled, the colonel will command:
3. Battalion, by the left flank—MARCH. 4. Guide left.
97. At the command march, the Companies will face
to «the left, and march in column in the new direction.
The captains will place themselves in front of the
centres of their respective companies. At the fourth
command, the guides will conform to the principles
of the march in column; the leading one will move
in the direction indicated to him by the lieutenant
colonel. The men will take the touch of elbows to
the left.
98. To break to the rear by the left, the colonel
will give the same commands as in the case of breaking to the rear by the right, substituting the indication left, for that of right.
99. The movement will be executed according to
the same principles. Each captain will hasten to
the left of his company, cause the first two files to
break to the rear, and then place his breast against
the right file of the company next on the left of hia
own, in the manner prescribed above.
100. As soon as the two files break to the rear, the
left guide of each company will place himself before
the front rank man of the headmost file, to conduct
him.
j.01. The instant the companies face to the front,

232

SCHOOL OP THE BATTALION—PART I I .

the right guide of each will place himself so that n^s
right arm may lightly touch the breast of his captain.
102. The battalion may be broken by division to
the rear, by the right or left, in like manner; in this
case, the indication divisions will be substituted, in
the first command, for that of companies; the chiefs
of division will conform themselves to what is prescribed for the chiefs of company. The junior captain in each division will place himself, when the
division faces to a flank, by the side of the covering
sergeant of the left company, who steps into the
front rank.
103. If there be an odd number of companies, and
the battalion breaks by division to the rear, whether
by the right or left, the captain of the left company
will conform to what is prescribed No. 77.
104. This manner of breaking into column, being
at once the most prompt and regular, will be preferred on actual service, unless there be some particular reason for breaking to the front.
105. If the battalion be in line and at a halt, and
the colonel should wish to advance or retire by the
right of companies, he will command:
1. By the right of companies to the front (or rear).
2. Battalion, right—FACE.
3. MARCH (or double
quick—MARCH). 4. Guide right {left) or {centre).
106. At the first command, each captain will move
rapidly two paces in front of the centre of his company, and caution it to face to the right; the covering sergeants will replace the captains in the front
rank.
107. At the second command, the battalion will
face to the right, and each captain moving quickly to
the right of his company will cause files to break to
the front, according to the principles indicated No. 89.
108. At the command ?narchi each captain placing

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART II.

233

himself on the left of his leading guide will conduct
his company perpendicularly to the original line.
At the fourth command, the guide of each companj
will dress to the right, left, or centre, according to
the indication given, taking care to preserve accurately his distance.
109. If the colonel should wish to move to the
front, or rear, by the left of companies, the movement will be executed by the same means and the
same commands, substituting left for right.
110. If the battalion be in march, and the colonel
should wish to advance or retire by the right of companies, he will command:
1. By the right of companies to the front (or rear).
2. Battalion, by the right flank. 3. MARCH (or
double quick—MARCH).
4. Guide right (left) or
(centre).
111. Which will be executed according to the principles and means prescribed Nos. 95 and following,
and 106 and following. At the first command, the
color and general guides will take their places as in
column.
112. If the colonel should wish to advance or retire
by the left of companies, the movement will be executed by the same means and the same commands,
substituting left for right.
113. If the battalion be advancing by the right or
!«ft of companies, and the colonel should wish to form
line/to the front, he will command ;
1. By companies into line. 2. MARCH (or double
quick—'MARCH). 3. Guide centre.
114. At the command march, briskly repeated by
the captains, each company will be formed into line,
ad prescribed in the school of the company, No. 154.
115. At the third command, the color and genera]

234

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART II,

guides will move rapidly to their places in line, as
will be hereinafter prescribed No. 405.
116. If the battalion be retiring by the right or
left of companies, and the colonel should wish to
form line facing the enemy, he will first cause the
companies to face about while marching, and immediately form in line by the commands and means
prescribed Nos. 113 and following.
ARTICLE THIRD.

To ploy the battalion into close column.
117. This movement may be executed by company
or by division, on the right or left subdivision, or on
any other subdivision, right or left in front.
11§. The examples in this school will suppose the
presence of four divisions, with directions for an odd
company; but what will be prescribed for four will
serve equally for two, three or five divisions.
119. To ploy the battalion into close column by
division in rear of the first, the colonel will command:
1. Close column, by division. 2. On the first division^
right in front. 3. Battalion, right—FACE. 4. MAUCH
(or double quick—MARCH).
120. At the second command, all the chiefs of division will place themselves before the centres of their
divisions; the chief of the first will caution it to
stand fast; the chiefs of the three others will remind
them that they will have to face to the right, and the
covering sergeant of the right company of each division will replace his captain in the front rank, aa
soon as the latter steps out.
121. At the third command, the last three divisions
will face to the right; the chief of each division will
hasten to its right, and cause files to be broken to the
rear, as indicated No. 89; the right guide will break
at the same time, and place himself before the front

SCHOOL OP THE BATTALION—PART II.

235

rank man of the first file, to conduct him, and each
chief of division will place himself by the side of
this guide.
122. The moment these divisions face to the right,
the junior captain in each will place himself on the
left of the covering sergeant of the left company,
who will place himself in the front rank. This rule
is general for all the ployments by division.
123. At the command march, the chief of the first
division will add, guide left; at this, its left guide will
place himself on its left, as soon as the movement of
the second division may permit, and the file closers
will advance one pace upon the rear rank.
124. All the other divisions, each conducted by its
chief, will step off together, to take their places in the
column; the second will gain, in wheeling by file to
the rear, the space of six paces, which ought to separate its guide from the guide of the first division, and
so direct its march as to enter the column on a line
parallel to this division; the third and fourcn divisions
will direct themselves diagonally towards, but a little
in rear of, the points at which they ought, respectively,
to enter the column ; at six paces from the left flank
of the column, the head of each of these divisions
will incline a little to the left, in order to enter the
column as has just been prescribed for the second,
taking care also to leave the distance of six paces between its guide and the guide of the preceding division.
At the moment the divisions put themselves in march
to enter the column, the file closers of each will incline
to the left, so as to bring themselves to the distance
of a pace from the rear rank.
125. Each chief of these three divisions will conduct
his division till he shall be up with the guide of the
directing one; the chief will then himself halt, see his
division file past, and halt it the instant the last file
shall have passed, commanding: 1. Such division; 2
HALTj 3 FRONT; 4.

Left—'DB.ESs.

236

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART II.

126. At the second command, the division will halt;
the left guide will place himself promptly on the direction, six paces from the guide which precedes him,
in order that, the column being formed, the divisions
may be separated the distance of four paces.
127. At the third command, the division will face
io the front; at the fourth, it will be aligned by Ha
chief, who will place himself two paces outside of his
guide, and direct the alignment so that his division
may be parallel to that which precedes—which being
done, he will command, FRONT, and place himself before the centre of his division.
128. If any division, after the command front, be
not at its proper distance, and this can only happen
through the negligence of its chief, such division will
remain in its place, in order that the fault may not
be propagated.
129. The colonel will superintend the execution of
the movement, and cause the prescribed principles to
be observed.
130. The lieutenant colonel, placing himself in succession in rear of the left guides, will assure them on
the direction as they arrive, and then move to his
place outside of the left flank of the column, six paces
from, and abreast with, the first division. In assuring
the guides on the direction, he will be a mere observer,
unless one or more should fail to cover exactly the
guide or guides already established. This rule is
general.
131. The major will follow the movement abreast
with the left of the fourth division, and afterwards
take his position outside of the left flank of the
column, six paces from, and abreast with, this division.
132. To ploy the battalion in front of the first division, the colonel will give the same commands, substituting the indication left for that of right in front.
133. At the second and third commands, the chiefs

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION r - P A R T I I .

23?

of division and the junior captains will conform themselves to what is prescribed Nos. 120, 121, 122; but
the chiefs of the last three divisions, instead of causing
the first two files to break to the rear, will cause them
to break to the front.
184. At the fourth command, the chief of the first
division will add: Guide right.
135. The three other divisions will step off together
to take their places in the column in front of the directing division; each will direct itself as prescribed,
No. 124, and will enter in such manner that, when
halted, its guide may find himself six paces from the
guide of the division next previously established in
the column.
136. Each chief of these divisions will conduct his
division, till his right guide shall be nearly up with
the guide of the directing one; he will then halt his
division, and cause it to face to the front; at the
instant it halts, its right guide will face to the rear,
place himself six paces from the preceding guide, and
cover him exactly—which being done, the chief will
align his division by the right.
137. The lieutenant colonel, placed in front of the
right guide of the first division, will assure the guides
on the direction as they successively arrive, and then
move outside of the right flank of the column, to a
point six paces from, and abreast with, the fourth
division, now in front.
138. The major will conform himself to what is prescribed No. 131, and then move outside of the right
flank of tthe column, six paces from, and abreast with,
the first division, now in the rear.
139. The movement being ended, the colonel will
command:
Guides, about—FACE.
140. At this, the guides, who are faced to the rear,
will face to the front.

238

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION

PART I I .

141. To ploy the battalion in rear, or in front of the
fourth division, the colonel will command:
1. Close column by division. 2. On the fourth division,
left (or right) in front. 3. Battalion, left—JFACE. 4.
MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).

142. These movements will be executed according
to the principles of those which precede, but by inverse means: the fourth division on which the battalion ploys will stand fast; the instant the movement commences, its chief will command, guide right
(or left).
143. The foregoing examples embrace all the principles : thus, when the colonel shall wish to ploy the
battalion on an interior division, he will command:
1. Close column by division. 2. On such division, right
(or left) in front. 3. Battalion inwards—•FACE. 4.
MARCH (or double quick MARCH).

144. The instant the movement commences, the
chief of the directing division will command, guide
left (or right).
145. The divisions which, in the order in battle,
are to the right of the directing division, will face to
the left; those which are to the left, will face to the
right.
146. If the right, is to be in front, the right divisions will ploy in front of the directing division, and
the left in its rear; the reverse, if the left is to be in
front. And in all the foregoing suppositions, the
division or divisions contiguous to the directing one,
in wheeling by file to the front or rear, will gain the
space of six paces, which ought to separate their
guides from the guide of the directing division.
147. In all the ployments on an interior division,
the lieutenant colonel will assure the positions of the
guides in front, and the major those in* rear of the
directing division.

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION

PART I I .

239

148. If t h e battalion be in march, instead of at a
halt, t h e movement will be executed by combining the
two gaits of quick and double quick time, a n d always
in r e a r of one of t h e flank divisions.
149. The battalion being in march, to ploy it in
r e a r of t h e first division, the colonel will c o m m a n d :
1, Close column by division.
3. Battalion—by
the right

2. On the first division.
flank. 4. Double quick

—MARCH.

150. At t h e second command, each chief of division
will move rapidly before the centre of his division
a n d caution it to face to t h e r i g h t .
151. The chief of the first division will caution it
to continue to m a r c h to t h e front, and he will command : Quick march.
152. At t h e command march, t h e chief of the first
division will c o m m a n d : Guide left. At this, the left
guide will move to t h e left flank of the division and
direct himself on the point indicated.
153. The t h r e e other divisions will face to t h e r i g h t
and move off in double quick time, b r e a k i n g to the
right to t a k e t h e i r places in c o l u m n ; each chief of
division will move r a p i d l y to the r i g h t of his division
in order to conduct it. The files will be careful to
preserve t h e i r distances, a n d to m a r c h with a u n i form and decided step. The color-bearer a n d general
guides will r e t a k e their places in the r a n k s .
154. The second division will immediately enter
the column, m a r c h i n g parallel to t h e first division ;
its chief will allow it to file p a s t him, and, when t i e
last file is abreast of him, will c o m m a n d : 1. Second
division, by the left
flank—MARCH.
2. Guide left, a n d
place himself in front of t h e c e n t r e of his division.
155. At t h e command march, t h e division will face
to the left; at the second command, the left guide
will march in t h e trace of t h e left guide of t h e first
division; the men will take t h e touch of elbows to the
20

240

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART III.

left. When the second division has closed to itg
proper distance, its chief will command: Quick time—
MARCH. This division will then change its step U
quick time.
156. The chiefs of the third and fourth divisioni
will execute their movements according to the sam«
principles, taking care to gain as much ground at
possible towards the head of the column.
157. If the battalion had been previously marching
in line at double quick time, when the fourth division
shall have gained its distance, the colonel will command : Double quick—-MARCH.
158. In this movement, the lieutenant colonel will
move rapidly to the side of the leading guide, give
him a point of direction, and then follow the movements of the first division. The major will follow the
^movement abreast with the left of the fourth divisionKemarks on ploying the battalion into column.
159. The battalion may be ployed into column at
full> or half distance, on the same principles, and by
the same commands, substituting for the first command: Column at full (or half) distance by division.
160. In the ployments and movements in column,
when the subdivisions execute the movements successively, such as—to take or close distances; to
change direction by the flank of subdivisions, each
chief of subdivision will cause his men to support
arms after having aligned it and commanded, FRONT.
PART THIRD.
ARTICLE FIRST.

To march in column at full distance.
161. When the colonel shall wish to put the column
in march, he will indicate to the leading guide two
distinct objects in front, on the line w&ich the guids

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART I I I .

241

ought to follow. This guide will immediately put
his shoulders in a square with that line, take the
more distant object as the^ point of direction, and the
nearer one as the intermediate point.
162. If only a single prominent object present
itself in the direction the guide has to follow, he will
face to it as before, and immediately endeavor to
catch on the. ground some intermediate point, by
which to give steadiness to his march on the point
of direction.
163. There being no prominent object to serve as
the point of direction, the colonel will despatch the
lieutenant colonel or adjutant to place himself forty
paces in advance, facing the column, and by a sign
of the sword establish him on the direction he may
wish to give to the leading guide; that officer being
thus placed, this guide will take him as the point of
direction, conforming himself to what is prescribed
in the school of the company No. 87.
164. These dispositions being made, the colonel
will command :
j
1. Column forward. 2. Guide left (or right).
3. MARCH (or double quick-—MARCH).

165. At the command march, briskly repeated by
the chiefs of subdivision, the column will put itself
in march, conforming to what is prescribed in the
school of the company No. 200 and following.
166. The leading guide may always maintain himself correctly on the direction by keeping steadily in
view the two points indicated to him, or chosen by
himself; if these points have a certain elevation, he
may be assured he is on the true direction, when the
nearer masks the more distant point.
167. The following guides will preserve with exactness both step and distance; each will march in the
trace of the guide who immediately precedes him, without occupying himself with the general direction.

142

SCHOOL OF THIS BATTALION—PART III.

168. The lieutenant colonel will hold himself, habitually, abreast with the leading guide, to see that he
does not deviate from the direction, and will observe,
also, that the next guide marches exactly in the trace
of the first.
169. The major will generally be abreast with the
last subdivision; he will see that each guide marches
exactly in the trace of the one immediately preceding:
if either deviate from the direction, the major will
promptly rectify the error, and prevent its being propagated ; but he need not interfere, in this way, unless
the deviation has become sensible, or material.
170. The column being in march, the colonel will
frequently cause the about to be executed while marching ; to this effect, he will command:
1 Battalion, right about. 2. MAIICH. 3. Guide right*
171. At the second command, the companies will
face to the right about, and the column will then march
forward in an opposite direction; the chiefs of subdivision will remain behind the front rank, the file
closers in front of the rear rank, and the guides will
place themselves in the same rank. The lieutenant
colonel will remain abreast of the first division, now
in rear; the major will give a point of direction to
the leading guide, and march abreast of him.
172. The colonel will hold himself habitually on the
directing flank; he will look to the step and to the distances, and see that all the principles prescribed for the
march in column, school of the company, are observed.
173. These means, which the practice in that school
ought to have rendered familiar, will give sufficient
exactness to the direction of the column, and also
enable it to form forward or faced the rear, on the right,
or on the left, into line of battle, and to close in mass.
174. But when a column, arriving in front, or in rear
of the line of battle, or, rather, on one of the extremities of that line, has to prolong itself on it, in

PI. 44.

243
pi

Pi

Pi

Tig'l
^sd„—

77ie column arriving in
f) out of the line of battle,
to pi olony it on this line
(No. 175).
Tig.2

..'...

Ty

H

I

R

|J

H

H

H
h

~

H

V

Tig 3
H

V

i
p

H
.. r

T

The column arriving behind
the line of battle, to jwolong
it on this line (No. 181).

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART III.

24E

ordoi to form to the left or to the right into line of battle, then, as it is essential, to prevent the column from
cutting the line, or sensibly deviating from it, other
means, as follows, will be employed.
The column arriving in front of the line of battle, to
prolong it on this line.
175. If the column right in front arrive in front
of the line of battle, as it should cross it and find itself four paces beyond it after having changed direction, the colonel will cause to be placed, in advance,
a marker on the line to indicate the point at which,
the column ought to cross it, and another marker to
indicate the point where the first subdivision should
commence to wheel; he will be so placed that when
the wheel is executed, the left guide will find himself
four paces within the line of battle. The chief of the
leading subdivision, when the head of the column shall
have arrived near the line, will take the guide to the
right, and this guide will immediately direct himself
on the second marker. On arriving abreast of him,
this subdivision will be wheeled to the left, and when
the wheel is completed, the guide will be changed again
to the left; this guide will then march parallel to the
line of battle by the means to be hereinafter indicated.
176. The instant the first sub iivision wheels, the
right general guide, who, by a ca«iut>n from the lieutenant colonel, will before have placed himself on the
line of battle at the point where the column crosses
it, and who will have faced to the two points of direction in his front, indicated by the colonel, will march
forward correctly on the prolongation of those points.
177. The color-bearer will place himself in like
manner on the line of battle; and, at the instant the
color subdivision wheels, he will prolong his march
on that line, abreast with this subdivision, taking
care to carry the color-lance before the centre of his
person, and to maintain himself exactly in the direc-

244

SCHOOL OP THE BATTALICN—•PART III.

tion of the general guide who precedes him, and the
point of direction in front which will have been indicated to him.
178. Finally, the left general guide will place himself in the same manner on the line of battle; and,
at the instant the last subdivision of the battalion
wheels, he will march correctly in the direction of
the color-bearer, and the other general guide.
179. The guide of the first subdivision will march
steadily abreast with the right general guide, and
about four paces to his right; each of the guides of
the following subdivisions will march in the trace of
the guide who immediately precedes him, as prescribed No. 167.
180. The colonel, placed outside of the general
guides, will see that the column marches nearly parallel to, and about four paces within, these guides.
181. The lieutenant colonel and major Will look to
the direction of the general guides, and, to this end,
place themselves sometimes in rear of the color-bearer,
or the left general guide.
182. If the column be composed of several battalions, the general guides of each will successively
place themselves on the line of battle to prolong their
march on this line, as the leading subdivision, that
of the coV»r, and the one in the rear of their battalion,
shall wheel into the new direction; these guides will
conform themselves respectively, as will also the colonel, lieutenant colonel, and major, to what is prescribed above for those of the leading battalion.
183. In the case of several battalions, the lieutenant
colonel of each will maintain steadily the guide of his
leading subdivision about four paces within the line
of general guides, even should the last subdivisions
of the battalion immediately preceding deviate from
*he parallelism, in order that the false direction of
one battalion may not influei 3e that of the battaliona
Which follow.

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART III.

245

The column arriving behind the line of battle, to
prolong it on this line.
184. If the column, right in front, arrive behind
the line of battle, as it ought to find itself four paces
within this line, after having changed direction, the
colonel will cause a marker to be placed at the point
where, according to that condition, the first subdivision ought to commence wheeling. Another marker
will be established on the line of battle, to indicate
the point at which the general guides ought, in succession, to begin to prolong themselves on that line;
he will be so placed that each subdivision, having
finished its wheel, may find itself nearly in a line
with this marker.
185. At the instant the first subdivision, after
having wheeled to the right, begins to prolong itself,
parallelly to the line of battle, the leading general
guide, placed in advance on that line, will direct
himself on the two points taken in his front; the
color-bearer and the other general guide will successively place themselves on the same line the
instant that their respective subdivisions shall have
finished their wheel.
186. If the column be composed of several battalions, the general guides of the following battalions
will successively execute* what has been just prescribed for those of the leading battalion, and the
whole will conform themselves, as well as the guides
of subdivisions, and the field officers of the several
battalions, to what is indicated, above, for a column
arriving in front of the line of battle.
187. In a column, left in front, arriving in front
or in rear of the line of battle, these movements will
be executed on the same p inciples, and by inverse
means.

246

SCHOOL OP THE BATTALION—PART III.

The column arriving on the right or the left of the
line of battle, to prolong it on this line.
188. If the column, instead of arriving in front
or in rear of the line of battle, arrive on its right or
left, and if it have to prolong itself on that line, in
order afterwards to form to the left or right into line
of battle, the colonel will bring the color and general
guides on the flank of the column by the command
color and general guides on the line: and these guide?
will prolong themselves on the line of battle, conforming to what is prescribed above.
Manner of prolonging a line of battle by markers.
189. When a column prolongs itself on the line of
battle, it being all-important that the general guides
march correctly on that line, it becomes necessary
that colonels, lieutenant colonels, and majors, whose
duty it is to maintain the true direction, should be
able to see, as far as practicable, the two objects, on
which the march of the general guides ought to be
directed; consequently, when no prominent objects
present themselves in the desired direction, the chief
of the column will supply the want of them in advance by aids-de-camp, or other mounted officers,
and in such number as may be necessary.
190. Three such officers „may prolong a line as far
as may be desired in the following manner: they
will place themselves in advance on the line of battle,
the first at the point where the head of the column
ought to enter; the second, three or four hundred
paces behind the first, and the third, a like distance
behind the second. The first of these officers will
remain in position till the leading general guide shall
have entered on the line of battle, and then, at a
gallop, place himself at a convenient distance behind
the third. The second will do the like in respect to
ihe first, when the 1 ead of the column shall be near

SJflOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART III*

247

him, and so on in continuation. These officers, without dismounting, will face to the column, and cover
each other accurately in file. It will be on them
that the general guides will steadily direct their
march, and it will be so much the more easy for the
latter to maintain themselves on the direction, as
they will always be able to see the mounted officers
over the heads of the preceding guides: thus the deviation from the direction, by one or more general
guides, need not mislead those who follow.
191. A single mounted officer may suffice to assure
the direction of a column, when the point of direction
towards which it marches is very distinct. In this
case, that officer will place himself on the line of
battle within that point, and beyond the one at
which the head of the column will halt, and remain
in position till the column halts; serving thus as the
intermediate point for giving steadiness to the march
of the general guides.
192. For a column of one or two battalions, markers on foot will suffice to indicate the line to bs followed by the general guides.
Eemarks on the march in column.
193. Although the uncadenced step be that of
columns in route marches, and also that which ought
to be habitually employed in the Evolutions of the
Line, because it leaves the men more at ease, and,
consequently, is better adapted to movements on a
large scale and to difficult grounds, nevertheless, as
it is of paramount importance to confirm soldiers in
the measure and the movement of the cadeneed pace,
the route step will be but little practised in the exercises by battalion, except in going to, and returning
from, til e ground of instruction, and for teaching the
mechanism and movements of columns in route.
194. It is highly essentia] to the regularity of the
march in column that each guide follow exactly in

248

SCHOOL OP THE BATTALION—PART III.

the trace of the one immediately preceding, without
occupying his attention with the general direction of
the guides. If this principle be steadily observed,
the guides will find themselves aligned, provided that
the leading one march'exactly in the direction indicated to him; and even should obstacles in his way
force him into a momentary deviation, the direction
of the column would not necessarily be changed;
whereas^ if the following guides endeavor to conform
themselves at once to all the movements of the leading one, in order to cover him in file, such endeavors
would necessarily cause corresponding fluctuations
in the column, from right to left, and from left to
right, and render the preservation of distances extremely difficult.
195. As a consequence of the principle, that each
guide shall exactly folloio in the trace of the one who
immediately precedes, if, pending the maroii of ihe
column, the colonel shall give a new point of direction, too near to the first to require a formal change
of direction, the leading guide, advancing the one
or other shoulder, will immediately direct himself
on this point; the other guides will only conform
themselves to this movement as each arrives at the
point at which the first had executed it. Each subdivision will conform itself to the movement of its
guide, the men insensibly lengthening or shortening
the step, and advancing or refusing (throwing back)
the shoulder opposite to the guide, but without losing
the touch of the elbow towards his side.
196. The column, by company, being in march,
the colonel will cause it to dimmish front by platoon, from front to rear, at once, and to increase
front by platoon in like manner, which movements
will be commanded and executed as prescribed in
the school of the company Nos. 282 and 273 and
following, changing the command form company to
form companies. So may he increase and diminish,

248

PI 45.

~TT?

1

9

T=J
-n

J**** E—

^

SCHOOL OP THE BATTALION—PART III.

249

or diminish and increase, front, according to the
same principles and at once, by company, changing
the command form companies to form divisions, and
the command break into platoons to break into companies. In this case, the companies and divisions
will execute what is prescribed for platoons and companies respectively.
197. The column being at a halt, if the colonel
ehould wish to march it to the rear, and the distance
to be gained be so inconsiderable as to render a
countermarch a disproportionate loss of time, he will
cause the column to face about, and then put it
in march by the commands prescribed No. 164; the
chiefs of the subdivisions will remain behind the
front rank, the file closers before the rear rank, and the
guides will step into the rear rank, now in front. In a
column, by division, the junior captains, in the intervals
between companies, will replace their covering sergeants in the rear rank, and these sergeants will step
into the line of file closers in front of their intervals.
ARTICLE SECOND.

Column in route.
198. A column in route, like a column in manoeuvre, ought never to have a depth greater than
about the front it had occupied in the line of battle,
less the front of a subdivision.
199. The observance of this principle requires no
particular rule for a column in manoeuvre ; but, as
a column in route may have hourly to pass narrow
ways, bridges, or other defiles, rendering it necessary
to diminish the front of subdivisions, it becomes important to give rules and means by which the column
may, for any length of march, preserve the ease of
the route step without elongation from front to rear.
200. A column in route will be habitually formed
!>y company.

250

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART III.

201. "When a column in route shall arrive at a
pass too narrow to receive the front of a company,
the column will diminish front by platoon before
entering. This movement will be executed suc^
cessively, or by all the companies at once.
202. If, however, the defile be very short, and it
may be passed by the diminution of a »few files, it
will be preferable to break to the rear the 'limited
number of files.
203. The column being by platoon, and the want
of space rendering a further diminution of front
necessary, it will be diminished by section, if the
platoons be of twelve or more files.
204. The column being by section, will continue
to march by that front as long as the defile may
permit.
205. If the platoons have less than twelve files,
one or two files will be broken to the rear, according to the narrowing of the defile, and the route step
continued as long as six files can march abreast.
206. What has just been explained for breaking
files to the rear in a column by platoon, is equally
applicable to a column by section.
207. If the defile be too narrow to permit six
men to march abreast, the subdivisions will be
marcWd successively by the flank, conforming to
what is prescribed Nos. 314 and 315, school of the
company.
208. The battalion marching by the flank, will
be formed into column, by section, by platoon, or by
company, as soon as the breadth of the way may
permit; the several movements which these formations include will be executed by the commands of
the captains, as their companies successively clear
^the defile, observing the following rules.
209. As soon as the way is sufficiently broad
fco contain six men abreast, the captain will command ;

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART III.

251

1. By section (or by platoon) into line. 2. MARCH.
210. At the command march, the subdivisions indicated will form themselves into line; the files
which have not been able to enter will follow (by
the flank) the last four files of their subdivision
which have entered into line.
211. The column marching in this order, the files
in rear will be caused to enter into line as the increased breadth of the way may permit.
212. The column marching by section or by platoon, platoons or companies will be formed as soon
as the breadth of the way may peimiit. %
213. The leading subdivision will follow the windings of the pass or defile ; the following subdivisions
will not occupy themselves with the direction, but
all, in succession, pass over the trace of the subdivisions which precede them respectively. The men
will not seek to avoid the bad parts of the way, but
pass, as far as practicable, each in the direction of
his file.
214. Changes of direction will always be made
without command; if the change be important, a
caution merely from the respective chiefs to their
subdivisions will suffice, and the rear rank, as well
as the files broken to the rear, will execute successively the movement where the front rank had executed it.
215. The colonel will hold himself at the head of
the battalion; he will regulate the step of the leading
subdivision, and indicate to its chief the instant for
executing the various movements which the nature
of the route may render necessary.
216. If the column be composed of several battalions, each will conform itself, in its turn, to what
shall have been commanded for the leading battalion,
observing to execute each movement at the same
place, and in the same manner.
21

252

SCHOOL 01 THE BATTALION

PART III.

217. Finally, to render the mechanism of all those
movements familiar to the troops, and to habituate
them to march in the route step without elongating
the column, commanders will generally cause their
battalions to march in th Is step, going to, and returning from, fields of exercise. Each will occasionally conduct his battalion through narrow passes,
in order to make it perceive the utility of the principles prescribed above; and he will several times,
in every course of instruction, march it in the route
step, and cause to be executed, sometimes at once,
and sometimes successively, the divers movements
Which have just been indicated.
General remarks on the column in route.
218. The lesson relative to the column in route is,
by its frequent application, one of the most important
that can be given to troops. If it be not well taught
and established on right principles, it will happen
that the rear of the column in route will be obliged
to run, to regain distances, or that the front will be
forced to halt till the rear shall have accomplished
that object; thus rendering the march greatly slower,
or greatly more fatiguing, generally both, than if it
were executed according to rule.
219. The ordinary progress of a column in route
ought to be, on good roads or good grounds, at' the
rate of one hundred and ten paces in a minute. Thia
rate may be easily maintained by columns of almost
any depth; but over bad roads, ploughed fields,
loose sands, or mountainous districts, the progress
cannot be so great, and must therefore be regulated
according to circumstances.
220. The most certain means of marching well in
route, is to preserve always a regular and equal
movement, and, if obstacles oblige one or more subdivisions to slacken or to shorten the step, to cause

SCHOOL OP THE BATTALION-—PART III.

253

the primitive rate of march to be resumed the moment the difficulties are passed.
221. A subdivision ought never to take more than
the prescribed distance from the subdivision immediately preceding; but it is sometimes necessary to
lessen that distance.
222. Thus: the head of the column encounters am
obstacle which obliges it to. relax its march; all the
following subdivisions will preserve the habitual
step, and close up in mass, if necessary, on the subdivision nearest to the obstacle. Distances will afterwards naturally be recovered as each subdivision
shall successively have passed the obstacle. Nevertheless, if the difficulty be too great to be overcome
by one subdivision, while the next is closing up, so
that distances cannot afterwards be recovered without running, the chief of the column will halt the
leading subdivision beyond the obstacle, at a distance sufficient to contain the whole column in mass.
He will then put the column in march, the subdivisions taking distances by the head, observing to
commence the movement in time, so that the last
subdivision may not be obliged to halt, after having
cleared the obstacle.
223. When the chief of a column 'shall wish to
change the rate of march, he will cause the leading
battalion to quicken or to relax the step insensibly,
and send orders to the other battalions each to regulate itself by that which precedes it.
224. The column being composed of several battalions, the general-in-chief will always leave an aidde-camp with its rear to bring him prompt information if it find a difficulty in following.
225. Subdivisions ought always to step out well
in obliquing, both in breaking and forming companies or platoons. When either is done in succession, it is highly important that no subdivision
Blacken or shorten the step whilst that which pre-

254

SCHOOL OP THE BATTALION—PART III.

cedes it is engaged in the movement. The observance
of this principle can alone prevent an elongation of
the column.
226. If the battalion, marching by the flank, encounter a pass so narrow as to oblige it to defile with
a front of two men, the colonel will order support
arms, take the cadenced step, and undouble the files,
which will be executed as prescribed in the school of
the company, No. 326; the files will double again
as soon as the breadth of the way will permit.
227. If the defile be only sufficient to receive a
front of one man, the colonel will cause the men to
pass one at a time. The men of the same file should
follow each other in their order as closely as possible,
and without loss of time. As soon as the defile permits a front of two or four men, the battalion will be
re-formed into two or four ranks, and will march in
this order until there be space to form platoons or
sections, as indicated No. 209.
228. In both cases, just supposed, the head of the
battalion, after having passed the defile, will march
till sufficient space be left to contain the whole of the
subdivisions in mass; afterwards it will be put in
march by the means indicated No. 222.
229. When a command has to move rapidly over a
given distance, the movements prescribed in this
article will be executed in double quick time; if the
distance be long, the chief of the column will not
allow the march at this gait to be continued for more
than fifteen minutes; at the end of this time, he will
order the ordinary route step to be marched for five
minutes, and then again resume the double quick.
If the ground be uneven, having considerable ascents
and descents, he will reserve the double quick for
those parts of the ground most favorable to this
march.
230. A column marching alternately in double
quick time and the ordinary route step, in the man-

255

PI 46.

^pMiMip

^lliilill^

To clunxje. direction.

Head of column to (he riylit.
(No. 232).

SCHOOL (XF THE BATTALION—PART I I I .

255

ner stated, can easily accomplish very long distances
in a very short space of time ; but when the distance
to be passed over be not greater than two miles, it
ought to be accomplished, when the ground is favor
able, without changing the rate of march.
ARTICLE

THIRD.

To change direction in column at full distance.
231. The column being in march in the cadenced
step, when the colonel shall wish to cause it to
change direction, he will go to the point at which the
change ought to be commenced, and establish a
marker there, presenting the breast to the flank of
the column; this marker, no matter to which side
the change of direction is to be made, will be posted
on the opposite side, and he will remain in position
till the last subdivision of the battalion shall have
passed. The leading subdivision being within a few
paces of the marker, the colonel will command :
Head of column to the left (or right).
232. At this, the chief of the leadiug subdivision
will immediately take the guide on the side opposite
the change of direction, if not already there. This
guide will direct himself so as to graze the breast
of the marker; arrived at this point, the chief will
cause his subdivision to change direction by the
commands and according to the principles prescribed
in the school of the company. When the wheel ia
completed, the chief of this subdivision will retake
the guide, if changed, on the side of the primitive
direction.
233. The chief of each succeeding subdivision, as
well as the guides, will conform to what has just
been explained for the leading subdivision.
234. The colonel will carefully see that the guide
of each subdivision, in wheeling, does not throw

256

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART III.

himself without or within, but passes over all the
points of the arc of the circle, which he ought to
describe.
235. As often as no distinct object presents itself
in the new direction, the lieutenant colonel will place
himself upon it in advance, at the distance of thirty
or forty paces from the marker, and be assured in
this direction by the colonel; the leading guide will
take, the moment he shall have changed direction,
two points on the ground in the straight line which,
drawn from himself, would pass between the heels
of the lieutenant colonel, taking, afterwards, new
points as he advances.
236. The major will see that the guides direct
themselves on the marker posted at the point of
change, so as to graze his breast.
237. If the column be composed of several battalions, the lieutenant colonel of the second will
cause the marker of the first battalion to be replaced as soon as the last subdivision of this battalion shall have passed; this disposition will be
observed by battalion after battalion, to the rear of
the column.
Remarks.
238. It has been demonstrated, school of the company, how important it is, first, that each subdivision
execute its change of direction precisely at the point
where the leading one had changed, and that it arrive
in a square with the direction; second, that the wheeling point ought, always, to be cleared in time, in
order that the subdivision engaged in the wheel may
not arrest the movement of the following one. The
deeper the column, the more rigorously ought these
principles to be observed; because, a fault that
would be but slight in a column of a single battalion
would cause much embarrassment in one of great
depth

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART III.

257

ARTICLE FOURTH.

To halt the column.
239. The column being in march, when the colonel
shall wish to halt it, he will command:
1. Column. 2. HALT.

240. At the second command, briskly repeated by
the captains, the column will halt; no guide will
stir, though he may have lost his distance, or be out
of the direction of ihe preceding guides.
241. The column being in march, in double quick
time, will be halted by the same commands. At
the command halt, the men will halt in their places,
and will themselves rectify their positions in the
ranks.
242. The column being halted, when the colonel
shall wish to form it into line of battle, he will move
a little in front of the leading guide, and fac<- to
him; this guide and the following one will fix their
eyes on the colonel, in order promptly to conform
themselves to his directions.
243. If the colonel judge it not necessary to give
a general direction to the guides, he will limit himself to rectifying the position of such as may be
without, or within the direction, by the command,
guide of (such) company, or guides of (such) companiesf
to the right (or to the left); at this command, the
guides designated will place themselves on the direction ; the others will stand fast.
244. If, on the contrary, the colonel judge it necessary to give a general direction to the guides of
the column, he will place the first two on the direction he shall have chosen, and command:
Guides, cover.
245. At this, the following guides will promptly
place themselves on the direction covering the first

258

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART I I I .

two in file, and each precisely at a distance equal U
the front of his company, from the guide immediately preceding; the lieutenant colonel will assure
them in the direction, and the colonel will command:
Left (or right)—DRESS.
246. At this command, each company will incline
to the right or left, and dress forward or backward,
so as to bring the designated flank to rest on its
guide; each captain will place himself two paces
outside of his guide, promptly align his company
parallelly with that which precedes, then command,
FRONT, and return to his place in column.
247. Finally, if the general guides march on the
flank of the column, the colonel, having halted it,
will place himself in rear of the color-bearer, to
ascertain whether the leading general guide and the
color-bearer be exactly on the direction of the two
points in advance, and establish them on that direction if they be not already on it; the major will do
the like, in respect to the general guide in the rear;
which being executed, the colonel will command:
1. Guides—ON THE LINE.

248. At this command, the guide of each company
of the directing flank will step promptly into the
direction of the general guides, and face to the front.
The lieutenant colonel, placed in front of, and facing
to, the leading general guide, and the major, placed
in rear of the rearmost one, will promptly align the
company guides.
249. The colonel, having verified the direction oi
the guides, will command:
Left (or right) —DRESS.
250. This will be executed as prescribed No. 246.

259

\r

PL 47.

T
i

i

|

iJ

Li
1
1

i?

i

TOHfiillllillH
•Rlllililll5
'llliiilP
wf

n

iHiiiiilP

V

-p

iliMilliiiiP
i
i"j

f

«ffllilSP

J

',

ri

1
1

1J

h

H

To close the column to half d'xtanoe on the eighth
company (No. 252).

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—-PART III.

259

Remarks.
251. The means indicated No.' 244 and following,
for giving a general direction to the guides of a
column, at full distance, will apply only to a column
composed of two or, at most, three battalions. If
the number be more numerous, its chief will cause
the colors and general guides of all the battalions to
step out and place themselves on the direction which
he may wish to give to the column, as is explained in
the evolutions of the line.
ARTICLE FIFTH.

To close the column to half distance, or in mass.
252. A column by company being at full distance
right in front, and at a halt, when the colonel shall
wish to cause it to close to half distance, on the leading company, he will command:
1. To half distance, close column. 2. MARCH (or
double quick—MARCH).
253. At the first command, the captain of the leading company will caution it to stand fast.
254. At the command march, which will be repeated by all the captains, except the captain of the
leading company, this company will stand fast, and
its chief will align it by the left; the file closers will
close one pace upon the rear rank.
255. All the other companies will continue to
march, and as each in succession arrives at platoon
distance from the one which precedes, its captain will
halt it.
256. At the instant that each company halts, its
guide will place himself on the direction of the
guides who precede, and the captain will align the
company by the left; the file closers will close one
pace upon the rear rank.
257. No particular attention need be given to the

260

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART III.

general direction of the guides before they respectively halt: it will suffice if each follow in the trace
of the one who precedes him.
258. The colonel, on the side of the guides, will
superintend the execution of the movement, observing
that the captains halt their companies exactly at
platoon distance the one from the other.
259. The lieutenant colonel, a few paces in front,
will face to the leading guide and assure the positions
of the following guides as they successively place
themselves on the direction.
260. The major will follow the movement abreast
with the last guide.
261. If the column be in march, the colonel will
cause it to close by the same commands.
262. If the column be marching in double quick
time, at the first command, the captain of the leading company will command quick time; the chiefs of
the other companies will caution them to continue
their march.
263. At the command march, the leading company
will march in quick, and the other companies in
double quick time; and as each arrives at platoon
distance from the preceding one, its chief will cause
it to march in quick time.
264. When the rearmost company shall have gained
its distance, the colonel will command:
Double quick—MARCH.
265. When the colonel shall wish to halt the
column and to cause it to close to half distance at
the same time, he will notify the captain of the leading company of his intention, who at the command
march will halt his company and align it by the left.
266. If the column be marching in quick time,
and the colonel should not give the command double
quick, the captain of the leading company will halt
his company at the command march, and align it by

SCHOOL C i ' THE BATTALION—PART I I I .

261

the left. In the case, where the colonel adds the
command double quick, the captains of companies
will conform to what is prescribed No. 262, and the
movement will be executed as indicated No. 263.
To close the column on the eighth, or rearmost,
company.
267. The column being at a halt, if, instead of
causing it to close to half distance on the first company, the colonel should wish to cause it to close Ofc
the eighth, he will command:
1. On the eighth company, to half distance close column,
2. Battalion about—FACE. 3. Column fomoard. 4,
Guide right. 5. MARCH (or double quick—MARCH)
268. At the second command, all the companies,
except the eighth, will face about, and their guides
will remain in the front rank, now the rear.
269. At the fourth command, all the captains will
place themselves two paces outside of their companies on the directing flank.
270. At the command march, the eighth company
will stand fast, and its captain will align it by the
left: the other companies will put themselves in
march, and, as each arrives at platoon distance from
the one established before it, its captain will halt it
and face it to the front. At the moment that each
company halts, the left guide, remaining faced to the
rear, will place himself promptly on the direction of
the guides already established. Immediately after,
the captain will align his company by the left, and
the file closers will close one pace on the rear rank.
If this movement be executed in double quick time,
each captain, in turn, will halt, and command: Such
company, right about—HALT. At this command, the
company designated will face to the right about and
halt.
271. All the sompanies being aligned, the colonel

262

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART III.

will cause the guides, who stand faced to the rear, to
face about.
272. The lieutenant colonel, placing himself behind
the rearmost guide, will assure successively the positions of the other guides, as prescribed No. 259 ;
the major will remain abreast with the rearmost
company.
273. The column being in march, when the colonel
shall wish to close it on the eighth company, he will
command:
1. On the eighth company, to half instance, close column,
2. Battalion right about. 3. MARCH (or doubh
quick—MARCH).
4. Guide right.
274. At the first command, the captain of the
eighth company will caution his company that it will
remain faced to the front; the captains of the other
companies will caution their companies that they will
have to face about.
275. At the command march, the captain of the
eighth company will halt his company and align it
by the left; the file closers will close one pace upon
the rear rank.
276. The captains of the other companies, at the
same command, will place themselves on the flank of
the column; the subdivisions will face about, and, as
each arrives at platoon distance from the company
immediately preceding it, its chief will face it to the
front and halt it as prescribed No. 270. The instant
each company halts, the guide on the directing flank,
remaining faced to the rear, will quickly place himself on the direction of the guides already established.
After which, the captain will align the company by
the left, and the file closers will close one pace upon
the rear rank.
277. The lieutenant colonel will follow the movement abreast of the first company. The major will
place himself a few paces in rear of the guide of the

263

PI, 48.

P=?

n

L_ m

To cltaiKje directum in column <xt It a?f distance (No. 2S7).

SCHOOL OP THE BATTALION—PART III.

263

eighth company, and will assure successively the
position of the other guides.
Remarks.
278. A column by division at full distance will
close to half distance by the same means and the
same commands.
279. A column, by company, or by division, being
at full or half distance, the colonel will [cause it to
close in mass by the same means and commands, substituting the indication, column, close in mass, for that
of to half distance, close column. Each chief of subdivision will conform himself to all that has just
been prescribed, except that he will not halt his
subdivision till its guide shall be at a distance of six
paces from the guide of the subdivision next preceding.
280. In a column, left in front, these various
movements will be executed on the same principles.
ARTICLE SIXTH.

To [inarch in column at half distance, or closed
in mass.
281. A column at half distance or in mass, being
at a halt, the colonel will put it in march by the
commands prescribed for a column at full distance.
282. The means of direction will also be the same
for a column at half distance or in mass, as for a
column at full distance, except that the general
guides will not step out.
283. A column at half distance or in mass, being
in march, when the colonel shall wish to halt it, he
will give the commands prescribed for halting a
column at full distance, and if, afterwards, he judge
it necessary to give a general direction to the guides

264

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART I I I .

of the column, he will employ, to this end, the commands and means indicated No. 244 and following.
284. In columns at half distance or closed in mass,
chiefs of subdivision will repeat the commands march
and halt, as in columns at full distance.
285. The colonel will often march the column to
the rear, by the means and the commands prescribed
Nos. 170 and 171.
286. A column by division or company, whether
at full or half distance or closed in mass, at a halt
or marching, can be faced to the right or left, and
marched off in the new direction.
ARTICLE SEVENTH.

To change direction in column at half distance,
287. A column at half distance, being in march,
will change direction by the same commands and
according to the same principles as a column at full
distance; but, as the distance between the subdivisions is less, the pivot-man in each subdivision
will take steps of fourteen inches instead of nine,
and of seventeen inches instead of eleven, according
to the gait, in order to clear, in time, the wheeling
point, and the marching flank will describe the arc
of a larger circle, the better to facilitate the movement.
ARTICLE EIGHTH.

To change direction in column closed in mass.
1st. To change direction in marching,

288. A column by division, closed in mass, being
in march, will change direction by the front of subdivisions.
289. Whether the change be made to the reverse,
or to the pivot flank, it will always be executed on
the principle of wheeling in marching; to this end,

264

PI 49.

,<<w
\ \ \ \

/ '•»,,

¥'
m.
BL.
H

LJ-.

~——-i
til

W

k

L

'IV

p 4%
e

p
p

t:

e

To change direction in column closed in mass while
marching (No. 288).

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART III.

265

the colonel will first cause the battalion to take the
guide on the flank opposite to the intended change of
direction, if it be not already on that flank.
290. A column by division, closed in mass, right in
front, having to change direction to the right, the
colonel, after having caused a marker to be placed at
the point where the change ought to commence, will
command:
1. Battalion, right wheel. 2. MARCH.
291. At the command march, the leading division
will wheel as if it were part of a column at half distance.
292. The instant that this division commences the
wheel, all the others will, at once, conform themselves to its movement; to this end the left guide of
each, advancing slightly the left shoulder and Lengthening a little the step, will incline to the left, and v*ill
observe, at the same time, to gain so much ground to
the front that there may constantly be an interval of
four paces between his division and that which precedes it; and as soon as he shall cover the preceding
guide, he will cease to incline, and then march exactly
in his trace.
293. Each division will conform itself to the movement of its guide; the men will feel lightly the elbow
towards him and advance a little the left shoulder the
instant the movement commences; each file, in inclining, will gain so much the less ground to the
front, as the file shall be nearer to the pivot, and the
right guide will gain only so much as may be necessary to maintain between his own and the preceding
division the same distance which separates their
marching flanks.
294. Each chief of division, turning to it, will
regulate its march, and see that it remains constantly
included between its guides, that its alignment con*

266

SCHOOL or

THE BATTALION—PART H I .

tinues nearly parallel to that of the preceding division,
and that the centre bends only a little to the rear.
295. The colonel will superintend the movement,
and cause the pivot of the leading division to lengthen
or to shorten the step, conforming to the principle
established, school of the company, No. 227—if either
be necessary to facilitate the movement of the other
divisions.
296. The lieutenant colonel, placed near the left
guide of the leading division, will regulate his march,
and take care, above all, that he does not throw himself within the arc he ought to describe.
297. The major, placed in the rear of the guides,
will see that the last three conform themselves, each
by slight degrees, to the movement of the guide immediately preceding, and that neither inclines too
much in the endeavor to cover too promptly the guide
in his front; he will rectify any serious fault that
may be committed in either of those particulars.
298. The colonel, seeing the wheel nearly ended,
will command:
1. Forward.

2. MABCH.

299. At the second command, which will be given
at the instant the leading division completes its
wheel, it will resume the direct march; the other
divisions will conform themselves to this movement;
and if any guide find himself not covering his immediate leader, he will, by slight degrees, bring himself
on the trace of that guide, by advancing the right
shoulder.
300. If the column, right in front, has to change
direction to the left, the colonel will first cause it to
take the guide to the right, and then command:
1. Battalion, left wheel. 2. MABCH.
301. At the command march, the battalion will

•M^iiiiiiiii'iiTripiiip-piiiiiiiitfiViiiirir-5""

SCHOOL OP THE BATTALION—PART III.

267

change direction to the left, according to the principles just prescribed, and by inverse means.
302. When the battalion shall have resumed the
direct march, the colonel will change the guide to the
left, on seeing the last three guides nearly in the direction of the one in front.
303. The foregoing changes of direction will be
executed according to the same principles in a column,
left in front.
304. A column by company, closed in mass, will
change direction in marching, by the commands and
means indicated for a column by division.
305. The guide who is the pivot of the particular
wheel ought to maintain himself at his usual distance
of six paces from the guide who precedes him; if
this distance be not exactly preserved, the divisions
would necessarily become confounded, which must be
carefully avoided.
2d. To change direction from a halt,
306. A column by company, or by division, closed
in mass, being at a halt, when the colonel shall wish
to give, it a new direction, and in which it is to remain, he will cause it to execute this movement by
the flanks of subdivisions, in the following manner:
307. The battalion having the right in front, when
the colonel shall wish to cause it to change direction
by the right flank, he will indicate to the lieutenant
colonel the point of direction to the right; this officer
will immediately establish, on the new direction, two
markers, distant from each other a little less than the
front of the first subdivision, the first marker in front
of the right file of this subdivision; which being executed, he will command:
I. Change direction by the right flank. 2. Battalion,
right—FACE.

8. MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).

308 At the second command, the column will faca

268

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—-PART III.

to the right, and each chief of subdivision will plaoe
himself by the side of his right guide.
309. At the command march, all the subdivisions
will step off together; the right guide of the leading
one will direct himself from the first step, parallelly
to the markers placed in advance on the new direction ; the chief of the subdivision will not follow the
movement, but see it file past, and as soon as the left
guide shall have passed, he will command:
1. First company (or first division). 2. HALT. 3. FRONT.
4.

Left—DRESS.

310. At the fourth command, the subdivision will
place itself against the two markers, and be prompcly
aligned by its chief.
311. The right guide of each of the following subdivisions will conform himself to the direction of the
right guide of the subdivision preceding his own in
the column, so as to enter on the new direction parallelly to that subdivision, and at the distance of four
paces from its rear rank.
312. Each chief of subdivision will halt in his own
person, on arriving opposite to the left guides already
placed on the new direction, see his subdivision file
past, and conform himself, in halting and aligning it,
to what is prescribed No. 309.
313. If the change of direction be by the left flank,
the colonel will cause markers to be established as
before, the first in front of the left file of the leading
subdivision, and then give the same commands, sub"
etituting the indication left for right.
314. At the second command, all the subdivisions
will face to the left, and each chief will place himself
by the side of his left guide.
315. At the command march, all the subdivisions
will step off together, each conducted by its chief.
316. The guide of the leading subdivision will
direct himself, from the first step, parallelly to tha

SCHOOL OP THE BATTALION—PART III.

269

markers; the subdivision will be conducted by its
chief j and as soon as its left guide shall have passed
the second marker, it will be halted and aligned as
prescribed above; and so of each of the following
subdivisions.
317. The colonel will hold himself on the designated flank, to see that each subdivision enters the
new direction parallelly to the leading one, and at
the prescribed distance from that which precedes.
818. The lieutenant colonel will place himself in
front of, and facing to, the guide of the leading subdivision, and will assure the positions of the following guides, as they successively arrive on the new
direction.
319. The major will follow the movement abreast
with the last subdivision.
320. In order that this movement may be executed
with facility and precision, it is necessary that
the leading subdivision should entirely unmask the
column; for example, the movement being made by
the right flank, it is necessary, before halting the
leading subdivision, that its left guide shall, at least,
have arrived at the place previously occupied by its
right guide, in order that each following subdivision
which has to pass over a space at least equal to its
front to put itself in the new direction, and whose
left ought to pass the point at which the right had
rested, may, at the command halt, find itself, in its
whole front, parallel to the leading subdivision.
321. By. this method there is no direction that may
not be given to a column in mass.
ARTICLE N I N T H .

Being in column at half distance, or closed in mass,
to take distances.
322. A column at half distaoice will take full distances by the head of the column when it has to pro*

270

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART III.

long itself on the line of battle. If, on the contrary,
it has to form itself in line of battle on the ground it
occupies, it will take distances on the leading or on
the rearmost subdivision, according as the one or the
other may find itself at the point where the right or
left of the battalion ought to rest in line of battle.
1st. To taJce distances by the head of the column,

823. The column being by company at half distance and at a halt, when the colonel shall wish to
cause it to take full distances by the head, he will
command:
By the head of column, take wheeling distance.
324. At this command, the captain of the leading
company will put it in march; to this end, he will
command:
1. First company, forward. 2. Guide left.
(or double quick—MARCH).

3. MARCH

325. When the second shall have nearly its wheeling distance, its captain will command:
1. Second company, fortvard. 2. Guide left 3. MARCH
(or double quick—MARCH).
326. At the command march, which will be pronounced at the instant that this company shall have
its wheeling distance, it will step off smartly, taking
the step from the preceding company. Each of the
other companies will successively execute what has
just been prescribed for the second.
327. The colonel will see that each company puts
itself in march at the instant it has its distance.
328. The lieutenant colonel will hold himself at
the head of the column, and direct the march of the
leading guide.
329. The major will hold himself abreast with the
rearmost guide.

271

PI 51.

rPfcllriiiiiiiliiiili!l-<

r[j-':Mi'lili;i;"ti:!i;iiiilU

r-i

j£liliil»L
1-'

""' "

\\
!
!
!

L,

r;

i-

r1,.

"i

iMMlllL
r-!

" ~V.

^

1

-1

Ja

r ^.!!!liiil!lil<'i|;li'li|:i!^

PPFiliL

7*o /<?/,,? v)hecluifj

distance

on eighth

company

( N o . £);jl).

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION

PART I I I .

271

330. If t h e column, instead of b e i n g at a halt, b e
in "march, t h e colonel will give the same c o m m a n d s ,
and add:
M A R C H (or double

quick—MARCH).

331. If t h e column be m a r c h i n g in quick time,
a t t h e command march, t h e captain of t h e l e a d i n g
c o m p a n y will cause double quick time to be t a k e n ;
w h i c h will also be done by t h e other captains as t h e
companies successively a t t a i n their p r o p e r wheeling
distance.
332. If t h e column be m a r c h i n g in double quick
time, t h e l e a d i n g company will continue to m a r c h a t
t h e same gait. The c a p t a i n s of t h e other companies
will cause quick time to be t a k e n , and a s each comp a n y gains its p r o p e r distance, its captain will cause
i t to r e t a k e t h e double quick step.
2d.

To take distances

on the rear of the

column.

333. If t h e colonel wish to t a k e distances on t h e
rearmost company, h e will establish two m a r k e r s on
t h e direction he shall wish to give to the line of
b a t t l e , t h e first opposite to the rearmost company,
t h e second m a r k e r towards the head of the column,
a t company distance from the first, and both facing
to t h e r e a r ; at the same time, the r i g h t general
guide, on a n intimation from the l i e u t e n a n t colonel,
will move r a p i d l y a little beyond the point to which
t h e head of t h e column will extend, a n d place h i m self correctly on the prolongation of t h e two m a r k ers.
These dispositions being made, t h e colonel will
command:
1. On the eighth company, take wheeling distance.
Column, forward.
3. Guide left.
4, M A R C H
double
quick—MARCH).

2.
(or

334. At t h e t h i r d command, t h e captains will place
themselves two paces outside of the directing flank j

272

SCHOCL OF THE BATTALION—PART III.

the captain of the eighth company will caution, it
to stand fast.
335. At the command march, repeated by all the
captains, except the captain of the eighth company
this latter company will stand fast; its chief will
align it by the left on the first marker, who is opposite to this company, and place himself before its
centre, after commanding: FRONT. At this command, the marker will retire, and the left guide will
take his place.
336. All the other companies will put themselves
in march, the guide of the leading one directing himself a little within the right general guide; when
the seventh company has arrived opposite the second
marker, its captain will halt, and align it on this
marker, in the manner prescribed for the eighth
company.
337. When the captain of the sixth company shall
see that there is, between his company and the seventh, the necessary space for wheeling into line, he
will halt his company; the guide facing to the rear
will place himself promptly on the direction, and the
moment he shall be assured in his position, the captain will align the company by the left, and then
place himself two paces before the centre; the other
companies will successively conform themselves to
what has just been prescribed for the sixth company.
338. The colonel will follow the movement, and
see that each company halts at the prescribed distance ; he will promptly remedy, any fault that may
be committed, and, as soon as all the companies shall
be aligned, he will cause the guides, who are faced
to the rear, to face about.
339. The lieutenant colonel will successively assure
the left guides on the direction, placirg himself in
their rear, as they arrive.
340. The major will hold himself at the head of

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART III.

273

the column, and will direct the march of the leading
guide.
Bd. To take distances on the head of the column.

341. The colonel, wishing to take distances on the
leading company, will establish two markers in the
manner just prescribed, one abreast with this company, and the other at company distance in rear of
the first, but both facing to the front: the left genera!
guide, on an intimation from the lieutenant colonel,
will move rapidly to the rear and place himself cor
rectly on the prolongation of the two markers, s
little beyond the point to which the rear of the
column will extend: these dispositions being made,
the colonel will command:
1. On the first company, take wheeling distance. 2.
Battalion, about—FACE. 3. Column, forward. 4.
Guide right. 5. MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).
342. At the second command, all the companies,
except the one designated, will face about, the guides
remaining in the front rank, now become the rear.
343. At the fourth command, the captains will
place themselves outside of their guides.
344. At the command march, the captain of the
designated company will align it, as prescribed No.
335, on the marker placed by its side.
345. The remaining companies will put themselves
in march: the guide of the rearmost one will direct
himself a little within the left general guide; when
the second company shall have arrived opposite the
second marker, its captain will face it about, conforming to what is prescribed No. 270, and align it,
as has just been prescribed for the first company.
346. The instant that the third company shall
have its wheeling distance, its captain will halt it,
facing it about, as prescribed No. 270, and align,
it by the left; the captains of the remaining com-

274

SCHOOL OE THE BATTALION—PART III.

panies will each, in succession, conform himself to
what has just been prescribed for the captain of the
third.
347. The colonel will follow the movement, as
indicated No. 338; the lieutenant colonel and major
will conform themselves to what is prescribed Nos.
839 and 340.
348. These various movements will be executed
according to the same principles in a column with
the left in front.
349. They will be executed in like manner in a
column closed in mass; but, if it be the wish of
the colonel to open out the column to half, instead
of full distance, he will substitute, in the commands,
the indication half, for that of wheeling distance.
350. In a column by division, distances will be
taken according to the same principles.
ARTICLE TENTH.

Countermarch of a column at full or half distance.
351. In a column at full or half distance, the countermarch will be executed by the means indicated,
school of the company; to this end, the colonel will
command:
1. Countermarch. 2. Battalion, right (or left)—FACE.
3. By file left (or right). 4. MARCH (or double
quick—MARCH).

To countermarch a column closed in mass.
352. If the column be closed in mass, the countermarch will be executed by the commands and means
subjoined.
353. The column being supposed formed by division, right in front, the colonel will command:
1. Countermarcn. 2. Battalion, right and left—FACE,
3. By file left and right. 4. MARCH (or double
quick—MARCH).

PL 52.

274
* i —

n

B

i-'l

Na
V

" \-

q,. .

—^a
V

H

ri>
(^

EF^S4

^miiisi!'iiinjiiijiitiiiiiidiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiitiiifiiiih
r ».W4 'i!!i!!!!i!!|!li!|jl-^!l!|l:!H

|: !

l: :il!:;: HUil-f

-I"'!::]"!! '•i'il'H-lliilll'iljrli'iniT'iifihiMr:i-!:iiL,
i,

J

5 ;

fiffi:'^'.i-i=. tl:;!>!{H = i''! il IS '

".•••:iU

To countermarch a column closed in mass (ICo. £52).

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART III.

275

354. At the first command, the chiefs of the odd
numbered divisions will caution them to face to the
right, and the chiefs of the others to face to the left.
355. At the second command, the odd divisions will
face to the right, and the even to the left; the right
and left guides of all the divisions will face about;
the chiefs of odd divisions will hasten to their right
and cause two files to break to the rear, and each
chief place himself on the left of the leading front
rank man of his division; the chiefs of even divisions
will hasten to their left, and cause two files to break
to the rear, and each chief place himself on the right
of his leading front rank man.
356. At the command march, all the divisions, each
conducted by its chief, will step off smartly, the
guides standing fast; each odd division will wheel by
file to the left around its right guide; each even
division will wheel by file to the right around its left
guide, each division so directing its march as to arrive behind its opposite guide, and when its head
shall be up with this guide, the chief will halt the
division, and cause it to face to the front.
357. Each division, on facing to the front, will be
aligned by its chief by the right: to this end, the
chiefs of the even divisions will move rapidly to the
right of their respective divisions.
358. The divisions being aligned, each chief will
command, FRONT; at this, the guides will shift to
their proper flanks.
359. In a column with the left in front, the countermarch will be executed by the same commands and
means; but all the divisions will be aligned by the
left: to this end, the chiefs of the odd divisions will
hasten to the left of their respective divisions as soon
as the latter shall have been faced to the front.
360. The colonel, placed on the directing flank, will
superintend the general movement.
361. The countermarch being ended, the lieutenant

276

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART III.

colonel will always place himself abreast with the
leading, and the major abreast with the rearmost
division.
362. In a column by company, closed in mass, the
countermarch will be executed by the same meana
and commands, applying to companies what is prescribed for divisions.
863. The countermarch will always take place from
a halt, whether the column be closed in mass, or at
full, or half distance.
ARTICLE ELEVENTH.

Being in column by company, closed in mass, to form
divisions.
364. The column being closed in mass, right in
front, and at a halt, when the colonel shall wish to
form divisions, he will command:
1. Form divisions. 2. Left companies, left—FACE.

3.

MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).

365. At the first command, the captains of the left
companies will caution them to face to the left.
366. At the second command, the left companies
will face to the left, and their captains will place
themselves by the side of their respective left guides.
367. The right companies, and their captains, will
Btand fast; but the right and left guides of each of
these companies will place themselves respectively
before the right and left files of the company, both
guides facing to the right, and each resting his right
arm gently against the breast of the front rank man
of the file, in order to mark the direction.
368. At the command march, the left companies
only will put themselves in march, their captains
standing fast; as each shall see that his company,
filing past, has nearly cleared the column, he mil
Command:

Pi 53.

276

»WJfPllT!k

r!

•

••

H

rl

Fl

•L

1.

rl

H

rl

-

!
J<

rl

•

—4J

r!

i

h

Ff

1,

1,

^
.

2?eiwy in column by company, closed in mass, to forn
divisions (No. 364).

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION^PAFT III.

1. Such company. 2. HALT.

277

3. FRONT.

369. The first command will be given when the
company shall yet have four paces to march; the
second at the instant it shall have cleared its right
company; and the third immediately after the second.
370. The company having faced to the front, the
files, if there be intervals between them, will promptly
incline to the right; the captain will place himself on
the left of the right company of the division, and
align himself correctly on the front rank of that
company.
371. The left guide will place himself at the same
time before one of the three left files of his company,
face to the right, and cover correctly the guides of
the right company; the moment his captain sees him
established on the direction, he will command:
Might—DRESS.

372. At this, the left company will dress forward
on the alignment of the right company; the front
rank man, who may find himself opposite to the left
guide, will, without preceding his rank, rest lightly
his breast against the right arm of this guide; the
captain of the left company will direct its alignment
on this man, and, the alignment being assured, he
will command, FRONT ; but not quit his position.
373. The colonel seeing the divisions formed, will
command:
Guides—POSTS.
374. At this, the guides who have marked the
fronts of divisions will return to their places in
column, the left guide of each right company passing
through the interval of the centre of the division,
and the captains will place themselves as prescribed
No. 75.
375. The colonel, from the directing iiank of the

278

SCHOOL OP THE BATTALION—PART III.

column, will superintend the general execution of
the movement.
376. If the column be in march, instead of at a
bait, when the colonel shall wish to form divisions,
he will command:
1. Form divisions. 2. Left companies, by the left flank,
3. MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).

377. At the first command, the captains of the
right companies will command, Mark time, the captains of the left companies will caution their companies to face by the left flank.
378. At the third command, the right companies
will mark time, the left companies will face to the
left; the captains of the left companies will each
see his company file past him, and when it has
cleared the column, will command:
Such company by the right flank—MARCH.
As soon as the divisions are formed, the colonei
will command:
4. Forward.

5. MARCH.

379. At the fifth command, the column will resume
the gait at which it was marching previous to the
commencement of the movement. The guides of
each division will remain on the right and left of
their respective companies; the left guide of the
right company will pass into the line of file closers,
before the two companies are united; the right
guide of the left company will step into the rear
rank. The captains will place themselves as prescribed No. 75.
Being in column at full or half distance, to form
divisions.
380. If the column be at a halt, and, instead of
being closed in mass, is at full or half distance,

PI 54.

278

J
T — T

^iliftlliliiliilllHIiilillHillillliflHMiiiiiilililH

r

fc
cp

„

^

r-—i

5=3

E=3

f

lggI»iiiS

'piliil^^

Being in column at full or half distance, to form
(No. 380).

divisions

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALIOtf-^-PART III.

279

divisions will be formed in the same manner; but
the captains of the left companies, if the movement
be made in quick time, after commanding FRONT,
will each place himself before the centre of his company, and command, 1. Such company, forward.
2. Guide right. 3. MARCH. If the movement be made
in double quick time, each will command, as soon ar
his company has cleared the column:
1. Such company by the right flank. 2. MARCH.
381. The right guide of each left company will so
direct his march as to arrive by the side of the man
on the left of the right company. The left company
being nearly up with the rear rank of the right company, its captain will halt it, and the movement will
be finished as prescribed No. 371 and following.
382. If the left be in front, the movement will be
executed by inverse means: the right companies will
conform themselves to what is prescribed above.for
the left companies: and the two guides, placed respectively before the right and left files of eacjh. left
company, will face to the left. At the command,
Guides posts, given by the colonel, the guides, who
have marked the front of divisions, and the captains,
will quickly retake their places in the column.
383. If the column be marching at full distance,
the divisions will be formed as prescribed No. 196.
If it be marching at half distance, the formation will
take place by the commands and according to the
principles indicated No. 376 ; if the column be marching in double quick time, the companies which should
mark time will march in quick time by the command
of their captains.
Eemarks on the formation of divisions from a halt.
384. As this movement may be considered as the
element of deployments, it ought to be executed with
the utmost accuracy.

280

SCHOOL OP THE BATTALION—PART IT.

385. If companies marching by the flank do not
preserve exactly their distances, there will be openings between the files at the instant of facing to the
front.
386. If captains halt their companies too early,
they will want space, and the files which have not
cleared the flanks of the standing companies will not
be able to dress into line without pushing their ranks
laterally.
387. If on the contrary the companies be halted
too late, it will be necessary for them to incline to
the right or left in dressing; and in deployments,
either of these faults would lead to error in the following companies.
388. As often as a guide shall have to step out to
place himself before his subdivision in order to mark
the direction, he will be particularly careful to place
himself so as to be opposite to one of the three outer
files of the subdivision when they shall be aligned:
if he take too much distance, and neither of those
files finds itself against him, the chiefs of the subdivision will have no assured point on which to direct
the alignment.
PART FOURTH.
Different modes of passing from the order in column
to the order in battle.
ARTICLE FIRST.

Manner of determining the line of battle.
389. The line of battle may be marked or determined in three different manners: 1st, by placing two
markers eighty or a hundred paces apart, on the direction it is wished to give to the line; 2d, by placing
a marker at the point at which it may be intended to
*est a flank, and then choosing a second point towards,

/

Ma-nnner of determining tie line of battle (No. 389).

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART IV.

281

or beyond the opposite flank, and there posting a second
marker distant from each other a little less than the
leading subdivision; 3d, by choosing at first the points
of direction for the flanks, and then determining, by
intermediate points, the straight line between those
selected points, both of which may sometimes be
beyond reach.
ARTICLE SECOND.

Different modes of passing from column at full
distance into lino of battle.
1. To the left (or right)
2. On the right (or left)
[ into line of battle.
3. Forward,
4. Faced to the rear,
Xet, Column at full distance, right in front, to the left into
line of battle.

390. A column, right in front, being at a halt,
when tlie colonel shall wish to form it to the left into
line, he will assure the positions of the guides by the
means previously indicated, and then command:
1. Left, into line, wheel. 2. MARCH (or double quick—
MARCH).

391. At the first command, the right guide of the
leading company will hasten to place himself on the
direction of the left guides of the column, face to
them, and place himself so as to be opposite to one
of the three right files of his company, when they
shall be in line: he will be assured in this position
by the lieutenant colonel.
392. At the command march, briskly repeated by
the captains, the left front rank man of each company
will face to the left, and rest his breast lightly against
the right arm of his guide; the companies will wheel
to the le^t on the principle of wheeling from a halt,

282

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART IT.

conforming themselves to what is prescribed, school
of the company No. 239: each captain will turn to
his company, to observe the execution of the movement, and when the right of the company shall arrive
at three paces from the line of battle, he will command:
1. Such company. 2. HALT.
393. The company being halted, the captain will
place himself on the line by the side of the left front
rank man of the company next on the right, align
himself correctly, and command:
3.

Right—DRESS.

894. At this command, the company will dress up
between the captain and the front rank man on its
left, the captain directing the alignment on that man;
the front rank man on the right of the right company,
who finds himself opposite to its right guide, will
lightly rest his breast against the left arm of this
guide.
395. Each captain, having aligned his company,
will command, FRONT, and the colonel will add:
Guides—POSTS.
396. At this command, the guides will return to
their places in line of battle, each passing through
the nearest captain's iuterval; to permit him to pass,
the captain will momentarily step before the first file
of his company, and the covering sergeant behind the
Bame file. This rule is general for all the formations
into line of battle.
397. When companies form line of battle, file closers
•will always place themselves exactly two paces from
the rear rank, which will sufficiently assure their
alignment.
398. The battalion being correctly aligned, the
colonel, lieutenant colonel, and major, as well as the

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART IY.

283

adjutant and sergeant major, will return to their re^
fcpective places in line of battle. This rule is general,
for all the formations into line of battle; nevertheless?
the battalion being in the school of elementary instruction, the colonel will go to any point he may deem
ne'cessary.
399. A column, with the left in front, will form itself to the right into line of battle, according to the same
principles; the left guide of the left company will
place himself, at the first command, on the direction
of the right guides, in a manner corresponding to what
is prescribed, No. 391, for the right guide of the right
company.
400. At the command guides posts, the captains will
take their places in line of battle as well as the guides
This rule is general for all formations into line of battle
in which the companies are aligned by the left.
401. A column by division may form itself into line
of battle by the same commands and means, but observing what follows: if the right be in front, at the
command halt, given by the chiefs of division, the left
guide of each right company will place himself on the
alignment opposite to one of the three files on the left
of his company ; the left guide of the first company
will be assured on the direction by the lieutenant
colonel; the left guides of the other right companies
will align themselves correctly on the division guides;
to this end, the division guides (on the alignment)
will invert, and hold their pieces up perpendicularly
before the centre of their bodies, at the command left
into line, wheel. If the column by division be with the
left in front, the right guides of left companies will
conform themselves to what has just been prescribed
for the left guides of right companies, and place themselves on the line opposite to one of the three right
files of their respective companies.
402. A column in march will be formed into line,
witJiout halting, by the same commands and means,

284

SCHOOL or THE BATTALION—PART I T .

At the command march, the guides will halt in thei*
places, and the lieutenant colonel will promptly rectify their positions.
403. If, in forming the column into line, the colonel
^hould wish to move forward, without halting, he will
command:
1. By companies left wheel. 2. MARCH (or double
quick—MARCH).

404. At the command march, briskly repeated by
the captains, each company will wheel to the left on
a fixed pivot, as prescribed in the school of the company, No. 261; the left guides will step back into the
rank of file closers before the wheel is completed;
and, when the right of the companies shall arrive near
the line, the colonel will command:
3. Forward. 4. MARCH. 5. Guide centre.
405. At the fourth command, given at the instant
the wheel is completed, the companies will march
directly to the front. At the fifth command, the
color and the general guides will move rapidly six
paces to the front. The colonel will assure the direction of the color; the captains of companies and the
men will, at once, conform themselves to the principles of the march in line of battle, to be hereinafter
indicated, No. 587 and following.
406. The same principles are applicable to a column
left in front.
By inversion to the right (or left) into line of battle.
407. When a column, right in front, shall be under
the necessity of forming itself into line faced to the
reverse flank, and the colonel shall wish to execute
this formation by the shortest movement, he will
command:
1. By inversion, right into line, wheel. 2. Battalion,
guide right.

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART I T .

285

408. At the first command, the lieutenant colonei
will place himself in front, and facing to the right
guide of the leading subdivision; at the second command, he will rectify, as promptly as possible, the
direction of the right guides of the column; the captain of the odd company, if there be one, and the
column be by division, will promptly bring the right
of his company on the direction, and at company distance from the division next in front; the left guide
of the leading subdivision will place himself on the
direction of the right guides, and will be assured
in his position by the lieutenant colonel; which being
executed, the colonel will command:
S. MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).

409. At this, the right front rank man of each subdivision will face to the right, rest his breast lightly
against the left arm of his guida, and the battalion
will foim itself to the right into lme of battle, according to the principles prescribed,- which being executed, the colonel will command:
Guides—POSTS.
410. If the column be with the left in front, it will
form itself, by inversion, to the left into line, according to the same principles.
411. If the colonel should wish the battalion, when
formed into line of battle, to be moved forward, the
movement will be executed by the commands, and
according to the principles, indicated in No. 408;
always preceding the command, by companies right (or
left) wheel, by the command, by inversion.
Successive Formations.
412. Under the denomination of successive formations are included all those formations where the
(several subdivisions of a column arrive one after
another on the line of battle; such are formations

286

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART I T .

on the right, or left, forward and faced to the rear
into line of battle, as well as deployments of columns
in mass.
413. The successive formations which may be ordered when the column is marching, and is to continue marching, will be executed by a combination
of the two gaits, quick and double quick time.
2d. Column at full

distance, on the right (or on the left),
into line of battle.

414. A column by company, at full distance and
right in front, having to form itself on the right into
line of battle, the colonel will indicate to the lieutenant colonel, a little in advance, the point of appui,
or rest, for the right, as well as the point of direction
to the left; the lieutenant colonel will hasten with
two markers, and establish them in the following
manner on the direction indicated.
415. The first marker will be placed at the point
of appui for the right front rank man of the leading
company; the second will indicate the point where
one of the three left files of the same company will
rest when in line; they will be placed so as to present the right shoulder to the battalion when formed.
416; These dispositions being made, the colonel
will command:
1. On the right, into line. 2. Battalion, guide right.
417. At the second command, the right will become
the directing flank, and the touch of the elbow will
be to that side; the right guide of the leading company will march straight forward until up with the
turning point, and each following guide will march
in the trace of the one immediately preceding.
418. The leading company being nearly up with
the fiftt marker, its captain will command: 1. Right
turn, and when the company is precisely up with thig
marker, he will add: 2. MARCH.

PI. 56.

^hiiiiinHiiHiiii'iiiiliilr,

tPWIiMlift

To form on the right into line (ISlo. 417).

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART IT.

287

419. At the,command march, the company will turn
to the right; the right guide will so direct himself as
to bring the man next to him opposite to the right
marker, and when at three paces from him, the captain will command:
1. First company; 2. HALT.
420. At the second command, the company will
halt; the files, not yet in line, will form promptly;
the left guide will retire as a file closer; and the
captain will then command :
3. Right—-DRESS.

421. At this command, the company will align
itself; the two men who find themselves opposite to
the two markers will each lightly rest his breast
against the riojht arm of his marker; the captain,
passing to the right of the front rank, will direct the
alignment on these two men. These rules are general
for all successive formations.
422. The second company will continue to march
straight forward; when arrived opposite to the left
flank of the preceding company, it will turn to the
right, and be formed on the line of battle, as has just
been prescribed; the right guide will direct himself
so as to come upon that line by the side of the man
on the left of the first company.
423. At the distance of three paces from the line
of battle, the company will be halted by its captain,
who will place himself briskly by the side of the man
on the left of the preceding company, and align himself correctly on its front rank.
424. The left guide will, at the same time, place
himself before one of the three left files of his company, and, facing to the right, lie will place himself
accurately on the direction of the two markers of tin*
preceding company.
425. The captain will then command:

288

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART IV.

Right—DRESS.

426. At this command, the second company will
dress forward on the line; the captain will direct its
alignment on the front rank man who has rested his
breast against the left guide of the company.
427. The following companies will thus come successively to form themselves on the line of battle,
each conforming itself to what has just been prescribed for the one next to the right; and when they
Bhall all be established, the colonel will command:
Guides—POSTS.
423. At this command, the guides will take thc5r
places in line of battle, and the markers placed before
the right company will retire.
429. If the column be marching in quick time, and
the colonel should wish to cause the movement to be
executed in double quick time, he will add the command: Double quick—MARCH.
At the command
march, all the companies will take the double quick
step, and the movement will be executed as prescribed No. 417 and following.
430. The colonel will follow up the formation,
passing along the front, and being always opposite to
the company about to t u r n : it is thus that he will be
the better able to see and to correct the error that
would result from a command given too soon or too
late to the preceding company.
431. The lieutenant colonel will, with the greatest
care, assure the direction of the guides: to this end,
the instant that the markers are established for the
leading company, he will move a little beyond the
point at which the left of the next company will rest,
establish himself correctly on the prolongation of the
two markers, and assure the guide of the second company on this direction; this guide being assured, the
lieutenant colonel will place himself farther to the

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART IT".

289

rear, in order to assure, in like manner, the guide of
the third company, and so on, successively, to the left
of the battalion. In assuring the guides in their positions on the line of hattle, he will take care to let
them first place themselves, and confine himself to
rectifying their positions if they do not cover accurately, and at the proper distance; the preceding
guides or markers. This rule is general, for all successive formations.
432. A column, left in front, will form itself on the
left into line of battle according to the same principles : the captains will go to the left of their respective
companies to align them, and shift afterwards to their
proper flanks, as prescribed No. 400.
Remarks on the formation on the right, or left, into
line of battle.
433. In order that this movement may be executed
with regularity, it is necessary to establish the line
of battle so that the guide of each company, after
turning, may have at least ten steps to take, in order
to come upon that line.
434. In the first exercises, the line of battle will
be established on a direction parallel to that of the
column; but, when the captains and guides shall
comprehend the mechanism of the movement, the
colonel will generally choose oblique directions, in
order to habituate the battalion to form itself in any
direction.
435. When the direction of the line of battle forms
a sensible angle with that of the march of the column,
the colonel, before beginning the movement, will give
the head of the column a new direction parallel to
that line: to this end, he will indicate to the guide
of the leading company a point in advance, on which
this guide will immediately direct himself, and the
company will conform itself to the direction of its
guide, at the command, or on a mere caution, of the

290

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART IT.

captain, according as the change of direction may require ; each following company will make the same
movement, on the same ground, as it shall successively
arrive By this means the guides of all the companies
in the column will have, after turning, nearly the
same number of paces to take in order to come upon
*he line of battle.
436. Every captain will always observe, in placing
himself on that line, not to give the command dress,
until after the guide of his company shall have been
assured on the direction by the lieutenant colonel.
This rule is general for, all successive formations.
437. Each captain will cause his company to sup
port arms, the instant that the captain, who follows
him, shall have commanded front. This rule is general
for all successive formations.
438. When, in the execution of this movement, the
colonel shall wish to commence firing, he will give the
order to that effect to the captain whose company is
the first in line of battle; this captain will immediately place himself behind the centre of his company,
and as soon as the next captain shall have commanded
front, he will commence the fire by file, by the commands prescribed, school of the company. At the
command fire by file, the marker at the outer file of
this first company will retire, and the other will place
himself against the nearest man of the next company.
The captain of the latter will commence firing as
soon as the captain of the third company, in line,
shall have commanded front; the marker before the
nearest file of the second company, in line, will now
retire, and the guide before the opposite flank will
place himself before the nearest file of the third company, in line, and so on, in continuation, to the last
company on the left or right of the battalion, according as the formation may have commenced with the
right or left in front.
439. In all the successive formations, the same

291

PL 57.

i
!

V
\

^ \ .

\
\

\

\
\

\
\

\

I

\

^
^

\

\

\x
-

\

\

\

\
\

\

\

\ ¥**-—$
T?\

\

F

\
\

Forward into line, <£<?• (Ko. 441).

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART IT.

291

p r i n c i p l e s will be observed for t h e execution of the
fire b y file. This fire will always be executed by t h *
c o m m a n d of each c a p t a i n of company.
Zd. Column at full distance, forward

into line of battle.

440. A column b e i n g b y company, at full distance,
r i g h t in front, and at a halt, when the colonel shall
wish to form it forward into line, he will conform
to w h a t is prescribed Nos. 414 a n d 415, a n d then
command:
1. Forward into line. 2. By company, left half ivlicel.
3. M A R C H (or double
quick—MARCH).
441. A t the first command, the captain of t h e leadi n g c o m p a n y will &&&—guide right, p u t t h e company
in m a r c h , h a l t it three paces from the m a r k e r s , a n d
align it against the latter by the right.
442. A t t h e command march, all the other comp a n i e s will wheel to t h e left on fixed p i v o t s ; and, at
t h e i n s t a n t t h e colonel shall j u d g e , according to the
direction of t h e line of b a t t l e , t h a t t h e companies
have sufficiently wheeled, h e will c o m m a n d :
4. Forward.

5. M A R C H .

6. Guide right.

443. A t t h e fifth command, t h e companies, ceasing
to wheel, will m a r c h straight f o r w a r d ; a n d at t h e
s i x t h , t h e m e n will touch elbows towards t h e r i g h t .
T h e r i g h t guide of the second company, who is
n e a r e s t to the line of battle, will m a r c h s t r a i g h t
f o r w a r d ; each succeeding r i g h t guide will follow t h e
file immediately before him a t t h e cessation of the
wheel.
444. T h e second company h a v i n g arrived opposite
to t h e left file of the first, its captain will cause it to
t u r n to t h e right, in order to a p p r o a c h t h e line of
b a t t l e ; a n d when its r i g h t guide shall b e a t t h r e e
paces from t h a t line, the c a p t a i n will c o m m a n d :
25

292

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART IT.

1. Second company. 2. HALT.
445. At the second command, the company will
halt; the files not yet in line with the guide will come
into it promptly, the left guide will place himself on
the line of battle, so as to be opposite to one of the
three files on the left of the company; and, as soon
as he is assured on the direction by the lieutenant
colonel, the captain, having placed himself accurately
on the line of battle, will command:
3. Right—DRESS.

446. At the instant that the guide of the second
company begins to turn to the right, the guide of the
third, ceasing to follow the file immediately before
him, will march straight forward; and, when he shall
arrive opposite to the left of the second, his captain
will cause the company to turn to the right, in order
to approach the line of battle, halt it at three paces
from that line, and align it by the right, as prescribed
for the second company.
447. Each. following company will execute what
has just been prescribed for the third, as the preceding company shall turn to the right, in order to
approach the line of battle.
448. The formation ended, the colonel will command:
Guides—POSTS.
449. The colonel and lieutenant colonel will observe, in this formation, what is prescribed for them
on the right into line.
450. A column left in front will form itself forward
into line of battle according to the same principles
and by inverse means.
451. When a column by company at full distance,
right in front, and in march, shall arrive behind the
right of the line on which it is to form into battle, the

SCHOOL OF THE RAT 1'ALION—PART IT.

293

colonel and lieutenant colonel will conform themselves
to what is prescribed Nos. 414 and 415.
452. The head of the column having arrived at
company distance from the two markers established
on the line, the colonel will command :
1. Forward into line. 2. By company, left half wheel.
3. MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).

453. At the first command, the captain of the first
company will command, Guide right, and caution it to
march directly to the front; the captains of the other
companies will caution them to wheel to the left.
454. At the command march, briskly repeated by
the captains, the first company will continue to march
to the front, taking the touch of elbows to the right.
Its chief will halt it at three paces from the markers,
and align it by the right. The other companies will
wheel to the left on fixed pivots, and at the instant
the colonel shall judge that they have wheeled suifieiently, he will command:
4. Forward. 5. MARCH. 6. Guide right.
455. At the fifth command, the companies will
cease to wheel, and move forward. At the sixth, they
will take the touch of elbows to the right. The
movement will be executed as previously explained.
456. If the colonel should wish to form the column
forward into line, and to continue to march in this
order, he will not cause markers to be established;
the movement will be executed in double quick time, by
the same commands and means, but with the following
modifications.
457. At the first command, the captain of the first
company will add quick time after the command guide
right. At the second command, the first company will
continue to march in quick time, and will take the
touch of elbows to the right; its chief will immediately place himself on its right, and, to assure the

294

scnooL OP THE BATTALION—-PART JY.

march, will take points of direction to the front. The
captain of the second company will cause his company
to take the same gait as soon as it shall arrive on a
line with the first, and will also move to the right of
his company; the captains of the third and fourth
companies will execute successively what has just
been prescribed for the second. The companies will
preserve the touch of elbows to the right until the
command, guide centre.
458. When the color-company shall have entered
the line, the colonel will command, guide centre. At
this command, the color-bearer and the right general
guide will move rapidly six paces in advance of the
line. The colonel will assure the direction of the
color-bearer. The lieutenant colonel and the right
companies will immediately conform themselves, to
the principles of the march in line of battle. The
left companies and the left general guide, as they
arrive on the line, will also conform to the same
principles. If the column be marching in double
quick time, when the last company shall have arrived
on the line, the colonel will cause the double quick to
be resumed.
459. It is not necessary that the movement be
entirely completed before halting the battalion. As
soon as the part of the battalion already formed shall
have arrived on the line of battle, the colonel will
halt the battalion; the companies not in line will each
complete the movement.
Bemarks on the formation forward, into line of battle,
460. The precision of this movement depends on
the direction the companies have at the moment the
colonel commands, Forward—MARCH.
The colonel
will judge nicely the point of time for giving this
command, observing that, if the direction of the line
of battle form with that of the column a right or
nearly a right angle, the companies ought to wheel

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART IV. " 295

about the eighth of the circle, and that the more acute
the angle formed by the two directions, so much the
more the companies ought to wheel before marching
straight forward.
461. It is important that each company in marching towards the line of battle should turn exactly
opposite the point where its captain ought to place
himself on that line; if a company turn too soon, it
will find itself masked, in part, by that which preceded it on the line of battle, and be obliged to unmask itself by the oblique step ; if it turn too late, it
will leave an interval between itself and the preceding company to be regained in like manner. In
either case, the next company will be led into error,
and the fault propagated to the opposite flank of the
battalion.
462. The guide of each company ought so to regulate himself in turning, as to bring his company to
the halting point parallelly with the line of battle.
4 33. If the angle formed by the line of battle and
the primitive direction of the column be so acute, that
the sompanies, on arriving opposite to their respective
pl&^es on the line of battle, find themselves nearly
paiallel to it, the captains will not give the command,
rig'ilt (or left) turn, but each halt his company, place
himself o n t h e line, and command:
Right (or left)—DRESS.
464. If, on the contrary, the angle formed by the
line of battle and the primitive direction of the
column be much greater than a right angle, the formation should be executed, not by the movement forward into line of battle, but by that of on the right (or
left) into line of battle, and according to the principles
prescribed for this formation.
465. If a company encounter an obstacle sufficient
to prevent it from marching by the front, it will right
(or left) face in marching, by the commands and means

296

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART IT.

indicated in t h e school of t h e company, Nos 314 a n d 315.
Tiie guide will continue to follow t h e same file b e h i n d
w h i c h he was m a r c h i n g , a n d will m a i n t a i n exactly
t h e same distance from t h e company immediately
preceding his own. The obstacle being passed, t h e
company will be formed into line b y t h e command of
its captain.
4.th. Column at full distance, faced to the reai% into line of
battle.
466. A column b e i n g b y company, a t full distance,
r i g h t in front, a n d a t a h a l t , w h e n t h e colonel shall
wish to form it into line faced to t h e r e a r , he a n d t h e
l i e u t e n a n t colonel will conform themselves to w h a t is
prescribed Nos. 414 a n d 415, a n d the colonel will then
command:
1. Into

line, faced

FACE.

to the rear.

3. M A R C H (or double

2. Battalion,

right—

quick—MARCH).

467. At the first command, t h e c a p t a i n of t h e leading company will cause it to face to t h e r i g h t , a n d
p u t it in m a r c h , causing it to wheel by file to the left,
a n d direct its m a r c h t o w a r d s t h e line of b a t t l e , which
i t will pass in r e a r of the left m a r k e r ; t h e first file
h a v i n g passed t h r e e paces beyond the line, t h e comp a n y will wheel again b y file to t h e left, in order to
place itself in r e a r of the two m a r k e r s ; b e i n g in t h i s
position, its captain will h a l t it, face it to the front,
a n d align it by t h e r i g h t against t h e m a r k e r s .
468. At the second command, all t h e other comp a n i e s will face to t h e r i g h t , each c a p t a i n placing
himself by the side of his r i g h t guide.
469. At the command march, t h e companies will p u t
themselves in m o v e m e n t ; the left guide of the second,
w h o is n e a r e s t to t h e line of b a t t l e , will h a s t e n in
advance to m a r k t h a t line ; he will place himself on
it as prescribed above for successive formations, and
t h u s indicate to his c a p t a i n t h e point at w h i s h ho

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART IT.

297

ought to pass the line of battle, by three paces, in
order to wheel by file to the left, and then to dhect
his company parallelly to that line.
470. As soon as the first file of this company shall
have arrived near the left file of the preceding one
already on the line of battle, its captain will command:
1. Second company. 2. HALT.
4. Right—DRESS.

8. FRONT.

471. The first command will be given when the
company shall yet have four paces to take to reach
the halting point.
472. At the second command, the company will
halt.
473. At the third, the company will face to the
front, and, if there be openings between the files, the
latter will promptly close to the right; the captain
will immediately place himself by the side of the man
on the left of the preceding company, and align himself on its front rank.
474. The fourth command will be executed as pre*
scribed No. 426.
475. The following companies will be conducted and
established on the line of battle as just prescribed
for the second, each regulating itself by the one that
precedes i t ; the left guides will detach themselves in
time to precede their respective companies on the line
by twelve or fifteen paces, and each place himself so
as to be opposite to one of the three left files of his
company, when in line. If the movement be executed
in double quick time, the moment it is commenced,
all the left guides will detach themselves at the same
time from the column, and will move at a run to establish themselves on the line of battle.
476. The formation ended, the colonel will com*
mand:

298

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART I f .

Guides—POSTS.
477. The colonel and lieutenant colonel, in this formation, will each observe what is prescribed for him
in that of on the right, into line of battle.
478. A column, left in front, will form itself faced
to the rear into line of battle according to the same
principles and by inverse means.
479. If the column be in march, and should arrive
in front of the right of the line on which it is to form
into battle, the colonel and lieutenant colonel will
conform to what is prescribed Nos. 414 and 415.
480. When the head of the column shall be nearly
at company distance from the two markers established
on the line, the colonel will command:
1. Into line, faced to the rear. 2. Battalion, by the
right flank. 3. MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).
481. At tl^e first command, the captains will caution their companies to face by the right flank.
482. At the command march, briskly repeated by
the captains of companies, all the companies will
face to the right; the first company will then wheel
by file to the left, and be directed by its captain a
little to the rear of the left marker ; then pass three
paces beyond the line, and wheel again by file to the
left; having arrived on the line, the captain will
halt the company, and align it by the right. The
remaining part of the movement will be executed aa
heretofore explained.
483. The foregoing principles are applicable to a
column, left in front.
484. As the companies approach the line of battle,
it is necessary that their captains should so direct
the march as to cross that line a little in rear of their
respective guides, who are faced to the basis of the
formation; hence each guide ought to detach himself in time to find himself correctly established

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION

PART I V .

299

on the direction before his company shall come up
with him.
ARTICLE THIRD.

Formation in line of battle by two movements.
485. If a column by company, right in front, and
at a halt, find itself in part on the line of battle, and
the colonel should think proper to form line of battle
before all the companies enter the new direction,
the formation will be executed in the following
manner:
486. It will be supposed that the jolumn has arrived behind the line of battle, and that five companies have entered the new direction. The colonel
having assured the guides of the first five companies
on the direction, will command:
1. Left into line, wheel. 2. Three rear companies,
forward into line.
487. At the second command, the chief of each of
the rear companies will command: By company, left
half wheel; and the colonel will add:
3. MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).

488. At this command, briskly repeated, the first
five companies will form themselves to the left, into
line of battle, and the three last forward, into line of
battle, by the means prescribed for these respective
formations; each captain of the three rear companies will, when his company shall have sufficiently
wheeled, command:
1. Forward. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right.
489. If the column be in march, the colonel will
command:

300

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION

PART I T .

1. To the left, and forward into line. 2. MARCH (or
double quick—MARCH).
490. At the first command, the captains of those
companies which have not entered on the new direction will command: By company, left half tvheel. At
the command march, briskly repeated, the first five
companies will form left into line, and the last three
forward into line, as prescribed for these respective
formations. Those captains who form their companies forward into line will conform to what is prescribed No. 488.
491. If the colonel should wish, in forming the
battalion into line, to march it immediately forward,
he will command:
1. By company to the left, and forward into line.
2.

MARCH.

492. At the first command, each captain, whose
company is not yet in the new direction, will command: 1. By company, left half ivheel; 2. Double
quick. At the command march, briskly repeated by
the captains, the companies not in the new direction
will execute what is prescribed above for forming
forward into line while marching; each of the other
companies will wheel to the left on a fixed pivot, and
when the right of these companies shall arrive on the
line, the colonel will command:
3. Forward. 4. MARCH. 5. Guide ventre.
493. The fifth command will be given when the
color-bearer arrives on the line, if not already there.
494. If the battalion be marching in double quick
time, the colonel will cause quick time to be taken
before commencing the movement.
495. If, instead of arriving behind, the column
should arrive before the line of battle, the colonel
will command:

SCHOOL 0£ THE BATTALION--FART IV.

301

1. Left into line, wheel. 2. Three rear companies
into line, faced to the rear.
496. At the second command, the captain of each
of the three rear companies will command: 1. Such
company. 2. Bight—FACE.
The colonel will then
add:
3. MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).

497. At this command, briskly repeated, the first
five companies will form themselves to the left, into
line of battle, and the three last faced to the rear, into
line of battle, by the means prescribed for these respective formations.
498. If the column be in march, the colonel will
command :
1. To the left, and into line faced to the rear. 2. MARCH
(or double quick—MARCH).
499. The movement will be executed as prescribed
Nos. 391, 480, and following.
500. These several movements in a column, left in
front, will be executed according to the same principles, and by inverse means.
ARTICLE FOURTH.

Different modes of passing from column at half distance, into line of battle.
1. To the left (or right)
2. On the right (or left)
into line of battle.
3. Forward, by deployment,
4. Faced to the rear,
1st. Column at half distance, to the left (or right) into
line of battle,

501. A column at half distance having to form
itself to the left (or right) into line of battle, the
colonel will cause it to take distances by one of the

302

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION- PART IT.

means prescribed Article IX., Part Third, of this
school; which being executed, he will form the
column into line of battle, as has been indicated No.
890 and following.
502. If a column by company, at half distance, be
in -march, and it be necessary to form rapidly into
line of battle, the colonel will command:
1. By the rear of column left (or right) into line, wheel*
2. MAIICH (or double quick—MARCH).

503. At the first command, the right general guide
will move rapidly to the front, and place himself a
little beyond the point where the head of the column
will rest, and on the prolongation of the guides.
The captain of the eighth company will command;
Left into line, wheel; the other captains will caution
their companies to continue to march to the front.
504. At the command march, briskly repeated by
the captain of the eighth company, the guide of this
company will halt short, and the company will wheel
to the left, conforming to the principles prescribed
for wheeling from a halt; when its right shall arrive
near the line, the captain will halt the company, and
align it by the left. The other captains will place
themselves briskly on the flank of the column; when
the captain of the seventh sees there is sufficient distance between his company and the eighth to form
the latter into line, he will command: Left into line,
wheel—MARCH ; the left guide will halt short, and,
facing to the rear, will place himself on the line;
the company will wheel to the left, the man on the
left of the front rank will face to the left, and place
his breast against the left arm of the guide; the
captain will halt the company when its right shall
arrive near the line, and will align it by the left.
The other companies will conform successively to
what has just been prescribed for the seventh.
505. Each captain will direct the alignment of his

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—rART IT.

303

company on the left m a n in t h e front r a n k of th«
company n e x t on his r i g h t .
506. The lieutenant colonel will be watchful t h a t
t h e leading guide m a r c h e s accurately on the p r o longation of the line of battle, and directs himself
on the r i g h t general guide. The major, placed in
r e a r of t h e left guide of the eighth company, will, as
soon as the guide of t h e seventh company is established on the direction, hasten in r e a r of the guides
of t h e other companies, so as to a s s u r e each of t h e m
in succession on the line.
2d. Column at half distance, on the right (or left), into lint
of battle.
507. A column at half distance will form itself on.
the r i g h t (or left) into line of battle, as prescribed
for a column at full distance.
3d. Column at half distance, forxoard, into line of battle.
508. If it be wished to form a column at half distance, forward into line of battle, the colonel will
first cause it to close in mass and t h e n deploy it on
the leading company.
4zth. Column at half distance, faced to the rear, into line
of battle.
509. A column at half distance will be formed inti)
line of battle, faced to the rear, as prescribed for a
column at full distance.
ARTICLE

FIFTH.

Deployment of columns closed i n m a s s .
510. A column in mass may be formed into line of
battle:
1. Faced to the front, by the deployment.
2. Faced to the r e a r , by the c o u n t e r m a r c h and
the deployment.

304

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART IV.

3. Faced to the right and faced to the left, by a
change of direction by the flank, and the
deployment.
511. When a column in mass, by division, arrives
behind the line on which it is intended to deploy it,
the colonel will indicate, in advance, to the lieutenant
colonel, the direction of the line of battle, as well as
the point on which he may wish to direct the column.
The lieutenant colonel will immediately detach himself with two markers, and establish them on that
line, the first at the point indicated, the second a little
less than the front of a division from the first.
512. Deployments will always be made upon lines
parallel and lines perpendicular to the line of battle;
consequently, if the head of the column be near the
line of battle, the colonel will commence by establishing the direction of the column perpendicularly to
that line, if it be not already so, by one of the means
indicated No. 244 and following, or No. 307 and
following. If the column be in march, he will so
direct it that it may arrive exactly behind the
markers, perpendicularly to the line of battle, and
halt it at three paces from that line.
513. The column, right in front, being halted, it is
supposed that the colonel wishes to deploy it on the
first division; he will order the left general guide to
go to a point on the line of battle a little beyond that
at which the left of the battalion will rest when deployed, and place himself correctly on the prolongation of the markers established before the fiisfc
division.
514. These dispositions being made, the colonel
will command:
1. On the first division, deploy column. 2. Battalion,
left—'FACE.

515. At the first command, the chief of the first
division will caution it to staud fast; the chiefs of

SCHOOL OP THE BATTALION—PART IT.

305

the ffr*ee other divisions will remind them that they
will have to face to the left.
516. At the second command, the three last divisions fidll face to the left; the chief of each division
will place himself by the side of its left guide, and
the junior captain by the side of the covering sergeant of the left company, who will have stepped
into the front rank.
517. At the same command, the lieutenant colonel
will place a third marker on the alignment of the
two first, opposite to one of the three left files of the
right company, first division, and then place himself
on the line of battle a few paces beyond the point at
which the left of the second division will rest.
518. The colonel will then command:
8. MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).

519. At this command, the chief of the first divi
sion will go to its right, and command:
Right—DRESS.

520. At this, the division will dress up against the
markers; the chief of the division, and its junior
captain, will each align the company on his left, and
then command:
FRONT.

521. The three divisions, faced to the left, will put
themselves in march; the left guide of the second
will direct himself parallelly to the line of battle; the
left guides of the third and fourth divisions will
march abreast with the guide of the second; the
guides of the third and fourth each preserving the
prescribed distance between himself and the guide of
the division which preceded his own in the column.
522. The chief of the second division will not follow its movement; he will see it file by him, and
when its right guide shall be abreast with him, he
will command:

306

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PA fcl' I T .

1. Second division. 2. HALT.

3. FRONT.

523. The first command will be given when the
division shall yet have seven or eight paces to
march; the second, when the right guide shall be
abreast with the chief of the division, and the third
immediately after the second.
524. At the second command, the division will
halt; at the third, it will face to the front, and if
there be openings between the files, the chief of th«
division will cause them to bo, promptly closed to the
right; the left guides of both companies will step
upon the line of battle, face to the right, and place
themselves on the direction of the markers established before the first division, each guide opposite
to one of the three left files of his company.
525. The division having faced to the front, its
chief will place himself accurately on the line of
battle, on the left of the first division; and when he
shall see the guides assured on the direction, he will
command, Right—DRESS.
At this, the division will
be aligned by the right in the manner indicated for
the first.
526. The third and fourth divisions will continue
to march; at the command halt, given to the second,
the chief of the third will halt in his own person,
place himself exactly opposite to the guide of the
second, after this division shall have faced to the
front and closed its files; he will see his division file
past, and when his right guide shall be abreast with
him, he will command:
1. Third division. 2. HALT.

3. FRONT.

527. As soon as the division faces to the front,
its chief will place himself two paces before its
centre, and command:
X. Third division, forward. 2. Guide right. 3. MARCH,

SCHOOL OF TLE BATTALION—PART IT.

307

528. At the third command, the division will march
towards the line of battle; the right guide will so
direct himself as to arrive by the side of the man on
the left of the second division, and when the division
is at three paces from the line of battle, its chief will
halt it and align it by the right.
529. The chief of the fourth division will conform
himself (and the chief of the fifth, if there be a fifth)
to what has just been prescribed for the third.
530. The deployment ended, the colonel will
command :
Guides—POSTS.
531. At this command, the guides will resume
their places in line of battle, and the markers will
retire.
532. If the column be in march, and the colonel
shall wish to deploy it on the first division without
halting the column, he will make the dispositions
indicated Nos. 512 and 513, and when the first division shall have arrived at three paces from the line,
he will command:
1. On the first division, deploy column. 2. Battalion by
the left flank. 3. MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).
533. At the first command, the chief of the first
division will caution it to halt, and will command,
First division; the other chiefs will caution their divisions to face by the left flank.
534. At the command march, briskly repeated by
the chiefs of the rear divisions, the chief of the first
division will command, HALT, and will align his division by the right against the markers ; the other divisions will face to the left, their chiefs hastening to
the left of their divisions. The second division will
conform its movements to what is prescribed Nos.
522 and following. The third and fourth divisions
will execute what is prescribed Nos. 526 and follow26

308

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART IVT.

ing; but the chief of each division will halt in his
own person at the command march given by the chief
of the division which precedes him, and when the
right of his division arrives abreast of him, he will
eommand:
Such division, by the right flanh—MARCH
635. The lieutenant colonel will assure the position
of the guides, conforming to what is prescribed No.
431. The major will follow the movement abreast
with the fourth division.
536. If the colonel shall wish to deploy the column
without halting it, and to continue the march, the
markers will not be posted; the movement will be
executed by the same commands and the same means
as the foregoing, but with the following modifications:
537. At the first command, the chief of the first
division will command, 1. Guide right. 2. Quick time.
At the command, Double quick—MARCH, given by the
colonel, the first division will march in quick time
and will take the touch of elbows to the right; the
captains will place themselves on the right of their
respective companies ; the captain on the right of the
battalion will take points on the ground to assure the
direction of the march. The chief of the second division will allow his division to file past him, and
when he sees its right abreast of him, he will command: 1. Second division by the right flank. 2. MARCH.
8. Guide right; and when this division shall arrive $n
the alignment of the first, be will cause it to march
in quick time. The third and fourth divisions will
deploy according to the same principles as the second.
538. The colonel, lieutenant colonel, major, and
color-bearer will conform themselves to what is prescribed No. 458.
539. The colonel will see, pending the movement,
that the principles just prescribed are duly observed,
and particularly that the divisions, in deploying, be

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART IV*.

809

not halted too soon nor too late. He will correct
promptly and quickly the faults that may be committed, and prevent their propagation. This rule is
general for all deployments.
540. The column being at a halt, if, instead of deploying it on the first, the colonel shall wish to deploy
it on the rearmost division, he will cause the dispositions to be made indicated No. 511 and following;
but it will be the right general guide whom he will
send to place himself beyond the point at which the
right of the battalion will rest when deployed.
541. The colonel will then command:
1. On *hc fourth (or such) division, deploy column.
2. Battalion, right—-'FACE.
542. At the first command, the chief of the fourth
division will caution it to stand fast; the chiefs of
the other divisions will caution them that they will
have to face to the right.
543. At the second command, the first three divisions will face to the right; and the chief of each
will place himself by the side of its right guide.
544. At the same command, the lieutenant colonel
will place a third marker between the first two, so
that this marker may be opposite to one of the three
right files of the left company of the division; the
lieutenant colonel will then place himself on the line
of battle a few paces beyond the point at which the
right of the third division will rest when deployed.
545. The colonel will then command:
3. MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).

546. At this command, the three right divisions
will put themselves in march, the guide of the first so
directing himself as to pass three paces within the
line marked by the right general guide. The chief
Of the third division will not follow its movement:
he will see it file past, halt it when its left guide shall

310

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART IY.

be abreast with him, and cause it to face to1 the front;
and, if there be openings between the files, he will
cause them to be promptly closed to the left.
547. The chief of the fourth division, when he sees
it nearly unmasked by the three others, will com
mand:
1. Fourth division, forward. 2. Guide left. 3. MARCH
548. At the command march, which will be given
the instant the fourth is unmasked, this division will
approach the line of battle, and when at three paces
from the markers on that line, its chief will halt it,
and command:
Left—DRESS.

549. At this command, the division will dress forward against the markers; the chief of the division
and the junior captain will each align the company
on his right, and then command:
FRONT.

550. The instant that the third division is unmasked, its chief will cause it to approach the line
of battle, and halt it in the manner just prescribed
for the fourth.
551. The moment the division halts, its right guide
and the covering sergeant of its left company will
step on the line of battle, placing themselves on the
prolongation of the markers established in front of
the fourth division; as soon as they shall be assured
in their positions, the division will be aligned as has
just been prescribed for the fourth.
552. The second and first divisions which will
have continued to march, will, in succession, be
halted and aligned by the left, in the same manner
as the third; the chiefs of these divisions will conform themselves to what is prescribed No. 526. The
Becond being near the line of battle, the command

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART IT.

311

will not be given for it to move on this line, but it
will be dressed up to it.
553. The deployment ended, the colonel will command:
Guides—POSTS.
554. At this command, the chiefs of division and
the guides will resume their places in line of ^battle,
and the markers will retire.
555. The lieutenant colonel will assure the positions of the guides by the means indicated No. 431,
and the major will follow the movement abreast with
the fourth division.
556. If the column be in march, and the colonel
shall wish to deploy it on the fourth division, he
will make the dispositions indicated No. 511 and
following; and when the head of the column shall
arrive within three paces of the line, he will command :
1 On the fourth division, deploy column. 2. Battalion,
by the right flank. 3. MARCH (or double quick—*
MARCH).

557. At the first command, the chief of the fourth
division will caution it to halt, and will command,
Fourth division ; the chiefs of the other divisions will
caution their divisions to face to the right.
558. At the command march, briskly repeated by
the chiefs of the first three divisions, the chief of the
fourth will command: HALT. The first three di»
visions will face to the right, and be directed parallelly to the line of battle. The chief of each of these
divisions will place himself by the side of its right
guide. The chief of the third division will see his
division file past him, and when his left guide is
abreast of him, he will halt it, and face it to the
front. The chief of the fourth division, when ho
shall see it nearly unmasked, will command: 1.

312

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—-PART IV.

Fourth division, forward; 2, Guide left; 3. M IBCH
(or double quick—MARCH). This division will move
towards the line of battle, and when at three paces
from this line, it will be halted by its chief, and
aligned by the left.
659. The chief of the third division will move his
division forward, conforming to what has just been
prescribed for the fourth.
560. The chiefs of the second and first divisions,
after halting their divisions, will conform to what
is prescribed No. 552.
561. If the colonel should wish to deploy on the
fourth division without halting the column, and to
continue to march forward, he will not have markers
posted, and the movement will be executed by the
same commands and the same means, with the following modifications: the fourth division, wjien unmasked, will be moved forward in quick time, and
will continue to march, instead of being halted,
and will take the touch of elbows to the left. The
third division, on being unmasked, will be moved to
the front in double quick time, but when it arrives
on the alignment of the fourth it will take the quick
step, and dress to the left until the command Guide
centre, is given by the colonel. The chiefs of the
second and first divisions will conform to what has
been prescribed for the third. When the first division shall arrive on the line, the colonel may cause
the battalion to take the double quick- step.
562. The colonel and lieutenant colonel will conform to what has been prescribed Nos. 458 and 459.
563. To deploy the column on an interior division,
the colonel will cause the line to be traced by the
means above indicated, and the general guides will
move briskly on the line, as prescribed Nos. 513
and 540. This being executed, the colonel will command:

SCHOOL OF SHE BATTALION—PAST IV.

313

I On such division, deploy column. 2. Battalion outwards-— FACE.
MARCH).

3. MARCH

(or double

quick-^

564. Whether the column be with the right or
left in front, the divisions which, in the order in
battle, belong to the right of the directing one, will
face to the right; the others, excepting the directing
division, will face to the left; the divisions in front
of the latter will deploy by the means indicated No.
642 and following; those in its rear will deploy as
is prescribed No. 513 and following.
565. The directing division, the instant it finds
itself unmasked, will approach the line of battle,
taking the guide left or right, according as the right
or left of the column may be in front. The chief of
this division will align it by the directing flank, and
then step back into the rear, in order momentarily
to give place to the chief of the next for aligning the
next division.
566. The lieutenant colonel will assure the positions of the guides of divisions, which, in the line
of battle, take the right of the directing division,
and the major will assure the positions of the other
guides.
567. If the column be in march, the colonel will
command:
1 On such division, deploy column. 2. Battalion,
by the right and left flanks. 3. MARCH (or double
quick—MARCH).

568. The divisions which are in front of the di
recting one will deploy by the means indicated Nos
657 and following; those in rear, as prescribed No.
533 and following.
669. The directing division, when unmasked, wil!
conform to what is prescribed for the fourth division, No- 558.

314

SCHUOL Off THE BATTALION—IART IT.

570. The colonel, lieutenant colonel and major
will conform to what has been prescribed Nos. 458
and 459.
571. In a eolun.n, left in front, deployments will
be executed according to the same principles, and
by inverse means.
Remarks on the deployment of columns, closed in
mass.
672. All the divisions ought to deploy rectangularly, to march off abreast, and to preserve their
distances towards the line of battle.
573. Each division, the instant that it is unmasked,
ought to be marched towards the line of battle, and
to be aligned upon it by the flank next to the directing division ; the latter, whether the right or left be
in front, will always be aligned by the flank next to
the point of appui, when the deployment is made on
the first or last division; but if the column be deployed on an interior division, this division will be
aligned by the flank which was that of direction.
574. The chiefs of division will see that, in deploying, the principles prescribed for marching by
the flank are well observed, and if openings between
the files occur, which ought not to happen except o"
broken or difficult grounds, the openings ought to be
promptly closed towards the directing flank as soon
as the divisions face to the front.
575. If a chief of division give the command
halt, or the command by the right or left flank, too
soon or too late, his division will be obliged to oblique to the right or left in approaching the line of
battle, and his fault may lead the following subdivi'
sion into error.
576. In the divisions which deploy by the left
flank, it is always the left guide of each company
who aught to place himself on the line of battle, to

SCHOOL OF THE BAT3 ALION—-PART IY.

315

mark the direction; in divisions which deploy by
the right fiank, it is the right guide.
577. A column by company, closed in mass, may
be formed to the left or to the right into line, in the
same manner as the column at half distance, and by
the means indicated No. 502 and following.
578. A column by company, closed in mass, may
be formed on the right or on the left into line of
battle, as a column at half distance; but in order to
execute this movement, without arresting the march
of the column, it is necessary that the guides avoid,
with the greatest care, shortening the step in turning, and that the men near them, respectively, conform themselves rapidly to the movements of their
guides.
Remarks on inversions.
579. Inversions giving frequently the means of
forming line of battle, in the promptest manner, are
of great utility in the movements of an army.
580. The application that may be made of inversions in the formations to the right and to the left in
line of battle, has been indicated No. 407 and following. They may also be advantageously employed
in the successive formations, except in that of faced
to the rear, into line of battle.
581. Formations, by inversion, will be executed
according to the same principles as formations in the
direct order; but the colonel's first command will
always begin by inversion.
582. The battalion being in line of battle by inversion, when the colonel shall wish, by forming it
into column, to bring it back to the direct order, he
will cause it either to break or to ploy by company,
or by division, accordingly as the column may have
been by company or by division before it had been
formed into line of battle by inversion.
583. When a battalion in line of battle, formed by

310

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART V.

inversion, has to he ployed into column, the move*
ment will be executed according to the same principles as if the line were in the direct order, but
observing what follows.
584. If it be intended that the column shall be by
division, with the first in front, or by company, with
the first company in front, the colonel will announce
in the second command—left in front, because the battalion being in line of battle by inversion, that subdivision is on the left.
585. Each chief whose subdivision takes position
in the column in front of the directing one, will eonduct his subdivision till it halts; and each chief
whose subdivision takes position in rear of the directing one, will halt in his own person when up with the
preceding right guide, and see his subdivision file
past; and each chief will align his subdivision by the
right. When the column is to be put in march, the
second command will be, guide left, because the proper
right is in front.
588. For the same reason, if it be intended that the
fast subdivision shall be in front, right in front, will
be announced in the second command; the subdivisions will be aligned by the left, and to put the column
in march, the second command will be, guide right,
because the proper left is in front.
PAKT FIFTH.
ARTICLE FIRST.

To advance in line of battle.
587. The battalion being correctly aligned, and
supposed to be the directing one, when the colonel
shall wish to march in line of battle, he will give the
lieutenant colonel an intimation of his purpose, place
himself about forty paces in rear of the color-file,
and face to the front.

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PARTY.

317

588. The lieutenant colonel will place himself a
like distance in front of the same file, and face to the
colonel, who will establish him as correctly as possible, by signal of the sword, perpendicularly to the
line of battle opposite to the color-bearer. The
colonel will next, above the heads of the lieutenant
colonel and color-bearer, take a point of direction in
the field beyond, if a distinct one present itself,
exactly in the prolongation of those first- two points.
589. The colonel will then move twenty paces farther to the rear, and establish two markers on the
prolongation of the straight line passing through the
color-bearer and the lieutenant colonel; these markers will face to the rear, the first placed about twentyfive paces behind the rear rank of the battalion, and
the second at the same distance from the first.
590. The color-bearer will be instructed to take,
the moment the lieutenant colonel shall be established on the perpendicular, two points on the
ground in the straight line which, drawn from himself, would pass between the heels of that officer;
the first of these points will be taken at fifteen or
twenty paces from the color-bearer.
591. These dispositions being made, the colonel
will command:
1. Battalion, forward.
592. At this, the front rank of the color-guard
will advance six paces to the front; the corporals in
the rear rank will place themselves in the front rank,
and these will be replaced by those in the rank of
file closers ; at the same time the two general guides
will move in advance, abreast with the color-bearer,
the one on the right, opposite to the captain of the
right company, the other opposite to 'the sergeant
who closes the left of the battalion.
593. The captains of the left wing will shift, passing before the front rank, to the left of their re-

318

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART Y.

spective companies ; the sergeant on the left of the
battalion will step back into the rear rank. The
covering sergeant of the company next on the left
of the color-company will step into the front rank.
594. The lieutenant colonel having assured the
color-bearer on the line between himself and the
corporal of the color-file, now in the front rank,
will go to the position which will be hereinafter indicated, No. 602.
595. The major will place himself six or eight
paces on either flank of the color-rank.
596. The colonel will then command:
2. MAECH (or double quick—MARCH)

597. At this command, the battalion will step off
with life; the color-bearer, charged with the step and
direction, will scrupulously observe the length and
cadence of the pace, marching on the prolongation
of the two points previously taken, and successively
taking others in advance by the means indicated in
the school of the company; the corporal on his right,
and the one on his left, will march in the same step,
taking care not to turn the head or shoulders, the
color-bearer supporting the color-lance against the
hip.
598. The two general guides will march in the
same step with the color-rank, each maintaining
himself abreast, or nearly so, with that rank, and
neither occupying himself with the movement of the
other.
599. The three corporals of the color-guard, now
in the front rank of the battalion, will march well
aligned, elbow to elbow, heads direct to the front,
and without deranging the line of their shoulders;
the centre oiae will follow exactly in the trace of the
color-bearer, and maintain the same step, without
lengthening or shortening it, except on an intimation
frona the colonel or lieutenant colonel, although he

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART V.

319

Should find himself more or less than six paces from
the color-rank.
600. The covering sergeant in the front rank between the color-company and the next on the left
will march elbow to elbow, and on the same line,
with the three corporals in the centre, his head well
to the front.
601. The captains of the color-company, and the
company next to the left, will constitute, with the
three corporals in the centre of the front rank, the
basis of alignment for both wings of the battalion ;
they will march in the same step with the colorbearer, and exert themselves to maintain their
shoulders exactly in the square with the direction.
To this end, they will keep their heads direct to the
front, only occasionally casting an eye on the three
centre corporals, with the slightest possible turn of
the neck, and, if they perceive themselves in advance
or in rear of these corporals, the captain, or two
captains, will almost insensibly shorten or lengthen
the step, so as, at the end of several paces, to regain
the true alignment, without giving sudden checks or
impulsions to the wings beyond them respectively.
602. The lieutenant colonel, placed twelve or fifteen
paces on the right of the captain of the color-company, will maintain this captain and the next one
beyond, abreast with the three centre Corporals ; to
this end, he will caution either to lengthen or to
shorten the step, as may be necessary, which the
captain, or two captains, will execute as has just been
explained.
603. All the other captains will maintain themselves on the prolongation of this basis; and, to this
end, they will cast their eyes towards the centre,
taking care to turn the neck but slightly, and not to
derange the direction of their shoulders.
604. The captains will observe the march of their
companies, and prevent the men from getting in

320

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART T.

advance of the line of captains; they will not
lengthen or shorten step except when evidently ne •
cessary; because, to correct, with too scrupulous
attention, small faults, is apt to cause the production of greater—loss of calmness, silence, and equality of step, each of which it is so important to maintain,
605. The men will constantly keep their heads well
directed to the front, feel lightly the elbow towarda
the centre, resist pressure coming from the flank,
give the greatest attention to the squareness of
shoulders, and hold themselves always very slightly
behind the line of the captains, in order never to
shut out from the view of the latter the basis of
alignment; they will, from time to time, cast an eye
on the color-rank, or on the general guide of the
wing, in order to march constantly in the same step
with those advanced persons.
606. Pending the march, the line determined by
the two markers (h and d) will be prolonged by
placing, in proportion as the battalion advances, a
third marker (i) in the rear of the first (A), then
the marker (d) will quit his place and go a like distance in rear of (i); the marker (h) will, in his turn,
do the like in respect to (d), and so on, in succession,
as long as the battalion continues to advance; each
marker, on shifting position, taking care to face to
the rear, and to cover accurately the two markers
already established on the direction. A staff officer,
or the quartermaster sergeant, designated for the
purpose, and who will hold himself constantly fifteen
or twenty paces facing the marker farthest from the
battalion, will caution each marker when to shift
place, and assure him on the direction behind the
other two.
607. The colonel will habitually hold himself about
thirty paces in rear of the centre of his battalion,
taking care not to put himself on the line of markers;

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART Y.

321

if, for example, by the slanting of the battalion, or
the indications which will be given Nos. 617 and
following, he find that the march of the color-bearer
is not perpendicular, he will promptly command*
Point of direction to the right (or left).
608. At this command, the major will hasten thirty
or forty paces in advance of the color-rank, halt, face
to the colonel, and place himself on the direction
which the latter will indicate by signal of the sword;
the corporal in the centre of the battalion will then
direct himself upon the major, on a caution from the
colonel, advancing, to that end, the opposite shoulder ; the corporals on his right and left will conform
themselves to his direction.
609. The color-bearer will also direct himself upon
the major, advancing the opposite shoulder, the major
causing him, at the same time, to incline to the right
or left, until he shall exactly cover the corporal of
his file ; the color-bearer will then take points on the
ground in this new direction.
610. The two general guides will conform themselves to the new direction of the color-rank.
611. The officer charged with observing the successive replacing of the markers in the rear of the
centre, will establish them promptly on the new direction, taking for basis the color-bearer and the corporal of his file in the centre of the battalion; the
colonel will verify the new direction of the markers.
612. The lieutenant colonel, from the position given
No. 602, will see that the two centre companies, and
successively all the others, conform themselves to the
new direction of the centre, but without precipitancy or disorder; he will then endeavor to maintain
that basis of alignment for the battalion, perpendicularly to the direction pursued by the colorIbearer.
613. He will often observe the march of the two

322

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART Y.

wings; and, if he discover that the captains negleci
to conform themselves to the basis of alignment, ha
will recall their attention by the command—captain
of (such) company, or captains of (such) companies,
on the line—without, however, endeavoring too scrupulously to correct small faults.
614. The major on the flank of the color-rank willj
during the march, place himself, from time to time,
twenty paces in front of that rank, face to the rear, and
place himself correctly on the prolongation of the
markers established behind the centre, in order to
verify the exact march of the color-bearer on that
line; he will rectify, if necessary, the direction of
the color-bearer, who will immediately take two new
points on the ground between himself and the major.
615. All the principles applicable to the advance in
line are the same for a subordinate as for the directing battalion ; but when the battalion under instruction is supposed to be subordinate, no markers will be
placed behind its centre.
Remarks on the advance in line of battle.
616. If, in the exercises of detail, or courses of elementary instruction, the officers, sergeants, corporals,
and men, have not been well confirmed in the principles of the position under arms, as well as in the
length and cadence of the step, the march of the battalion in line will be floating, unsteady, and disunited.
617. If the color-bearei% instead of marching perpendicularly forward, pursue an oblique direction,
the battalion will slant; crowdings in one wing, and
openings in the other, will follow, and these defects
in the march, becoming more and more embarrassing
in proportion to the deviation from the perpendicular,
will commence near the centre.
618. It is then of the greatest importance that the
color-bearer should direct himself perpendicularly

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART Y .

O

forward, and that the basis of alignment should always be perpendicular to the line pursued by him.
629. If openings be formed, if the files crowd each
other^ if, in sho^s, disorder ensue, the remedy ought
to be applied as promptly as possible, but calmly,
with few words, and as little noise as practicable.
620. The object of the general guides, in the march
in line of battle, is to indicate«to the companies near
the flanks the step of the centre of the battalion, and
to afford more facility in establishing the wings on
the direction of the centre if they should be too
much in the rear; hence the necessity that these
guides should maintain the same step, and march
abreast, or very nearly so, with the color-rank, which
it will be easy for them to do by casting from time to
time an eye on that rank.
621. If the battalion happen to lose the step, the
colonel will recall its attention by the command, to
the—STEP ; captains and their companies will immediately cast an eye on the color-rank, or one of the
general guides, and promptly conform themselves to
the step.
622. Finally, it is of the utmost importance to the
attainment of regularity in the march in line of
battle, to habituate the battalion to execute with as
much order as promptness the movements prescribed
No. 607 and following, for rectifying the direction;
it is not less essential that commanders of battalions
should exercise themselves, with the greatest care,
in forming their own coup d'ozil, in order to be able
to judge with precision the direction to be given to
their battalions.
ARTICLE SECOND.

Oblique march in line of battle
*23. The battalion marching in line of battle, when
27

4

SCHOOL OP THE B A T T A L I O N — P A R T Y .

the colonel shall wish to cause it to oblique, he will
command;
1. Right (or left) oblique. 2, MARCH (or double
quick—MARCH).

624. At the first command, the major will place
himself in front of, and faced to, the color-bearer.
625. At the command march, the whole battalion
will take the oblique step. The companies and captains will strictly observe the principles established
in the school of the company.
626. The major in front of the color-bearer ought
to maintain the latter in a line with the centre corporal, so that the color-bearer may oblique neither
more nor less than that corporal. He will carefully
observe also that they follow parallel directions and
preserve the same length of step.
627. The lieutenant colonel will take care that the
captains and the three corporals in the centre keep
exactly on a line and follow parallel directions.
628. The colonel will see that the battalion preserves its parallelism; he will exert himself to prevent the files from opening or crowding. If he perceive the latter fault, he will cause the files on the
flank, to which the battalion obliques, to open out.
629. The colonel, wishing the direct march to be
resumed, will command :
1. Forward.

2. MARCH.

630. At the command march, the battalion will
resume the direct march. The major will place himself thirty paces in front of the color-bearer, and face
to the colonel, who will establish him, by a signal of
the sword, on the direction which the color-bearer
ought to pursue. The latter will immediately take
two points on the ground between himself and the
* major.
631. In resuming the direct march, care will be

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART V.

325

taken that the men do not close the intervals which
may exist between the files at once; it should be
done almost insensibly.
Bemarks on the oblique march.
632. The object of the oblique step is to gain
ground to the right or left, preserving all the while
the primitive direction of the line of battle; as thus,
for example: the battalion, departing from the line
(sz), arrives on the line (xx) parallel to (sz).
633. It is then essential that the corporals in the
centre of the battalion, and the captains of com
panies, should follow parallel directions, and maintain
themselves at the same height; without which they
will give a false direction to the battalion. *
634. The colonel and lieutenant colonel will exert
themselves to prevent the files from crowding; for,
without such precaution, the oblique march cannot
be executed with facility.
ARTICLE THIRD.

To halt the battalion, marching in line of battle, and
to align it.
635. The battalion marching in the line of battle,
when the colonel shall wish to halt it, he will command:
1. Battalion.

2. HALT.

636. At the second command, the battalion will
halt; the color-rank and the general guides will
remain in front; but if the colonel should not wish
immediately to resume the advance in line, nor to
give a general alignment, he will command:
Color and general guides—POSTS.
637. At this command, the color-rank and general
guides will retake their places in line of battle, the

326

SCHOOL OP THE BATTALION—PART V.

captains in the left wing will shift to the right of
their companies.
638. If the colonel should then judge it necessary
to rectify the alignment, he will command:
Captains, rectify the alignment.
639. The captains will immediately cast an eye
towards the centre, align themselves accurately, on
the basis of the alignment, which the lieutenant colonel will see well directed, and then promptly dress
their respective companies. The lieutenant colonel
will admonish such captains as may not be accurately
on the alignment by the command: Captain of (such;
company, or captains of (such) companies, move up of
fall back.
640. B%it when the colonel shall wish to give tin
battalion a general alignment, either parallel oi
oblique, instead of rectifying it as above, he will
move some paces outside of one of the general guides
(the right will here be supposed), and caution the
right general guide and the color-bearer to face him,
and then establish them, by signal of the sword, on
the direction which he may wish to give to the battalion. As soon as they shall be correctly established,
the left general guide will place himself on their
direction, and be assured in his position by the major.
The color-bearer will carry the color-lance perpendicularly between his eyes, and the two corporals of
his rank will return to their places in the front rank
the moment he shall face to the colonel.
641. This disposition being made, the colonel will
command:
1. Guides—ON THE LINE.

642. At this command, the right guide of each
company in the right wing, and the left guide of each
company in the left, will each place himself on the
direction of the color-bearer and the two general

326

PI. 03.

A* V
To rectify, or slightly alter, the aliynment
line) (No. 642).

[Guides on the

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION- PART Y.

327

guides, face to the color-bearer, place himself in
rear of the guide who is next before him at a distance equal to the front of his company, and align
himself upon the color-bearer and the general guide
beyond.
643. The captains in the right wing will shift to the
left of their companies, except the captain of the colorcompany, who will remain on its right, but step into
the rear rank; the captains in the left wing will shift
to the right of their companies.
644. The lieutenant colonel will promptly rectify,
if necessary, the positions of the guides of the right
wing, and the major those of the other; which being
executed, the colonel will command:
2. On the centre—DRESS.
645. At this command, the companies will move up
in quick time against the guides, where, having arrived,
each captain will align his company according to prescribed principles, the lieutenant colonel aligning the
color-company.
646. If the alignment be oblique, the captains will
take care to conform their companies to it in conducting them towards the line.
647. The battalion being aligned, the colonel will
command:
3. Color and guides—POSTS.
648. At this command, the color-bearer, the general
and company guides, and the captains in the right
wing, will take their places in the line of battle, and
the color-bearer will replace the heel of the color-lance
against the right hip.
649. If the new direction of the line of battle be
such that one or more companies.find themselves in
advance of that line, the colonel, before establishing
the general guides on the line, will cause such companies to be moved to the rear, either by the back

,V>«8

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART. Y.

step, or by first facing about, according as there may
be less or more ground to be repassed to bring the
companies in rear of the new direction.
650. When the colonel shall wish to give a general
alignment, and the color and general guides are not
on the line, he will cause them to move out by the
command:
1. Color and general guides—ON THE LINE.
651. At this command, the color-bearer and the
general guides will place themselves on the line, con*
forming to what is prescribed No. 640.
ARTICLE FOURTH.

Change of direction in marching in line of battle.
652. The battalion marching in line of battle, when
the colonel shall wish it to change direction to the
right, he will command :
1. Change direction to the right. 2. MARCH (or double
quick—MARCH).

653. At the command march, the movement will
commence; the color-rank will shorten the step to
fourteen or seventeen inches, and direct itself circularly to the right, taking care to advance the left
shoulder, but only insensibly; the major will place
himself before the color-bearer, facing him, and so
direct his march that he may describe an arc of a
circle neither too large nor too small; he will also see
that the color-bearer takes steps of fourteen or seventeen inches, according to the gait.
654. The right general guide will wheel on the right
captain of the battalion as his pivot; the left general
guide will circularly march in the step of twenty-eight
inches or thirty-three inches, according to the gait,
and will align himself upon the color-bearer and the
right general guide.

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION

PART Y .

329

655. The corporal placed in the centre of the battalion, will take steps of fourteen or seventeen inches,
and will wheel to the right by advancing insensibly
the left shoulder ; the battalion will conform itself to
the movement of the centre ; to this end, the captain
of the color-company, and the captain of the next to
the left, will attentively regulate their march, as well
as the direction of their shoulders, on the three centre
corporals. All the other captains will regulate the
direction of their shoulders and the length of their
step on this basis.
656. The men will redouble their attention in order
not to pass the line of captains.
657. In the left wing, the pace will be lengthened
in proportion as the file is distant from the centre;
the captain of the eighth company who closes the left
flank of the battalion will take steps of twenty-eight
or thirty-three inches, according to the gait.
658. In the right wing the pace will be shortened
in proportion as the file is distant from the centre;
the captain who closes the right flank will only slowly
turn in his person, observing to yield ground a little
if pushed.
659. The colonel will take great care to prevent
the centre of the battalion from describing an arc of
a circle either too great or too small, in order that
the wings may conform themselves to its movement.
He will see also that the captains keep their companies
constantly aligned upon the centre, so that there may
be no opening and no crowding of files. He will endeavor to prevent faults, and, should they occur, correct them without noise.
660. The lieutenant colonel, placed before the battalion, will give his attention to the same objects.
661. When the colonel shall wish the direct maich
to be resumed, he will command:
1. Forward. 2. MARCH.

330

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION

PART V.

662 At the command march, the color-rank, the
general guides, and the battalion will resume the
direct march; the major will immediately place himself thirty or forty paces in front, face to the colonel,
placed in rear of the centre, who will establish him
by signal of the sword on the perpendicular direction
which the corporal in the centre of the battalion ought
to pursue ; the major will immediately cause the colorbearer, if necessary, to incline to the right or left, so
as to be exactly opposite to his file; the color-bearer
will then take two points on the ground between himself and the major.
663. The lieutenant colonel will endeavor to give
to the color-company and the next on the left a direction perpendicular to that pursued by the centre corporal; and all the other companies, without precipitancy, will conform themselves to that basis.
ARTICLE F I F T H .

To march in retreat, in line of battle.
664. The battalion being halted, if it be the wish
of the colonel to cause it to march in retreat, he will
command:
1. Face to the rear. 2. Battalion, about—FACE.
665. At the second command, the battalion will
face about; the color-rank, and the general guides,
if in advance, will take their places in line; the colorbearer will, pass into the rear rank, now leading; the
corporal of his file will step behind the corporal next
on his own right, to let the color-bearer pass, and
then step into the front rank, now rear, to re-form
the color-file; the colonel will place himself behind
the front rank, become the rear; the lieutenant colonel and major will place themselves before the rear
rank, now leading.
666. The colonel will take post forty paces behind

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART Y .

SZ\

the color-file, in order to assure the lieutenant colonel on the perpendicular, who will place himself at a
like distance in front, as prescribed for the advance
in line of battle.
667. If the battalion be the one charged with the
direction, the colonel will establish markers in the
manner indicated No. 589, except that they will face
to the battalion, and that the first will be placed
twenty-five paces from the lieutenant colonel. If the
markers be already established, the officer charged
with replacing them in succession will cause them to
face about, the moment that the battalion executes
this movement, and then the marker nearest to the
Dattalion will hasten to the rear of the two others.
668. These dispositions being made, the colonel
will command:
3. Battalion, forward.
669. At this command, the color-bearer will advance six paces beyond the rank of file closers, accompanied by the two corporals of his guard of that
rank, the centre corporal stepping back to let the
color-bearer pass; the two file closers nearest this
centre corporal will unite on him behind the colorguard to serve as a basis of alignment for the line of
file closers; the two general guides will place themselves abreast with the color-rank, the covering sergeants will place themselves in the line of file closers,
and the captains in the rear rank, now leading; the
captains in the left wing, now right, will, if not
already there, shift to the left of their companies,
aow become the right.
670. The colonel will then command:
4. MAIICH (or double quick—MARCH).

671. The battalion will march in retreat on the
Same principles which govern the advance in line:

332

SCHOOL or THE BATTALION—PART Y.

the centre corporal behind the color-bearer will march
exactly in his trace.
672. If it be the directing battalion, the colorbearer will direct himself on the markers, who will,
of their own accord, each place himself in succession
behind the marker most distant, on being approached
by the battalion; the officer charged with the superintendence of the markers will carefully assure them
on the direction.
673. In the case of a subordinate battalion, ths
color-bearer will maintain himself on the perpendicular by means of points taken on the ground.
674. The colonel, lieutenant-colonel, and major
will each discharge the same functions as in the
advance in line.
675. The lieutenant colonel, placed on the outside
of the file closers of the color-company, will also
maintain the three file closers of the basis of alignment in a square with the line of direction: the other
file closers will keep themselves aligned on this basis.
ARTICLE SIXTH.

To halt the battalion marching in retreat, and to face
it to the front.
676. The colonel having halted the battalion, and
wishing to face it to the front, will command:
1. Face to the front. 2. Battalion, about—FACE.
677. At the second command, the color-rank, general guides, captains, and covering sergeants, will all
retake their habitual places in line of battle, and the
color-bearer will repass into the front rank.
678. The battalion marching in line of battle by
the front rank, when the colonel shall wish to anarch
it in retreat, he will command:
1. Battalion, right about, 2. MARCH.

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART T.

333

679. At the command march, the battalion will face
to the rear and move off at the same gait by the real
rank. The principles prescribed Nos. 669 and following will be carefully observed.
680. If the colonel should wish the battalion to
march again by the front, he will give the same
commands.
ARTICLE SEYENTH.

Change of direction, in marching in retreat.
681. A battalion retiring in line will change direction by the commands and means indicated No. 652
and following; the three file closers, united behind
the color-rank, will conform themselves to the movement of this rank, and wheel like it; the centre file
closer of the three will take steps of fourteen or
seventeen inches, according to the gait, and keep
himself steadily at the same distance from the colorbearer; the line of file closers will conform themselves to the movement of its centre, and the lieu
tenant colonel will maintain it on that basis.
ARTICLE EIGHTH.

Passage of obstacles, advancing and retreating.
682. The battalion advancing in line will be supposed to encounter an obstacle which covers one or
more companies; the colonel will cause them to ploy
into column at full distance, in rear of the next company towards the color, which will be executed in the
following manner. It will be supposed that the obstacle only covers the third company, the colonel
will command:
Third company, obstacle,
683. At this command, the captain of the third
company will place himself in its front, turn to it,
and command, 1. Third company, by the left flank, to the

S34

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—-PART Y.

tear into column. 2. Double quick. 3. MARCH. H<
Will then hasten to the left of his company.
684. At the command march, the company will fac«
to the left in marching; the two left files will promptly
disengage to the rear in double quick time; the left
guide, placing himself at the head of the front rank,
will conduct it behind the fourth company, directing
himself parallelly with this company; the captain of
the third will himself halt opposite to the captain of
the fourth, and see his company file past; when its
right file shall be nearly up with him, he will command, 1. Third company. 2. By the right flank. 3.
MARCH. 4. Guide rights and place himself before the
centre of his company.
685. At the command march, the company will face
to the right, preserving the same gait, but the moment
it shall be at the prescribed distance, its captain will
command:
1. Quick time. 2. MARCH.
686. This company will thus follow in column that
behind which it finds itself, and at wheeling distance,
its right guide marching exactly in the trace of the
captain of that company.
687. As soon as the third company shall have faced
to the left, the left guide of the second will place himself on the left of the front rank of his company, and
maintain between himself and the right of the fourth
the space necessary for the return into line of the
third.
688. The obstacle being passed, the colonel will
command:
Third company, forward, into line.
689. At this command, the captain, turning to his
company, will add:
1. By company, right half wheel. 2. Double quick*
3. MARCH.

SCHOOL OP THE BATTALION—PART T.

335

690. At the command march, the company will take
the double quick step, and execute a half wheel; its
Captain will then command, 1. Forward. 2. MARCH.
3. Guide left. The second command will be given
when the company shall have sufficiently wheeled.
691. At the command march, the company will
direct itself straight forward towards the line of
battle, and retake its position in it according to the
principles prescribed for the formation forward into
line of battle.
692. It will be supposed that the obstacle covers
Beveral contiguous companies (the three companies
on the right, for example), the colonel will command:
1. Three right companies, obstacle. 2. By the Wt flank,
to the rear, into column. 3. Double quick—MARCH.
693. At the first command, the captains of the
designated companies will each place himself before
the centre of his company, and caution it as to the
movement about to be executed.
694. At the command march, the designated companies will face to the left in marching, and immediately take the double quick step ; each captain will
cause the head of his company to disengage itself tc
the rear, and the left guide will place himself at the
head of the front rank; the captain of the third
company will conform himself to what is prescribed
No. 684 and following; the captains of the other
companies will conduct them by the flank in rear of
the third, inclining towards the head of the column;
and, as the head of each company arrives opposite to
the right of the one next before it in column, its
captain will himself halt, see his company file past,
and conform himself for facing it to the front, in
marching, to what is prescribed No. 684 and following.
695. When the last company in column shall have
passed the obstacle the colonel will command:

336

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION

PARTY,

1. Three right companies, forward, into line.
696. At this command, the captain of each of ihesa
three companies will command, By company, right half
wheel. The colonel will then add :
1. Double quick.

2. MARCH.

697. At this, briskly repeated by the captains of
the three companies, each company will conform itself to what is prescribed No. 690 and following.
698. It is supposed, in the foregoing examples, that
the companies belonged to the right wing; if they
make part of the other, they will execute the passage
of an obstacle according to the same principles and
by inverse means.
699. When flank companies are broken off to pass
an obstacle, the general guide on that flank will place
himself six paces in front of the outer file of the
nearest company to him remaining in line.
700. In the preceding movements, it has been supposed that the battalion was marching in quick time;
but if it be marching in double quick time, and the
colonel shall wish to cause several contiguous companies to break to the rear, he will first order the
battalion to march in quick time; the companies will
break as indicated No. 692.
701. When the movement is completed, the colonel
will order the double quick step to be resumed. He
will also cause the battalion to march in quick time
when he shall wish to bring into line the several companies which are to the rear in column; the movement will be executed as previously indicated; and
when the last company shall have nearly completed
its movement, the colonel will cause the double quick
step to be resumed.
702. In the movement of a single company, or of
several companies not contiguous to each other, the
battalion will continue to march in double quick

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION-HP ART T.

337

t i m e ; h u t in these cases t h e companies which are to
ploy into column, or re-enter the line, will i n c r e a s e
t h e gait.
703. I n the m a r c h in r e t r e a t , these several movem e n t s will be executed on the same principles a s if
the b a t t a l i o n marched by t h e front r a n k .
704. When a battalion, advancing in line cf b a t t l e ,
shall be obliged to execute t h e r i g h t about in o r d e r
to r e t r e a t , if there be companies in column, behind
the r e a r r a n k , these companies will also execute t h e
r i g h t a b o u t , , p u t themselves in m a r c h , at the same
time with t h e battalion, and will t h u s precede it in
the r e t r e a t ; they will afterwards successively p u t
themselves into line by t h e oblique step, a s t h e
ground m a y permit.
705. If t h e battalion be m a r c h i n g in r e t r e a t in
doub"!e quink time, a n d m a n y contiguous companies
be m a r c h i n g before the r e a r r a n k of the battalion,
t h e colonel will not c h a n g e t h e gait of t h e battalion
in causing them to r e - e n t e r into line.
706. W h e n the color-company shall be obliged to
execute the movement of passing an obstacle, t h e
color-rank will r e t u r n into line at t h e moment t h e
company shall face to the left or r i g h t ; t h e major
will place himself six paces before the e x t r e m i t y of
t h e company behind which t h e color - c o m p a n y
m a r c h e s in column, in order to give the step a n d t h e
d i r e c t i o n ; h e , himself, first t a k i n g t h e step from the
battalion.
707. As soon as the color-company shall have r e t u r n e d into line, the front r a n k of t h e color-guard
will again move out six paces in front of the b a t t a lion, and take t h e step from t h e m a j o r ; t h e l a t t e r
will immediately place himself t w e n t y or t h i r t y paces
in front of the color-bearer, a n d face to t h e colonel
placed behind the centre of t h e battalion, w h o will
establish him on the perpendicular-; and, as soon as
ht shall be assured on it, t h e color-bearer will i n 28

338

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART Vi

gtantly take two points on the ground between him*
self and the major.
708. It is prescribed, as a general rule, that the
companies of the right wing ought to execute the
movement of passing obstacles by the left flank, and
the reverse for the companies of the other wing; but
if the obstacle cover at .once several companies of the
centre, each will file into column behind that, still in
line, and of the same wing, which may be the nearest
to it.
ARTICLE NINTH.

To pass a defile, in retreat, by the right or left
flank.
709. When a battalion, retiring in line, shall encounter a defile which it must pass, the colonel will
halt the battalion, and face it to the front.
710. It will be supposed that the defile is in rear of
the left flank, and that its width is sufficient to give
passage to a column by platoon; the colonel will
place a marker fifteen or twenty paces in rear of the
file closers at the point around which the subdivisions
will have to change direction in order to enter the
defile; he will then command:
To the rear, by the right flank, pass the defile.
711. The captain of the first company will immediately command:
1. First company, right—FACE. 2. MARCH (or doubh
quick—MARCH).

712. At the command march, the first company will
commence the movement; the first file will wheel to
the right, march to the rear till it shall have passed
four paces beyond the file closers, when it will wheel
again to the righty and then direct itself straight forward towards the left flank. All the other files of

338
BBiiBnfflffluui&nBH

PL

67.

SCHOOL OP THE BATTALION—PART T .

339

this company will come to wheel in succession at the
same place where the first had wheeled.
713. The second company will execute, in its turn,
the same movement, by the commands of its captain,
who will give the command MARCH, so that the first
file of his company may immediately follow the last
of the first, without constraint, however, as to taking
the step of the first; the first file of the second company will wheel to the right, on its ground; all the
other files of this company will come in succession to
wheel at the same place. The following companies
will execute, each in its turn, what has just been prescribed for the second.
714. Whenjhe whole of the second company shall
be on the same direction with the first, the captain
of the first will cause it to form, by platoon, into
line, and the moment that it is in column, the guide,
of the first platoon will direct himself on the marker
around whom he has to change direction in order to
enter the defile.
715. The second company will continue to march
by the flank, directing itself parallelly with the line
of battle; and it, in its turn, will form by platoon
into line, when the third company shall be wholly on
the same direction with itself.
716. The following companies will successively
execute what has just been prescribed for the second,
and each will form by platoon into line, when the
next company shall be on the same direction with
itself.
717. The first platoon of the leading company having arrived opposite to the marker placed at the
entrance of the defile, will turn to the left, and the
following platoons will all execute this movement at
the same point. As the last companies will not be
able to form platoons before reaching the defile, they
will so direct themselves, in entering it, as to leave
Loom to the left for this movement.

340

SCHOOL OP THE BATTALION—PART Y.

718. The battalion will thus pass the defile by platoon ; and, as the two platoons of each company
shall clear it, companies will be successively formed
by the means indicated, school of the company, No.
273 and following.
719. The head of the column having cleared the
defile, and having reached the distance at which the
colonel wishes to re-form line faced to the defile, he
may cause the leading company to turn to the left,
to prolong the column in that direction, and then
form it to the left into line of battle; or he may halt
the column, and form it into line of battle faced to
the rear.
720. If the defile be in the rear of the right flank,
it will be passed by the left; the movement will be
executed according to the same principles, and by
inverse means.
721. If the defile be too narrow to receive the front
of a platoon, it will be passed by the flank. Captains
find file closers will be watchful that the files do not
lose their distances in marching. Companies or platoons will be formed into line as the width of the defile may permit, or as the companies shall successively
clear it.
ARTICLE TENTH.

To march by the flank.
722. The colonel, wishing the battalion to march
by the flank, will command:
1. Battalion. 2. Right (or left)—FACE. 3. Forward,
4. MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).

723. At the second command, the captains and
covering sergeants will place themselves as prescribed Nos. 186 and 141, school of the company.
724. The sergeant on the left of the battalion wiU
place himself to the left and by the side of the last
file of his company, covering the captains in file.

340

PL 68.

err
EF5F
^

r

i- i

i

i

i "i
i

i

i

i

i . i

1 ! M |
1

!

1

1

I

.i

1

1

!

,

•
;

1

1

i

1
1

I ' l l

1

.

1

1 i

1 1 1
1 1

1

1 1

1

1

1 ,

1 1

I

M i l l
To match by the flank forming fours (No. 722).

SCHOOL OP THE BATTALION—PART V .

34\

725. The battalion having to face by the left flank,
the captains, at the second command, will shift
rapidly to the left of their companies, and each place
himself by the side of the covering sergeant of the
company preceding his own, except the captain of
the left company, who will place himself by the side
of the sergeant on the left of the battalion. The
covering sergeant of the right company will place
himself by the right side of the front rank man of
the rearmost file of his company, covering the captains in file.
726. At the command march, the battalion will
step off with life; the sergeant placed before the
leading file (right or left in front) will be careful to
preserve exactly the length and cadence of the step,
ana to direct nimseif straight forward; to this end,
he will take points on the ground.
727. Whether the battalion march by the right or
left flank, the lieutenant colonel will place himself
abreast with the leading file, and the major abreast
with the color-file, both on the side of the front rank,
and about six paces from it.
728. The adjutant, placed between the lieutenant
colonel and the front rank, will march in the same
step with the head of the battalion, and the sergeant
major, placed between the major and the colorbearer, will march in the same step with the adjutant.
729. The captains and file closers will carefully
see that the files neither open out, nor close too
much, and that they regain insensibly their distances, if lost.
730. The colonel wishing the battalion to wheel
by file, will command:
1. By file right (or left). 2. MARCH.
731. The files will wheel in succession, and au at
the place where the first had wheeled, in conforming

342

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION"—PART V.

to the principles prescribed in the school of the
company.
732. The battalion marching by the flank, when
the colonel shall wish it to halt, he will command :
1. Battalion.

2. HALT.

3. FRONT.

733. These commands will be executed as prescribed in the school of the company, No. 146.
734. If the battalion be marching by the flank, and
the colonel should wish to cause it to march in line,
either to the front or to the rear, the movements will
be executed by the commands and means prescribed
in the school of the company.
ARTICLE ELEVENTH.

To form the battalion on the right or left, by file, into
line of battle.
735. The battalion marching by the right flank,
when the colonel shall wish to form it on the right
by file, he will determine the line of battle, and the
lieutenant colonel will place two markers on that
line, in conformity with what is prescribed No. 415.
736. The head of the battalion being nearly up
with the first marker, the colonel will command :
1. On the right, by file, into line. 2. MARCH (or double
quick—MARCH).

737. At the command march, the leading company will form itself on the right, by file, into line
of battle, as indicated in the school of the company,
No. 149; the front rank man of the first file will rest
his breast lightly against the right arm of the first
marker; the other companies will follow the movement of the leading company; each captain will
place himself on the 1 ne at the same time with the
front rank man of his first file, and on the right of
this man.

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART V.

343

738. The left guide of each company, except the
leading one, will place himself on the direction of the
markers, and opposite to the left file of his company,
at the instant that the front rank man of this fie
arrives on the line.
739. The formation being ended, the colonel will
command:
Guides—POSTS.
740. The colonel will superintend the successive
formation of the battalion, moving along the front of
the line of battle.
741. The lieutenant colonel will, in succession,
assure the direction of the guides, and see that the
men of the front rank, in placing themselves on the
line, do not pass it.
742. If the battalion march by the left flank, the
movement will be executed according to the same
principles, and by inverse means.
ARTICLE TWELFTH.

Changes of front.
Change of front 'perpendicularly forward.
743. The battalion being in line of battle, it is
supposed to be the wish of the colonel to cause a
change of front forward on the right company, and
that the angle formed by the old and new positions
be a right angle, or a few degrees more or less than
one; he will cause two markers to be placed on the
new direction, before the position to be occupied by
that company, and order its captain to establish it
against the markers.
744. The captain of the right company will immediately direct it upon the markers by a wheel to the
right on the fixed pivot; and, af >r having halted it,
he will align it by the right.

344

SCHCOL OF THE BATTALION—-PART V.

745. These dispositions being made, the colonel
will command:
1. Change front forward on first company. 2. By
company, right half wheel. 3. MARCH (or double
quick—MARCH).

746. At the second command, each captain will
place himself before the centre of his company.
747. At the third, each company will wheel to
the right on the fixed pivot; the left guide of each
will place himself on its left as soon as he shall be
able to pass; and when the colonel shall judge
that the companies have sufficiently wheeled, he will
command:
4. Forward. 5. MARCH. 6. Guide right.
748. At the fifth command, the companies ceasing
to wheel will march straight forward ; at the sixth,
the men will touch elbows towards the right.
749. The right guide of the second company will
march straight forward until this company shall
arrive at the point where it should turn to the right;
each succeeding right guide will follow the file immediately before him at the cessation of the wheel, and
will march in the trace of this file until this company
shall turn to the right to move upon the line; this
guide will then march straight forward.
750. The second company having arrived opposite
to the left file of the first, its captain will cause it to
turn to the right; the right guide will direct himself
go as to arrive squarely upon the line of battle, and,
when he shall be at three paces from that line, the
captain will command:
1. Second company.

2. HALT.

751. At the second command, the company will
halt; the files not yet in line with the guide wili

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART T.

345

come into it promptly, the left guide will place himself on the line of battle, and as soon as he is assured
in the direction by the lieutenant colonel, the captain
will align the company by the right.
752. Each following company will conform to
what has j ist been prescribed for the second.
753. Tha formation ended, the colonel will command :
Guides—POSTS.
754. If the battalion be in march, and the colonel
shall wish to change front forward on the first company, and that the angle formed by the old and new
positions be a right angle, he will cause two markers
to be placed on the new direction, before the position
to be occupied by that company, and will command:
1. Change front forward on first company. 2. By
company, right half wheel. 3. MARCH (or double
quick—MARCH).

755. At the first command, the captains will move
rapidly before the centre of their respective companies ; the captain of the first company will command: 1. Right turn; 2. Quick time; the captains
of the other companies will caution them to wheel
to the right.
756. At the command march, the first company will
turn to the right, according to the principles prescribed in the school of the soldier, No. 402; its
captain will halt it at three paces from the markers,
and the files in rear will promptly come into line.
The captain will align the company by the right.
757. Each of the other companies will wheel to the
right on a fixed pivot; the left guides will place
themselves on the left of their respective companies,
and when the colonel shall judge they have wheeled
sufficiently, he will command:

346

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART T,

4. Forward. 5. MARCH. 6. Guide right.
758. These ccmmands will be executed as indi*
cated No. 746 and following.
759. The colonel will cause the battalion to change
front forward on the eighth company according to
the same principles and by inverse means.
Change of front ^perpendicularly to the rear.

760. The colonel, wishing to change front to the
rear on the right company, will impart his purpose
to the captain of this company. The latter will immediately face his company about, wheel it to the
left on the fixed pivot, and halt it when it shall bo
in the direction indicated to him by the colonel; the
captain will then face his company to the front, ^nd
align it by the right against the two markers, whom
the colonel will cause to be established before the
right and left files.
761. These dispositions being made, the colonel
will command:
1. Change front to the rear, on first company. 2. Battalion, about—FACE. 3. By company, left half wheel.
4. MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).

762^ At the second command, all the companies,
except the right, will face about.
763. At the third, the captains, whose companies
have faced about, will each place himself behind the
centre of his company, two paces from the front rank,
now the rear.
764. At the fourth, these companies will wheel to
the left on the fixed pivot by the rear rank; the left
guide of each will, as soon as he is able to pass, place
himself on the left of the rear rank of his company,
now become the right; and when the colonel shall
judge that the compani3S have sufficiently wheeled,
he will command:

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALIOK—PART Y.

347

6. Forward. 6. MARCH. 7. Guide left,
765. At the sixth eommand, the companies will
cease to wheel, march straight forward towards the
new line of battle, and, at the seventh, take the touch
of the elbow towards the left.
766. The guide of each company on its right flank,
become left, will conform himself to the principles
prescribed No. 748:
767. The second company, from the right, having
arrived opposite to the left of the first, will turn to
the left; the guide will so direct himself as to arrive
parallelly with the line of battle, cross that line, and
when the front rank, now in the rear, shall be three
paces beyond it, the captain will command: 1. Second
company; 2. HALT.

768. At the second command, the company will
halt; the files which may not yet be in line with the
guide will promptly come into it; the captain will
cause the company to face about, and then align it by
the right.
769. All the other companies will execute what has
just been prescribed for the second, each as it successively arrives opposite to the left of the company
that precedes it on the new line of battle.
770. The formation being ended, the colonel will
command:
Guides—Po s T s.
771. The colonel will cause a change of front oir
the left company of the battalion to the rear, according to the same principles and by inverse means.
772. In changes t)f front, the colonel will give a
general superintendence to the movement.
773. The lieutenant colonel will assure the direct ion
of the guides as they successively move out on the
line of battle, conforming himself to what has been
prescribed in the successive formations.

848

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART V.

Eemarks on changes of front.
774. When the new direction is perpendicular, ci
nearly so, to that of the battalion, the companies
ought to make about a half wheel (the eighth of the
circle) before marching straight forward; but when
those two lines are oblique to each other, the smaller
the angle which they form, the less ought the companies to wheel. It is for the colonel to judge, according to the angle, the precise time when he ought
to give the command march after the caution forward,
and if he cannot catch the exact moment, the word
of execution should rather be given a little too soon,
than an instant too late.
775. When the old and the new lines form an angle
of forty-five or fewer degrees, the colonel will find it
necessary to arrest the wheel of the companies when
the marching flanks shall have taken but a few paces,
or, it may be, have but disengaged, respectively, from
the fixed pivots of the next companies; and in all
such cases the companies will arrive so nearly
parallel to the new line as to be able to align themselves upon it without the intermediate turn to the
right or left: to execute the movement under either
circumstance supposed, the colonel will command:
Oblique change of front, forward (or to the rear) on [such
company).
ARTICLE THIRTEENTH.

To ploy tfc« battalion into column doubled on the
centre.
776. This movement consists in ploying the corresponding companies of the right and left wings into
column at company distance, or closed in mass, in
rear of the two centre companies, according to the
principles prescribed Article Third, Part Second, of
this School.

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART V.

349

777. The colonel, wishing to form the double
column at company distance (the battalion being in
line of battle), will command :
1. Double column, at half distance. 2. JBattalion, inwards—FACE.

3. MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).

778. At the first command, the captains will place
themselves two paces in front of their respective
companies ; the captains of the two centre companies
will caution them to stand fast, and the other captains will caution their companies to face to the left
and right, respectively. The covering sergeants will
step into the front rank.
779. At the second command, the fourth and fifth
companies will stand fast; the others of the right
wing will face to the left, and the others of the left
wing will face to the right; each captain whose company has faced will hasten to break to the rear the
two files, at the head of his company ; the left guide
of each right company, and the right guide of each
left company, will each place himself at the head
of its front rank, and the captain by the side of his
guide.
780. At the command march, the fourth and fifth
companies, which are to form the first division, will
stand fast; the senior captain of the two will place
himself before the centre of the division, and command: Guide right; the junior captain will place
himself in the interval between the two companies,
and the left guide of the left company will place himeelf in the front rank on the left of the division, as
soon as he shall be able to pass.
781. All the other companies, conducted by their
captains, will step off with life to arrange themselves
in column at company distance, each company behind
the preceding one in the column of the same wing, so
that, in the right wing, the th ; rd may be next behind
the fourth, the second next to the third, and so on to
2$

350

SCHOOL OP THE BATTALION—PART V*

the right company; and, in the left wing, the sixth
may be next behind the fifth, the seventh next to the
sixth, and so on to the left company of the battalion.
782. The corresponding companies of the two wings
will unite into divisions in arranging themselves in
column; an instant before the union, at the centre of
the column, the left guides of right companies will
pass into the line of file closers, and each captain
will command: 1. Such company; 2. Halt; 3. FRONT,
783. At the second command, which will be given
at the instant of union, each company will halt; at
the third, it will face to the front. The senior captain in each division will place himself on its right,
and command, Right—DRESS, and the junior captain
will place himself in the interval between the two
companies. The division being aligned, its chief will
command FRONT, and take his position two paces before its centre.
784. The column being thus formed, the divisions
will take the respective denominations of first, second,
third, &c, according to position in the column, beginning at the front.
785. The lieutenant colonel, who at the second
command given by the colonel will have placed himself at a little more than company distance in rear
of the right guide of the first division, will assure the
right guides on the direction as they successively
arrive, by placing himself in their rear.
786. The music will pass to the rear of the column.
787. The battalion being in march, to form the
double column at company distance without halting
the battalion, the colonel will command :
1. Double column, at half distance. 2. Battalion by the
right and left flanks. 3. MARCH (or double quick—
—MARCH).

788. At the first command, each captain will move
briskly in front of the centre of his company ; the

SCHOOL OP THE BATTALION—PART V.

351

captains of the fourth and fifth will caution their
companies to march straight forward; the other captains will caution their companies to face to the right
and left.
789. At the command march, the fourth and fifth
companies will continue to march straight forward;
the senior captain will place himself before the centre
of his division, and command* Guide right; the junior
captain will place himself in the interval between the
two companies. The left guide of the fifth company
will place himself on the left of the front rank of the
division. The men will take the touch of elbows to
the right. The color and general guides will retake
their places. The three right companies will face to
the left, and the three left companies will face to the
right. Each captain will break to the rear two files
at the head of his company; the left guides of the
right companies, and the right guides of the left companies, will each place himself at the head of the front
rank of his company, and the captain by the side ®f
his guide.
790. The third and sixth companies will enter the
column and direct themselves parallelly to the first
division. Each of the other companies will, in like
manner, place itself behind the company of the wing
to which it belongs, and will be careful to gain as
much ground as possible towards the head of the
column.
791. The corresponding companies of each wing
will unite into divisions on taking their positions in
column, and each captain, the instant the head of his
company arrives at the centre of the column, will
command: 1. Such company by the right (or left) flank.
2. MARCH. The senior captain of the two companies
will place himself in front of the centre of his division, and commind, Guide right; the junior captain
will place himsel: in the interval between the two
companies. The two c( mpanies thus formed into a

352

SCHOOL OP THE BATTALION-*~PAR<C T*

division will take the touch of elbows to the right*
and when each division has gained its proper distance, its chief will cause it to march in quick time.
792. When the battalion presents an odd number
of companies, the formation will be made in like manner, and the company on either flank which shall find
itself without a corresponding one, will place itself
at company distance behind the wing to which it belongs.
793. The double column, closed in mass, will be
formed according to the same principles and by the
same commands, substituting the indication, closed in
mass, for that of at half distance.
794. The double column never being formed when
two or more battalions are to be in one general column,
it will habitually take the guide to the right, sometimes to the left, or in the centre of the column; in
the last case, the command will be, Guide centre. The
column will march and change direction according to
the principles prescribed for a simple column by
division.
795. The double column at company distance will
be closed in mass, or, if in mass, will take half distance, by the commands and means indicated for a
simple column by division.
Deployment of the double column, faced to the front.
796. The colonel, wishing to deploy the double
column, will place a marker respectively before the
right and left files of the first division, and a third
before the left file of the right company, same division; which being done, he will cause the two
general guides to spring out on the alignment of the
markers a little beyond the points at which the respective flanks of the battalion ought to rest; he will
then command:
1. Deploy column. 2, Battalion outwards—FACE.
3. MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—4-PART ^ .

353

797. The column will deploy itself on the two companies at its head, according to the principles prescribed for the deployment of columns in mass. The
captains of these companies will each, at the command march, place himself on the right of his own
company, and align it by the right; the captain of
the fourth will then place himself in the rear rank,
and the covering sergeant in the rank of file closers*
at the moment the captain of the third shall come to
its left to align it.
798. The deployment being ended, the colonel will
command:
Guides—POSTS.
799. If it be the wish of the colonel to cause the
fire to commence pending the deployment, he will
give an order to that eifect to the captains of the
fourth and fifth companies,: and the fire will be executed according to the principles prescribed No. 438.
800. The battalion being in double column and in
march, if the colonel shall wish to deploy it without
halting the column, he will cause three markers to be
posted on the line of battle, and when the head of
the column shall arrive near the markers, he will
command:
1. Deploy column, 2. Battalion, by the right and left
flanks. 3. MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).
801. The column will deploy on the two leading
companies, according to the principles prescribed for
Che deployment of a close column, No. 533 and following; at the command marcht the chief of the first
division will halt it, and the captains of the fourth
and fifth companies will align their companies by
the right.
802. If the column be in march, and it be the wish
of the colonel to deploy the column and to continue
to march in the order of battle, he will not cause
markers to be established at the head of the column.

354

SCHGQL OF THE BATTALION—PART V.

The movement will be executed by the commands and
means indicated No. 800, observing what follows. At
the first command, the chief of the first division will
command, Quick time. At the command march, the
first division will continue to march in quick time,
the colonel will command, Guide centre. The captains
of the fourth and fifth companies, the color, and the
men, will immediately conform to the principles of
the march in line of battle. The companies will take
the quick step by the command of their captains, as
they successively arrive in line. The movement completed, the colonel may cause the battalion to march
in double quick time.
To form the double column into line of battle, faced to
the right or left.
803. The double column, being at company distance
and at a halt, may be formed into line of battle faced
to the right or left; when the colonel shall wish to
form it faced to the right, he will command:
1. Right into line wheel, left companies on the right into
line. 2. Battalion, guide right, 3. MARCH (or double
quick—-MARCH.).

804. At the first command, each captain will place
himself before the centre of his company; the right
companies will be cautioned that they will have to
wheel to the right into line, the left companies that
they will have to march straight forward.
805. At the second command, the left guide of tho
fourth company will place himself briskly on the
direction of the right guides of the column, face to
them, and opposite to one of the three last files of
his company when in line of battle; the lieutenant
colonel will assure him in that position.
806. At the command march, briskly repeated by
all the captains, the right companies will form to the
right into line of battle, the left companies will put

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART Y.

355

themselves in march in order to form on the right into
line of battle; these formations will be executed by
the means indicated No. 391 and following; No. 416
and following; the lieutenant colonel will assure the
guides of the left wing on the line of battle as they
successively come upon it.
807. If the column be in march, the colonel will
command :
1. Right into line wheel. 2. Left companies, on the
fight into line. 3. Battalion, guide tight. 4. MARCH
(or double quick— MARCH).
808. At the first command, each captain will place
himself promptly before the centre of his company;
the right companies will be cautioned that they will
have to wheel to the right, and the left companies
that they will have to form on the right into line.
809. At the command march, briskly repeated, the
right companies will form to the right into line, and
the left companies on the right into line. These formations will be executed as prescribed Nos. 402, 417,
and following.
810. If the colonel should wish to move the battalion forward, at the moment the right companies
have completed the wheel, he will command:
5. Forward.

6. MARCH (or double quick~M.AB.ca).

811. At the command forward^ the captains of the
Tight companies will command, Quick time. At the
command march, the right companies will cease to
wheel, and march straight forward. The colonel will
then add:
7. Guide centre.
812. The movement of the left companies will be
Executed in double quick time as prescribed above,
S n T as they arrive on the line each captain will cause
ko
his company to march in quick time.

356

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART Y.

813. The column may be formed faced to the left
into line of battle according to the same principles.
814. If the column be closed in mass instead of at
company distance, these movements will be executed
according to the principles prescribed Nos. 417, 502,
and 510.
Remark on the deployment of the double column.
815. The depth of the double column, at company
distance, being inconsiderable, closing it in mass, if
at a halt, in order to deploy it, may be dispensed
with; but if it be in march, it will be preferable to
cause it so to close, in halting, before deploying.
816. The double column will be deployed habitually
on the centre companies, but the colonel may sometimes deploy it on any interior company, or on the
first or eighth company.
ARTICLE FOURTEENTH.

Dispositions against Cavalry.
817. A battalion being in column by company, at
full distance, right in front, and at a halt, when the
colonel shall wish to form it into square, he will first
cause divisions to be formed; which being done, he
will command:
1. To form square. 2. To half distance, close column.
3. MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).

818. At the command march, the column will closi
to company distance, the second division taking its
distance from the rear rank of the first division.
819. At the moment of halting the fourth division,
the file closers of each company of which it is composed, passing by the outer flank of their companies,
will place themselves two paces before the front rank
©pposite to their respective places in line of battle,
&nd face towards the head of the column

PI. 72.

356

4

B

XL
lc u : c a

n.ODD

To form square, to half distance, close column (No. 818).

i»iwmmiiH-iHiirtmi.\t'.itwtiiiai
cucc a o o r a c e

C£3

s

i

Form square, right and left into line, wheel (No. 822).

SCHOOL OP THE BATTALION—PART V

357

820. At the commencement of the movement, the
major will place himself on the right of the column
abreast with the first division; the buglers formed in
two ranks will"'place themselves, at platoon distance,
behind the inner platoons of the second division.
821. These dispositions being made, the colonel
may, according to circumstances, put the column in
march or cause it to form square; if he wish to do
the latter, he will command:
1. Form square. 2. Right and left into line, wheel.
822. At the first command, the lieutenant colonel,
facing to the left guides, and the major, facing to
those of the right, will align them, from the front,
on the respective guides of the fourth division, who
will stand fast, holding up their pieces, inverted,
perpendicularly; the right guides, in placing themselves on the direction, will take their exact distances.
823. At the second command, the chief of the first
division will caution it to stand fast; all the captains
of the second and third divisions will place themselves before the centres of their respective com
panies, and caution them that they will have to wheel,
the right companies to the right, and the left companies to the left into line of battle.
824. The color-bearer will step back into the line
of file closers, opposite to his place in lrae of battle,
and will be replaced by the corporal of his file who
is in the rear rank; the corporal of the same file who
is in the rank of file closers will step into the rear
rank.
825. The chief of the fourth division will command: 1. Fourth division, forward; 2. Guide left, and
place himself at the same time two paces outside of
its left flank.
826. These dispositions ended, the colonel wil?
command:

358

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART V\

MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).

827. At this command, briskly repeated, the first
division will stand fast; but its right file will face to
the right, and its left file to the left.
828. The companies of the second and third divisions will wheel to the right and left into line, and
the buglers will advance a space equal to the front
of a company.
829. The fourth division will close up to form the
square, and when it shall have closed, its chief will
halt it, face it about, and align it by the rear rank
upon the guides of the division, who will, for this
purpose, remain faced to the front. The junior captain will pass into the rear rank, now become the
front, and the covering sergeant of the left company
will place himself behind him in the front rank,
become rear. The file closers will, at the same time,
close up a pace on the front rank, and the outer file
on each flank of the division will face outwards.
830. The square being formed, the colonel will
command:
Guides—POSTS.
831. At this command, the chiefs of the first and
fourth divisions, as well as the guides, will enter the
square.
832. The captains whose companies have formed
to the right into line will remain on the left of their
companies; the left guide of each of those companies
will, in the rear rank, cover his captain, and the
covering sergeant of each will place himself as a file
closer behind the right file of his company.
833. The field and staff will enter the square, the
lieutenant colonel placing himself behind the left,
and the major behind the right, of the first division.
834. If the battalion present ten instead of eight
companies, the fourth division will make the same
movements prescribed above for the second and third

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION- -PART,;V<

358

divisions, and the fifth the movements prescribed for
the fourth division.
835. A battalion ought never to present, near the
enemy's cavalry, an odd company. The odd company, under that circumstance, ought, when the
battalion is under arms, to* be consolidated, for the
time, with the other companies.
836. The fronts of the square will be designated
as follows: the first division will always be the first
front; the last division, the fourth front; the right
companies of the other divisions will form the second
front; and the left companies of the same divisions
the third front.
837. A battalion being in column by company, at
full distance, right in front, and in march, when the
colonel shall wish to form square, he will cause this
movement to be executed by the commands and
means indicated No. 817.
838. At the command march, the column will close
to company distance, as is prescribed No. 278.
When the chief of the fourth division shall command,
Quick, march, the file closers of this division will
place themselves before the front rank.
,839. The major and the buglers will conform to
what is prescribed No. 820.
840. If the colonel shall wish to form square, he
will command:
1. Form square. 2. Right and left into line, wheel.
3. MARCH.

, 841. At the first command, the chief of the first
division will caution it to halt; all the captains of
the second and third divisions will rapidly place
themselves before the centres of their respective companies, and caution them that they will have to wheel,
the right companies to the right, and the left companies to the left into line. The chief of the fourth
division will caution it to continue its march, and

S60

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION-^PAItT r .

will hasten to its left flank. At the third command,
briskly repeated, the chief of the first division will
halt his division and align it to the left, the outer
files will face to the right and left, the rest of the
movement will be executed as prescribed No. 828 and
following.
842. The lieutenant colonel and the major, at the
command march,' will conform to what is prescribed
No. 822.
843. If the battalion, before the square is formed,
be in double column, the two leading companies will
form the first front, the two rear companies the
fourth: the other companies of the right half battalion will form the second, and those of the left half
battalion the third front.
844. The first and fourth fronts will be commanded
by the chiefs of the first and fourth divisions; each
of the other two by its senior captain.
845. The commander of each front will place himself four paces behind its present rear rank, and will
be replaced momentarily in the command of his company by the next in rank therein.
846. If the column be at full distance, instead ; of
at company distance, as has been supposed, the
square will be formed in the manner prescribed No.
817 or 838, and following; and the dispositions indicated Nos. 819 and 820 will be executed at the command form square.
847. If the column by division, whether double or
simple, be in mass, and the colonel shall wish to form
it into square, he will first cause it to take company
distance * to this effect, he will command:
1 To form square. 2. By the head of column^ take half
distance.
848. The divisions will take half distance by the
means indicated No 324 and following. What ia

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART V.

361

prescribed No. 820 will be executed as the first and
second divisions are put in motion.
849. Th'e colonel will halt the column the moment
the third division shall have its distance. As soon as
the column is halted, the dispositions indicated No.
819 will be executed, and when these are completed,
the colonel may proceed to form square.
850. If the column be in march, he will also, in
the first place, cause company distance to be taken,
and, for this purpose* will command:
\. To form square. 2. By the head of column, take
half distance. 3. MARCH (or double quick—-MARCH).
851. This movement will be executed as prescribed
No. 830 and following. What is prescribed No.
820 will be executed as the first and second divisions
are put in motion.
852. The colonel will proceed to form square the
moment the third division shall have its distance; at
the command form square, the dispositions indicated
No. 819 will be executed. If it be intended merely
to dispose the column for square, the colonel will not
halt the column until the last division has its distance.
853. In a simple column, left in front, these several
movements will be executed according to the same
principles and by inverse means; but the fronts of
the square will have the same designations as if the
right of the column were in front, that is, the first
division will constitute the first front, and thus of the
Other subdivisions.
854. The battalion being formed into square, when
the colonel shall wish to cause it to advance a distance less than thirty paces, he will command:
1. By (such) front, forward.

2. MARCH.

855. If it be supposed that the advance be mad*

$32

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART V.

by the first front, the chief of this front will command :
1. First division, forward. 2. Guide centre.
•856. The chief of the second front will face his
front to the left. The captains of the companies
composing this front will place themselves outside,
and on the right of their left guides, who will replace
them in the front rank; the chief of the third front
will face his front to the right, and the captains in
this front will place themselves outside, and on the
left of their covering sergeants ; the chief of the
fourth front will face his front about, and command :
1. Fourth division, forward; 2. Guide centre. The
captain who is in the centre of the first front will be
charged with the« direction of the march, and will
regulate himself by the means indicated in the school
of the company, No. 89.
857. At the command march, the square will put
itself in motion; the companies marching by the
flank will be careful not to lose their distances. The
chief of the fourth division will cause his division to
keep constantly closed on the flanks of the second
and third fronts.
858. This movement will only be executed in quick
w'me.
859. The lieutenant colonel will place himself in
rear of the file of direction in order to regulate hia
march.
860. If the colonel should wish to halt the square,
he will command:
1. Battalion.

2. HALT.

861. At the second command, the square will halt;
the fourth front will face about immediately, and
without further command; the second and third
fronts will face outwards; the captains of companies
will resume their places as in square.

SCHOOL OP THE BATTALION

PART V.

363

862. I n moving t h e s q u a r e forward b y the second,
third, or fourth fronts, the same rules will be observed.
863. The battalion being formed into s q u a r e , w h e n
t h e colonel shall wish to cause it to advance a g r e a t e r
distance t h a n t h i r t y paces, h e will command :
1. Form column*
864. The chief of t h e first front will c o m m a n d :
1. First division forward.

2. Guide left.

865. The commander of t h e fourth front will
caution it to stand f a s t ; the commander of the second
front will cause it to face to t h e left, a n d then command, By company, by file left. The commander of
t h e t h i r d front will cause it to face to t h e r i g h t , a n d
then /command, By company, by file right.
At the
moment the second and third fronts face to the left
a n d r i g h t , each c a p t a i n will cause to b r e a k to t h e r e a r
the two leading files of his c o m p a n y .
866. These dispositions b e i n g made, t h e colonel
will c o m m a n d :
3. M A R C H (or double

quick-—MARCH).

867. At this command, the first front will m a r c h
f o r w a r d ; its chief will h a l t i t when it shall have
advanced a space equal to half its front, and align it
b y the left.
868. The c o r r e s p o n d i n g companies of t h e second
a n d t h i r d fronts will wheel by file to t h e left and
right, and m a r c h to meet each other behind the centre
of the first division, a n d t h e moment t h e y unite, t h e
captain of each company will h a l t his company a n d
face it to the front. The division being re-formed,
its chief will align it by the left.
869. The^ commander of the fourth front will cause
it to face a b o u t : its file closers will remain before the
front r a n k .
870. The column b e i n g t h u s re-formed, the colonel
30

364

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART V.

may put it in march by the commands and means
prescribed No. 164 and following; the right guides
will preserve company distance exactly as the directing guides.
871. When the colonel shall wish to re-form square,
he will give the commands indicated No. 840.
872. To cause the square to march in retreat a distance greater than thirty paces, the colonel will first
cause column to be formed as indicated No. 863 ; and
when formed, he will cause it to face by the rear
rank; to this end, he will command:
1. To march in retreat. 2. Face by the tear rank. 3.
Battalion about—FACE.
873. At the second command, the file closers of the
interior divisions* will place themselves, passing by
the outer flanks of their respective companies, behind
the front rank opposite to their places in line of battle ; the file closers of the other divisions will stand
fast.
874. At the third command, the battalion will face
about; each chief of division will place himself before
its rear rank, become front, passing through the interval between its two companies; the guides will
step into the rear rank, now front.
875. The column being thus disposed, the colonel
may put it in march, or cause it to form square as if
it were faced by the front rank. The square being
formed, its fronts will preserve the same designations
they had when faced by the front rank.
876. The battalion being in square by the rear
rank, when the colonel shall wish to march it in
retreat or in advance, a distance less than thirty
paces, he will conform to what is prescribed No. 854
and following; otherwise, he will re-form the column
according to the principles prescribed No. 863, by
marching forward the fourth front.
877. If the square is to be marched to the front a

PL 73.

364
rP

a

r|
a

rl

H

a CJ raa n r *

n n Tin

*'

H

Column faced

*

11
-

Fig. 1.

a coon a n n a nn
V

P

• p a DO • ra

cL

"IT

a c^iu u . n c 4 , a o a

J=L

4

h

n n a CCT

_ii

by the rear rank, to march in retreat
(No. 873).

Fig.%.

To form square, marching in retreat (No. 875).

365

PI 74.

W//WM/Wm:$d^-^\ ^
lig.l.

Fig. 2.

To reduce the square (No. S83).

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART Y.

365

distance greater than thirty paces, the colonel will
face the column by the front rank; to this end, he
will command:
1. To march in advance. 2. .Face by the^front rank.
3. Battalion about—FACE.
878. Which will be executed as prescribed No. 873
and following.
879. If the column be marching in advance, and
the colonel shall wish to march it in retreat, he will
command:
1. To march in retreat.

2, Battalion right about.

3. MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).

880. At the second command, the file closers of the
second and third divisions will place themselves rapidly
before the front rank of their respective divisions. At
the command march, the column will face about and
move off to the rear; the chiefs of divisions and the
guides will conform to what is prescribed No. 874.
881. If the column be marching in retreat, and the
colonel shall wish to march it in advance, he will
command:
1. To march in advance. 2. Battalion right about. S
MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).

882. At the second command, the file closers of the
second and third divisions will place themselves before
the rear rank of their respective divisions; at the
third, the column will face by the front rank.
To reduce the square.
883. The colonel, wishing to break the square, will
command:
1. Reduce square. 2. MARCH (or double quick~MARCH).

366

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART T.

884. This movement will be executed in the man
ner indicated No. 863 and following; but the file
closers of the fourth front will place themselves
behind the rear rank the moment it faces about;
the field and staff, the color-bearer and buglers,
will, at the same time, return to their places in
column.
To form square from line of battle,
885. A battalion deployed may be formed into
square in a direction either parallel or perpendicular to the line of battle.
886. In the first case, the colonel will cause the
battalion to break by division to the rear, by the
right or left, and then close the column, to half distance, as indicated No. 817 and following.
887. In the second case, he will ploy the battalion
into simple column by division at half distance in rear
of the right or left division, or into column doubled
on the Centre.
888. To ploy the battalion into column upon one
of the flank divisions, the colonel will command :
1. To form square. 2. Column at half distance by division. 3. On the first (or fourth) division. 4. Battalion right (or left)—FACE. 5. MARCH (or double
quick—MARCH).

889. This movement will be executed according to
the principles prescribed No. 119 and following.
890. If the battalion be marching in line of battle,
and the colonel shall wish to form square in a direction perpendicular to the line of battle, he will command:
] . To form square. 2. On the first [or fourth) division,
form column. 3. Battalion by the right (or left) flank.
4. MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).

SCHOOL )F THE BATTALION—PART T.

367

891. This movement will be executed according to
the principles prescribed for ploying a column by
division at half distance, No. 150. The chief of the
first division will halt his division at the command
march.
892. To ploy the battalion into double column, the
colonel will command:
1. To form square. 2. Double column at half distance.
8. Battalion inwards—FACE. 4. MARCH (or double
quick—MARCH)

893. This movement will be executed as prescribed
No. 778 and following.
894. The battalion being in march, to ploy it into
double column to form square, the colonel will command:
1. To form square. 2. Form double column. 3. Battalion by the right and left flanks. 4. MARCH (or
double quick—MARCH).
895. This movement will be executed as prescribed
No. 788. The chief of the leading division will halt
his division at the command march.
Observations relative to the formation of squares in
two ranks.
896. When the colonel shall judge it proper to have
a reserve, this reserve, in a column of three divisions,
will be formed of the inner platoons of the second division. The second division will, in this case, close to
platoon distance on the first division. When the square
is formed, the reserve platoons will move forward a
distance nearly equal to a platoon front.
897. In re-forming column, the first division will
move forward platoon, instead of company distance.
898. If the column be formed of four divisions, the
inner platoons of the third division will compose the
reserve; then, in re-forming column, the first divi-

368

SCHOOL OP THE BATTALION—PART T*

sion will conform to the general rule, and the chief
of the third, as soon as his division is formed, will
close it to platoon distance on the second division.
The colonel may, if necessary, form the reserve of
the entire third division. In this case, the movement
will be executed in the following manner.
899. If the column be at full distance, when it
shall close, at the command to form square, to half
distance, the chief of the third division will cause
four files to break to the rear from the right and left
of his division; the guides will close upon the outer
files remaining in line, and the left guide will march
exactly in the trace of the file immediately in front
of him. This division will then close in mass on the
second division; and the chief of the fourth division
will close to half distance on the same division.
900. At the command form square, the chief of the
reserve division will command, 1. Third division forward. 2. Guide centre; at this command, the guides
on the flanks will fall into the line of file closers. At
the command march, the reserve will move forward
the distance of a company front. When halted, its
chief will cause the platoons to be doubled, and for
this purpose will command:
1. On the centre double platoons. 2. MARCH.
901. At the first command, the chiefs of platoon
will place themselves in front of the centre of their
respective platoons; the chief of each outer platoon
will face his platoon towards the centre, and cause
to break to the rear two files from the left or right.
At the command march, the outer platoons will direct
their march so as to double on the centre platoon at
the distance of four paces; their chiefs will align
these outer platoons on the centre, and the files previously broken to the rear will come into line.
902. If the column be at half instead of full distance, the colonel before forming square will order

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION

PART V.

369

the chiefs of the third and fourth divisions to move
forward their divisions as prescribed No. 899.
903. If the column be closed in mass, at the command to form square, the chief of the third division
will break four files to the rear from each of the
flanks as prescribed No. 899.
904. The colonel will halt the column as soon as
the second division shall have gained its distance.
905. If the colonel shall wish the column to continue marching, at the command, by the head of column
take half distance, the chief of the reserve division
will give his cautionary commands in sufficient time
to place his division in motion simultaneously with
the one which precedes it. The chief of the fourth
division will give the command march at the instant
there is company distance between his division and
the second.
906. "When the colonel shall wish to re-form the
column, at the command form column, the chief of the
third division will command, Form division; at this
command, the chiefs of the outer platoons which have
doubled in rear of the centre platoons, will give the
commands and make the preparatory movements for
deploying on the centre platoons, which will be executed at the command march given by the colonel
and briskly repeated by the chief of this division.
The division being re-formed, the chiefs of the outer
platoons will retake their places in column, and the
chief of this division will again cause four files from
each of its flanks to break to the rear.
907. If before the, formation of the square, the
column had been left in front, it would be formed by
ithe same commands and according to the same principles. The second division, in this case, would form
the reserve.
908. The column being formed, if the colonel
should wish to march it in retreat he will face it \<y
the rear rank. The files of the third division broken

370

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—r-P ART V.

off to the rear, will face about with the battalion, and
when the column is put in motion will march in front
of the rear rank. But should the colonel wish to
re-form the square, he will cause the battalion to face
by the front rank.
909. If the battalion be in line, instead of in
column, the chief of the reserve division will bring
it into column in such manner that there may be a
distance of only four paces between this division and
the one which is to be immediately in front of it; and
when this division is halted and aligned, its chief
will cause the usual number of files to be broken to
the rear. The chief of the division which should
occupy in column a position immediately in rear of
the reserve division will, on entering the column,
take a distance of twelve paces between it and the
division established immediately in front of the reserve division.
Squares in four ranks.
910. If the square formed in two ranks, according
to the preceding rules, should not be deemed sufficiently strong, the colonel may cause the square to
be formed in four ranks.
911. The battalion being in column by company
at full distance, right in front, and at a halt, when
the colonel shall wish to form square in four ranks,
he will first cause divisions to be formed, which being
executed, he will command:
1. To form square in four ranks. 2. To half distance,
close column. 3. MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).
912. At the first command, the chief of the first
division will caution the right company to face to the
left, and the left company to face to the right. The
chiefs of the other divisions will caution their divisions to move forward.
.913. At the command march, the right company of

SCHOOL OP THE BATTALION—PART V.

371

the first division will form into four ranks on its left
file, and the left company into four ranks on its right
file. The formation ended, the chief of this division
will align it by the left.
914. The other divisions will move forward and
double their files marching; the right company of
each division will double on its left file, and the left
company on its right file. The formation completed,
each chief of division will command, Guide left. Each
chief will halt his division when it shall have the distance of a company front in four ranks from the preceding one, counting from its rear rank, and will
align his division by the left. At the instant the
fourth division is halted, the file closers will move
rapidly before its front rank.
915. The colonel will form square, re-form column,
and reduce square in four ranks, by the same commands and means as prescribed for a battalion in two
ranks.
916. If the square formed in four ranks be reduced
and at a halt, and the colonel shall wish to form the
battalion into two ranks, he will command:
1. In two ranks undouble files. 2. Battalion outwards
—FACE.

3. MARCH.

917. At the first command, the captains will step
before the centres of their respective companies, and
those oh the right will caution them to face to the
right, and those on the left to face to the left.
918. At the second command, the battalion will
face to the right and left.
919. At the command march, each company will
undouble its files and re-form into two ranks as
indicated in the school of the company No. 376 and
following. Each captain will halt his company and
face it to the front. The formation completed, each
chief of division will align his division by the left.
920. If the column be in march, with divisions

3? 2

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART T.

formed in four ranks, and the colonel shall wish to
re-form them into two ranks, he will command ;
1. Guide centre. 2. In tiuo ranks, undouble files.
3. MARCH.

921. The captain, p_aced in the centre of each
division; will continue to march straight to the front,
as will also the left file of the right company, and
the right file of the left company. Each company
will then be re-formed into two ranks, as prescribed
in the school of the company.
922. The battalion being formed into two ranks,
the colonel will command, Guide left (or right).
923. To form square in four ranks on one of the
flank divisions, the colonel will command :
1. To form square, in four ranks. 2. Column at half
distance, by division. 3. On the first (or fourth)
division. 4. Battalion, right (or left)—FACE.
6.
MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).

924. At the second command, each chief of division
will place himself before the centre of his division,
and caution it to face to the right.
925. At the fourth command, the right guide of
the first division will remain faced to the front, the
battalion will face to the right.
926. At the command march, the first file of four
men of the first division will face to the front, remaining doubled. All the other files of four men
will step off together, and each in succession will
close up to its proper distance on the file preceding
it, and face to the front, remaining doubled. When
the last file shall have closed, the chief of division
will command, Left—DRESS.
927. The other divisions will ploy into column in
the same manner as with a battalion in two ranks,
observing what follows: the chiefs of division, instead of allowing their divisions to file past them on

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART T.

373

entering the column, will continue to lead them, and
as each division shall arrive on a line with the right
guide of the first division, its chief will halt the right
guide, who will immediately face to the front; the
first file of four men will also halt at the same time
and face to the front, remaining doubled. The
second file will close on the first, and, when closed,
halt, and face to the front, remaining doubled. All
the other files will execute successively what
just been prescribed for the second. When the 1
tile shall have closed, the chief of division will command, Left—DRESS.
928. If the battalion be in march, the colonel will
command:
1. To form square, in four ranks. 2. On the first
division, form column. 3. Battalion, by the right
flank. 4. MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).
929. At the second command, each chief of division will step in front of the centre of his division
and caution it to face by the right flank. The chief
of the first division will caution his covering sergeant to halt, and remain faced to the front.
930. At the command march, the battalion will
face to the right; the covering sergeant of the first
division will halt and remain faced to the front, the
first division will then form into four ranks as heretofore prescribed. The other divisions will ploy into
column in the same manner as if the movement had
taken place from a halt.
931. If the colonel should wish to form a perpendicular square in four ranks, by double column,
he will command:
1. To form square, in four ranks. 2. Double column,
at half distance. 3. Battalion inwards—FACE. 4.
MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).

932. At the second command, the captains of companies will place themselves before the centres of

374

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PAET V.

their respective companies, and caution those on the
right to face to the left, and those on the left to face
to the right. The captain of the fifth company will
caution his covering sergeant to stand fast.
933. At the third command, the battalion will face
to the left and right; at the command march, the
ieft file of the fourth and ths right file of the fifth
company will face to the front, remaining doubled.
The fourth company will close successively by file
of fours on the left file, and the fifth company, in
like manner, on the right file ; the files will face to
the front, remaining doubled. The formation completed, the chief of division will command, Right
dress. The junior captain will place himself in the
interval between the two companies.
934. The other companies will close as prescribed
for the double column in two ranks, observing what
follows: each captain will halt the leading guide of
his company the moment the head of his company
arrives on a line with the centre of the column. In
the right companies, the left guides will step into the
line of file closers, and the left file of four men will
face immediately to the front, remaining doubled,
and by the side of the right guide of the left com
pany. The companies will each form into four ranks,
as prescribed No. 926, the right companies on the
left file, and the left companies on the right file. The
formation completed, the junior captain will place
himself between the two companies, and the senior
will command, Right dress.
935. If the battalion be in march, the colonel will
command:
1. To form square, in four ranks. 2. Form doubU
column. 3. Battalion by the right and left flanks.
4. MARCH (or double quick—MARCH).

936. At the second command, the captains will
place themselves before the centres of their re-

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART V.

375

spective companies, and those on the right will
caution them to face by the left flank, and those on
the left to face by the right flank; the captain of the
fifth company will caution his covering sergeant to
halt and remain faced to the front.
937. At the command march, the fourth and fifth
companies will halt. The battalion will face to the
left and right; the covering sergeant of the fifth
company will halt and remain faced to the front; the
movement will then be executed as if the battalion
was at a halt.
Oblique squares.
938. The battalion being in line of battle, when
the colonel shall wish to form the oblique square, he
will command:
1. To form oblique square. 2. On the first division
form column.
339. At the second command, the lieutenant colonel will trace the alignment of the first division in
the following manner: he will place himself before
and near the right file of this division, face to the
left, march twelve paces along the front rank, halt,
face to the right, march twelve paces perpendicularly
to the front, halt again, face to the right, and immediately place a marker at this point. The covering
sergeant of the right company will step, at the same
time, before its right file, face to the left, and conform
the line of his shoulders to that of the shoulders of the
marker established by the lieutenant colonel. These
two markers being established, the lieutenant colonel
will place a third marker on the same alignment, at
the point where the left of the division will halt.
940. The chiefs of division will place themselves
in front of the centres of their divisions; the chief
of the first division will immediately establish it by
a wheel to the right on a fixed pivot, against the

376

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION"—PART V.

m a r k e r s , and align it by t h e left. The chiefs of the
!>ther divisions will caution them to face to the r i g h t .
The colonel will then c o m m a n d :
\. Battalion,

right—FACE.
4. M A R C H
quick—M ARC H ) .

(or

double

941. The three r e a r divisions will direct theix
march so as to place themselves at half distance
/rom each other, and in the r e a r of the first division,
as previously indicated* observing what follows :
942. The chief of the second division, instead of
b r e a k i n g t h e headmost files to t h e r e a r , will b r e a k
them to the front, and, at t h e command march, will
conduct his division towards the point of entrance
into the column. Arrived at this point, he will halt
in his own person, cause his division to wh^el by file
to the right, i n s t r u c t i n g the r i g h t guide to direct
himself parallelly to the first division ; and as soon
as t h e left file h a s passed, its chief will halt the
division, and align it by the left. The other divisions
will b r e a k to the r e a r , b u t slightly ; each will enter
the column as prescribed for t h e second, and t h e
moment the battalion is ployed into column t h e
colonel will cause it to form s q u a r e .
943. The formation of a battalion into oblique
s q u a r e on t h e left division, will be executed according to t h e same principles and by inverse means.
944. Should t h e battalion be in m a r c h , t h e colonel
will first cause it to h a l t .
945. I n t h e preceding example, t h e battalion wag
supposed to be d e p l o y e d ; but if it be a l r e a d y formed
in column, t h e desired obliquity will be established
by causing it to c h a n g e direction b y the flank; to
this end, t h e colonel will c o m m a n d :
1. To form oblique square.
2. Change direction by the
right (or left) flank.
946. At the second command, t h e lieutenant colo-

376

PI. 7G.

«A*

To form oblique square (No. 946).
31

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART V.

377

nel will trace the new direction in the following
manner: he will place before the right and left files
of the headmost division, two markers, and a third
on the prolongation of the first two, on the side of
the change of d.rection, and at twelve paces from
the flank of the column. He will then place himself
before the third marker, march twelve paces perpendicularly to the front, halt, and finish tracing the
new direction in the manner indicated No. 939.
947. The colonel will then command:
8. Battalion right (or left)—FACE,
4. MARCH (or
double quick—MARCH).
948. The change of direction having been executed,
the colonel will cause the square to be formed.
949. Should the column be in march, the colonel
will first cause it to halt.
950. Oblique squares in four ranks will be executed by the same means, and according to the principles prescribed for the formation of squares in four
ranks.
951. Whether the battalion be ployed into simple
or double column, the particular dispositions for the
formation of the square will be executed as prescribed
No. 819 and following. The division which is to form
the rear of the column will be closed in mass, and,
as soon as it is aligned, the major will rectify the
position of the guides on the side of the column
opposite to the direction.
952. If it be the wish of the colonel merely to
prepare for square, he will in all formations with
that view substitute the command prepare for square
in place of to form square, and in that case the last
division will enter the column at company distance.
.Remarks on the formation of squares.
953. It is a general principle that a column by
company, which is to be formed into square, will

378

SCHOOL OP THE BATTALION—PART V.

first form divisions, and close to half distance.
Nevertheless, if it find itself suddenly threatened by
cavalry without sufficient time to form divisions, the
colonel will cause the column to close to platoon
distance, and then form square by the commands and
means which have been indicated; the leading and
rearmost companies will conform themselves to what
has been prescribed for divisions in those positions.
The other companies will form by platoon to the
right and left into line of battle, and each chief of
platoon, after having halted it, will place himself on
the line, as if the platoon were a company, and he
will be covered by the guide in the rear rank.
954. A battalion in column at full distance, having
to form square, will always close on the leading subdivision; and a column closed in mass will always,
for the same purpose, take distances by the head.
In either case, the second subdivision should be careful, in taking its distance, to reckon from the rear
rank of the subdivision in front of it.
955. If a column by company should be required
to form square in four ranks, the doubling of files
will always take place on the file next the guide.
956. When a column, disposed to form square,
shall be in march, it will change direction as a column
at half distance; thus, having to execute this movement, the column will take the guide on the side opposite to that to which the change of direction is to
be made, if that be not already the side of the guide.
957. A column doubled on the centre at company
distance or closed in mass, may be formed into square
according to the same principles as a simple column.
958. When a battalion is ployed, with a view to the
square, it will always be in rear of the right or left
division, in order that it may be able to commence
firing, pending the execution of the movement. The
double column, also, affords this advantage, and being
*iore promptly formed than any other, it will habit-

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART V.

3f9

aally be employed, unless particular circumstances
cause a different formation to be preferred.
959. A battalion, in square, will never use any
other than the fire by file and by rank; the color
being in the line of file closers, its guard will not fall
back as prescribed No. 4 1 ; it will fire like the men
of the company of which it forms a part.
960. If the square be formed in four ranks, the
first two ranks will alone execute the firings prescribed above; the other two ranks will remain either
at shoulder or support arms
961. The formation of the square being often necessary in war, and being the most complicated of the
manoeuvres, it will be as frequently repeated as the
supposed necessity may require, in order to render
its mechanism familiar to both officers and men.
962. In the execution of this manoeuvre, the colonel
will carefully observe that the divers movements which
it involves succeed each other without loss of time,
but also without confusion; for, if the rapidity of
cavalry movements requires the greatest promptitude
in the formation of squares, so, on the other hand,
precipitancy always results in disorder; and in no
circumstance is disorder more to be avoided.
963. When the colonel shall wish to cover by skir«
mishers the movements of a column preparing to forn
square, he will detach for this purpose one or two
inner platoons of one of the interior divisions of the
column. In this case, the exterior platoons of this
division and the following subdivisions, will, according to circumstances, close on the preceding subdivision, in such manner, that there may be between
them only the distance necessary for forming into
line.
964. When the colonel shall be ready to form square,
he will, in order to recall the skirmishers, cause to
the color to be sounded. If, on the return of the
Bkirnushers, there be not room for them to form into

380

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART T.

line of battle, they will double on the outer platoons
of their respective companies.
Column against Cavalry.
965. When a column closed" in mass has to form
square, it will begin by taking company distance;
but, if so suddenly threatened by cavalry as not to
allow time for this disposition, it will be formed in
the following manner:
966. The colonel will command:
1. Column against cavalry.

2. MARCH.

967. At the first command, the chief of the leading
division will caution it to stand fast and pass behind
the rear rank; in the interior divisions each captain
will promptly designate the number of files necessary
to close the interval between his company and the
one in front of it. The captains of the divisions
next to the one in rear, in addition to closing the
interval in front, will also close up the interval
which separates this division from the last; the
chief of the fourth division will caution it to face
about, and its file closers will pass briskly before the
front rank.
968. At the command march, the guides of each
division will place themselves rapidly in the line of
file closers. The first division will stand fast, the
fourth will face about, the outer file of each of these
divisions will then face outwards; in the other divisions the files designated for closing the intervals will
form to the right and left into line, but in the division
next to the rearmost one, the first files that come into
line will close to the right or left until they join the
rear division. The files of each company which remain in column will close on their outer files, formed
into line, in order to create a vacant space in the
middle of the column.

380

PL 77.

-^R
rr

^ ^^

mmm £
( ^
v/m

^ M

H M

/CM
f>OT

1^ M ^ ^ M W W••
p
^
Column arjainat cavalry (No. 967).

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART V.

381

961). If the column be in march, the column against
cavalry will be formed by the same commands and
means. At the command march, the first and fourth
divisions will halt and the latter division will face
about; the interior divisions will conform to what
has been prescribed above.
970. The battalion being no longer threatened by
cavalry, the colonel will command:
1. Form column. 2. MARCH.
971. At the command march, the files in column
will close to the left and right to make room for those
in line, who will retake their places in column by stepping backwards, except those closing the interval between the two rear divisions, who will take their
places in column by a flank movement. The fourth
division will face about, the guides will resume their
places.
972. If the colonel should be so pressed as not to
have time to order bayonets to be fixed, the men will
fix them, without command or signal, at the cautionary command, column against cavalry.
973. As this manoeuvre is often used in war, and
with decided advantage, the colonel will frequently
cause it to be executed in order to render it familiar.
ARTICLE FIFTEENTH.

The Bally.
974. The battalion being in line of battle, the colonel will sometimes cause the disperse to be sounded,
at which signal, the battalion will break and disperse.
975. When the colonel shall wish to rally the battalion, he will cause to the color to be sounded, and
at the same time place two markers and the colorbearer in the direction he may wish to give to the
battalion,

&82

SCHOOL OP THE BATTALION—PART T.

976. Each captain will rally his company about
8ix paces in rear of the place it is to occupy in line
of battle.
977. The colonel will cause the color-company to
be promptly established against the markers, and
each company by the command of its captain will be
aligned on the color-company according to the principles heretofore prescribed.
978. When the colonel shall wish to rally the battalion in column, he will cause the assembly to be
sounded, and place*two markers before the position
to be occupied by the first company; the captain of
this company will rally his company in rear of the
two markers, and each of the other captains will
rally his company at platoon distance, behind the
one which should precede it in the order in column.
ARTICLE SIXTEENTH.

Rules for manoeuvring by the rear rank.
979. It may often be necessary to cause a battalion
to manoeuvre by the rear rank; when the case presents itself, the following rules will be observed.
980. The battalion being by the front rank, when
the colonel shall wish to manoeuvre by the rear rank,
he will command:
1. Face by the rear rank. 2. Battalion.
3. About—FACE.
981. If the battalion be deployed, this movement
will be executed as has been indicated for the fire by
the rear rank.
982. If the battalion be in column by company, or
by platoon, right or left in front, the chiefs of subdivision, to take their new places in column, will
each pass by the left flank of his subdivision, and
the file closers by the right flank; the guides will
place themselves in the rear rank,

SCHOOL OV THE BATTALION—PART V.

383

983. If the column be formed by division, the
chiefs of division will each pass by the interval in
the centre of his division, and the file closers by the
outer flanks of their respective companies; the junior
captain in each division will step into the rear rank,
and be covered in the front rank by the covering
sergeant of the left company.
984. The lieutenant colonel will place himself
abreast with the leading subdivision, and the major
abreast with the rearmost one.
985. The battalion, being faced by the rear rank,
companies, divisions, and wings, will preserve their
prior denominations respectively.
986. The manoeuvres by the rear rank will be executed by the same commands and on the same principles as if the battalion faced by the front rank ; but
in such manner that when the battalion shall be
brought to its proper front, all the subdivisions may
find themselves in their regular order from right to
left.
987. According to this principle, when a column
faced by the rear rank is deployed, the subdivisions
which, in line of battle by the front rank, ought to
find themselves on the right of the subdivision on
which the deployment is made, will face to the left;
and those which ought to be placed on its left, will
face to the right.
988. When a battalion in line of battle, faced by
the rear rank, is to be ployed into column, the colonel
will announce, in the commands, left or right in front,
according as it may be intended that the first or last
subdivision shall be at the head of tne column, hecause the first subdivision is on the left, an I the last
on the right of the battalion faced by the rear rank.
The column by the rear rank will take the guide to
the right, if the first subdivision be in front, and to
the left in the reverse case.

384

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART V.

989. A column, faced by the rear rank, will be
brought to its proper front by the means heretofore
prescribed. If the column be formed by company,
or by platoon, the chiefs of subdivision, in order to
take their new places in column, will pass by the left
subdivisions, now right, and the file closers by the
right, now left.

STREET FIRING.
STREET firing is the method of firing adapted to
defend or clear a street, lane, or narrow pass, in the
execution of which the company or platoon must be
formed according to the width of the place, leaving
sufficient space on the flanks for the platoons to file
successively to the rear.
When the column has arrived at the place where
the firing is to commence, the commanding officer will
give the word, Column, halt—Prepare for street firing.
At this command, all the captains will pass by the
right flank to the rear of their companies, covering
the centre. The colonel next commands—Commence
firing. The captain of the first company will promptly
command: First company—ready---aim—fire—recover arms—outward face—quick march.
The first platoon face to the right, the second to
the left; the first platoon conducted by the captain,
the second by the first lieutenant, will file right and
left around the flanks towards the rear, halt on the
flanks opposite the centre of the column, re-load, and
as soon as the rear of the column has passed the platoons, the captain will command: Platoons—right
and left face—march. At which command, the first
platoon faces to the left, and files left, and the second
to the right, and files right, and unite in rear of the
column. At the instant the men of the first company
recover their arms after firing, the captain of the
second will order such company: Ready—and wait
in that position until the front is cleared by the first
company, when the captain will cause it to advance
twice its front (followed by all the companies in rear),
385

386

STREET FIRING.

and fire, file down the ranks in the aanie order as
prescribed for the first company.
Firing in retreat is conducted on the same principles as on the advance, except that the companies
fire without advancing, on the front being cleared by
the former company; and, instead of halting on the
flanks, the platoons will pass immediately to the rear
of the column, counter-march, form, and re-load.
The same principle will be observed in column of
platoons as column of company.
If a column by company find itself in a narrow
street or pass, or in any position without cover for
either flank or rear, and is suddenly menaced at
diiferent points, ae colonel will cause it to form
Bquare, notwithstanding the general principle that a
column by company, with a view to the square, will
first form divisions; the colonel will close the column
to half or platoon distance; the file closers of the
eighth company will conform themselves to what is
prescribed in paragraph 823, p. 357, for the file
closers of the fourth division.
These dispositions ended, he will command: Right
and left, into line, wheel, quick—march! At this,
briskly repeated, the leading company will stand fast,
the second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth, and seventh
companies will wheel by platoons, right and left, into
line of battle, the right platoons to the right and the
left to the left; the eighth company will close up to
form the square, and when it shall have closed up,
its captain will halt it, face it about, and align it by
the rear rank; the right file of the first company will
lace to the right, and its left file to the left, and the
outer files on each flank of the eighth company will
face outward. The square being formed, the colonel
will command: " Guides post;" at this, the field and
stall, captains of the first and eighth companies, will
enter the square.
In case it becomes necessary to use artillery in the

STREET FIRING.

387

suppression of riots or insurrection, the mounted
howitzer can be used with much effect, and without
injury to property in the vicinity; the lightness and
ready manner in which they can be conveyed from
place to place make this arm peculiarly adapted for
this purpose.

APPENDIX.
ARTICLES OF WAR.
AN

ACT F O R E S T A B L I S H I N G R U L E S AND A R T I C L E S FOR THB
GOVERNMENT OF T H E A R M I E S OF T H E U N I T E D S T A T E S . *

SECTION 1. Be it enacted, by the Senate and House of
Representatives of the United States of America, in Congress assembled, That, from and after the passing of this
act, the following shall be the rules and articles by which
the armies of the United States shall be governed:
ARTICLE 1. Every officer now in the army of the United
States shall, in six months from the passing of this act,
and every officer who shall hereafter be appointed shall,
before he enters on the duties of his office, subscribe these
rules and regulations.
ART. 2. It is earnestly recommended to all officers and
soldiers diligently to attend divine service; and all officers
who shall behave indecently or irreverently at any place
of divine worship shall, if commissioned officers, be brought
before a general court-martial, there to be publicly and
severely reprimanded by the president; if non-commissioned officers or soldiers, every person so offending shall,
for his first offence, forfeit one-sixth of a dollar, to be deducted out of his next pay; for the second offence, he shall
not only forfeit a like sum, but be confined twenty-four
hours j and for every like offence, shall suffer and pay in
like manner; which money, so forfeited, shall be apr lied,
by the captain or senior officer of the troop or company, to
the use of the sick soldiers of the company or troop to
which the offender belongs.
ART. 3. Any non-commissioned officer or soldier who
* The0e rules and articles, with the exceptions indicated by the
notes annexed to articles 20, 65, and 87, remain unaltered, and ia
force at present.
32
389

390

ARTICLES OP WAR.

shall use any profane oath or execration shall incur the
penalties expressed in the foregoing article; and a commissioned officer shall forfeit and pay, for each and every such
offence, one dollar, to be applied as in the preceding
article.
ART. 4. Every chaplain commissioned in the army or
armies of the United States, who shall absent himself from
the duties assigned him (excepting in cases of sickness or
leave of absence), shall, on conviction thereof before a
court-martial, be fined not exceeding one month's pay, besides the loss of his pay during his absence; or be discharged, as the said court-martial shall judge proper.
ART. 5. Any officer or soldier who shall use contemptuous or disrespectful words against the President of the
United States, against the Vice-President thereof, against
the Congress of the United States, or against the Chief
Magistrate or Legislature of any of the United States in
which he may be quartered, if a commissioned officer, shall
be cashiered, or otherwise punished, as a court-martial
shall direct; if a non-commissioned officer or soldier, he
shall suffer such punishment as shall be inflicted on him
by the sentence of a court-martial.
ART. 6. Any officer or soldier who shall behave himself
with contempt or disrespect toward his commanding officer,
shall be punished, according to the nature of his offence,
by the judgment of a court-martial.
ART. 7. Any officer or soldier who shall begin, excite,
cause, or join in, any mutiny or sedition, in any troop or
company in the service of the United States, or in any
party, post, detachment, or guard, shall suffer death, or
such other punishment as by a court-martial shall be inflicted.
ART. 8. Any officer, non-commissioned officer, or soldier,
who, being present at any mutiny or sedition, does not use
his utmost endeavor to suppress the same, or, coming to
the knowledge of any intended mutiny, does not, without
delay, give information thereof to his commanding officer,
shall be punished by the sentence of a court-martial with
death, or otherwise, according to the nature of his offence.
ART. 9. Any officer or soldier who shall strike his superior officer, or draw or lift up any weapon, or offer any
violence against him, being in the execution of his office,

ARTICLES OF WAR.

301

on any preten e whatsoever, or shall disobey any lawful
command of his superior officer, shall suffer death, or such
other punishment as shall, according to the nature of his
offence, be inflicted upon him by the sentence of a courtmartial.
ART, 10. Every non-commissioned officer or soldier, who
shall enlist himself in the service of the United States,
shall, at the time of his so enlisting, or within six days
afterward, have the Articles for the government of the
armies of the United States read to him, and shall, by the
officer who enlisted him, or by the commanding officer of
the troop or company into which he was enlisted, be taken
before the next justice of the peace, or chief magistrate
of any city or town corporate, not being an officer of the
army, or, where recourse cannot be had to the civil magistrate, before the judge advocate, and in his presence shall
take the following oath or affirmation: " t , A. B., do
solemnly swear or affirm (as the case may be) that I will
bear true allegiance to the United States of America, and
that I will serve them honestly and faithfully against all
their enemies or opposers whatsoever; and observe and
obey the orders of the President of the United States, and
the orders of the officers appointed over me, according to
the Rules and Articles for the government of the armies
of the United States." Which justice, magistrate, or
judge advocate is to give to the officer a certificate, signifying that the man enlisted did take the said oath or affirmation.
ART. 11. After a non-commissioned officer or soldier
shall have been duly enlisted and sworn, he shall not be
dismissed the service without a discharge in writing; and
no discharge granted to him shall be sufficient which is
not signed by a field officer of the regiment to which he
belongs, or commanding officer, where no field officer of
the regiment is present; and no discharge shall be given
to a non-commissioned officer or soldier before his term of
service has expired, but by order of the President, the
Secretary of War, the commanding officer of a department, or the sentence of a general oourt-martial; nor shall
a commissioned officer be discharged the service but by
order of the President of the United States, or by sentence
of c general court-martial.

£92

ARTICLES OF

WAR.

ART. 12. Every colonel, or other officer commanding a
regiment, troop, or company, and actually quartered with
it, may give furloughs to non-commissioned officers or soldiers, in such numbers, and for so long a time, as he shall
judge to be most consistent with the good of the service;
and a captain, or other inferior officer, commanding a troop
or company, or in any garrison, fort, or barrack of the
United States (his field officer being absent), may give
furloughs to non-commissioned officers or soldiers, for a
time not exceeding twenty days in six months, but not to
more than two persons to be absent at the same time, excepting some extraordinary occasion should require it.
ART. 13. At every muster, the commanding officer of
each regiment, troop, or company, there present, shall giv«
to the commissary of musters, or other officer who mustera
the said regiment, troop, or company, certificates signed by
himself, signifying how long such officers, as shall not
appear at the said muster, have been absent, and the reason of their absence. In like manner, the commanding
officer of every troop or company shall give certificates,
signifying the reasons of the absence of the non-commissioned officers and private soldiers; which reasons and
time of absence shall be inserted in the muster-rolls, opposite the names of the respective absent officers and soldiers. The certificates shall, together with the muster
rolls, be remitted by the commissary of musters, or other
officer mustering, to the Department of War, as speedily as
the distance of the place will admit.
ART. 14. Every officer who shall be convicted before a
general court-martial of having signed a false certificate
relating to the absence of either officer or private soldier
or relative to his or their pay, shall be cashiered.
ART. 15. Every officer who shall knowingly make a falsa
muster of man or horse, and every officer or commissary
of musters who shall willingly sign, direct, or allow the
signing of muster-rolls wherein such false muster is con-»
tained, shall, upon proof made thereof, by two witnesses,
before a general court-martial, bo cas'viered, and shall bo
thereby utterly disabled to have or hoxd any office or employment in the service of the United States.
ART. 16. Any commissary of musters, or other officer,
who shall be convicted of having taken money, or other

ARTICLES OF WAR.

ass

thing, by way of gratification, on mustering any regiment,
troop, or company, or on signing muster-rolls, shall be
displaced from his office, and shall be thereby utterly disabled to have or hold any office or employment in the service of the United States.
ART. 17. Any officer who shall presume to muster a
person as a soldier who is not a soldier, shall be deemed
guilty of having made a false muster, and shall suffei
accordingly.
ART. 18. Every officer who shall knowingly make a
false return to the Department of War, or to any of his
superior officers, authorized to call for such returns, of tho
state of the regiment, troop, or company, or garrison,
under his command, or of the arms, ammunition, clothing,
or other stores thereunto belonging, shall, on conviction
thereof before a court-martial, be cashiered.
ART. 19. The commanding officer of every regiment,
troop, or independent company, or garrison, of the United
States, shall, in the beginning of every month, remit,
through the proper channels, to the Department of War,
an exact return of the regiment, troop, independent company, or garrison, under his command, specifying the
names of the officers then absent from their posts, with the
reasons for and the time of their absence. And any officer
who shall be convicted of having, through neglect or design, omitted sending such returns, shall be punished,
according to the nature of his crime, by the judgment of
a general court-martial.
ART. 20. All officers and soldiers who have received pay,
or have been duly enlisted in the service of the United
States, and shall be convicted of having deserted the same,
shall suffer death, or such other punishment as, by sentence
of a court-martial, shall be inflicted.*
ART. 21. Any non-commissioned officer or soldier who
ehall, without leave from his commanding officer, absent
himself from his troop, company, or detachment, shall,
upo>a being convicted thereof, be punished according to the
nature of his offence, at the discretion of a court-martial.
ART. 22. No non-commissioned officer or soldier shall
enlist himself in any other regiment, troop, or company,
* Modified by Act of 29th May, 1830.

sn

ARTICLES OF WAR.

without a regular Jischarge from the regiment, trc >p, or
company in which he last served, on the penalty of being
reputed a deserter and suffering accordingly. And in case
any officer shall knowingly receive and entertain such noncommissioned officer or soldier, or shall not, after his being
discovered to be a deserter, immediately confine him, and
give notice thereof to the corps in which he last served, tin
gaid officer shall, by a court-martial, be cashiered.
ART. 23. Any officer or soldier who shall be convicted of
having advised or persuaded any other officer or soldier to
desert the service of the United States, shall suffer death,
or such other punishment as shall be inflicted upon him by
the sentence of a court-martial.
ART. 24. No officer or soldier shall use any reproachful
or provoking speeches or gestures to another, upon pain,
if an officer, of being put in arrest: if a soldier, confined,
and of asking pardon of the party oliended, in the presence of his commanding officer.
ART. 25. No officer or soldier shall send a challenge to
another officer or soldier, to fight a duel, or accept a challenge if sent, upon pain, if a commissioned officer, of being
cashiered; if a non-commissioned officer or soldier, of suffering corporeal punishment, at the discretion of a courtmartial.
ART. 26. If any commissioned or non-commissioned
officer commanding a guard shall knowingly or willingly
suffer any person whatsoever to go forth to fight a duel, he
shall be punished as a challenger; and all seconds, promoters, and carriers of challenges, in order to duels, shall
be deemed principals, and be punished accordingly. And
it shall be the duty of every officer commanding an army,
regiment, company, post, or detachment, who is knowing to
a challenge being given or accepted by any officer, noncommissioned officer, or soldier, under his command, or has
reason to believe the same to be the case, immediately to
arrest and bring to trial such offenders.
ART. 27. All officers, of what condition soever, have
power to part and quell all qiu *rels, frays, and disorders,
though the persons concerned should belong to another
regiment, troop, or company; and either to order officers
into arrest, or non-commissioned officers o/ soldiers into
confinement, until their proper superior officers shall ba

ARTICLES OF WA R.

395

acquainted therewith , and whosoever shall ref ase to obey
*
such officer (though of an inferior rank), or shall draw his
sword upon him, shall be punished at the discretion of a
general court-martial.
ABT. 28. Any officer or soldier who shall upbraid another
for refusing a challenge, shall himself be punished as a
challenger; and all officers and soldiers are hereby discharged from any disgrace or opinion of disadvantage
which might arise from their having refused to accept of
challenges, as they will only have acted in obedience to the
laws, and done their duty as good soldiers who subject
themselves to discipline.
ART. 29. No sutler shall be permitted to sell any kind of
liquors or victuals, or to keep their houses or shops open
for the entertainment of soldiers, after nine at night, or
before the beating of the reveille, or upon Sundays, during
divine service or sermon, on the penalty of being dismissed
from all future suttling.
ART. 30. All officers commanding in the field, forts, barracks, or garrisons of the United States are hereby
required to see that the persons permitted to suttle shall
supply the soldiers with good and wholesome provisions,
or other articles, at a reasonable price, as they shall be
answerable for their neglect.
ART. 31. No officer commanding in any of the garrisons,
forts, or barracks of the United States, shall exact exorbitant prices for houses or stalls let out to sutlers, or connive at the like exactions in others; nor by his own
authority, and for his private advantage, lay any duty or
imposition upon, or be interested in, the sale of any victuals, liquors, or other necessaries of life brought into the
garrison, fort, or barracks, for the use of the soldiers, on
the penalty of being discharg id from the service.
ART, 32. Every officer commanding in quarters, garrisons, or on the march, shall keep good order, and, to the
utmost of his power, redress all abuses or disorders which
may be committed by any officer or soldier under his command; if, upon complaint made to him of officers or soldiers
beating or otherwise ill treating any person, or disturbing
fairs ormarkets, or of committing any kind of riots, to the
disquieting of the citizens of the United States, he, tbe
Said commander, who shall refuse or omit to see justice

396

ARTICLES OF WAR,

done to the offender or offenders, and reparation made to
the party or parties injured, as far as part of the offender's
pay shall enable him or them, shall, upon proof thereof, be
cashiered, or otherwise punished, as a general court-martial shall direct.
ART. 33. When any commissioned officer or soldier shall
be accused of a capital crime, or of having used violence
or committed any offence against the person or property
of any citizen of any of the United States, such as is
punishable by the known laws of the land, the commanding officer and officers of every regiment, troop, or company, to which the person or persons so accused shall
belong, are hereby required, upon application duly made
by or in behalf of the party or parties injured, to use their
utmost endeavors to deliver over such accused person or
persons to the civil magistrate, and likewise to be aiding
and assisting to the officers of justice in apprehending and
securing the person or persons so accused, in order to bring
him or them to trial. If any commanding officer or officers
shall wilfully neglect, or shall refuse, upon the application
aforesaid, to deliver over such accused person or persons to
the civil magistrates, or to be aiding and assisting to the
officers of justice in apprehending such person or persons,
the officer or officers so offending shall be cashiered.
ART. 34. If any officer shall think himself wronged by his
colonel, or the commanding officer of the regiment, and
shall, upon due application being made to him, be refused
redress, he may complain to the general commanding in
the State or Territory where such regiment shall be stationed, in order to obtain justice; who is hereby required
to examine into said complaint, and take proper measures
for redressing the wrong complained of, and transmit, as
soon as possible, to the Department of War, a true state of
such complaint, with the proceedings had thereon.
ART. 35. If any inferior officer or soldier shall think him*
self wronged by his captain or other officer, he is to complain thereof to the commanding officer of the regiment,
who is hereby required to summon a regimental courtmartial, for the doing justice to the complainant,' from
which regimental court-martial either party may, if he
thinks himself still aggrieved, appeal to a general courtmartial. Br.t if, upon a second hearing, the appeal shall

ARTICLES OF WAK.

397

appear vexatious and groundless, the person so appealing
shall be punished at the discretion of the said courb
martial.
ART. 36. Any commissioned officer, store-keeper, or commissary, who shall be convicted at a general court-martial
of having sold, without a proper order for that purpose, embezzled, misapplied, or wilfully, or through neglect, suffered any of the provisions, forage, arms, clothing, ammunition, or other military stores belonging to the United
States to be spoiled or damaged, shall, at his own expense,
make good the loss or damage, and shall, moreover, forfeit
all his pay, and be dismissed from the service.
ART. 37. Any non-commissioned officer or soldier who
shall be convicted at a regimental court-martial of having
sold, or designedly, or through neglect, wasted the ammunition delivered out to him, to be employed in the service
of the United States, shall be punished at the discretion
of such court.
ART. 38. Every non-commissioned officer or soldier who
shall be convicted before a court-martial of having sold,
lost, or spoiled, through neglect, his horse, arms, clothes,
or accoutrements, shall undergo such weekly stoppages
(not exceeding the half of his pay) as such court-martial
shall judge sufficient for repairing the loss or damage;
and shall suffer confinement, or such other corporeal punishment as his crime shall deserve.
ART. 39. Every officer who shall be convicted before a
court-martial of having embezzled or misapplied any money
with which he may have been intrusted, for the payment
of the men under his command, or for enlisting men into
the service, or for other purposes, if a commissioned officer,
shall be cashiered, and compelled to refund the money j
if a non-commissioned officer, shall be reduced to the
ranks, be put under stoppages until the money be made
good, and suffer such corporeal punishment as such court*
martial shall direct.
ART. 40; Every captain of a troop or company is charged
with the arms, accoutrements, ammunition, clothing, or other'
warlike stores belonging to the troop or company under his
commands which he is to be accountable for to his colonel
in case of their being lost, spoiled, or damaged, not by unavoidable accidents, or OJ actual service.

m

ARTICLES OF WAR.

ART. 41. All ncn-commissioned officers and soldiers wha
shall be found one mile from the camp without leave, in
writing, from their commanding officer, shall' suffer such
punishment as shall be inflicted upon them by the sentence
of a court-martial.
ART. 42. No officer or soldier shall lie out of his quarters,
garrison, or camp without leave from his superior officer,
upon penalty of being punished according to the naturo
of his offence, by the sentence of a court-martial.
ART. 43. Every non-commissioned officer and soldier
ghali retire to his quarters or tent at the beating of the retreat; in default of which he shall be punished according to
the nature of his offence.
ART. 44. No officer, non-commissioned officer, or soldier
shall fail in repairing, at the time fixed, to the place of
parade, of exercise, or other rendezvous appointed by his
commanding officer, if not prevented by sickness or some
other evident necessity, or shall go from the said place of
rendezvous without leave from his commanding officer,
Jbefore he shall be regularly dismissed or relieved, on the
penalty of being punished, according to the nature of his
offence, by the sentence of a court-martial.
ART. 45. Any commissioned officer who shall be found
drunk on his guard, party, or other duty, shall be cashiered. Any non-commissioned officer or soldier so offending shall suffer such corporeal punishment as shall be inflicted by the sentence of a court-martial.
ART. 46. Any sentinel who shall be found sleeping upon
his post, or shall leave it before he shall be regularly relieved, shall suffer death, or such other punishment as shall
be inflicted by the sentence of a court-martial,
, ART. 47. No soldier belonging to any regiment, troop,
or company shall hire another to do his duty for him, oi
be excused from duty but in cases of sickness, disability,
or leave of absence ; and every such soldier found guilty
of hiring his duty, as also the party so hired to do another's
duty, shall be punished at the discretion of a regimental
court-martial.
ART. 48. And every non-commissioned officer conniving
at such hiring of duty aforesaid, shall be reduced; and
every commissioned officer knowing and allowing such ill

ARTICLES OF WAR.

399

practices in the service, shall be punished by t i e judgment
of a general court-martial.
ART. 49. Any officer belonging to the service of the
United States, who, by discharging of firearms, drawing of
swords, beating of drums, or by any other means whatsoever, shall occasion false alarms in camp, garrison, or
quarters, shall suffer death, or such other punishment as
shall be ordered by the sentence of a general court-martial.
ART. 50. Any officer or soldier who shall, without urgentnecessity, or without the leave of his superior officer, quit
his guard, platoon, or division, shall be punished, according
to the nature of his offence, by the sentence of a courtmartial.
ART. 51. No officer or soldier shall do violence to any
person who brings provisions or other necessaries to the
camp, garrison, or quarters of the forces of the United
States, employed in any parts out of the said States, upon
pain of death, or such other punishment as a court-martial
shall direct.
ART. 52. Any officer or soldier who shall misbehave himself before the enemy, run away, or shamefully abandon
any fort, post, or guard which he or they may be commanded to defend, or speak words inducing others to do
the like, or shall cast away his arms and ammunition, or
who shall quit his post or colors to plunder and pillage,
every such offender, being duly convicted thereof, shall
suffer death, or such other punishment as shall be ordered
by the sentence of a general court-martial.
ART. 53. Any person belonging to the armies of the
United States who shall make known the watchword to any
person who is not entitled to receive it according to the
rules and discipline of war, or shall presume to give a
parole or watchword different from what he received, shall
suffer death, or such other punishment as shall be ordered
by the sentence of a general court-martial.
ART. 54. All officers and soldiers are tc behave themselves
orderly in quarters and on their march; and whoever shall
commit any waste or spoil, eith tv in walks of trees, parks,
Warrens, fish-ponds, houses, cr gardms, corn-fields, enclosures of meadows, or shall rialiciously destroy any property whatsoever belonging to the inhabitants of the United
States, unless by order of the then commander-in-chief of

400

ARTICLES OF WAR.

the armies of the said States, shall (besides such penalties
as they are liable to by law) be punished according to the
nature and degree of the offence, by the judgment of a
regimental or general court-martial.
ART. 55. Whosoever, belonging to the armies of the
United States in foreign parts, shall force a safeguard, shall
suffer death.
ART. 56. Whosoever shall relieve the enemy with money,
victuals, or ammunition, or shall knowingly harbor or
protect an enemy, shall suffer death, or such other punishment as shall be ordered by the sentence of a courtmartial.
ART. 57. Whosoever shall be convicted of holding correspondence with, or giving intelligence to, the enemy,
either directly or indirectly, shall suffer death, or such other
punishment as shall be ordered by the sentence of a courtmartial.
ART. 58. All public stores taken in the enemy's camp,
towns, forts, or magazines, whether of artillery, ammunition, clothing, forage, or provisions, shall be secured for
the service of the United States; for the neglect of which
the commanding officer is to be answerable.
ART. 59. If any commander of any garrison, fortress, or
post shall be compelled, by the officers and soldiers under
his command, to give up to the enemy, or to abandon it,
the commissioned officers, non-commissioned officers, or
soldiers who shall be convicted of having so offended, shall
suffer death, or such other punishment as shall be inflicted
upon them by the sentence of a court-martial.
ART. 60. All sutlers and retainers to the camp, and all
persons whatsoever, serving with the armies of the United
States in the field, though not enlisted soldiers, are to be
subject to orders, according to the rules and discipline of
n&r.
ART. 61. Officers having brevets or commissions of a
prior date to those of the regiment in which they serve,
may take place in courts-martial and on detachments, when
composed of different corps, according to the ranks given
them in their brevets or dates of their former commissions;
but in the regiment, troop, or company to which such officers belong, they shall do duty and take rank, both in courtsmartial and on detachments which shall be composed oi

ARTICLES OF WAR.

401

their own corps, according to the commissions by which
they are mustered in the said corps.
AUT. 62. If, upon marches, guards, or in quarters, different corps of the army shall happen to join, or do duty
together, the officer highest in rank of the line of the army,
marine corps, or militia, by commission, there on duty or
in quarters, shall command the whole, and give orders for
what is needful to the service, unless otherwise specially
directed by the President of the United States, according
to the nature of the case.
ART. 63. The functions of the engineers being generally
confined to the most elevated branch of military science,
they are not to assume, nor are they subject to be ordered
on any duty beyond the line of their immediate profession,
except by the special order of the President of the United
States; but they are to receive every mark of respect to
which their rank in the army may entitle them respectively,
and are liable to be transferred, at the discretion of the
President, from one corps to another, regard being paid to
rank.
ART. 64. General courts-martial may consist of any
number of eommissioned officers, from five to thirteen, inclusively; but they shall not consist of less than thirteen
where that number can be convened without manifest injury to the service.
ART. 65.* Any general officer commanding an army, or
colonel commanding a separate department, may appoint
general courts-martial whenever necessary. But no sentence of a court-martial shall be carried into execution
until after the whole proceedings shall have been laid
before the officer ordering the same, or the officer commanding the troops for the time being; neither shall any
sentence of a general court-martial, in the time of peace,
extending to the loss of life, or the dismission of a commissioned officer, or which shall, either in time of peace or
war, respect a general officer, be carried into execution,
until after the whole proceedings shall have been transmitted to the Secretary of War, to be laid before the President of the United States for his confirmation or disapproval, and orders in the case. All other sentences may
* Modified by Act of 29th May, 1830.

402

ARTICLES OP JFAR.

be confirmed and executed by the officer ordering the eourt
to assemble, or the commanding officer for the time being,
as the case may be.
ART. 66. Every officer commanding a regiment or corps
may appoint, for his own regiment or corps, courts-martial,
to consist of three commissioned officers, for the trial and
punishment of offences not capital, and decide upon their
sentences. For the same purpose, all officers commanding
any of the garrisons, forts, barracks, or other places where
the troops consist of different corps, may assemble courtsmartial, to consist of three commissioned officers, and decide upon their sentences.
ART. 67. No garrison or regimental court-martial shall
have the power to try capital cases or commissioned officers ; neither shall they inflict a fine exceeding one month's
pay, nor imprison, nor put to hard labor, any non-commissioned officer or soldier for a longer time than one
month.
ART. 68. "Whenever it may be found convenient and necessary to the public service, the officers of the marines
shall be associated with the officers of the land forces, for
the purpose of holding courts-martial, and trying offenders
belonging to either; and, in such cases, the orders of the
senior officer of either corps who may be present and duly
authorized, shall be received and obeyed.
ART. 69. The judge advocate, or some person deputed by
him, or by the general, or officer commanding the army,
detachment, or garrison, shall prosecute in the name of the
United States, but shall so far consider himself as counsel
for the prisoner, after the said prisoner shall have made hia
plea, as to object to any leading question to any of the
witnesses, or any question to the prisoner, the answer to
which might tend to criminate himself; and administer to
each member of the court, before they proceed upon any
trial, the following oath, which shall also be taken by ail
members of the regimental and garrison courts-martial:
"You, A. B., do swear that you will weir and truly try
and determine, according to evidence, the matter now
before you, between the United States of America and the
prisoner to be tried, and that you will duly administer justice, according to the provisions of 'An act esta-blishing
Rules and Articles fcf the government of the armies of the

ARTICLES OF WAR.

4\)3

United States/ without partiality, favor, or affection j and
if any doubt should arise, not explained by said Articles,
according to your conscience, the best of your understanding, and the custom of war in like cases; and you do further swear that you will not divulge the sentence uf the
court until it shall be published by the proper authorityj
neither will you disclose or discover the vote or opinion of
any particular member of the court-martial, unless required
to give evidence thereof, as a witness, by a court of justice,
in a due course of law. So help you God."
And as soon as the said oath shall have been administered to the respective members, the president of the court
shall administer to the judge advocate, or person ofi&ciating
as such, an oath in the following words:
" You, A. B., do swear, that you will not disclose or dis
cover the vote or opinion of any particular member of the
court-martial, unless required to give evidence thereof, as
a witness, by a court of justice, in due course of law; nor
divulge the sentence of the court to any but the proper
authority, until it shall be duly disclosed by the same.
So help you God."
ART. 70. When a prisoner, arraigned before a general
court-martial, shall, from obstinacy and deliberate design,
stand mute, or answer foreign to the purpose, the court
may proceed to trial and judgment as if the prisoner had
regularly pleaded not guilty.
ART. 71. When a member shall be challenged by a pri
soner, he must state his cause of challenge, of which the
court shall, after due deliberation, determine the relevancy
or validity, and decide accordingly; and no challenge to
more than one member at a time shall be received by the
court.
ART. 72. All the members of a court-martial are to behave with decency and calmness, and in giving their votes
are to begin with the youngest in commission.
ART. 73. All persons who give evidence before a courtmartial are to be examined on oath or affirmation, in the
following form:
" You swear, or affirm (as the case may be), the evidence
you shall give iu the cause now in hearing shall be the
truth, the whole truth, and notting but the truth. So help
you God.,)<

404

ARTICLES OP WAR.

ART. 74. On the trials of cases not capital, before courts*
martial, the deposition of witnesses, not in the line or staff
of the army, may be taken before some justice of the peace,
and read in evidence; provided the prosecutor and person
accused are present at the taking the same, or are duly
notified thereof.
ART. 75. No officer shall be tried but by a general courtmartial, nor by officers of an inferior rank, if it can be
avoided. Nor shall any proceedings of trials be carried
on, excepting between the hours of eight in the morning
and three in the afternoon, excepting in cases which, in
the opinion of the officer appointing the court-martial, require immediate example.
ART. 76. No person whatsoever shall use any menacing
words, signs, or gestures, in presence of a court-martial, or
shall cause any disorder or riot, or disturb their proceedings, on the penalty of being punished at the discretion of
the said court-martial.
ART. 77. Whenever any officer shall be charged with a
crime, he shall be arrested and confined in his barracks,
quarters, or tent, and deprived of his sword by the commanding officer. And any officer who shall leave his confinement before he shall be set at liberty by his commanding officer, or by a superior officer, shall be cashiered.
ART. 78. Non-commissioned officers and soldiers, charged
with crimes, shall be confined until tried by a court-martial, or released by proper authority.
ART. 79. No officer or soldier who shall be put in arrest
shall continue in confinement more than eight days, or
until such time as a court-martial can be assembled.
ART. 80. No officer commanding a guard, or provost
marshal, shall refuse to receive or keep any prisoner committed to his charge by an officer belonging to the forces
of the United States; provided the officer committing shall,
at the same time, deliver an account in writing, signed by
himself, of the crime with which the said prisoner is
charged.
ART. 81. No officer commanding a guard, or provost
marshal, shall presume to release any person committed to
his charge without proper authority for so doing, nor shall
he suffer p.ny person to escape, on the penalty of being
punished for it by the sentence of a court-martial.

ARTICLES OF WAR.

405

ART. 82. Every officer or provost marshal, tn whose
charge prisoners shall be committed, shall, within twentyfour hours after such commitment, or as soon as he shall
be relieved from his guard, make report in writing, to the
commanding officer, of their names, their crimes, and the
names of the officers who committed them, on the penalty
of being punished for disobedience or neglect, at the discretion of a court-martial.
ART. 83. Any commissioned officer convicted before a
general court-martial of conduct unbecoming an officer
and a gentleman, shall be dismissed the service.
ART. 84. In cases where a court-martial may think it
proper to sentence a commissioned officer to be suspended
from command, they shall have power also to suspend his
pay and emoluments for the same time, according to the
nature and heinousness of the offence.
ART. 85. In all cases where a commissioned officer is
cashiered for cowardice or fraud, it shall be added in the
sentence, that the crime, name, and place of abode, and
punishment of the delinquent, be published in the newspapers in and about the camp, and of the particular State
from which the offender came, or where he usually resides; after which it shall be deemed scandalous for an
officer to associate with him.
ART. 86. The commanding officer of any post or detachment, in which there shall not be a number of officers adequate to form a general court-martial, shall, in cases which
require the cognizance of such a court, report to the commanding officer of the department, who shall order a court
to be assembled at the nearest post or department, and tho
party accused, with necessary witnesses, to be transported
to the place where the said court shall be assembled.
ART. 87.* No person shall be sentenced to suffer death
but by the concurrence of two-thirds of the members of
a general court-martial, nor except in the cases herein expressly mentioned; nor shall more than fifty lashes be inflicted
* So much of these rules and articles as authorizes the infliction of
corporeal punishment by stripes or lashes, was specially repealed
by act of 16th May, 1812. By act of 2d Maich, 1833, the repealing
act was repealed, so far as it applied to the crime of desertion, which,
of course, revived the punishment by lashes for that offence.
33

406

ARTICLES OF WAR.

on any offender, at the discretion of a court-martial; and
no officer, non-commissioned officer, soldier, or follower of
the army shall be tried a second time for the same offence.
ART. 88. No person shall be liable to be tried and punished by a general court-martial for any offence which
shall appear to have been committed more than two years
before the issuing of the order for such trial, unless tha
person, by reason of having absented himself, or some
other manifest impediment, shall not have been amenable
to justice within that period.
ART. 89. Every officer authorized to order a general
court-martial shall have power to pardon or mitigate any
punishment ordered by such court, except the sentence of
death, or of cashiering an officer; which, in the cases
where he has authority (by Article 65) to carry them into
execution, he may suspend, until the pleasure of the President of the United States can be known; which suspension,
together with copies of the proceedings of the courtmartial, the said officer shall immediately transmit to the
President for his determination. And the colonel or commanding officer of the regiment or garrison where any
regimental or garrison court-martial shall be held, may
pardon or mitigate any punishment ordered by such court
to be inflicted.
ART. 90. Every judge advocate, or person officiating as
such, at any general court-martial, shall transmit, with as
much expedition as the opportunity of time and distance
of place can admit, the original proceedings and sentence
of such court-martial to the Secretary of W a r ; which said
original proceedings and sentence shall be carefully kept
and preserved in the office of said Secretary, to the end
that the persons entitled thereto may be enabled, upon
application to the said office, to obtain copies thereof.
The party tried by any general court-martial shall, upon
demand thereof, made by himself, or by any person or
persons in his behalf, be entitled to a copy of the sentence
and proceedings of such court-martial.
ART. 91. In cases where the general or commanding
officer may order a court of inquiry to examine into the
nature of any transaction, accusation, or imputation
against any officer or soldier, the said court shall consist of
one or more officers, not exceeding three/and a judge advo-

ARTICLES OF WAR.

407

cafce, or other suitable person, as a recorder, to reduce the
proceedings and evidence to writing; all of whom shall be
sworn to the faithful performance of their duty. This
court shall have the same power to summon witnesses as a
court-martial, and to examine them on oath. But they
shall not give their opinion on the merits of the case, excepting they shall be thereto specially required. The parties accused shall also be permitted to cross-examine and
interrogate the witnesses, so as to investigate fully the circumstances in the question.
ART. 92. The proceedings of a court of inquiry must be
authenticated by the signature of the recorder and the
president, and delivered to the commanding officer, and the
said proceedings may be admitted as evidence by a courtmartial, in cases not capital, or extending to the dismission
of an officer, provided that the circumstances are such that
oral testimony cannot be obtained. But as courts of
inquiry may be perverted to dishonorable purposes, and
may be considered as engines of destruction to military
merit, in the hands of weak and envious commandants,
fchey are hereby prohibited, unless directed by the President
of the United States, or demanded by the accused.
ART. 93. The judge advocate or recorder shall administer
to the members the following oath:
" You shall well and truly examine and inquire, according to your evidence, into the matter now before you,
without partiality, favor, affection, prejudice, or hope of
reward. So help you God."
After which the president shall administer to the judge
advocate or recorder the following oath :
" You, A. B., do swear that you will, according to your
best abilities, accurately and impartially record the proceedings of the court, and the evidence to be given in the
case in hearing. So help you God."
The witnesses shall take the same oath as witnesses sworn
before a court-martial.
ART. 94. When any commissioned officer shall die or bo
killed in the service of the United States, the major of the
regiment, or the officer doing the major's duty in his absence, or, in any post or garrison, the second officer in command, or the assistant military agent, shall immediately
iecure all his effects or equipage, then in camp or quarter^

408

ARTICLES OF WAR.

and shall make an inventory thereof, and forthwith transmit the same to the office of the Department of War, to the
end that his executors or administrators may receive the
same.
ART; 95. When any non-commissioned officer or soldier
shall die, or be hilled in the service of the United States,
the then commanding officer of the troop or company shall,
in the presence of two other commissioned officers, take an
account of what effects he died possessed of, above his arm's
and accoutrements, and transmit the same to the office of
the Department of War, which said effects are to be accounted for, and paid to the representatives of such deceased
non-commissioned officer or soldier. And in case any of
the officers, so authorized to take care of the effects of deceased officers and soldiers, should, before they have accounted to their representatives for the same, have occasion
to leave the regiment or post, by preferment or otherwise,
they shall, before they be permitted to quit the same, deposit in the hands of the commanding officer, or of the
assistant military agent, all the effects of such deceased
non-commissioned officers and soldiers, in order that the
same may be secured for, and paid to, their respective
representatives.
ART. 96. All officers, conductors, gunners, matrosses,
drivers, or other persons whatsoever, receiving pay or hive
in the service of the artillery, or corps of engineers of the
United States, shall be governed by the aforesaid Rules
and Articles, and shall be subject to be tried by courtsmartial, in like manner with the officers and soldiers of
the other troops in the service of the United States.
ART. 97. The officers and soldiers of any troops, whether
militia or others, being mustered and in pay of the United
States, shall, at all times and in all places, when joined
or acting in conjunction with the regular forces of the
United States, be governed by these rules and articles
of war, and shall be subject to be tried by courts-martial,
in like manner with the officers and soldiers in the regular forces,- save only that such courts-martial shall be
composed entirely of militia officers.
ART. 98. All officers serving by commission from the
authority of any particular State, shall, on all detachments, courts-martial, or other duty, wherein they may bo

ARTICLES OF

WAR.

409

employed in conjunction with the regular forces of the
United States, take rank next after ail officers of the like
grade m said regular forces, notwithstanding the commissions of such militia or State officers may be elder
than the commissions of the officers of the regular forces
of the United States.
ART. 99. All crimes not capital, and all disorders and
neglects which officers and soldiers may be guilty of, to the
prejudice of good order and military discipline, though not
mentioned in the foregoing articles of war, are to be taken
cognizance of by a general or regimental court-martial,
according to the nature and degree of the offence, and be
punished at their discretion.
ART. 100. The President of the United States shall have
power to prescribe the uniform of the army.
ART. 101. The foregoing articles are to be read and published, once in every six months, to every garrison, regiment, troop, or company, mustered, or to be mustered, in
the service of the United States, and are to be duly observed and obeyed by all officers and soldiers who are, or
shall be, in said service.
SEC. 2. And be it further enacted, That in time of war, all
persons not citizens of, or owing allegiance to, the United
States of America, who shall be found lurking as spies in
or about the fortifications or encampments of the armies
of the United States, or any of them, shall suffer death,
according to the law and usage of nations, by sentence of a
general court-martial.
SEC. 3. And be it further enacted, That the rules and
regulations by which the armies of the United States have
heretofore been governed, and the resolves of Congress
thereunto annexed, and respecting the same, shall henceforth be void and of no effect, except so far as may relate
to any transactions under them prior to the promulgation
of this act, at the several posts and garrisons respectively,
Occupied by any part of the army of the United States.
[APPROVED, April 10, 1806.]

A DICTIONAEY
OP

MILITARY WORDS AND PHRASES.
ABANDON.—To retire from, and yield to the enemy, a position which cannot be defended or ought not to be retained.
ABATIS {pron. Al-bat-tee,).—Felled
trees, with their sharp
branches placed outward, and so interlaced as to present
an irregular and thick row of pointed stakes towards the
enemy.
They are easily prepared, and expose the enemy to a
destructive fire while endeavoring to remove them.
ABSENCE (Leave ofJ.—The permission obtained by officers
to absent themselves from their regiments or posts.
(Without leave.)—Every absence without permission,
or after the term of the leave is expired, is entered upon
the daily roll as absence without leave, and constitutes a
military offence.
ACCOUTREMENTS.—A word which comprises the belts, cartridge-box, bayonet-scabbard, &c. of a soldier. When
besides these he has his arms, he is said to be armed and
accoutred.
ADJUTANT (From a Latin verb meaning to help).—Is the
regimental staff officer who assists the colonel or other
commander in the details of regimental or garrison duty.
Wnen serving with a detachment of a regiment at a post,
411

412

A DICTIONARY OF

lie is called a post adjutant. The adjutant is usually
selected from the rank of lieutenants, and receives extra
pay and allowances. He receives and issues orders, forma
the daily parade, details and mounts the guards, &c.
ADJUTANT GENERAL.—The principal staff officer of an army,
to whom the communications for the head-quarters are
addressed. He keeps careful and systematic account
of the strength, posts, and condition of the various corps,
and is the organ of the general commanding in issuing
orders. I n the TJ. S. Army there is a department called
the Adjutant General's Department, composed of one
colonel, one lieutenant colonel, four brevet majors, and
eight brevet captains: all except the colonel are called
assistant adjutant generals.
AFFAIR.—An engagement between hostile bodies, less in
importance than a battle, and usually of short duration.
AIDE-DE-CA%P (Commonly called aid).—An officer on the
personal staff of a general, whose orders he receives and
executes. Aids are usually regimental officers temporarily detached.
ALIGNMENT (Erom the French aligner, to place in line).—
the line upon which troops are formed in battle order.
AMBULANCE.—A large spring wagon for conveying the
wounded. A flying hospital.
AMBUSCADE.—A body of troops concealed from the enemy's
approach, designed to surprise him and cause confusion.
The place where they lie is called an ambush.
AMMUNITION.—Powder, either loose or in cartridges, balls,
shells, and other projectiles; in short, every thing designed to supply cannon and firearms.
AMNESTY.—Pardon and release.from all charges connected
with war,—-usually stipulated for in treaties of peace, or
conceded by monarchs upon coming into power.
ANGLE,—la gunnery, the inclination which the barrel of

MILITARY WORDS AND PHRASES.

413

the piece makes with a horizontal line is called the angle
of elevation, or the angle of the piece.
APPROACHES.—The lines of entrenchment, ditches, <fcc. b j
which the besiegers approach a fortified place. The
principal trenches are called the first, second, and third
parallels.
A PRON.—A piece of sheet-lead, used to cover the vent of a
cannon, to keep it from the weather.
A RMISTICE (Latin, armisticium).—A temporary suspension
of hostilities.
ARMORY.—A store-house in which arms are deposited. Sometimes, also, the place where arms are made and repaired.
The person who makes or repairs them is called an armorer,
ARMSTRONG GUN.—A rifle cannon loaded at the breech.
Its projectile is made of cast iron, surrounded by two
leaden-rings placed at the extremity of the cylindrical
part, for the purpose of fitting the grooves when it is
forced through the bore.
ARMY.—A body of troops of various corps (infantry, cavalry,
artillery, and engineers), organized and commanded by a
general. They constitute a military unit.
ARREST.—The confinement of an officer, and his temporary
suspension from duty, preparatory to his trial on military
charges.
ARSENAL.—A place where arms are made, repaired, and deposited. Military stores are also placed in arsenals.
ARTICLES OF WAR.—The various sections and articles of an
act of Congress " for establishing rules and articles foi
the government of the armies of the United States."
ARTILLERY.—In this term are included all kinds of cannon,
mortars, howitzers, <fcc, with all the munitions and implements requisite for service.
ASSEMBLY.—An army-call beaten upon the drum, for
assembling the troops by company^

414

A DICTIONARY OF

ATTACK.—Any onset upon the enemy. In sieges it implies
the works carried on by the besiegers. When an assault
i3 only partly made,with the design of deceiving the enemy
and diverting his attention, it is called a, false attack.
ATTENTION.—A word of command preparatory to the drill
or exercise of troops, as, Attention, squad (or company, or
battalion).
BAGGAGE.—The utensils, tents, provision, &c. of an army or
corps. The wagons in which these are carried constitute
the haggage train, which is always defended by a guard.
BAND.—A number of trained musicians, attached to a
regiment or corps, usually under the immediate direction
of the adjutant.
BANQUETTE.—A small elevation of earth on the inside of a
fort, upon which the soldiers stand to fire over the parapet which shelters thera when loading. I t is usually
three or four feet wide and less than five feet high.
BARBETTE GUNS.—Are guns which fire entirely over the
parapet, on raised platforms, and thus have a free range
in all outer directions. They are distinguished from
guns in embrasure, which fire through a narrow cut in
the parapet, and have but a limited field of fire.
BARRACKS (From the Spanish
Barraea.)—Government
buildings for lodging troops. They are provided with
kitchens, mess-rooms, soldiers' quarters, <fcc, and are in
reality a kind of military hotel.
BARRICADE.—To obstruct the avenues of access, as roads,
streets, &c. This is done by wagons, heaps of stones,
abatis, &c.,* ditches are also dug across the approaches,
and trees felled.
BASTION.—In fortification, the advanced portion of a regular
work, consisting of two faces enclosing a salient angle,
and two flanks. When two such bastions are united by

MILITARY WORDS AND PHRASES.

415

a retired line called a curtain, they constitute a hastioned
front.
The advantages of bastions consist in their flanking arrangements.
BATTALION.—One-half of a regiment of infantry. This
word is loosely used. Two companies are sometimes
called a battalion, while the whole regiment at drill is
also called thus. I t is commonly understood, however,
that a regiment is composed of two battalions.
BATTER.—To beat down with cannon-balls. To batter in
breach is to discharge cannon for the purpose of making
a break or breach in a fortification sufficiently large for
attacking troops to enter.
BATTERY.—A number of cannon of any kind arranged for
firing together. Sometimes the place where they are
parked receives the name of battery.
BATTLE.—A contest between considerable bodies of hostile
troops. A battle is more important than an affair or
a skirmish.
BAYONET (SO called because first made at Bayonne.)—The
sharp-pointed steel instrument made to fit upon the end
of a musket or rifie, as an additional weapon. The new
rifles are armed with sabre-bayonets.
BERM.—A narrow space between the parapet and the ditch,
left vacant in the construction, so that the mass of the
parapet may be secure from falling into the ditch.
BESIEGE.—To surround and shut in a place by an armed
force. The dwellers in the place are called the besieged
the force surrounding them, the besiegers.
BILLETING.—The temporary lodgment of soldiers in the
houses of the inhabitants of a town or village. It is
often attended with evil consequences, and is only resorted to when separate quarters cannot be had.
BIVOUAC.—When an army passes the night without shelter,
except such as can be hastily made of plants, branches

m

A DICTIONARY OP

Ac, it is said to bivouac. (From bis, double, and wach^
the German for guard.)
BLOCKADE.—Shutting in a fortress or place so that ther©
is neither ingress nor egress practicable. On land, this is
done by troops. By sea, a competent force of vessels
must be provided.
BOMB.—A word formerly used to mean a shell, such as is
thrown from a mortar. When mortars are fired upon a
place, they are said to bombard it.
BOYAU.—Zigzag ditches by which the besiegers approach
a fortified place. The plural is boyaux.
BREACH.—An opening made by cannon in a wall or fort,
by which infantry troops may attack it.
BREASTWORK.—Any wall of defence breast-high, which
shelters infantry in loading and firing upon the enemy.
BREECH.—The extremity of a gun near the vent.
BREVET.—An honorary commission given to officers for
meritorious service, but not affecting the lineal rank
except under special circumstances.
BRIGADE.—A body of troops consisting of two or three
regiments.
BRIGADE INSPECTOR. — The officer appointed to inspect
troops in companies, before they are mustered into
service.
BRIGADIER G-ENERAL.—An officer who commands a brigade. The second rank in our service, next below a
major-general and above a colonel.
CADENCE.—Exact time in marching and executing the
manual of arms. I t is indispensable to uniformity of
motion.
CAISSON.—The ammunition carriage accompanying a fieldpiece.
CALIBRE.—The diameter of the bore of a cannon of any o n d .

MILITARY WORDS AND PHRASES.

417

CAMP.—Implies the ground upon which troops encamp, the
form of the encampment, and the tents or temporary
shelters of any kind which are used.
CAMPAIGN.—The strategic arrangements of troops in o
war for some definite end.
CANNON.—The name given to pieces of artillery of every
form.
CANTEEN.—A small flat bottle, or runlet, in which a soldier carries water. Canteens are made of wood, tin, 01
India-rubber.
CAPTAIN.— The commander of a company.
CARBINE.—A small musket or rifle used by cavalry.
CARTRIDGE.—A charge of powder for any kind of firearms. Those for muskets are rolled in paper; those for
cannon are put up in flannel. A ball cartridge is one
which has a ball inserted at the end of the powder, so
that the piece is entirely loaded at once.
CARTRIDGE-BOX.—The leather box worn on the right hip,
in which cartridges are kept.
CASCABLE,—The knob of a cannon at the end of tho
breech.
CASEMATE.—Casemates are bomb-proof chambers in fortifications, through holes in which, called embrasure?,
heavy guns are fired.
CASHIER.—To dismiss an officer ignominiously from the
army.
CAVALRY.—This term includes all kinds of mounted
troops, dragoons, hussars, light and heavy cavalry, <fcc.
CHAMBER;—The cavity at the bottom of the bore of a
mortar or howitzer into which the charge of gunpowder
is put.
OHEVAU-DE-FRISE.—A square beam (or hexagonal) of
timber or iron, from six to nine feet long, in each side of
which pointed stakes are placed at right angles to the

418

A DICTIONARY OP

sides. They are designed as obstacles for stopping a
breach, or for obstructing the ditch. (Plural, chevaitfcde-frise.)
COLONEL.—The commander of a regiment.
COLORS {Regimental).—The two silken flags belonging to a
regiment. The regimental colors contain the name and
number of the regiment. The national colors are the flag
of the United States. In our service the colors are borne
by color-sergeants; in the English, by ensigns.
COLUMBIA!).—A gun of very large calibre, used for throwing solid shot or shells. The old columbiads had chambers; the modern are made without them.
COMMISSARY.—An officer who purchases and issues provisions.
COMPANY.—A body of men, from fifty to one hundred, commanded by a captain.
CORPORAL.—The lowest grade of non-commissioned officers.
COUNTERMARCH.—To change the direction of a company
or battalion fiom front to rear, by a flank movement,
retaining the same ground.
COUNTERSCARP.—The outer wall or slope of the ditch of a
fort.
COUNTERSIGN.—A secret word of communication to the
sentinels on post, without a knowledge of which no one
is permitted to pass the lines.
COUP-J>E-MAIN.—A sudden attack connected with a surprise.
COURT-MARTIAL.—A military court of justice to try and
punish all offences against military law. I t is composed
of military officers. They are divided into general courts,
to try important cases, garrison courts, for lesser delinquencies, and drum-head courts, for summary punishment. (Plural, courts-martial.)
CUIRASSIERS.—Heavy cavalry protected by breastplates.
There are no cuirassiers in the United States service.

MILITARY WORDS AND PHRASES.

419

DAHLGREN GUN.—An improved cannon, bearing the name
of the inventor.
D E F I L E . — A narrow passage or road, in marching through
which the troops can show but a small front.
DEPLOY.-—To open the order of troops from column into
line of battle.
DITCH.—The excavation in front of a fort, from which
earth has been taken to build the parapet, and which
offers an obstacle to the enemy.
DRAGOON.—A kind of cavalry, who sometimes serve also
on foot.
ECHELON (A French word, meaning ladder).—A formation of troops, where battalions or brigades follow each
other on separate lines like the steps of a ladder.
EMBRASURE.—An opening cut in a parapet, for cannon to
fire through. When guns fire over a parapet, they are
called barbette guns.
ENFILADE.—To sweep with a battery the whole length of a
work or line of troops.
ENGINEERS.—Officers who build fortifications. There is a
corps of engineers in the United States service. The
topographical engineers are those who make military
surveys or reconnoissances.
ENLISTMENT.—The mode of bringing soldiers into service*
The term of enlistment varies according to circumstances.
ENTRENCH.—To throw up a parapet with a ditch in front
of it, so as to render a position stronger.
EPAULETTES.—Ornaments of gold or silver worn upon
the .shoulders of commissioned officers, and marked so
as to determine their rank.
EPROUVETTE.—A small mortar for testing the strength and
equality of gunpowder.
ESCALADE.—The attack upon a fort with scaling-ladder*.

420

A DICTIONARY OF

EVOLUTIONS OF THE LINE.—Movements by which troops,
consisting of more regiments than one, change their position with order and regularity upon the field of battle.
FASCINES.—Brushwood, or long twigs, such as osier OT
willow, collected together and bound into bundles of
convenient size : used to revet a parapet, or to make firm
footing on marshy ground, and for other purposes.
FIELD OFFICERS.—The colonel, lieutenant colonel, and
major of a regiment are called field officers.
FILE.—The front and rear rank man constitute a file.
F I L E CLOSER.—The officers and non-commissioned officers
of a company, whose habitual position is two paces behind the rear rank, are called file closers.
FORAGE.—The hay, straw, and oats required for the horses.
FLANK.—Literally, side. The right or left flank is the
right or left side or at right angles. The flanks of an
army are the troops on the right or left.
FORLORN HOPE.—A party of officers and men selected—
generally volunteers—to attack a breach in storming a
work. The duty is very dangerous, and the survivors
receive promotion.
FORT.—Any military work designed to strengthen a point
against every attack is a fort. If it be an important and
complete fort, it is called a fortress.
FORTIFICATIONS.—Are works of strong character to defend
a city or some extensive front. When they are mado
entirely of earth, they are called field fortifications /
when of masonry, permanent
fortifications.
FURLOUGH.—Leave of absence granted to warrant and
non-commissioned officers and soldiers.
FUSE.—A tube filled with combustible materials, which ia
fixed in a shell: it burns, when ignited, for a calculated time before it reaches the powder in the shell and
explodes it.

MILITARY WORDS AND PHRASES.

421

GABION.—Cylindrical baskets, without top or bottom, made
of pliant twigs, filled with earth, and placed to resist
cannon-shot.
GARRISON. — A strong place in which troops are quartered.
Often the troops themselves are called the garrison.
GENERALS.—All officers above the rank of Colonel. We
have in the United States service only two grades, major
general and brigadier general. By special act, the brevet
of lieutenant general was conferred on General Winfield
Scott.
GLACIS.—The declivity of ground running from beyond
the counterscarp of the ditch to the open country, and
swept by the fire of the parapet.
GRAPE.—Large shot (usually nine) sewed together in cylindrical bags, which are made to fit like cartridges into
cannon.
GRENADE.—A small shell with a short fuse, which may be
thrown into the enemy's works.
GRENADIERS.—The infantry company on the right of the
regiment is called the grenadier-company, because they
formerly carried hand-grenades.
GUARD.—A portion of troops regularly detailed, whose
duty is to watch against surprise and disorder. The
individual soldiers of the guard are called sentinels.
GUIDON.—Small silken flags borne by cavalry and light
artillery.
GUNPOWDER.—A composition of saltpetre (76 parts),-charcoal (14 parts), and sulphur (10 parts). The charcoal is
the combustible p a r t ; the saltpetre furnishes the oxygen, and changes the mass into g a s ; the sulphur gives
intensity of heat.
HANDSPIKE.—A wooden lever, placed at the rear end of a
gun-carriage for convenience in turning it.
34

422

A DICTIONARY OF

HAVERSACK.—A coarse bag of linen, cotton, or India
rubber, in which a soldier carries his rations for daily
use.
HOLSTERS.—Cases fixed to the front of cavalry saddles to
hold a pair of pistols.
floRS DE COMBAT (French: literally, out of combat).—Not
able to take part in immediate action. The term includes all dead, wounded, missing, or those who from any
cause are thus disabled.
HOWITZER.—A chambered cannon, which fires a species of
shell called a howitz. They are of various calibres and
dimensions.
INFANTRY.—The foot troops of an army. They constitute
the chief element, and are usually armed with the musket
or rifle. They are divided into infantry of the lina and
light infantry.
INSPECTION.—A stated examination, by commanders, of the
condition of their troops in every respect.
INSPECTOR GENERAL.—The ofiicer (with the rank of colonel) who makes regular tours of inspection in the different departments of a country, and reports to headquarters on the condition of the troops.
INTERVAL.—The distances between platoons, companies,
regiments, or any other divisions of troops are called
intervals. In manoeuvring it is important to preserve
the interval.
INVEST.—To take measures for besieging a town or place,
by shutting in the inhabitants and shutting off all approach.
JUDGE ADVOCATE.—A person (commonly an officer) who
conducts the prosecution before courts-martial. He also
acts as counsel to the prisoner, should there be no other

MILITARY WORDS AND PHRASES.

423

counsel. He summons witnesses, and makes all the
arrangements for trial.
KNAPSACK.—A square frame, to fit across the shoulders,
covered with canvas or India-rubber, and containing
the entire necessaries of an infantry soldier.
LADDERS (SCALING).—A-e made of flat staves, fastened in
ropes, which are provided at the end with hooks for grappling the enemy's ramparts that soldiers may mount them.
LIEUTENANT (lieu-tenant, French, holding the place of).—
An officer below the rank of captain, who has specific
company duties.
LIEUTENANT GENERAL.—A general of rank next above a
major general. We have no such lineal rank in the
United States service. I t is conferred by brevet upon
General Scott.
LIGHT INFANTRY.—Infantry whose habitual order is that
of skirmishers, or dispersed as sharp-shooters.
LIMBER.—A two-wheeled carriage fastened to the trail of a
cannon when it is to be removed to a considerable distance ; when the piece is brought into action, it is unlimbered.
LINSTOCK.—A piece of wood shod with iron, and easily
stuck in the ground, through a hole in the upper end of
which a piece of prepared tow-rope is kept burning.
LOGISTICS.—That branch of the art of war which concern*
moving and supplying armies.
LUNETTE. — Small triangular field forts, with the base
angles cut away.
MAGAZINE.— The place where arms, ammunition, provisions, and all other army stores are collected.
MAJOR.—A field officer just below the lieutenant colonel.

424

A DICTIONARY OF

MALINGERER.-—A soldier who feigns ill health to avoid
doing his duty. When discovered, his conduct is declared
disgraceful, and he is tried.
MANOEUVRE.—Any concerted movement of troops at drill.
MARTIAL LAW.—A subordination of the civil law to the
military, by which the habeas corpus act is suspended.
Subjection to the articles of war.
METRE.—A French measure of distances, containing three
feet and a third.
MINE.— A subterraneous passage dug under a work or
glacis, and stocked with gunpowder, which may be exploded by a long train fired without danger.
MINIE.—A kind of rifle invented by Captain Minig, of
France, which carries a conical ball, hollow at the base.
MORTARS.—Short pieces of ordnance, with large calibre?
and chambers, from whicn shells are fired at an elevated
angle.
MUSTER-ROLL. — A roll, prepared at intervals of two
months, containing all the details of company organization. At the same time the troops are mustered and
inspected.
MUTINY.—Seditious or refractory conduct among troops :
the name is given to insubordination associated with
violence.
MUZZLE.—The extremity of a cannon, or any firearm,
through which the ball makes its exit.
NON-COMMISSIONED—Officers, are sergeants of various grades
and corporals : they are appointed by authorities lowei
than the President,—commissions issuing from him. As
a punishment, non-commissioned officers may be reduced
to the ranks.
ORDERLY.—A soldier of any grade, appointed to wait offi-

MILITARY WORDS AND PHRASES.

425

cially upon a general or other officer, to carry orders
or messages. The orderly sergeant is the first sergeant
of the company. The officer of the day is sometimes
called the orderly officer.
ORDNANCE CORPS.—A corps of officers with regimental
grades, having charge of the making, keeping, and
issuing of arms and ammunition. They are usually
quartered at arsenals and armories.
OUTPOST.—A body of troops—usually considered as guards,
and relieved from time to time—posted beyond the lines,
to guard against surprise of the main body.
OUTWORKS.—The detailed works constructed outside the
regular fortification, but connected with it according to
the principles of defence.
PAIXHAN.—A large howitzer, similar to a columbiad, and
throwing very large shells and balls. I t is named after
the inventor.
PARADE.—The assembling of troops in a prescribed manner. When equipped with arms, it is called a dress
parade; when without, undress.
PARALLELS.—The deep trenches parallel to the general
direction of a fort, by means of which the besiegers approach it.
PARAPET.—The mass of earth or masonry elevated so as
to screen a place from the fire of the enemy. I t is made
so thick that shot cannot penetrate it.
P A R K . — A number of cannon arranged in close order.
Also, the place where they are.
PAROLE (French).—The word of honor given by a prisoner
to his captor.
PATROL.—A small party, under a non-commissioned officer,
which goes through or around an encampment at night,
to keep order.

426

A DICTIONARY OF

PAT.—The stipend or salary allowed to officers and sol
diers. Besides the pay, certain allowance*, such aa
rations, are made to soldiers,* while officers have also
servants, fuel, stationery, and other allowances.
PICKET.—-A small outpost guard.
PIONEERS.—Soldiers equipped with axes, saws, and other
instruments for clearing the way before an advancing
army, or to entrench.
PLATOON.—One-half a company. The two platoons are
called,- respectively, first and second platoons.
PLOY.—To close a battalion, or any other division of troops,
from line of battle into column.
POINT-BLANK.—The point of distance at which when a
cannon or firearm is aimed, the axis of the piece is on the
line with it.
POLICE.—In military parlance, keeping the camp or barracks clean and neat.
PONTOON, or PONTON.—Boats, or India-rubber bags, made
into compartments, and filled with air, which are anchored in a stream at different distances, and upon which
planks are placed to form a bridge.
PORT-FIRE.—A cylindrical case of stiff paper filled with
a combustible material, and used sometimes in firing
cannon.
PROJECTILES.—All kinds of shot and shells. Every thing
which is projected from firearms.
QOARTER-MASTER, <fec.—The quarter-master is the officer
charged with providing quarters and furnishing clothing.
In the United States service, there is a Quarter-Master
Department, containing officers of all grades from the
colonel commanding to captains.
QUARTERS.—The places where troops are lodged. Head*
quarters are the residence of the commander.

MILITARY WORDS AND PHRASES.

427

RALLY. — To reform disordered troops j to bring skirmishers into close order; to collect retreating troop*
for a new attack.
RAMPART.—A broad embankment surrounding a fortified
place. I t includes the parapet and other raised works.
RANK..—The range or order of seniority in commission.
RANK AND VILE.—The corporals and privates of an army,
or those who parade in the ranks habitually. Lineal
rank is the order of promotion by seniority. Brevet
rank is honorary rank conferred for meritorious service.
RATIONS.—The daily allowance of meat, bread, and other
provisions to a soldier.
RECONNOISSANCE.—The survey and examination of a por-.
tion of country, or any point, with a view to military
movements.
RECRUIT.—Literally, a soldier, enlisted to take a vacant
place in a company,* commonly, any new soldier.
REDAN.—A portion of fortification included in a single
salient angle.
REDOUBT.—Any small isolated fort. I t is usually defensible
on all sides.
REGIMENT.—A body of troops comprising ten companies,
and commanded by a colonel.
REGULATIONS.—A system of orders and instructions on all
subjects connected with the management of the army.
They are published together, and constitute " T h e Aimy
Regulations." The last were issued in 1857.
RELIEF.— A division of the guard,—usually one-third*
These are called first, second, and third relief. The sentinels of each relief are on post for two hours, and off for
four.
RESERVE.—A select body of troops held back for a decisive moment. In light infantry, the compact nucleu*
upon which the skirmishers rally.

428

A DICTIONARY OF

RETREAT.—The parade at sunset, wbjn the evening gun is
fired, and the flag taken down for the night.
REVEILLE (pronounced rev-il-leef).— The early morning
drum-beat and roll-call, usually accompanied by the
morning gun.
REVETMENT.—Any wall or strengthening process of the
earth-works of a fori. Sometimes a work is revetted
with, sand-bags or fascines. Permanent forts are revetted
with masonry.
RICOCHET.—The rebounding of a shot, usually propelled
by a small charge, and with the gun pointed at an elevation of less than 10°. By striking in more spots than
one, it does greater damage.
HIPLE.—Any firearm which has a curved groove running
down its length from the muzzle to the bottom of the
bore. Cannon are rendered more effective by rifling.
ROLL-CALLS.—-Stated daily parades of the company, with
or without arms, for calling the roll and seeing that
every man is in his place.
ROSTER.—A list of ofiicers and men, from which details for
guard and other duties are made,—on the principle that
the longest off any duty shall be detailed for the next
tour.
SABRETASCHE (German, Sahel, sabre, and Tasclie, pocket).
—A leathern case, suspended at the left side of a mounted
officer, in which papers are carried.
SAFEGUARD.—A passport given by competent authority
to a person passing through military lines. I t is usually
both for persons and property.
SALIENT.—Any advanced point or angle in fortification.
SALLY-PORT.—The chief entrance to a fort, to afford egress
to bodies of troops, as in a sortie.
SALUTE.—A discharge of artillery or musketry in honor

MILITARY WORDS AND PHRASES.

429

of persons of rank. The rank is denoted by the number
of guns fired.
SAND-BAGS.—Coarse bags filled with sand, for revetting
earth-works and repairing breaches made in them by
«;hot.
S A P . — A ditch constructed rapidly by the besiegers in
advancing upon a besieged place. According to the
dimensions, it is called a full sap, a flying sap, or a
double sap. Those who make them are called sappers.
SENTINEL.—An individual of the guard who is posted to
watch for the safety of the camp, and who paces on his
post, always alert, and holding no communication with
any persons unauthorized to approach him.
SERGEANT.—The highest grade of non-commissioned officer.
Besides the sergeants who form part of the company
organization, in each regiment there is a sergeant major,
who assists the adjutant, a quarter-master sergeant,
who assists the quarter-master, a color-sergeant, who
carries the colors, and, at military posts, an ordnance
sergeant, who has charge of the ammunition.
SHELLS.—Hollow balls, filled with combustible matter,
which is fired by a fuse. They are shot from guns and
mortars, and explode when they reach the object
aimed at.
SIEGE.—The act of surrounding a fort or place with an
army, with a view to reducing it by regular approaches.
SKIRMISH.—A loose, desultory kind of engagement, generally between light troops thrown forward to test the
strength and position of the enemy.
SORTIE.—A secret movement, made by a strong detachment of troops in a besieged place, to destroy or retard
the enemy's approaches.

430

A DICTIONARY OJ?

SPHERICAL CASE.—A very thin shell, filled with musket
balls and powder.
SPIKE.—To close the vent of a gun with a nail forcibly driven in, so as to render it temporarily useless.
SQUAD.—A small party of men assembled for drill or
inspection.
Squads of recruits for drill should not
number more than four or five.
SQUADRON.—A body of cavalry, comprising two troops or
companies.
STAFF.—The officers connected with head-quarters, who
assist in the general conduct of affairs. Such are quarter-masters, commissaries, adjutants, adjutant-generals,
and aids.
STRATEGY.—The science by which armies are conducted in
a campaign. I t implies a thorough knowledge of the
theatre of the war, and the power to avail one's self of
the. natural features. The art of throwing masses of
troops upon important points.
SUBALTERN.—Any commissioned officer below a captain.
(Pronounced sub'al-tern.)
SUBSISTENCE DEPARTMENT. — The department, regularly

organized, with a colonel and officers of all grades, including captains, who have charge of supplying troops
with provisions and forage.
SURGEON.—An officer of the medical staff, with a thorough
medical education, who is charged with the health and
comfort of the troops, hospitals, and all care of the
wounded, &c.
TACTICS. — As opposed to strategy, the movements of
armies upon the battle-field, within sight and reach of
the enemy.
TATTOO,—The drum-beat, sometimes with roll-call, just

AIILITARY WORDS AND PHRASES.

431

preceding the retirement of troops, the putting out of
lights, &c. I t is usually at 9£ o'clock.
TENTS.— Small canvas houses, easily erected or pitched,
for the shelter of troops in camp.
TIME.—The regular cadence in marching. Common time
is 90 steps to the minute; quick time, 110; double
quick, 165.
TRAVERSES.—Masses of earth thrown up at short distances in forts along the line of the work, to screen the
troops from shot and shells fired in ricochet.
TRENCHES.—The parallels dug by the besiegers in approaching a work. The boyaux are sometimes included
in this term.
TROOP.—A company of cavalry.
TROUS DE LOUP.—Conical holes dug in the earth, about
six feet deep, and four and a half wide at top, A sharp
stake is fastened at the bottom, and the whole slightly
covered, so as to conceal them from the enemy. Rows
of trous de loup are very destructive to cavalry. (The
name is French, and means wolf-holes.)
UNIFORM.—The clothing and accoutrements, the same for
all the troops of a corps, by which uniformity of appearance, and easy recognition in battle, are assured.
"VANGUARD.—The body of troops constituting a guard,
detailed, from day to day, to march in advance of the
army.
VIDETTE. — Originally, sentinels on the farthest outposts. Now confined to mounted sentinels on outpost
duty.
VOLLEY.—The simultaneous discharge of a number of
cannon, or muskets, or any firearms.

432

A DICTIONARY OF MILITARY WORDS, ETC.

WINDAGE.—The small space by which a ball fails to fid
exactly into a piece; i.e. the difference between the
diameter of the ball and the calibre of the piece.
WINGS.—The portions of the army on the right and left.
An army consists of the centre and two wings. A regiment on drill is said to consist of two wings, right and
left,
WORKS.—A word used to express all kinds of fortifications
and entrenchments.
ZOUAYES.—Light infantry troops in the French service,—
(the name has also been adopted in the United States,)
—originally composed of Arabs and Moors in Algeria,
but afterwards recruited with French soldiers.

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION,
ARRANGED INTO

LESSONS.

LESSON F I R S T .

ARTICLE T.—Open ranks (No. 23).
ARTICLE II.—Close ranks (No. 29).
ARTICLE III.—Manual of arms (No. 30). Loading at will
(No. 31).
ARTICLE IV.—Different fires by the front rank (No. 39),
and by the rear rank (No. 54).
LESSON SECOND.

ARTICLE I.—Break by company to the right (No. 69), or to
the left (No. 74).
ARTICLE II.—March in column, at the cadensed step, a considerable distance (No. 164). Change of direction (No.
231). Diminish and increase front in marching (No.
196.) March in retreat (No. 170).
ARTICLE III.—Halt the column (No. 239). Form it to the
left or right into line of battle (No. 390). Execute this
formation, the column marching (No. 402).
ARTICLE IV.—Execute the countermarch, and repeat th*3
same movements (No, 351).
ARTICLE V.—Form column into line of battle, to the right
or left, by inversion (No. 407).
433

434

SCHOOL or THE BATTALION.
LESSON THIRD.

ARTICLE I.—Break by company to the rear by the right or
left, the battalion being at a halt (No. 87), or marching
(No. 94).
ARTICLE II.—March in the route step (No. 198). Cause to
be executed, at this gait and in double quick time, the
divers movements incident to the column in route, and
cause the cadenced step to be resumed.
ARTICLE III.—Form the column forward into line of battle
(Nos. 440, 452), faced to the rear into line of battle (Nos.
466, 480), the battalion being at a halt, or marching.
Form the column forward into line, and continue the
march in this order (No. 456).
ARTICLE IV.—Form the column on the right (No. 416), or
the left (No. 432), into line of battle.
ARTICLE V.—March by the flank (No. 722), and form companies into line, marching.
ARTICLE VI.—The column supposed to arrive before (No.
175) or behind the line of battle (No. 184), to prolong it
on that line.
ARTICLE VII.—Change front forward (No. 743), or in rear
(No. 760), on the right or left of companies, in directions
perpendicular or oblique.
ARTICLE VIII.—March by the right flank (No. 722), or by
the left flank (No. 725). Change direction by file (No.
730). Form the battalion into line of battle, on the
right or left, by file (No. 735).
ARTICLE IX.—Pass the defile in retreat by the right (No.
709), or by the left flank (No. 720).
LESSON FOURTH.

ARTICLE I.—Break by division to the rear, by the right or
left, the battalion being at a halt or marching (No. 102),

SCHOOL OP THE BATTALION.

435

ARTICLE II.—March in column by division (No. 161).
Diminish and increase front by company (No. 196).
ARTICLE III.—Close the column to half distance on the
headmost or the rearmost division (No. 278).
ARTICLE IV.—March in column at half distance (No. 281),
and change direction (No. 287).
ARTICLE V.—The column being at half distance, to form
square at a halt (No. 817), or marching (No. 837).
ARTICLE VI.—The battalion being in square, to march to
the front (No. 854). Halt the square (No. 860). Form
column to march to the front (No. 863), or in retreat
(No. 872). Ke-form the square (No. 875).
ARTICLE VII.—Reduce the square (No. 883).
ARTICLE VIII.—Close the column in mass on the headmost
or rearmost division (No. 279).
ARTICLE IX.—March in column closed in mass, and change
direction by the front of subdivisions (No. 288).
ARTICLE X.—Form the column against cavalry (No. 966).
ARTICLE XI.—Take distances by the head (Nos. 323 and
330), or on rear of the column (No. 333), the column
being at a halt or marching.
ARTICLE XII.—The column being by company, cause to
be executed the movements indicated in Nos. 3, 4, 5, 6,
7, 8, 9, 10, and 11 of this lesson. The column being
at half distance, or closed in mass, to form to the left,
or right, into line, wheel, on the rear of the column (No.
502).
ARTICLE XIII.—The column being by company, form
divisions from a halt (No. 364), or in march (No. 376).
ARTICLE XIV.—The column being by division, to form it
to the left or right into line of battle at a halt (No. 401),
or in march (No. 402).

436

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION".
LESSON F I F T H .

ARTICLE I.—The battalion being in line of battle, and at
a halt, to ploy it by division into column closed in mass
on the right division (No. 119), or on the left division
(No. 141), or on an interior division (No. 143), the right
or left in front. Ploy the battalion marching in line cf
battle on the right or left division (No. 149).
ARTICLE II.—Execute the countermarch (No. 352).
ARTICLE III.—Change direction to the right (No. 307),
to the left (No. 313), by the flank of the column.
ARTICLE IV.—Deploy the column on the right division
(No. 514), on the left division (No. 541), or on any interior division, the column being at a halt, or marching
(No. 563).
ARTICLE V.—Ploy the battalion into column by division at
half distance, marching (No. 556).
ARTICLE VI.—Ploy the battalion by company, closed in
mass, and form it on the right or left into line of battle
(No. 577).
ARTICLE VII.—Ploy the battalion into double column, at
half distance (No. 777), or closed in mass (No. 793), the
battalion being at a halt, or marching.
ARTICLE VIII.—March in this order, and change direction
(No. 794).
ARTICLE IX.—Deploy the column at a halt (No. 796), or
marching (No. 800), and without suspending the march
(No. 802).
ARTICLE X.—The double column being at half distance,
form it into line of battle faced to the right or left
(No. 803), the column being in march (No. 807).
Execute the same movement without suspending th&
march (No. 810).
ARTICLE XI.—Perpendicular or parallel squares, tbe bat-

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION.

437

talion heing deployed (Nos. 889, 895). Oblique squares,
the battalion being in line of battle (No. 938),% or in
column (No. 945). Squares in four ranks (No. 911).
LESSON SIXTH.

ARTICLE I.—March in line of battle (No. 587). Halt the
battalion (No. 635), and align it (No. 640).
ARTICLE II.—Change direction in line of battle advancing
(No. 652), or in retreat (No. 681). Execute passage of
obstacle! (No. 682).
ARTICLE III.—Oblique inarch in line of battle (No. 623).
ARTICLE IV.—Disperse and rally the battalion in line of
battle (No. 974), and rally the battalion in column by
company (No. 978).

REMARKS
ON THE SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION.
IN every course of instruction, the first lesson will be executed several times in the order in which it is arranged;
but as soon as the battalion shall be confirmed in the principles of the lesson, the fires will be executed after the
advance in line, and after the various formations into line
of battle, and into square. Particular attention will be
given to the fire by file, which is that principally used
in war.
Every lesson of this school will be executed with the
utmost precision; but the second, which comprehends the
inarch in column and the march in line of battle, being of
the most importance, will be the oftenesfc repeated, especially in the beginning,
35

138

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION.

Great attention ought, also, to be given to the fourth
lesson,, which comprehends the march in column by division, and the dispositions against cavalry.
The successive formations will sometimes be executed
by inversion.
In the beginning, the march in column, the march in
line of battle, and the march by the flank, will be executed
only in quick time, and will be continued until the battalion shall have become well established in the cadence of
this step.
The non-cadenced step will be employed in this school
only in the repetition of the movements incident to a
column in route, or when great celerity may be required.
When it may be desired to give the men relief, arms
may be supported, if at a halt, or marching by the flank.
In marching by the front, arms may be shifted to the
right shoulder; but not in the march in line of battle until
the battalions shall be well instructed.
After arms have been carried for some time on the right
shoulder, they may be shifted, in like manner, to the left
shoulder.
When a battalion is manoeuvring, its movements will be
covered by skirmishers.
All the companies will be exercised, successively, in thia
service.

TABLE OF CONTENTS.
TITLE

FIKST.

ARTICLE F I R S T .
PAGB

Formation of a regiment in order of battle, or in line,
Posts of company officers, sergeants and corporals
Posts of field officers and regimental staff
Posts of field music and band
Color-guard
General guides
,

7
8
9
10
10
11

ARTICLE SECOND.

Instruction
Instruction
Instruction
Instruction
Commands

of
of
of
of

the battalion...
officers
sergeants
corporals

TITLE

. ...........

2
14
14
14
15

SECOND.

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER.
PART

FIRST.

General rules and division of the school of the soldier
LESSON I.—Position of the soldier (No. 78). Byes
right, left and front (NOB. 80, 83)
439

10
21

440

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

LESSON II.—Facings (Nos. 88, 91)

TAQK
21

LESSON III.—Principles of the direct step in common
and quick time (Nos. 94, 102)
22
LESSON IV.—Principles of the double quick step (No.
104)
24
P A R T SECOND.

General rules
26
LESSON I.—Principles of shouldered arms
28
LESSON II.—Manual of arms. Support arms (No.
133). Present arms (No. 143). Order arms (No.
147). Position of order arms (No. 149). Load in
nine timr,d (No. 156). Ready (No. 171). Aim (No.
174). L'ire (No. 177). Fix bayonet (No. 188).
Charge bayonet (No. 193). Traii arms (No. 197).
Unfix bayonet (No. 200). Secure arms (No. 204).
Right shoulder shift arms (No. 210). Arms at will
(No. 219). Ground arms (No. 222). Inspection
arms (No. 227). Remarks on the manual of arms
(No. 237). Mark time (No. 241). Change step
(No. 245). March backwards (No. 247)
27
LESSON III.—Load in four times (No. 250). Load at
will (No. 257)
47
LESSON IV.—Firings. Direct fire (No. 261). Oblique
firings (No. 266). Position of the two ranks in the
oblique fire to the right (No. 267). Position of the
two ranks in the oblique fire to the left (No. 270).
Fire by file (No. 275). Fire by rank (No. 285)
48
LESSON V.—Fire and load, kneeling (No. 292). Fire
and load, lying (No. 300)
52
LESSON VI.—Bayonet exercise
55
PART
LESSON I.—Alignments

THIRD.
56

LESSON II.—March by the front (No. 325). March
by the front in double quick time (No. 334). Face
about in marching (No. 343). March backwards
(No. 345)
58

441

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

LESSON III.—March by the flank (No. 351). March
by the flank in double quick time (No. 368)
63
LESSON IV.—General Principles of wheeling (No.
377). Wheeling from a halt (No. 383). Wheeling
in marching (No. 393). Turning (No. 400).
Wheeling and turning in double quick time (No.
403)
67
LESSON V.—Long marches in double quick time and
the run (No. 406). Stack arms (No. 410). Take
arms (No. 413)
71
MANUAL OF ARMS FOR THE MUSKET.

(NO. 414.)

Shoulder arms (No. 415). Support arms (No. 417).
Carry arms (No, 421). Present arms (No. 424).
Order arms (No. 429). Charge bayonet (No. 434).
LOADING AND FIRING ( N O . 439).

Load in ten times

(NOB. 440 to 455). Ready (No. 456). Aim (No. 460).
Fh-e (No. 462). Recover arms (No. 470). Load in
four times (No. 474). Unfix bayonet (No. 479).
Secure arms (No. 485). Fix bayonet (No. 489).
Trail arms (No. 493). Right shoulder shift arms
(No. 496). Inspection of arms (No. 498). Fix bayonet (No. 504). Spring rammers (No. 506). Arms
port (No. 507). Arms at will (No. 511)
74

TITLE THIRD.

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY.
General rules and division of the school of the company...,
89
LESSON FIRST.

ARTICLE I.—To open ranks (No. 8)
ARTICLE II.—Alignments in open ranks (No. 18)
ARTICLE III.—Manual of arms (No. 26)

92
93
94

442

TABLE OF CONTENTS.
PAOB

ARTICLE IV.—To close ranks (No. 28)
ARTICLE V.—Alignments, and manual of arms in
closed ranks (No. 30)

95
95

LESSON SECOND.

ARTICLE
44)
ARTICLE
ARTICLE
ARTICLE
ARTICLE

I.—To load in four times, and at will (No.
II.—To fire by company (No. 48)
I I I . — T O fire by file (No. 55)
IV.—To fire by rank (No. 58)
V.—To fire by the rear rank (No. 68)

97
98
98
99
100

LESSON THIRD.

ARTICLE I.—To advance in line of battle (No. 84).....
ARTICLE II.—To halt the company, marching in line
of battle, and to align it (No. 99)
ARTICLE III.—ObKque irarch in line of baUle (No.
101)
ARTICLE IV.—To mark time, to march in double quick
time, and the back step (No. 109)
ARTICLE V.—To march in retreat (No. 119)

103
105
106
107
109

LESSON FOURTH.

ARTICLE I.—To march by the flank (No. 135)
ARTICLE II.—To change direction by file (No. 142)...
ARTICLE III.—To halt the company, marching by the
flank, and to face it to the front (No. 145)
ARTICLE IV.—The company being in march by the
flank, to form it on the right or left, by file, into line
of battle (No. 148)
ARTICLE V.—The company marching by the flank, to
form it by company or platoon into line, and cause
it to face to the right and left in marching (No. 153)

Ill
112
113
114
116

LESSON FIFTH.

ARTICLE I.—To break into column by platoon, either
at a halt, or marching (No. 171)
118
ARTICLE II.—To march in column (No. 195)
123

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

443
PAGS

ARTICLE III.—To change direction (No. 211)...
125
ARTICLE IV.—TO halt the column (No. 231)
... 129
ARTICLE V.—Being in column by platoon, to form to
the right or left into line of battle, either at a halt,
or marching (No. 235)
129
LESSON SIXTH.

ARTICLE I.—To break the company into platoons, and
to re-form the company (No. 265)..
ARTICLE II.—To break files to the rear, and to cause
them to re-enter into line (No. 289)
ARTICLE III.—To march in column in route, and to
execute the movements incident thereto (No. 306)...
ARTICLE IV.—Countermarch (No. 334)..
ARTICLE V.—Being in column by platoon, to form on
the right or left into line of battle (No. 343)
Formation of a company from two ranks into single
rank, and reciprocally (No. 359)
Formation of a company from two ranks into four, and
reciprocally, at a halt, and marching (No. 371)

134
137
140
145
147
149
151

INSTRUCTION FOB SKIRMISHERS.
General principles and division of the instruction

155

ARTICLE FIRST.

Deployments (No. 15). Deploy forward (No. 22). Deploy by the flank (No. 37). Extend intervals (No.
51). Close intervals (No. 59). Relieve skirmishers
(No, 66)
157
ARTICLE SECOND.

March to the front (No. 71). March in retreat (No.
79). Change direction (No. 86). March by ; the flank
(No. 96.)
167

4J4

TABLE OF

CONTENTS.

ARTICLE THIRD.
PAGH

Firings (No. 106). Fire at a halt (No. 107). Fire marching (No. 111). Observations (No. 120)
171
ARTICLE FOURTH.

Rally (No. 127). Rally by sections (No. 132). Rally
by platoons (No. 137). Rally on the reserve (No.
139). Form column (No. 143). Rally on the battalion (No. 161). Assemble on the reserve (No. 171).
Assemble on the centre (No. 174)
>.. 175
ARTICLE F I F T H .

Deploy the battalion as skirmishers (Na, 178).
vations (No. 194). Rally (No. 197)

Manual of the sabre for officers.
Salute of the color
Manual for relieving sentinels
Instruction for parade rest
Instruction for chief bugler, &c
General calls
Calls for skirmishers

^

Obser184

190
190
..- 191
192
192
192
193

MUSIC.
GENERAL CALLS.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

Attention
The general
The assembly
To the color
The recall
Quick time
Double quick time
The charge
The reveille
Retreat
Tattoo

195
196
196
197
197
197
198
199
200
200
201

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

445
PAGE

12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22;
23.
24.
25.

To extinguish lights
Assembly of the buglers
....i
Assembly of the guard
Orders for orderly sergeants
For officers to take their places in line after firing..
The disperse
Officers' call
Breakfast call
........
Dinner call
Sick call
Fatigue call
Church call
Drill call
School call

202
202
202
203
203
203
204
204
205
205
205
206
206
207

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.

CALLS FOR S K I R M I S H E R S .
Fix bayonet
Unfix bayonet
.*.
Quick time
Double quick time
The run
Deploy as skirmishers
Forward
.
In retreat
Halt
By the right
flank
By the left
flank
Commence
firing
Cease
firing
Change direction to the right
Change direction to the left
Lie down
Rise up
Rally by fours
Rally by sections
Rally by platoons
Rally on the reserve
Rally on the battalion
Assemble on the battalion

208
208
208
209
209
210
210
210
211
211
211
211
212
212
212
212
213
213
213
213
214
214
214

446

TABLE OF

TITLE

CONTENTS.

FOUETH.

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION.
Formation of the battalion (No. 1)
..
Composition and march of the color-escort (No. 4)
Honors paid to the color (No. 11)
General rules and division of the school of the battalion (No. 14)
,
PART

pxvaa
215
215
216
217

FIRST.

ARTICLE I.—To open and close ranks (No. 22)
218
ARTICLE II.—Manual of arms (No. 30)...
219
ARTICLE III.—Loading at will, and the firings (No.
HI)
219
PART

149)

SECOND.

TABLE OF

PART

CONTENTS.

44?

THIRD.
PAGE

ARTICUE I.—March, in column at full distance (No.
164). Column being in march, to execute the about
(No. 170). Column arriving in front of the line
of battle, to prolong it on this line (No, 175).
Column arriving behind the line of battle, to prolong it on this line (No. 184). Column arriving
on the right or the left of the line of battle, to prolong it on this line (No. 188). Manner of prolonging a line by markers (No. 189)
ARTICLE II.—Column in route (No. 198)..
ARTICLE III.—Change of direction in column at full
distance (No. 231)
ARTICLE IV.—Halt the column (No. 239)
ARTICLE V.—Close the column to half distance, or
in mass (No. 252). Close the column on the
eighth company (No. 267). Execute this movement, marelang (No. 278)
ARTICLE VI.—March in column at half distance, or
closed in mass (No. 281)
ARTICLE VII.—Change diiectiou in column at half
distance (No. 287)
ARTICLE VIII.—Change direction of a column closed
in mass, marching (No. 288). Change direction
of a column, closed in mass, from a halt (No. 306).
ARTJCX/E IX.—Take
distances hy the head of the
column (No. 323). Take distances by the rear of
the column (No. 333). Take distances on the head
of the column (No. 341)
ARTICLE X.—Countermarch of a column at full or
half distance (No. 351). Countermarch of a column
closed in mass (No. 352)........
ARTICLE XI.—Being in column by company, closed
in mass, to form divisions (No. 364). To form divisions, marching (No. 376)

240
249
255
257

259
263
264
264

269
274
276

PART FOURTH.

ARTICLE I.—Manner of determining the line of battle
(No. 389)
,... 280

448

TABLE OF

CONTENTS.

ARTICLE I I . —To form a column, at full distance,
to the left into line of battle (No. 390). To form
a column to the right into line of battle (No. 399;.
A column being in march, to form it into line of
battle (No. 402). To form a column into line of
battle, and to move it forward (No. 403). By inversion to the right or left into line of battle (No.
407).
Column at full distance, to form it on the
right or left into line of battle (No. 414). Column
at full distance, forward into line of battle (No.
440).
Forward into line of battle, marching (No.
452). Column at full distance, faced to the rear
into line of battle (No. 466). Execute this movement, marching (No. 479)
ARTICLE III.—Formation in line of battle by two
movements (No. 485)
ARTICLE IV.—Different modes of forming column at
half distance, to the left or right, into line of battle (No. 501). By the rear of column, left or right,
into line, wheel (No. 503) Column at half distance, on the right or left, into line (No. 507).
Column at half distance, forward into line (No.
508).
Column at half distance, faced to the rear
into line (No. 509)
ARTICLE V.—Deployment of columns closed in mass
(No. 510). Deployment on the first division (No.
514). To deploy, whilst marching, on the first division (No. 532). To deploy without halting the column,
and to continue marching (No. 536). To deploy on
the fourth division (No. 541). To deploy, whilst
marching, on the fourth division (No. 556). To deploy on an interior division (No. 563). To deploy,
whilst marching, on an interior division (No. 567)...
PART

281
299

301

303

FIFTH.

ARTICLE I.—To advance in line of battle (No. 587).... 316
ARTICLE II.—Oblique march in line of battle (No.
623)
323
ARTICLE III.—To halt the battalion, marching in line
of battle, and to align it (No. 635)
325

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

449
PAGB

ARTICLE IV.—Change of direction in marching in line
of battle (No. 652)
328
ARTICLE V.—To march in retreat in line of battle (No.
664).
330
ARTICLE VL—To halt the battalion, marching in retreat, and to face it to the front (No. 676)
332
ARTICLE VII.— Change of direction, in marching in
retreat (No. 681)
333
ARTICLE VIII.—Passage of obstacles, advancing and
retreating (No. 682)
333
ARTICLE IX.—To pass a defile, in retreat, by the right
or left flank (No. 710)
338
ARTICLE X.—To march by the flank (No. 722)
340
ARTICLE XI.—To form the battalion on the right or
left, by file, into line of battle (No. 735)
342
ARTICLE XII.—Change of front perpendicularly forward (No. 743). Change front forward on the first
company, marching (No. 754). Change of front
perpendicularly to the rear (No. 761)
343
ARTICLE X I I I . — T O ploy the battalion into column,
doubled on the centre (No. 776). To form double
column, marching (No. 787). Deployment of the
double column, faced to the front (No. 796). Deployment of the double column, marching (No. 800).
To form the double column into line of battle, faced
to the right or left (No. 803). To form the double
column into line of battle, faced to the right or left,
marching (No. 807)
34S
ARTICLE XIV.—Dispositions against cavalry (No. 817).
A column being in march at full distance, to form
square (No. 837). If the column be closed in mass,
to make dispositions to form square (No. 847). The
battalion being in square, to move it in advance by
one of its fronts (No. 854). To halt the square
(No. 860.) The battalion being in square, to form
column to march to the front, a distance greater
than thirty paces (No. 863). To march the square
in retreat a greater distance than thirty paces (No.
872). The battalion being in square, to march it in
advance, or in retreat, a distance less than thirty
paces (No. 876). The column marching to the front,

450

TABLE OF CONTENTS.
PAOI

to march it in retreat (No. 879). The column marching in retreat, to march it to the front (No. 881).
To reduce the square (No. 883). To form square
from line of battle (No. 885). Perpendicular square
(No. 888). Perpendicular square, marching (No.
890).
To form square by double column (No. 892).
To form square by double column, marching (No.
894).
Observations relative to the formation of
squares in two ranks (No. 896). The column being
formed of four divisions, to place the inner platoons
of the third division in reserve (No. 898). Squares
in four ranks (No. 910). The square formed in four
ranks being reduced, and at a halt, to form the battalion into two ranks (No. 916). The column being
in march with divisions formed in four ranks, to reform it into two ranks (No. 920). To form square
in fcur ranks on one of the flank divisions (No.
923). Form square in four ranks on the first division, marching (No. 928). Form perpendicular
square in four ranks, by double column (No. 931).
Form perpendicular square in four ranks, by double
column, marching (No. 935). Oblique square (No.
938).
Oblique square, being in column (No. 945).
Column against cavalry (No. 965). The battalion
being no longer threatened by cavalry, to form
column (No. 970)
356
fi RTICLE XV.—The rally (No. 974)
381
ARTICLE XVI.—Rules for manoeuvring by the rear
rank (No. 979)
382
STREET FIRING

385

APPENDIX.
ARTICLES OP W A R

389

DICTIONARY OF MILITARY WORDS AND PHRASES

411

J. B. Lippincott & Co.'s Military Publications.
McGLELLAFS AKMIES OP EUEOPE.
THE ARMIES OP EUROPE,- comprising descriptions in
detail of the Military Systems of England, France, Russia, Prussia, Austria, and Sardinia. Adapting thei?
advantages to all arms of the United States Service.
Embodying the Report of Observations in Europe during
the Crimean war, as Military Commissioner from the
United States Government in 1855-56. By GEO. B. M C CLELLAN, Major-General U.S.A. Originally published
under the direction of the War Department, by order of
Congress. 1 vol. 8vo. Illustrated with a fine steel Portrait and several hundred engravings. $3.50.
"Of the publications occasioned by the crisis, doubtless the most
important is the reissue, in a form adapted to general circulation, ol
the great report on the armies of Europe of Geo. B. McCIellan, now
commander-in-chief of the armies of the United States."—The MetlbOdist.
"The young captain of calvary is now a major-general, and to his
hands the destinies of our nation are in a great measure intrusted;
and his book will now be recognized as a popular necessity, and find
its way into the bands of the multitude."—New York Times.
"The work contains all that vast body of detailed information pertaining to the equipment, direction, and care of our military forces,
which is actually indispensable to every officer in the army, and may
be of the greatest service to every private in the ranks."—•Boston
Transcript.
"The book is invaluable to military men from the technical information and the sagacious views it presents. It is of the greatest
interest to the public in general, from the striking revelation it makes
oi the character and genius of its modest and gifted author."—Boston
Journal.
"The volume will be of great importance to the'kc^t of young
officers who are ambitious to excel in the art or profession to which
they have now devoted themselves."-^*© York Sun.

McCLELLAFS

UNITED STATES CAVALRY.
#
REGULATIONS AND INSTRUCTIONS FOR
THE
F I E L D S E R V I C E of t h e U n i t e d S t a t e s C a v a l r y i n T i m e
of W a r .
BY

GEO.

B.

McCLELLAN,

MAJOR-GENERAL TJ. 8 . A R M T .

One vol. 12mo. Eully Illustrated. $1.50.
To which is a d d e d t h e B a s i s of I n s t r u c t i o n for t h e U . S.
C a v a l r y , from t h e A u t h o r i z e d T a c t i c s , — i n c l u d i n g t h e
f o r m a t i o n of r e g i m e n t s a n d s q u a d r o n s , t h e d u t i e s a n d
p o s t s of officers, lessons in t h e t r a i n i n g a n d use of t h e
horse,—illustrated by numerous diagrams, with the sign a l s a n d calls n o w in u s e . A l s o , i n s t r u c t i o n s for officers
a n d n o n - c o m m i s s i o n e d officers on o u t p o s t a n d p a t r o l
d u t y . W i t h a drill for t h e use of o a v a l r v as s k i r m i s h e r s ,
mounted and dismounted.
" T h e volume is a complete manual for this arm of the service, and
its value cannot be overrated. Gen. McClellan enjoyed almost unequaled facilities for perfecting himself in a knowledge of the modern
European systems of tactics while a member of the Commission sent
by our Government to the Old World, and he has concentrated the
results of his observations within this volume. No work on the
subject could have more weight, and we can think of none which
will be more useful while the country is prosecuting the war for its
existence."—Evening Bulletin.
"The precepts contained in this volume are applicable to every
detail of duty which cavalry may be expected to perform in time of
war in the field. I t could not, therefore, be more valuable or more
timely than at present." * * * " Every cavalry soldier should
have it in his hands."—North American.
"We question whether ever before, in the same compass, so much
practical information on the cavalry arm of war* was collected. I t is
a thoroughly complete vade niecum for every mounted soldier in the
uerrtce."— The Press*
~

McCIELLAN'S

MANUAL OF BAYONET EXERCISES.
PBEPAItED FOR THE USE OF
T H E

A . R . M : Y aw

T H E XJISTITED

STATES.

BY GEORGE B. MoCLELLAN,
MAJOR-GENERAL U. S. ARMY.

Printed by order of the War Department.
One vol. 12mo. $1.25.
HEADQUARTERS OP THE ARMY, Washington, B.C.
HON. 0. M. CONRAD, Secretary of War.

SIR: Herewith I have the honor to submit a system of Bayonet Exercises, translated from the French by Capt. Geo. B. McClellan, Corpa
Engineers, XJ. S. Army.
I strongly recommend its being printed for distribution to the
Army; and that it be made, by regulation, a part of the system of
instruction.
The inclosed extracts from reports of the Inspector-General, etc.,
ehow the value.
I have the honor to be, sir, with high respect, your most obedient
servant,
WINFIELD SCOTT.
R. JONES, Adjutant-General.

Approved. C. M. CONRAD, Secretary of War,

McCIELLAN'S

EUROPEAN

CAVALRY.

EUROPEAN CAVALRY, including details of the organization of the Cavalry Service among the principal nations of Europe; comprising England, France, Russia,
Prussia, Austria, and Sardinia. By GEO. B. MCCLELLAN,
Major-General U. S. Army.

One vol. 12mo. Fully illustrated. $1.25,

HARDEE'S TACTICS.
Eifle and Light Infantry Tactics,
For the Exercise and Manoeuvres of Troops when
acting as Light Infantry or Riflemen.

Prepared under the direction of Ibe War Department,
By Brevet Lieutenant-Colonel W. J . HARDEE,
U.S.A.
T w o Vols, complete.

$1.50.

VOL. I.
Schools of the Soldier and Company; Instruction for Skirmishers.
VOL. II.
School of the Battalion.
This work is a careful revision of the rifle and light infantry tactics for the exercise and manoeuvres of troops
when acting as light infantry or riflemen. It was prepared,
under tho direction of the War Department, by Brevet
Lieutenant-Colonel WM. J. HARDEE, late Tactical instructor
at West Point, ilardee's Tactics have been adopted as the
text-book in the military establishments of nearly every
State in the Union, and hold a high rank among military
men as of great practical utility in the light infantry arm.
The work is prepated in a clear and lucid manner and with
numerous pie tonal illustrations. The famous Chicago
Zouave drill is essentially Hardee's tactics, with the exception of some few fancy movements of no utility except to
give a finish to an exhibition drill. The work is printed in
clear type, and is invaluable as a book of instruction to our
volunteer corps.—New York Herald, J a n . 28, 1861.

[BY

AUTHORITY.]

TJ3STITE3D S T A T E S

INFANTRY TACTICS:
FOR THE INSTRUCTION, EXERCISE, AND MAN(EUVRES OF THE U. S. INFANTRY, including I n fantry of the Line, Light Infantry, and Riflemen. Prepared under the direction pf the War Dapartment, and
authorized and adopted by SIMON CAMERON, Secretary of
War. Containing The School of the Soldier; The School
of the Company,- Instruction for Skirmishers; The General Calls; The Calls for Skirmishers, and the School of
the Battalion; including a Dictionary of Military Terms.
One volume, complete illustrated with numerous Engravings. $1.25.
WAR DEPARTMENT, Washington, May 1,1861.
This System of United States Infantry Tactics for Light Infantry
and Kiflernen, prepaied under the direction of the War Department,
having been approved by the President, ia adopted for the instruction
of the troops when acting as Light Infantry or Riflemen, and, under
the act of May 12,1820, for the observance of the militia when so employed.
SIMON CAMERON, Secretary of War.

INSTBUCTIONS FOR

OUTPOST AND PATROL DUTY.
Instructions for Officers and Non-commissioned Officers oc
Outpost and Patrol Duty, with

THE SKIRMISH DRILL
for Mounted Troops. Authorized and adopted by the
Secretary of War, Sept. 2d,)IS61. Price 25 cents.
•
*
* *
All Colonels, and others in authority, will see
it that their commands are instructed in these duties. *" * * •
SIMON CAMERON, Secretary of War.

COOKE'S

U. S. CAVALSY TACTICS.
Cavalry Tactics; or Regulations for the Instruction, Formations, and Movements of the Cavalry of the Army and
Volunteers of the United States. Prepared under the
direction of the War Department, and authorized and
adopted by the Secretary of "War, Nov. 1st, 1861.
BY P H I L I P ST. GEO. COOKE,
BRIG. GEN. U. S. ARMY.

In two vols. 18mo. Price $1.50.
Vol. I.—School of the Trooper, of the Platoon, and of
the Squadron.
Vol. II.—Evolutions of a Regiment and of the Line.

THE SOLDIERS HANDY-BOOK.
THE HANDY-BOOK FOR THE U. S. SOLDIER, ON
coming into Service. Containing a complete System of
Instruction in the School of the Soldier; embracing the
Manual for the Rifle and Musket, with a preliminary explanation of the Formation of a Battalion on Parade, the
Position of the Officers, etc. etc. Also, Instructions for
Street Firing. Being a First Book or Introduction to
the authorized United States Infantry Tactics.

Complete in one vol. 128 pages, illustrated. 25 cts.
To the recruit just mustered into service, the system of tactic*
•eems extensive and difficult.
The design of this little Handy-Book is to divide the instruction
»nd, by presenting a complete system for the drill of the individual
soldier, to prepare him for the nse and study of the authorized
United States Infantry Tactics, in the school of the company and the
battalion.

ORDNANCE MANUAL
4>

THE ORDNANCE MANUAL,
For the use of the Officers of the Army and others,
PREPARED UNDER THE DIRECTION OP THE WAR DEPARTMENT.

Third edition. One vol. demi-8vo» Fully illustrated
with Engravings on steel. $2.50.
CONTENTS,-Chap. I . Ordnance. I I . Shot and Shell.
I I I . Artillery Carriages. IV. Machines, etc. for Siege
and Garrison Service. V. Artillery Implements and
Equipments. VI. Artillery Harness and Cavalry Equipments. V I I . Paints, Lackers, ete. V I I I . Small Arms,
Swords, and Accoutrements. I X . Gunpowder, Lightning
Rods. X. Ammunition of all kinds, Fireworks. X I .
Equipment of Batteries for Field, Siege, and Garrison
Service. X I I . Mechanical Manoeuvres. X I I I . Artillery
Practice, Ranges, Penetration,, etc. XIV. Materials,
Strength of Materials. XV. Miscellaneous information,
Tables of Weights and Measures, Physical Data, Mathematical Formula, Ballistics, Tables, etc.
ORDNANCE DEPARTMENT,
WASHINGTON, NOV. 4, 1861.

HMT. S. CAMERON, Secretary of War.
It is respectfully recommended that the revised edition of the Ord^ace Manual be published for the use of the Army.
WILLIAM MAYNADIER,
Lt. Ool. ff Ordnance in charge of Bureau*
Approved, Nov. 4,1861.
THOMAS A. SCOTT,

Acting Secretary of War.
This most valuable work to persons engaged in the military service and in the preparation of any of the various military supplies,
(the construction of which is given in minute detail,) will also prove
useful to mechanics generally for the valuable tables and misccllane*
ous information which it contains.

JOMINI'-S
A E T

O F

"W.A.:R.

THE ART OF WAR. By BARON D. Joirrai, General and
Aid-de-Camp of the Emperor of Russia. A New Edition, with Appendices and Maps. Translated from the
French by Capt. G. H. MENDELL, U.S.A., Corps of Topo«
graphical Engineers, and Lieut. W. P. CRAIGHILL, U.S.A.,
Corps of Engineers.

One vol. demi 8vo. $1.50.
8UMMARY OP CONTENT8.

CHAP. I.—Policy of War. II. Military Policy or the Philosophy of
' War. III. Strategy. IV. Grand Tactics and Battles. Y. Of Different mixed Operations which participate at the same time of
Strategy and Tactics. VI. Logistics, or the Practical art of moving
Armies. VII. The Formation and Employment of Troops for
Combat. Conclusion. SUPPLEMENT. APPENDICES.

MARMONT'S
MILITARY INSTITUTIONS,
THE SPIRIT OF MILITARY INSTITUTIONS, from
the latest Paris edition. Translated, with Notes, by
HENRY COPPEE, Professor in the University of Pennsylvania, and late a Cantain in the Army of the United
States. 1 vol. 12mo. $1.00.
This book contains, in a smaii compass, the principles of the art ol
War, as learned and practiced by this great marshal during the Napoleonic wars. It treats of strategy, tactics, and grand tactics; of the
organization and formation of armies; the principles of fortification;
of military justice; wars offensive and defensive; marches and encampments, reconnoissances, battles; and various important topics,
fncluding the tactics of the three arms, as applied in actual movements before the enemy,—with the peculiar characteristics and duties
of general officers.

INSTRUCTION I I FIELD ARTILLERY.
Prepared by a Board of Artillery Officers.
ONE VOL. 8vo.

$2.50.

BALTIMORE, MD., Jan.

15,

1859.

Col. S. COOPER, Adjt.-Gen. U.S.A.
Sir:—The Light Artillery Board assembled by Special
Oulers No. 134, of 1856, and Special Orders No. 116, of
1858, has the honor to submit a revised system of Light
Artillery Tactics and Ptegulations recommended, for that
arm.
WM. H. FRENCH, Bt. Major, Capt. First Artillery.
WrLLiAM F. BARRY, Capt. Second Artillery.
HENRY J. HUNT, Bt. Mujoi, Capt. Second Artillery,

CAVALRY TACTICS.
P U B L I S H E D BY O R D E R OF T H E W A R

First

DEPARTMENT.

Part:

School of the Trooper; of the Platoon and of the
Squadron Dismounted.
Second Part:
Of the Platoon and of the Squadron mounted.
Third

Part:

Evolutions of a Regiment.
T h r e e "Vols. 1 8 m o .

$3.50.

WAR DEPARTMENT, Washington, Feb. 10, 1841.
The system of Cavalry Tactics adapted to the organization of Dragoon regiments, having been approved by the
President of the United States, is now published for th«
government of the said service.
Accordingly, instruction in the same will be given after
the method pointed out therein ; and all additions to or
departures from the exercises and manoeuvres laid down in
this system are positively forbidden.
J . II. POINSETT, Secretary of War.

DUFFIELD'S

SCHOOL OF T H E BRIGADE.
SCHOOL OF T H E BRIGADE, AND EVOLUTIONS
of the Line ; or, Rules for the Exercise and Manoeuvres of Brigades a n d Divisions. Designed as a Sequel to the United States Infantry Tactics, adopted
May 1, 1861.

By W I L L I A M W. DUFFIELD,

Acting

Brigadier-General Twenty-third Brigade, and Colonel
Ninth Michigan Infantry.
One YOI. 18mo.

75 cents.

MAJOR IORDECAFS REPORT.
REPORT OF THE MILITARY COMMISSION TO EUROPE
IN 1855 A ¥ D 1856.
BY MAJOR MORDECAr, OF THE ORDNANCE DEPARTMENT.
To which is appended

Rifled Infantry Arms.
A BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF T H E MODERN SYStem of Small Arms, as adopted in the various E u r o pean Armies. B y J . SCHON, Captain i n t h e Royal
Saxon Infantry, etc. etc. Second edition, revised and
augmented with Explanatory Plates. Translated from
the German by J . GrORGAS, Capt. of Ordnance, U.S.A.
One vol. 4 t o . N u m e r o u s E n g r a v i n g s . $3.50.

WILLARD'S

TARGET PRACTICE.
MANUAL OF TARGET PRACTICE FOR THE IT. S.
Army.

By Maj. G. L. WILLARD, U.S.A.

One vol. 18mo. 50 cents.

H E A D QUARTERS., ARMY OP THE POTOMAC,

August 10th, 1862.
MAJOR :—The General Commanding desires me to say
u
that he has examined your Manual of Target Practice/'
and thinks it well adapted for the use of troops. I t contains improvements on the system laid down in "Heth's
Manual," is got up in a very convenient form, and its general distribution, especially to the new troops, will no doubt
accomplish valuable results.
Very respectfully,
Your obedient servant,
S. WILLIAMS,
Asst. Adjutant General.
MAJOR G. L. WILLARD, 1 9 ^

Infantry.

HEAD QUARTERS, 5TH ARMY CORPS,
WESTERN V A . , August 8th, 1862.

MAJOR :—I have read your work on " Target Practice"
with much interest, and am pleased to see so valuable an
addition to our means of military instruction. I trust it
will be adopted by government, and freely distributed to
troops in the field as well as at camps of instruction.
I am, Major,
Very respectfully,
Your obedient servant,
F. J . PORTER,
Maj. General Com. Corps.
To MAJOR G. L. WILLARD, 19*A U. S. Infantry, Head Quarters Army of the Potomac, Harrison's Landing,

EVOLUTIONS OF THE LINE.
FIELD MANUAL OF EVOLUTIONS OF THE LINE,
arranged in a tabular form, for the use of officers of the
United States Infantry; being a sequel to the authorized
United States Infantry Tactics. Translated, with adaptation to the United States Service, from the latest French
authorities.

By Captain HENRY COPPEE, late Instructor

in the United States Military Academy at West Point.

18mo.

50 cents.

A most valuable and timely book; every officer should have it In
his pocket, in the manoeuvres of brigades and divisions. I t contains a
condensed and tabular statement of the commands of the instructor
and of the battalion commanders, with short but sufficient explanations accompanying each.
Many of our officers find the evolutions of the line a most complicated study. They are here rendered easy both of knowledge and
reference.

MANUAL 01 BATTALION DRILL
THE FIELD MANUAL OF BATTALION DRILL, containing all the movements and manoeuvres in the School
of the Battalion, with the commands arranged in tabular
forms, and properly explained. Translated from the
French, with adaptation to the United States service, by
Capt. HENRY COPPEE, late Instructor in the United States

Military Academy at West Point.

18mo.

50 cents.

This little manual is an invaluable aid to officers of every grade,
in battalion drill. The study of the tactics is not only shortened, but
veiy much facilitated; the airangeuient of the commands in every
case explaining the movement, and setting forth the duty of evei^
officer at a glance.
Its small size renders it a vade mecum for the officer on the field.

^CHALK'S

A. R T

OF

W A. R.

SUMMARY OF THE ART OF WAR. Written expressly for, and dedicated to, the United States Volunteer Army.
By EMIL SCHALK, Officer of Artillery.

One vol. 12mo. Illustrated with beautifully-engraved
Maps, Plates, and Diagrams. $1.50.
"Mr. Schalk, in our humble opinion, has admirably succeeded. He has here, in language simple and readily comprehended, unvailed the whole mystery of strategy, tactics,
grand tactics, mixed operations, and logistics, including
copious historical and professional descriptions of some of
the most celebrated battles, marches, and sieges of modern
times, with numerous original diagrams and maps of the
greatest interest. Mr. Schalk's first grand example of
strategy is the war in the United States, presupposing the
movements, on both sides, of the campaign now actually in
progress. The results at which the writer arrives are so
utterly at variance with popular ideas on the subject, and
yet so astonishingly in consonance with the actual state of
our military chess-board, that the reflecting reader will be
startled at their resemblance to a fixed prediction. The
positions and forces of the opposing armies, both east and
west, are given with singular accuracy, and the very battlefields which have just become, or are becoming memorable,
are marked beforehand. The diagrams accompanying this
part of the work are extremely interesting, especially those
covering the region of Yorktown'and Fredericksburg."—N.
Y. TIMES.

J. B. LIPPINCOTT & Co.'s

MILITARY PUBLICATIONS.
McClellan's Armies of Europe. 8vo
$3.50
McClellan's United States Cavalry. 12mo
1.50
McClellan's Manual of Bayonet Exercises. 12mo. 1.25
McClellan's European Cavalry. 12mo
1.25
U. S. Rifle and Light Infantry Tactics. 1 vol
1.25
Instructions for Outpost and Patrol Duty. 12mo..
25
Hardee's Tactics—Rifle and Light Inf. 2 vols... 1.50
Cooke's United States Cavalry Tactics. 2 vols... 1.50
The Soldier's Handy Book. 1 vol
25
The Ordnance Manual. Demy 8vo
2.50
Instruction in Field Artillery. Demy 8vo
2.50
Cavalry Tactics (by Authority.) 3 vols. 18mo.. 3.50
Jomini's Art of War. Demy 8vo
1.50
Maymont's Military Institutions. 12mo
1.00
Evolutions of the Line. 18mo
50
Manual of Battalion Drill. 18mo.
50
Revised Army Regulations. 8vo
1.75
Willard's Target Practice. 18mo
50
Stromeyer and E s m a r c h — G u n s h o t F r a c t u r e s ;
Resection in Gunshot Injuries. 12mo
75
Maxims and Instructions on Art of War. 18mo..
75
Schalk's Art of War. 12mo
1.50
Duffield's School of the Brigade. 18mo
75
Major Mordecai's Report of the Military Commission to Europe—Schon's Rifled Infantry Arms.
4to
3 50
Power's Anatomy of the Arteries. 12mo
2.00
Hospital Steward's Manual. 12mo
1.25
Macleod's Surgery of the Crimean War. 12mo
1.50
Guthrie's Commentaries on the Surgery of War.
12mo.7.
2 25
Longmore's Gunshot Wounds. 12mo
75
Treatise on Military Hygiene
In press.
Military Encyclopedia
In press.
Jebb's Treatises on Attack and Defence
I n press.